Download Now
Home Blog

Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881

0

This article has been written by Oishika Banerji and further updated by Kanika Goel. This article in itself is a detailed analysis of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 including all the details about negotiable instruments like promissory notes, bills of exchange, or cheques in India. This article also covers the relevant and important concepts underlying the statute. Let us delve into this article to understand every aspect of the Act including the relevant and important case laws, recent issues, and recent amendments. 

Table of Contents

Introduction

Prior to the enactment of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 (hereinafter referred to as the NI Act), the English Negotiable Instruments Act was applicable in India in order to govern the functioning of the negotiable instruments. However, the question which arises here is, what exactly is a negotiable instrument? Before getting to know all the incidental concepts of a negotiable instrument, it is important to understand the concept of the same. The term “negotiable instruments” is not composed of just one meaning. Rather, it derives various meanings depending upon its mode of implementation or the laws through which it becomes applicable in a country. A negotiable instrument in general is considered to be a paper or a document that ensures that a sum of money is paid upon the demand of the payee or at times, immediately. It is pertinent to note that some of such instruments also guarantee unconditional payment of money (for example, in the case of a bill of exchange or a promissory note).

The NI Act basically covers three major types of instruments namely, bills of exchange, promissory notes, and cheques. Apart from these modes of payment via the instruments, NEFT (National Electronic Fund Transfer) and RTGS (Real Time Gross Settlement) also serve as two additional modes of payment. 

This article aims to discuss all the aspects of the NI Act, 1881 which came into force on 1st March 1882, and is applicable to the whole of India. 

Objective behind the Act

The objective behind the NI Act, 1881 is to ensure that the entire system by which the negotiable instruments are governed is strengthened and legalised in a way that one person can pass an instrument and pay a certain amount of money to another by way of negotiation. The intent behind the formation and enforcement of this Act was to put forth an orderly statement of rules relating to the negotiable instruments.

Composition of the Act

The NI Act aims to define and amend the law relating to the instruments covered under the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881. The Act is composed of a total of 148 Sections divided into 17 chapters which are depicted below: 

  1. Chapter I (Sections 1 – 3): Preliminary 
  2. Chapter II (Sections 4 – 25): Notes, bills and cheques
  3. Chapter III (Sections 26 – 45A):  Parties to notes, bills and cheques
  4. Chapter IV (Sections 46 – 60): Negotiation 
  5. Chapter V (Sections 61 – 77): Presentment
  6. Chapter VI (Sections 78 – 81): Payment and interest 
  7. Chapter VII (Sections 82 – 90): Discharge from liability of notes, bills and cheques
  8. Chapter VIII (Sections 91 – 98): Notice of dishonour 
  9. Chapter IX (Sections 99 – 104A): Noting and protest 
  10. Chapter X (Sections 105 – 107): Reasonable time 
  11. Chapter XI (Sections 108 – 116): Acceptance and payment for honour and reference in case of need. 
  12. Chapter XII (Section 117): Compensation 
  13. Chapter XIII (Sections 118 – 122): Special rules of evidence 
  14. Chapter XIV (Sections 123 – 131A): Crossed cheques
  15. Chapter XV (Sections 132 – 133): Bill in sets 
  16. Chapter XVI (Sections 134 – 137): International law 
  17. Chapter XVII (Sections 138 – 148): Penalties in case of dishonour of certain cheques for insufficiency of funds in the accounts.

What is meant by negotiation

As per Section 14 of the NI Act, 1881, an instrument is said to be negotiated when that particular instrument is transferred to a person making that person the “holder” of the instrument. As per the provisions of the Act, there are two conditions to be fulfilled while negotiating an instrument:

  • The instrument must be transferable to any other person.
  • While transferring the instrument, it must be ensured that the transferee vests the stature of the holder of the instrument.

Modes of negotiation an instrument

An instrument may be negotiated in the following two ways:

  • As per Section 47 of the Act, an instrument may be negotiated by delivery of it. It means that whenever a negotiable instrument is payable to a bearer, it may be negotiated by mere delivery only. For example, C, a holder of the instrument payable to the bearer delivers it to A’s agent in order to keep it for A. Here, it can be said that the instrument is negotiated by delivery.
  • As per Section 48, a negotiable instrument can also be negotiated by endorsement. This means that when the maker of the instrument signs the same, it is endorsed and negotiated.

Who may negotiate

As per Section 51 of the Act, any maker, drawer, holder, payee, or even joint makers or payees can endorse or negotiate an instrument provided that they are not restricted to do so under Section 50 of the Act.

Negotiable instruments

The word “instrument” refers to a written document by virtue of which a right is created in favour of some individual. In order to understand the meaning of the term “negotiable instrument”, it is important to know the meaning of the term “negotiable”. An instrument is considered to be “negotiable” when it can be freely transferred from one party to another for some value and in good faith and the party to that instrument can sue in his own name. It is important to note that the term is not explicitly defined under the Act but Section 13 of the NI Act, 1881 gives an inclusive definition that a negotiable instrument means a bill of exchange, promissory note, or a cheque that is payable on order or otherwise.

The main distinction between a negotiable instrument and other documents (or a chattel) is that, in the case of a negotiable instrument, the transferee acquires a good title in good faith and for consideration even though the transferor’s title may have a flaw; in contrast, in the case of other documents, the transferee receives a similar title (or, to put it another way, no better title) than the transferor.

What is meant by a negotiable instrument

A document that is usually transferable from one person to another is often considered a “negotiable instrument”. Though the term is undefined in the Act, but as per Section 13(1), it includes a promissory note, a cheque, or a bill of exchange.

As quoted by Justice Willis, a negotiable instrument is defined as “an instrument, the property in which is acquired by anyone who takes it bona fide, and for a value, notwithstanding any defect or title in the person from whom he took it, from which it follows that an instrument cannot be considered as negotiable unless it is such and in such a state that the true owner could transfer the contract or engagement contained therein by simple delivery of instrument.”

For an instrument to be negotiable, there has to be fulfilment of certain conditions which are as follows:

  1. An instrument cannot be considered as negotiable unless it can be transferred freely. It must be in a capacity to be transferred from the true owner to any other hand either by delivery or by endorsement of the instrument.
  2. Transferee of the instrument should not be affected by any kind of defect in the transferor’s title.
  3. The transferee must land into the capacity to sue in his name.

Common traits of negotiable instruments

  1. Negotiable instruments are transferable by nature: A negotiable instrument may be freely transferred as many times as necessary until it reaches maturity. As mentioned earlier as well, an instrument is considered as negotiable when it is transferable upon delivery. When an instrument is “payable to the bearer”, it can be negotiated only by delivery but when an instrument is “payable to order”, it is accepted upon delivery and endorsement. In addition to becoming entitled to the money transferred with a negotiable instrument, the transferee also gains the ability to transfer the instrument again.
  2. Possession of an independent title: It is an unsaid fact that a party cannot transfer a better title to the other party than what he possesses. However, such a rule becomes inapplicable when it comes to negotiable instruments. When a party receives a negotiable instrument for a value in good faith, the defect in the title of the transferor becomes immaterial. This results in the difference of the title status amongst the parties to an instrument. It ensures that the transferee can possess an independent title despite the transferor having a defective title over the instrument.
  3. Presumptions: The negotiable instruments under the Act, 1881 are governed by certain presumptions which include those outlined in Sections 118 and 119 of the Negotiable Instruments Act of 1881.
  4. Rights incidental to an instrument: When a negotiable instrument is dishonoured, the transferee of the negotiable instrument has the right to sue in his own name. In such a case, the transferee may bring a claim against a negotiable instrument in its own name without notifying the original debtor of the transfer, i.e., without telling the original debtor that the transferee has taken possession of the negotiable instrument.
  5. Certainty of instrument: A negotiable instrument is considered “a carrier with no bags”. It must be framed in a manner that the negotiation be depicted in the fewest words possible indicating clearly the contract. A negotiable instrument must be free from any sort of irregularities that can pose a hindrance to its transferability and negotiation. A negotiable instrument must also include the payment of a specific (fixed or defined) amount of money (money only and on a specific time period).
  6. Prompt payment: A negotiable instrument allows the holder of that particular instrument to receive a prompt and quick payment as the failure of it would mean the loss of the credit of the persons involved as the parties to that instrument. 

Categorization of a negotiable instrument

There are various categories of negotiable instruments some of which find a place in the NI Act, 1881 as well. Let us understand about these classifications in brief:

Inland instruments 

These instruments as mentioned under Section 11 of the NI Act, 1881 are the ones which are either payable in India or drawn upon a person who is a resident of India. These types of instruments include promissory notes, bills of exchange, or cheques as well.

Foreign instruments

Foreign instruments are the ones which are not considered as inland instruments. This also implies that such type of instrument shall be either payable or drawn upon a person who is not a resident of India or such type of instrument is drawn and made payable outside India. Foreign instruments are mentioned under Section 12 of the NI Act, 1881.

Bearer instruments

Bearer instruments include promissory notes, bills of exchange, or cheques under the conditions that such instruments are expressly payable or endorsed in blank.

Order instruments

Such types of instruments are usually payable on order which may be to a specific person or when there is no type of restriction in the transferability of that particular instrument.

Demand instruments

When there is no time mentioned for the instrument to be payable and the instrument can be made payable on either presentation or on sight, such types of instruments are considered to be demand instruments under Section 19 of the NI Act, 1881.

Inchoate instruments

As per Section 20 of the NI Act, 1881, an inchoate instrument is considered to be that instrument which is signed and delivered on a stamped paper by one party either wholly blank or as an incomplete negotiable instrument. It can also refer to an unregistered instrument which becomes effective only when the prima facie error is removed. In simpler words, an inchoate instrument is any cheque, pro note, or bill of exchange that is signed by the maker despite being unfilled or unrecorded. Few judicial pronouncements (e.g., Magnum Aviation (Pvt.) Ltd. vs. State and Ors (2010)) recognise or regard a cheque as an inchoate instrument if it lacks one or more essentials listed in the characteristics of the negotiable instrument.

Ambiguous instruments

The type of instrument that is unclear on the face of it as to how it is to be treated is known as an ambiguous instrument. Under Section 17 of the NI Act, 1881, the power to treat an instrument as a bill or a note vests with the holder of the instrument. 

Important types of negotiable instruments under Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881

As per Section 13 of the Act, the classification of the negotiable instruments is made into 3 broad categories which are as follows:

  • Promissory note as mentioned under Section 4 of the NI Act;
  • Bills of exchange under Section 5 of the Act, and
  • Cheques under Section 6 of the Act

Let us understand the basics and the important characteristics of the above-mentioned instruments in detail.

Promissory Note (Section 4 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881)

Meaning

According to Section 4 of the NI Act of 1881, a written instrument (not a banknote or currency note) that contains an unconditional undertaking, signed by the maker with the promisor with the promise to pay a specific amount of money only to, or at the direction of, a specific person, or to the bearer of the instrument, qualifies as a negotiable instrument. Regardless of whether it is negotiable or not, an instrument that complies with the definition in Section 4 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, of 1881 must be regarded as a promissory note.

Specimen of promissory note


I _________ (debtor), S/o _______, PROMISE TO PAY  ________ (creditor), S/o _________, or ORDER, on demand the sum of Rs. 1,00,000 (RUPEES ONE LAKH ONLY) with interest at rate of 5% p.a. From the date of the value received in cash/cheque no._____ dated _______.

PLACE:

DATE:                                                                                                                       SIGN:


Who are the parties to a promissory note

Following are the parties to a promissory note:

  • Maker of the instrument: the one who makes the promissory note and promises to pay a certain amount as stated in a pro note.
  • Payee of the instrument: the one to whom the promissory note is paid
  • Holder of the instrument: the person in whose name the pro note is endorsed

Characteristics of a promissory note

  • It must be signed by the maker which implies that the person promising to pay a certain amount must sign that pro note. It can also be signed by the authorised agent of the maker of the instrument.
  • It must be in writing in such a way that it cannot be altered in an easy manner.
  • There must be a commitment or undertaking to pay as mere admission of debt is insufficient.
  • There must be no conditions. 
  • A promissory note must include an undertaking to pay money only. For example, A intends and promises to deliver paddy in alternative to money. This cannot be considered as a pro note.
  • A promissory note should clearly indicate about the parties agreeing to undertake the liability of the payment. A promissory note must be clear and unambiguous in terms of the certainty of the parties.
  • Even though the date on the promissory note is not an essential characteristic, it becomes material when the amount becomes payable at a certain time after the mentioned date.
  • The amount owing must be certain. This can be explained with a very simple example. Let’s say, A promises to pay Rs. 500 and all other sums which shall be due to him. However, this instrument cannot be construed as a promissory note because the amount mentioned is not certain.

Bill of Exchange (Section 5 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881)

Meaning

As per Section 5 of the Act, a “bill of exchange” (BOE) is considered to be a type of negotiable instrument that is made in writing consisting of an order which is unconditional, signed by the maker of that instrument, and directs a particular person to pay a certain amount of money only to or to the order of a certain person or to any bearer of that instrument.

The essence of a BOE lies in the fact that it is drawn by a creditor upon his debtor making him pay the amount of money to the person whose name is specified in the instrument.

Specimen of a bill of exchange


BILL OF EXCHANGE

Rs. 60,000/-

90 days after the date, pay Mr. X, or order a sum of RUPEES SIXTY THOUSAND ONLY for the value received.

ACCEPTED                                                STAMP                                       SIGN OF MAKER

(Drawee’s name)                                                                                             (Drawer’s name)

(Drawee’s address)                                                                                      (Drawer’s address)


Who are the parties to a bill of exchange

The following are the parties to a bill of exchange:

  • The Drawer: This person is the one who draws the bill and is vested with the secondary liability.
  • The Drawee of the Bill Of Exchange: Person with the primary liability and the one upon whom the drawer draws the bill.
  • The payee of the Bill Of Exchange: The person to whom the amount mentioned in the BOE is to be paid.

Characteristics of a BOE

  • A bill of exchange is required to be in writing. Along with being written, it should be suitably stamped and accepted by its drawee or on his behalf.
  • As the definition of a bill of exchange depicts, it must be an unconditional order to pay a certain amount of money.
  • A bill of exchange should be payable for a certain amount. One cannot agree to pay an uncertain sum of money through a bill of exchange.

Types of bill of exchange

Bills of exchange are further classified into the following categories on the basis of their usage and jurisdiction of their enforcement:

  • Foreign bills and inland bills: The bills which are drawn and paid within the same country are considered as inland bills. However, a foreign bill is one which may be issued in one country and executed in some other country. For example: If a bill of exchange is drawn and paid in India itself, it is considered as an inland bill. But, if a bill is drawn in India but executed outside the Indian territory, it is considered as a foreign bill.
  • Trade bills: When a bill of exchange is drawn to settle a credit transaction of a party and is accepted by the other party in lieu of it, it is considered a trade bill.
  • Demand bills: A bill of exchange which is paid on demand is known as a demand bill. In such cases, there is no time limit prescribed for the payment to be made.
  • Time bills: Where on one hand, demand bills are payable on demand, time bills are paid on a specific date and time which is usually mentioned on the bill. 
  • Accommodation bills: An accommodation bill is one which is not drawn for a mode of payment in trade transactions but only acts as an agreement for providing financial assistance between the parties to the bill.

Difference between a promissory note and a bill of exchange 

  • While on one hand, a promissory note is an unconditional promise to pay, a bill of exchange contains an unconditional order to pay.
  • There is a difference between the number of parties to various instruments. Where there are only two parties in a promissory note, a bill of exchange is dealt with by three parties.
  • Acceptance of a promissory note is not necessary but it is essential for a drawee to accept a bill of exchange.
  • The liability of the parties differs both in a promissory note and a bill of exchange. The drawer of a bill of exchange bears secondary liability, however, the liability of a drawer in the case of a promissory note is always absolute.
Parameters Promissory NoteBill of Exchange
Parties to the instrumentMainly 2 parties; the debtor and the creditorMainly three parties: the drawer, the drawee, and the payee
Payment to the makerCannot be made payable to the maker itselfThe drawer and the payee of the bill can be the same person
Unconditional promise/orderPromissory note contains an unconditional promise to payA bill of exchange contains an unconditional order to pay
Acceptance of the instrumentMaker need not give a prior acceptance in order to make the note payableIn order to make a bill payable, the drawee needs to accept it himself or by any other person on his behalf
LiabilityMaker of pro note vests with the primary abilityThe liability of the drawer of a bill of exchange is secondary and conditional
Relation The maker of a pro note and the payee stay in an immediate relationThe drawer of a BOE stands in an immediate relation with the drawee and not with the payee

Cheque (Section 6 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881)

Meaning

As per Section 6 of the NI Act, 1881, the cheque is defined as “a bill of exchange drawn on a specified banker and not expressed to be payable otherwise than on demand and it includes the electronic image of a truncated cheque and a cheque in the electronic form”.

Classification of cheques under Section 6

As per Section 6, a cheque includes a cheque in the electronic form and also a truncated cheque. Let us understand these in brief.

Truncated cheque

As per Explanation I, a truncated cheque is the one that is cut short in the clearance cycle. This means that rather than using the cheque in a physical capacity, a scanned copy or the electronic image of the same is used for the transmission of the payment.

Cheque in an electronic form

Such a type of cheque is the one that is digitally signed by the maker and is drawn by a secure digital cryptosystem.

Parties to a cheque

There are three main parties to cheque. They are:

  • The drawer: The drawer of a cheque is the one who draws the cheque and signs it.
  • The drawee: It is the bank upon whom a cheque is drawn. 
  • The payee: The payee of a cheque is the person to whom the amount stated in the cheque is to be paid. 

Characteristics of a cheque

  1. A cheque must always be in writing with the drawer’s signature upon it.
  2. A cheque is a type of bill of exchange, the payment can only be made when demanded.
  3. A cheque must bear the date of honour. In case of absence of such date, the cheque is considered to be invalid.
  4. As per Section 18 of the Act, the amount of the cheque must be stated in both words and numbers. In cases where the amount stated in words and numbers is different, the amount mentioned in words will supersede and will be considered a sum to be paid.
  5. No one other than the Reserve Bank of India or the Central Government may draw, accept, make, or issue any Bill of Exchange or Promissory Note payable to the bearer on demand, according to Section 31 of the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934 (RBI Act, 1934). Despite the provisions of the Negotiable Instruments Act of 1881, Section 31(2) of the RBI Act of 1934 stipulates the same. 

In the case of Surendra Madhavrao Nighojakar vs. Ashok Yeshwant Badave (2001), the Supreme Court of India held the following:

  1. A cheque is a bill of exchange written by the owner of an account payable on demand to a bank.
  2. A post-dated cheque becomes a cheque under Section 138 of the Negotiable Instruments Act of 1881 on the date specified on the face of the cheque, and the 6-month term must be calculated from that date for purposes of Proviso (a) of Section 138 of the Negotiable Instruments Act of 1881. 
  3. The cheque is not made payable in any other way than on demand just because the payment date for it has been moved to a later date.
  4. Legal action may be brought against the banker (the drawee in the case of a cheque) if it honours the cheque before the date stated on the cheque’s face.
  5. When a cheque is described as “payable on demand,” the payee of the cheque is referring to “payable at once.”

Difference between cheque and bill-of-exchange

  1. A cheque is always drawn upon a banker, however, a bill of exchange can be drawn upon anyone.
  2. Where on one hand, in accordance with Section 19 of the Act, a cheque is always made payable immediately, a bill of exchange can be made payable at a certain time or immediately.
  3. A bill of exchange cannot be crossed but a cheque can be crossed in order to make it non-negotiable.
  4. A bill of exchange needs to be accepted by the drawee but there is no requirement for a cheque to be accepted.
  5. A bill of exchange is always stamped which is not the case with a cheque. A cheque need not be stamped.
  6. A 3-day grace period is allowed when a bill is due for presentation but no grace period is allowed in the cases of the presentation of a cheque.

A cheque and a post-dated cheque

The Hon’ble Supreme Court of India explained the distinction between a cheque and a post-dated cheque with reference to Sections 5 and 6 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881, in the case of Anil Kumar Sawhney vs. Gulshan Rai (1993). According to the Supreme Court’s ruling:

  1. A post-dated cheque is only a bill of exchange when it is written or drawn; after it is due on demand, it is a cheque.
  2. A post-dated cheque is not cashable before the date printed on the document’s face. It remains a bill of exchange under Section 5 of the Negotiable Instruments Act of 1881 until the date indicated on it, at which point it becomes a cheque.
  3. Since a post-dated cheque cannot be presented to the bank, the issue of its return would not come up. The requirements of Section 138 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 only apply when the post-dated cheque becomes a “cheque” with effect from the date indicated on the face of the said cheque.
  4. A postdated cheque is nevertheless valid as a bill of exchange until the date printed on it. However, as of the date printed on the face of the said cheque, it qualifies as a cheque under the Negotiable Instruments Act of 1881, and in the event that it is dishonoured, Section 138’s proviso (a) is triggered.

Other types of cheques 

A cheque is classified into various types which are mentioned below:

  1. Open cheque: With the help of an open cheque, one can withdraw cash from the bank’s counter.
  2. Bearer Cheque: When the amount of the cheque is paid to someone whose name is mentioned upon the cheque, it is considered to be a bearer cheque.
  3. Crossed  Cheque: When the maker of a cheque crosses it by making two parallel transverse lines on the top left corner of the cheque with mentioning “not-negotiable” or “A/c payee” in order to make it payable only to be payee’s bank account, it is considered as a crossed cheque.
  4. Order Cheque: When a cheque is made out to a specific person by cutting the word “bearer” upon it, it is considered an order cheque.

Holder and holder in due course

Holder of an instrument

As per Section 8 of the Act, every instrument initially belongs to the payee of that instrument because he has the right to its possession. However, the payee has the authority to transfer that instrument to any other person in order to pay his debt and such transfer is called negotiation. Therefore, it can be said that the holder of an instrument is either the bearer of the instrument or the endorsee.

Holder in due course 

As per Section 9 of the Act, a holder in due course is the one who for consideration and in good faith becomes the possessor of a negotiable instrument even before the amount stated on that instrument becomes payable. It is pertinent to note that a holder in due course must have obtained the instrument prior to the lapse of maturity of that instrument and he should not have any notice of defect in the instrument. A person who has obtained a negotiable instrument in conformity with good faith and for value is referred to as a “holder in due process.” Each negotiable instrument holder is considered to be a “holder in due course.” It is the responsibility of a party liable for repayment to prove that the person holding the negotiable instrument isn’t the rightful owner in the event of a dispute. 

In any case, the onus is on the holder to prove that he is a holder in due course, for instance by proving that he obtained the negotiable instrument in accordance with some good faith and for value, if the parties obligated for repayment demonstrate that the negotiable instrument was obtained from its legitimate proprietor by means of a crime or extortion. In law, the “burden of proof” is the requirement to establish specific facts.

Difference between holder and holder in due course

  1. Any individual with the legal right to possess a promissory note, bill of exchange, or cheque in his or her own name, as well as to receive or obtain payment from the parties thereto, is referred to as the “holder” of that instrument. A holder who accepts the instrument in good faith, with due care and prudence, for value (consideration), and before maturity is referred to as a “holder in due course.” In the event of a “holder,” payment is not essential, and they are also permitted to purchase the instrument after it reaches maturity.
  2. A “holder” does not have any particular rights, but a “holder in due course” does have some specific rights. For instance, a holder in due course cannot use the argument that the amount they filled out on an instrument exceeded the authority granted. It was decided that an endorsement was irregular and that the endorsee (AB and Co.) was not a holder in due course, albeit it might be a holder for value when a bill was prepared by X in favour of Z and Z further endorsed the bill in favour of AB and Co.
  3. The key point is that the holder must have legal custody of the instrument in his own name. The possessor must be entitled to obtain or recoup that sum. An endorsee, payee, or bearer are all examples of holders. If someone has entitlement, it indicates that even if they don’t use it, they are still entitled to it and it cannot be taken away from them. In accordance with Section 8 of the Negotiable Instruments Act of 1881, the holder of an instrument must have a right to the instrument even if he does not possess it.
  4. A “holder” does not receive a title superior to that of his transferor; rather, a “holder in due process” receives a title superior to that of his transferor. The status of a “holder” is less favourable than that of a “holder in due course. ” The title of a “holder in due course” becomes free from all equities, meaning that a “holder in due course” cannot raise the defence that can be raised against the prior parties. For instance, if a negotiable instrument is lost and then found by someone through criminal activity (theft), the person who received the instrument through criminal activity is not entitled to any rights regarding any money owed in relation to that instrument. However, if such a document is properly transferred to a person as a holder, he will get a good title.

Indorsement 

Section 15 of the NI Act, 1881 clarifies as to what amounts to indorsement. When “the maker or holder signs the instrument otherwise than as a maker for the purpose of negotiation either on the back of it or on the face of it or on a slip annexed to it, then the instrument is said to have been endorsed”. 

Essential ingredients of indorsement

  • Endorsement must be made on the instrument irrespective of the fact that it is made on the back of the instrument or on the front side. It may also be made on a separate document attached to the instrument.
  • It is necessary that the endorser signs the instrument. The signature may be in full or even the initials may work.
  • An instrument must only be endorsed by the maker or the holder and not by any stranger to it.
  • Delivery of the essential is an essential of the process of endorsement. It may be made by the endorser or by his agent. 

Types of indorsement

As per the provisions of the NI Act, 1881, indorsement of an instrument can be done in four ways:

  • General indorsement (blank): As per Section 16 read with Section 54 of the NI Act, an instrument is said to be endorsed in “blank” when the person endorsing the instrument mentions his name as the sign. Such a type of instrument can be negotiated by mere delivery. For example, a bill is payable to Y and Y endorses it by just affixing his name as his signature. Here, the instrument is said to be endorsed in blank by Y.
  • Indorsement in full: As per Section 16 of the Act, where an endorser mentions the name of the person along with the signature, then it is said to be endorsed fully. As per Section 49, even an endorsement in blank can be converted into an endorsement in full if the last endorsement is a blank endorsement and the receiver of the instrument without writing his name mentions the endorser’s signature. For example, A is the holder of an instrument endorsed by C in blank. A writes over C’s signature, the words, “Pay to B or order.” This type of endorsement operates as an endorsement in full.
  • Restrictive indorsement: As per Section 50 of the Act, an endorsement is restrictive when the endorser while making the endorsement restricts/excludes the right of the endorser to further transfer the negotiable instrument. In other words, whenever the right to negotiate is restricted by an endorsement, then it is called a restrictive endorsement. For example, Pay B for the account of A. Here, the right of further negotiation is restricted by B.
  • Sans recourse endorsement: When we comprehend Section 52 of the Act, it becomes clear as to what sans-recourse endorsement is. When a person makes an endorsement and also excludes his own liability, it amounts to a sans-recourse endorsement. For example, Pay to B or order sans recourse. This means that in this case, the maker of the instrument being the endorser has opted to exclude its liability for paying the amount due to dishonour of the instrument.
  • Partial indorsement: As per Section 56 of the Act, negotiable instruments cannot be transferred for part of the amount mentioned on that instrument. But there is an exception to it as per Section 56, wherein if any part payment is already made, then in that case there can be partial endorsement for the remaining amount. For example, B is the holder of a bill worth Rs. 1500. He endorses it as “pay to C or order Rs. 1000.” 

Legal effects of indorsement

Following are the legal effects of negotiating an instrument by  way of endorsement:

  • Through endorsement, the property in the instrument gets transferred to the endorsee through the endorser.
  • Through endorsement, the right to further negotiate the instrument gets vested in the endorsee.
  • Endorsement gives the right to sue on the instrument.

In the case of A.V. Murthy vs. B.S. Nagabasavanna (2002), it was determined that a negotiable instrument is presumptively drawn for consideration and that a complaint of a dishonoured cheque at the threshold may be dismissed on the grounds that money had been advanced four years prior, the debt is not enforceable, and such a course of action is improper.

Parties to a negotiable instrument

Before getting to know about the types of negotiable instruments, it is important to know who can be a party to a negotiable instrument. As per Chapter III of the Act, any person who is capable of contracting as per the Indian Contract Act, 1872, is eligible to become party to a negotiable instrument.

Capacity of parties to the negotiable instrument

  • Minor: As per Section 26, a minor being incapable of contract, cannot bind himself by becoming a party to an instrument. A minor may be the drawer of the instrument, the maker, the acceptor, or even an endorser but he won’t be liable for the instrument. Even in such a case, the instrument remains binding upon all the parties to it. 
  • Agency: As per Section 27 of the Act, a person can legally bind himself by an instrument by becoming a party to it either by himself or even through a duly authorised agent. The provision clearly states that even an agent of the party to an instrument can bind his principal by acting on his behalf but only when he is authorised to do it. 

Liability of the parties 

The liability of the parties to a negotiable instrument under Chapter III has been mentioned under Sections 30 to 32 and further under Sections 35 to 42.

Liability of agent signing

Section 28: A promissory note, bill of exchange, or cheque that an agent sign without specifying that he is acting as an agent or that he does not intend to assume personal liability makes the agent personally liable for the instrument, with the exception of those who persuaded him to sign under the impression that only the principal would be held responsible.

Liability of legal representative signing 

Section 29: A promissory note, bill of exchange, or cheque that a legal representative of a deceased person signs binds him personally unless he expressly restricts his duty to the amount of assets he received in that capacity.

Liability of drawer

Section 30: If the drawee or acceptor of a bill of exchange or cheque dishonoured it, the drawer is obligated to pay the holder compensation, provided that the drawer has received or been given the proper notice of the dishonour as described further below.

Liability of drawee of cheque 

Section 31: The drawee of a cheque must pay the cheque when required to do so and, in the event that payment is not made as required, must reimburse the drawer for any losses or damages resulting from the default. This is true even if the drawee has sufficient funds in his possession that are legally applicable to the payment of the cheque.

Liability of maker of note and acceptor of bill

Section 32: The maker of a promissory note and the acceptor of a bill of exchange prior to maturity are obligated to pay the amount due at maturity in accordance with the apparent tenor of the note or acceptance, respectively, in the absence of a contract to the contrary, and the acceptor of a bill of exchange at or after maturity is obligated to pay the amount due to the holder upon demand. Any party to the note or bill who is not paid as required by the note or bill must be reimbursed by the maker or acceptor for any losses or damages they suffer as a result of the default.

Liability of indorser 

Section 35: Section 35, outlines the obligations of an endorser. In the case that the instrument is dishonoured, the endorser of a negotiable instrument undertakes the duty to the holder and any subsequent endorsers, unless there is a contrary arrangement. Significantly, the endorser’s liability will be secondary and arise only if the instrument is dishonoured after the proper procedures have been followed. Every indorser who does dishonour is accountable as if they were a demand-payable instrument.

Section 40 talks about the discharge of the indorser’s liability. The indorser is released from responsibility to the holder to the same extent as if the instrument had been paid in full when the holder of a negotiable instrument destroys or weakens the indorser’s remedy against a preceding party without the indorser’s consent. 

Liability of prior parties to the holder in due course

Section 36: Every prior party to a negotiable instrument is liable thereon to a holder in due course until the instrument is duly satisfied.

Discharge from liability

Chapter VII of the Act deals with the concept of discharge from the liability of the parties. These parties include either the maker of the instrument, the acceptor, or the endorser. When a party is discharged from liability over a particular instrument, in such a case, only that party gets discharged but the instrument continues to be negotiable and all the other undischarged parties will be liable on that instrument. 

Modes of discharge from liability

As mentioned above, Chapter VII not only deals with the concept of discharge from liability but also its various modes. Let us understand all the modes of discharge from liability of parties in brief.

Discharge by payment

As per Section 82(c), when a party is to be discharged from liability by the mode of payment, it needs to clear the payment in the due course of that payment. This means that the payment is to be made as per the terms and conditions and in accordance with good faith.

As per Section 79, the term “payment” is inclusive of the principal amount of the instrument along with the interest if any. Such interest if not mentioned while making the instrument remains 18% in accordance with the provisions mentioned under Section 80 of the Act.

Discharge by cancellation

As per Section 82(a), the maker, holder, or endorser is discharged from liability when such party cancels the name of the acceptor of the instrument. This results in the discharge of the liability of the maker, holder, or endorser against the person whose name is cancelled upon the instrument. 

Discharge by release

In accordance with Section 82(b), when the maker, holder, or endorser of an instrument gives notice of discharge to the party against whom the liability is to be discharged, the holder gets discharged from all such liabilities thereafter.

Crossing of cheques

A cheque is considered to be crossed when the maker of the cheque draws two parallel transverse lines across the face of the cheque. In the usual instance, these lines are drawn on the upper-left corner of the cheque. Payment of a cheque is usually affected by the crossing of a cheque. The word “crossing of a cheque” is nothing but a sort of direction to pay the money at the hands of the paying banker. Chapter XIV deals with the crossing of cheques.

Significance of crossing a cheque

A cheque is crossed to ensure that the payment is obtained only by the rightful holder of that cheque and not otherwise. When a cheque is crossed generally, the banker gets the rightful authority to obtain the payment. Crossing of cheques ensures that even in incidents of wrongful delivery of payments, the maker can trace back the transaction through the banker.

Who may cross a cheque

Following parties to a cheque may cross it:

  • Drawer of the cheque: a cheque may be crossed generally or specially by the drawer of that instrument.
  • Holder of the cheque: if the holder receives an uncrossed cheque, he has the authority to cross it either generally or specially. He may even add the words “not negotiable” to the cheque in order to restrict the instrument from getting negotiated any further.
  • Banker: a banker who receives a specially crossed cheque can even cross it again in order to negotiate it with another banker.

Modes of crossing a cheque

There are various modes of crossing a cheque as explained below:

General crossing

As per Section 123, when there remains no words between the lines of crossing or the name of the bank alongside the words if any, the cheque is said to be crossed generally. The maker of the cheque has the discretion to add the words “not negotiable” upon the cheque.

Special crossing

As per Section 124 of the Act, when there remains the name of the banker between the transverse lines, the cheque is said to be crossed specially. In such a case, the payment of the cheque can only be made through a specific banker whose name is mentioned between the lines of crossing.

Not-negotiable crossing

As per Section 130 of the Act, a cheque is said to be crossed as “not-negotiable” when the word “not-negotiable” is mentioned between the transverse lines on the cheque. Such type of crossing restricts the instrument from being negotiated any further. When a cheque is crossed as “not-negotiable”, the maker becomes ineligible for any authority to pass on any title which he is devoid of.

The penal provisions of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 (Chapter XVII)

The criminal penalties found in Sections 138 to 148 of the 1881 Act have been put in place to make sure that contracts entered into using cheques as a form of deferred payment are upheld. Conditions for filing a complaint for cheque dishonour are outlined in Section 138 of the Act. The following are the components needed to comply with Section 138:

  1. Cheques are a common form of payment, and post-dated cheques are regularly utilised in a variety of business operations. Cheques that have been postdated are issued to the cheque’s drawer as a convenience. As a result, it becomes important to make sure the cheque’s drawer isn’t abusing the accommodations made for him. 
  2. The NI Act, 1881 governs the use of negotiable instruments, including cheques, bills of exchange, and promissory notes. The purpose of Chapter XVII, which contains Sections 138 to 142, was to foster trust in the effectiveness of banking operations and lend legitimacy to the negotiable instruments used in commercial transactions.
  3. A person must have drawn a cheque to pay money to someone else to satisfy any debt or other obligation;
  4. The bank has received that cheque during the last three months;
  5. When a cheque is returned unpaid by the bank due to inadequate funds or because it exceeds the amount specified in an agreement established with the bank to be paid from that account;
  6. Within 15 days of learning from the bank that the cheque was returned as unpaid, the payee issues a written notice to the drawer demanding payment of the money;
  7. Within 15 days of receiving the notice, the drawer fails to pay the payee.

Dishonour of negotiable instruments

A negotiable instrument may occasionally be dishonoured, which means the party responsible for payment neglects to make the payment. After submitting the proper notice of dishonour, the holder has the right to file a lawsuit for the recovery of the sum. However, he is allowed to have a Notary Public’s certification about the actuality of dishonour before he files the lawsuit. A statement like that is referred to as “protest.” The court will assume that there has been dishonour based on the verification of such dissent. 

An overview of Section 138 of the Act

The “Negotiable Instruments Act” was first developed in 1866, and it was finally passed into law in 1881. Chapter XVII, which includes sections 138 to 142, was added to this statute in 1988, after more than a century. Section 138 of the Act essentially lays out the punishment for the crime of dishonouring a cheque. “A negotiable document drawn on a designated banker and not expressed to be payable otherwise on demand” is how one may define a cheque under the Section. The word “cheque” is defined in Section 6 of Chapter II of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 to include “an electronic image of a truncated cheque and a cheque in electronic form.” Before the recent addition, criminal prosecution of the accused in cases of cheque dishonour was not an option for the payee of the cheque; instead, only civil and alternative dispute resolution procedures were available. Now, the payee of the cheque has access to both civil and criminal remedies.

The Hon’ble Court stated in Modi Cement Limited vs. Kuchil Kumar Nandi (1998), that the major goal of Section 138 of the Negotiable Instrument Act, 1881 is to increase the effectiveness of banking operations and to guarantee complete trust while conducting business using cheques. The laws of the commercial world, which are specifically designed to simplify trade and commerce by making provisions for giving sanctity to the instruments of credit that would be deemed to be convertible into money and easily transferable from one to another, are those that deal with negotiable instruments.

In the most recent decision of P Mohanraj vs. M/S. Shah Brothers Ispat Pvt. Ltd. (2021), a division bench composed of Rohinton Fali Nariman, and B.R. Gavai rendered their decision that when discussing whether Section 14 of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 prohibits proceedings under Section 138 of the Negotiable Instrument Act, 1881, against corporate debtors, it was noted that the proceedings under Section 138 could be described as “civil sheep” in “criminal wolf’s clothing.”

Conditions to commit an offence under Section 138 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881

The term “Negotiable Instrument” is defined as “a promissory note, bills of exchange, or cheque payable either to order or to bearer” under Section 13 of the Negotiable Instrument Act, 1881. In other words, it basically says that “it is a sort of instrument which promises the bearer a sum of money that will be payable on demand or at any future date.” Section 138 essentially outlines the penalties for dishonouring a cheque as a criminal provision. 

The provision itself outlines specific conditions that render dishonouring a cheque illegal, and the prerequisites are: 

  1. A cheque must first have been prepared by the person who will be the drawer, and it must be for the payment of money to another party to satisfy a debt.
  2. The cheque should be handed to the drawee bank, and if there aren’t enough funds or the amount is greater than “the amount arranged to be paid from that account by an agreement established with the bank,” the bank will return the cheque unpaid.
  3. The bank must receive the cheque no later than six months after the day it was drawn or during the duration of its validity, whichever comes first.
  4. The bank promptly provides the payee with the “Cheque return memo” if the cheque is dishonoured by the bank.
  5. Following that, a demand notice for the return of the unpaid cheque must be sent by the cheque holder, who is also the payee, to the cheque drawer within 30 days of receiving the memo.
  6. The drawer must make the payment within 15 days of receiving this notice, and if it is not made within that time frame, the payee may file a lawsuit within 30 days of the expiration of the 15-day period.

The court ruled in the case of Shankar Finance Investment vs. State of Andhra Pradesh (2008) and others that “Section 142 of the Negotiable Instrument Act makes it compulsory that the complaint must be filed by the payee or holder in due course of the cheque where a Payee is a natural person he can file a complaint and when the pay is a form of a company registered person it must be represented by a natural person.” 

Decriminalisation of Section 138 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881

The decriminalisation of minor offices was announced in a public notice released by the Minister of Finance in the year 2020 with the goal of boosting business confidence and streamlining the legal system. for gathering feedback and proposals from interested parties about the decriminalisation of a variety of offences, including the offence under Section 138 of the Negotiable Instruments Act of 1881. 

The primary goal of the government’s proposal is to streamline business procedures and promote investment, but in a reasonable opinion, doing away with Section 138’s criminal penalties will not achieve this goal. Instead, it can be believed that this section was designed to have deterrent effects and to prevent people from breaking their agreements by paying by cheque.

Another goal of this proposal was to decriminalise certain offences in order to open up the legal system. However, this goal will not be achieved because there are already a lot of pending cases in the magistrate courts, and they are being resolved very slowly. Additionally, by decriminalising certain offences, the burden that was previously placed on the criminal courts will be transferred to the civil courts because the person who holds the cheque will now bear that burden.

Cognizance of the offence under Section 142 of the Negotiable Instrument Act, 1881

Section 142 of the NI Act, 1881 talks about the cognizance of offence mentioned under Section 138. According to Section 142(1)(a), a court can only take cognizance for an offence under Section 138 on the written complaint of the payee of the cheque or the holder in due course whatever the case may be.

Limitation period for making a complaint

It is pertinent to note that as per Section 142(1)(b), the complaint of the dishonour of the cheque must be made within one month from the cause of action of the offence mentioned under Section 138. However, the court may take cognizance post the limitation time if the payee or the holder in due course satisfies the court that there was a sufficient reason for not making the complaint in the requisite time period.

Who may take cognizance under Section 142

As per Section 142(1)(c), the court of a Metropolitan Magistrate or Judicial Magistrate first class is authorised to take cognizance of the offence mentioned under Section 138.

Jurisdiction of the trial of the offence 

As per Section 142(2), an offence under Section 138 may be tried in the following jurisdictions:

  1. The branch of the bank in which the payee maintains his account, or
  2. The branch of the drawee bank.

Defence that cannot be taken

As per Section 140 of the Act, the defence that the cheque presented may get dishonoured on presentment cannot be taken by the drawer of the cheque. However, the following defences may be considered by the court:

  • Wrong jurisdiction/ lack of jurisdiction
  • Absence of notice of 15 days
  • Cheque not returned by the payee
  • Complaint filed not in compliance with Section 142

Summary trial of the disputes as per Section 143

In accordance with Section 143 of the Act, the offences under Chapter XVII are to be dealt with summarily as per Sections 262265 of the Code of Criminal Procedure, 1973 for which the sentence passed by the magistrate must not exceed a term of one year and a fine for an amount of not exceeding 5000 rupees.

Speedy disposal of the matters under this provision

As per Section 143(3), every trial conducted by the magistrate under this provision must be concluded within a time span of 6 months from the date of filing of the complaint.

Speedy disposal of negotiable instrument cases in recent times

The Delhi High Court considered the issue of whether a criminally compoundable offence under Section 138 might be resolved by mediation in the case of  Dayawati vs. Yogesh Kumar Gosain (2017). The Court ruled that even while the legislature did not clearly provide for such a provision, the criminal court is still permitted to send both the complainant and the accused to alternative conflict resolution procedures. Without mandating or limiting the method by which it may be reached, the Code of Criminal Procedure, 1973, does permit and accept a settlement. Therefore, there is no prohibition against using alternative dispute resolution procedures, such as arbitration, mediation, and conciliation (recognised under Section 89 of the Civil Procedure Code, 1908), to resolve disputes that are the focus of offences covered by Section 320 of the Code of Criminal Procedure Code. Additionally, it was argued that the proceedings under Section 138 of the 1881 Act are unique from other criminal cases and really have more in common with a civil wrong that has been given criminal undertones.

After considering the purpose of enacting Section 138 and other sections of Chapter XVII of the Act, the Honourable Supreme Court stated in Meters and Instruments (P) Ltd. vs. Kanchan Mehta (2017) that an offence under Section 138 of the Act is principally a civil wrong. Section 139 places the burden of proof on the accused, but the standard for such proof is “preponderance of probabilities.” The case must typically be tried summarily in accordance with the provisions of summary trial under the CrPC, with any modifications necessary for proceedings under Chapter XVII of the Act. 

As written, Section 258 of the CrPC principle will be in effect, and the Court may close the case and release the accused if it is satisfied that the amount on the cheque, as well as any assessed costs and interest, have been paid and if there is no justification for continuing with the punitive element. Compounding at the initial stage must be encouraged but is not prohibited at a later stage, subject to appropriate compensation as may be found acceptable by the parties or the Court. The purpose of the provision is primarily compensatory, the punitive element being primarily with the object of enforcing the compensatory element. 

Cases brought under Chapter XVII of the Act must typically be tried in a summary manner. It is pertinent to note that the court having jurisdiction under Section 357(3) CrPC to try the case can also grant suitable compensation in addition to the sentence of imprisonment under Section 64 of the Indian Penal Code, 1860, and with further recovery powers under Section 431 of the CrPC. The Magistrate may decide, under the second proviso to Section 143 of the Indian Penal Code, 1860, that it was undesirable to try the case summarily because a sentence of more than one year may need to be passed. With this strategy, a prison term of more than a year may not be necessary in every circumstance.

The bank’s slip is prima facie proof of the dishonoured cheque, so the Magistrate need not record any additional preliminary evidence. The complaint’s evidence can be provided on affidavit, subject to the court’s ruling and scrutinising the individual providing the affidavit. This type of affidavit testimony is admissible at all stages of a trial or other action. 

Thus, the plan is to proceed in a summary manner.

Other important provisions under chapter XVII

Presumption in favour of the holder

As per Section 139, the court shall presume that the cheque issued in the favour of the holder was in discharge of the liability whether in part or in full.

Offences by the companies

As per Section 141, even a company can be held liable for an offence committed under Section 138. In such cases where the company commits an offence under Section 138 of the Act, the person in charge responsible for the company’s affairs at the time of the commission of the offence along with the company will be held liable and will be prosecuted against. Also, it is to note that the defence of due diligence and good faith cannot be taken in such cases where a company is accused of committing an offence under Section 138. 

However, no proceeding can be exercised against the Director of a company employed by the Central Government or a State Government.

Mode of service of summons

According to this Section 144, a copy of the summons must be duly served upon the accused or the witness where they reside or work for gain.

Evidence on affidavit

Section 145 denotes that the evidence of the complainant is given on affidavit and the court has the authority to summon and examine the person giving evidence on affidavit.

Offences to be compoundable

According to this Section 147, all the offences under this Act shall be compoundable within the meaning of the provisions of CrPC.

Latest amendment in the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881

The Negotiable Instruments (Amendment) Act, 2018 which came into force on 1st September, 2018 inserted two important provisions to chapter XVII of the Act. Sections 143A and Section 148 were inserted by the Amendment Act.

Interim compensation 

According to Section 143A, the court while trying an offence mentioned under Section 138 can also grant interim compensation to the complainant which must not exceed 20% of the cheque’s amount. Also, as per Sub-section (3) of Section 143A, such compensation must be paid within a time frame of sixty days further extendable to thirty days from the date of such order.

As per Sub-section 5, such compensation must be received as a fine in accordance with Section 421 of CrPC.

Power of Appellate Court

Section 148 denotes the power of the Appellate Court to order payment. As per this provision, the Appellant Court may order the appellant to deposit the sum of conviction for which the appeal has been preferred which would be 20% interest of the fine or compensation. However, such an amount would be in addition to the amount of compensation granted under Section 143A. 

As per Sub-section (2), such an amount must be deposited within a time frame of 60 days further extendable to 30 days on sufficient cause.

Other important provisions of the NI Act, 1881

Notice of dishonour

Chapter XVIII of the Act deals with the provisions concerning notice of dishonour of a negotiable instrument. The following are the provisions mentioned in this chapter:

  • Section 91: It denotes the dishonour by non-acceptance of an instrument. When an instrument is not duly accepted on the presentment of it in a timely manner, it is considered to be dishonoured. 
  • Section 92: This provision talks about the notice of dishonour by non-payment. An instrument is considered to be dishonoured by non-payment when the maker of that instrument makes a default in payment which he is required to pay.
  • Section 93: This provision talks about the parties by whom and to whom the notice of dishonour should be given. Whenever a negotiable instrument is dishonoured, the person or the maker of the instrument liable for the dishonour must give the notice to the holder or any other party to whom he is liable.

Noting and Protest

According to Section 99 of the Act, when an instrument gets dishonoured due to non-acceptance or non-payment, such dishonour may be called to be noted by the notary public upon that paper or any other affixed paper. 

As per Section 100, when such noting is certified by the notary public, that certificate is considered to be a protest. 

Reasonable time

Chapter X deals with the head of reasonable time. The important provisions in this chapter are dealt with as follows:

  • Section 105 deals with what reasonable time is. As per the provision, the reasonable time for the presentation of an instrument or for sending the notice of its dishonour depends upon the usual course of transmission and relevant details such as the exclusion of bank holidays or public holidays etc.
  • Section 106 talks about the reasonable time for the notice of dishonour of an instrument. As per the provision, “If the holder and the party to who notice of dishonour is given carry on business or live (as the case may be) in different places, such notice is given within a reasonable time if it is dispatched by the next post or on the day next after the day of dishonour.”

International law

Chapter XVI covers the provisions relating to international law in resonance with the negotiable instruments. As per Section 134 of the Act, a foreign negotiable instrument would be governed by the laws of the land where that instrument is made. However, this is not the case when a foreign instrument is dishonoured. As per Section 135, when the place of the making of the instrument is different from where it is made payable and such instrument gets dishonoured, the law of the place where it was to be made payable would apply.

Presumption as to foreign law

According to Section 137, unless the contrary is proved, the laws of the foreign land where an instrument is made would be considered similar to the Indian laws governing the negotiable instruments.

Presumption as to service of notice 

It is assumed that a notice has been served if it has been sent by registered mail to the right address of the cheque’s drawer. The drawer, however, has the right to refute this assumption.

The Apex Court has ruled that a notice is considered to have been properly served if it is delivered to the correct address and returned with the words “refused,” “no one was home,” “house was locked,” or words to that effect.

Requirement of stamp

Despite the fact that the Act makes no reference of the stamp’s relevance or requirement, every style of promissory note and bill of exchange must have a stamp on it. The Indian Stamp Act of 1899 mentions a mandatory provision for stamp affixation on such documents.

Presumptions under Section 118 and Section 119 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881

According to Section 101 of the Indian Evidence Act, 1872, the plaintiff has the initial burden of proving a prima facie case in his favour. Once the plaintiff presents evidence to support a prima facie case in his favour, the defendant is then required to present evidence to the court of law that supports the plaintiff’s case. The burden of proof may return to the plaintiff as the case develops. The following presumptions shall be made unless the contrary is shown, according to Section 118 of the Negotiable Instruments Act of 1881:

  1. Consideration: When dealing with a negotiable instrument, the complaint must establish prima facie that he did so in good faith and without payment. Every negotiable document is deemed to have been drawn for consideration, and every time one of these instruments is accepted, inscribed, or transferred, it is assumed that this was done for (or against) consideration. As a result, in the event that the complainant files a complaint alleging dishonour of a cheque (or other negotiable instrument), the accused person may discharge his or her responsibility by demonstrating that there is no sum due to be paid to the complainant by the accused person under the terms of the instrument.
  2. Date: It is assumed that a negotiable instrument was drawn on the date that is specified on the instrument’s face in the case of a negotiable instrument.
  3. Time of acceptance: When it comes to negotiable instruments, it is assumed that they were accepted within a reasonable amount of time following their execution date and prior to their maturity.
  4. Time of transfer: Every transfer involving a negotiable instrument is assumed to have taken place before the instrument’s maturity date.
  5. Order of indorsements: The endorsements that appear on a negotiable instrument are assumed to have been made in the order or sequence that they do.
  6. Holder in Due Course: A missing promissory note, bill of exchange, or cheque is assumed to have been properly marked, thereby, implying the concept of holder in due course.
  7. Stamp: Every possessor of a negotiable instrument is deemed to have obtained it voluntarily and in exchange for value. The accused party must demonstrate that the negotiable instrument’s holder is not a holder in good standing.

The Negotiable Instruments Act of 1881 mandates that when a promissory note or bill of exchange has been dishonoured by non-acceptance or non-payment, the holder of such instrument may cause such dishonour to be noted by a notary public upon the instrument or upon a paper annexed (or attached) thereto, or partly upon each of them, i.e., the instrument and the paper annexed to the instrument. Additionally, according to Section 100 of the Negotiable Instruments Act of 1881, the holder of an instrument may have it protested by a notary public within a reasonable amount of time regarding the dishonour of the instrument.

Following Chinnaswamy vs. Perumal (1999), it was held that the assumption under Section 118 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881, had been refuted by the facts in the case of Ayyakannu Gounder vs. Virudhambal Ammal (2004). In Bonala Raju vs. Sreenivasulu (2006) it was decided that the presumption as to consideration under Section 118 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881, applies when the fulfilment of a promissory note is proven.

According to Section 119 of the Negotiable Instruments Act of 1881, the presumption of proof of protest is discussed. It specifies that if a lawsuit is filed over the nonpayment of a promissory note or a bill of exchange, the court will presume that the nonpayment occurred unless and until the acceptor of the promissory note or bill of exchange refutes (or refutes) the claim.

Recommendation for better functioning of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881

  1. It is recommended to double the number of Magistrates designated solely for instances involving cheque bounces. To deal with certain cases, special courts can be established. The Government is required to allocate the money required to cover the costs associated with hiring more Magistrates, their support staff, and other infrastructure. A judge shouldn’t have more than fifty cases before them on any one day (25 people attended the morning session and 25 people the afternoon session), presuming that the number is a reasonable one.
  2. The court’s judicial clerk should sit for an hour, take roll calls, consider requests for adjournment by consent, and adjourn the cases that, in his opinion, need adjournment before the court’s time, which is before 11 AM. When the magistrate’s judicial attention or time is needed, those matters can be detained for judicial review until 11 AM with a note from the court clerk. The recording of the evidence should take up the entire hour of court time beginning at 11 AM. The aforementioned will spare the court between one and two hours per day. As he is not bringing a new financial claim, victims of cheque-bounce instances are not required to pay court costs.
  3. According to Section 139 of the Act of 1881, it is presumed that the holder of a cheque received a cheque of the kind mentioned in Section 138 for the discharge, in whole or in part, of any debt or other liability unless the contrary can be proven. The accused may disprove this presumption by presenting convincing evidence that there was no debt or liability. The burden of proof then switches back to the complainant when such rebuttal evidence has been presented and accepted by the court.
  4. Since it is a quasi-judicial proceeding, the Court should adopt a creative strategy and avoid becoming bogged down in details. Technicalities should be sought out and firmly rejected.
  5. Magistrates must act on their own, and a four-hearing process must be used. A non-bailable warrant must be issued if the accused does not show up for the initial hearing. The accused must provide justification and present a defence at the second hearing. Cross-examination should be done during the third hearing. Arguments should be made at the fourth hearing, and then a decision must be made.
  6. Credit is granted based on confidence and trust. To further simplify conducting business in India, it is in the judicial system’s best interest that these reforms are implemented as soon as practicable. It is against the law for someone who borrows money on credit to use Section 138 of the Act to put off making payments, and it is the Court’s responsibility to make sure that it does not become a party to such stalling measures. 

Conclusion 

According to the 213th Law Commission Report, the Indian judicial system is dealing with a significant backlog of cases, and roughly 20% of the litigation-related issues include cheque bounces. The lifeless sections of the Negotiable Instruments Act of 1881 would thus be given some life by the recently enacted provisions. Even though cases involving cheque bounces are penal in nature and result in criminal offences, the procedures for summary judgement are still on the books, and making the offence subject to bail has made these cases practically identical to civil issues. In this approach, newly introduced restrictions would in fact be a proactive measure to protect the legitimacy of cheques. Once the accused individuals or the appellant, if there is an appeal, deposit a sizable sum, they will begin to treat the situation seriously. Even while it is moving in the right way, there is still work to be done to make cheque bounce cases feasible, and summary trials must be given their actual meaning. Otherwise, the entire point of making a cheque bounce a criminal offence would become less significant. 

Apart from the significance of NI Act, 1881 in the cheque bounce matters, it is considered a substantial piece of legislation because of its governance over the various negotiable instruments in the Indian territory. It is a comprehensive legal framework of provisions which deals with every aspect of the negotiable instruments ranging from their creation to their enforcement. It highlights the rights and liabilities of the parties and provides for an efficient mechanism of the disputes pertaining to negotiable instruments.  

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)

What is the maximum punishment prescribed for the offence committed under Section 138 of the Act?

According to Section 138, any person accused of dishonour of a cheque due to insufficiency of balance in his bank account will be held liable for the offence mentioned under this Section and will be sentenced to imprisonment of a term not exceeding two years or with a fine which would not exceed twice the amount of the cheque.

How is an inland instrument different from a foreign instrument?

Inland instruments are the ones that are either payable in India or drawn upon a person who is a resident of India whereas foreign instruments are the ones that are not considered as inland instruments. This also implies that such type of instrument shall be either payable or drawn upon a person who is not a resident of India or such type of instrument is drawn and made payable outside India.

In which year, was Section 143A introduced in the Act?

Section 143A which talks about interim compensation was inserted into the Act of 1881 by the Negotiable Instruments (Amendment) Act, 2018 on 1st September, 2018.

Who can claim compensation under Section 143A?

The payee or the holder in due course upon the dishonour of the cheque can also file for a claim of interim compensation from the drawer of the cheque. This compensation is treated as a fine as per the provisions of CrPC.

Which court has the power to take cognizance of an offence committed under Section 138?

As per Section 142, the Judicial Magistrate First Class or the court of Metropolitan Magistrate has the authority to take cognizance of an offence under Section 138.

References 

  1. https://www.researchgate.net/publication/314466023_The_Negotiable_Instruments_Act_1881_Critical_Analysis.
  2. https://www.ijlmh.com/paper/critical-analysis-of-section-138-of-negotiable-instruments-act-1881/#:~:text=Promissory%20notes%2C%20bills%20of%20exchange,mode%20of%20of%20transferring%20money.

Download Now

How to build a Supreme Court practice in India

0

This article is written by Ashutosh with the aim of elucidating how a lawyer can develop a successful practice in the Supreme Court of India. In this article, the author has covered all the aspects related to the practice of law in the Supreme Court of India, covering additional topics such as Senior Advocate, AOR, eligibility criteria, how to become a Supreme Court lawyer, skills required, tips, issues and challenges faced by young lawyers etc.

Table of Contents

Introduction

There are a lot of students who get into law schools with a dream of becoming lawyers and having successful practice in the Supreme Court of India. Every year, hundreds and thousands of law students graduate in India who want to pursue litigation as their career and want to become successful Supreme Court lawyers. The Supreme Court is the court of the highest authority in India and becoming a Supreme Court lawyer is in itself a matter of prestige. However, there are various law students who don’t know about the functioning of the Supreme Court and what all it takes to become a successful Supreme Court lawyer.

If you are also a law student who is aspiring to become a successful Supreme Court lawyer but you don’t know when and how to start your preparation for the same, then don’t worry, because we have got you covered. In this article, we will be dealing with all the important aspects related to the practice as a Supreme Court lawyer.

Supreme Court of India and its significance

The Supreme Court of India is the court of the highest authority in India and it is also known as the court of the final appeal. The Supreme Court of India was established in accordance with the Government of India Act, 1935. The purpose of this court was to settle the disputes between the federal states and the provinces and it also heard various appeals against the judgements given by the High Courts. After India got Independence in 1947, the Judicial committee and the federal court of the Privy Council were replaced by the Supreme Court of India in the year 1950 and the Constitution of India envisaged for a Supreme Court that would consist of a Chief Justice and 7 other Judges. The number of judges of the Supreme Court was increased by the Parliament after amending the Supreme Court (Number of Judges) Act, 1956 and the latest amendment was done in 2019 in which the number of judges was increased from 30 to 33 (excluding the Chief Justice of India).  As of now there are a total of thirty four judges including the Chief Justice of India. However, currently the Supreme Court is functioning with a strength of 31 judges. 

The Supreme Court has a duty to perform various functions in order to safeguard the interests of the parties and to provide justice to the citizens of India. Some of the most prominent functions of the Supreme Court of India are to deal with the appeals against the judgements and orders of the various High Courts, tribunals and all other courts. The Supreme Court also takes up the cases that have been referred to it by the President. One of the most important functions of the Supreme Court is given under Articles 131 and 143.

The Supreme Court of India deals with three kinds of jurisdictions, namely the original, appellate and advisory jurisdiction. Original jurisdiction (Article 131) of the Supreme Court is the power of the court through which it can take up a matter as the court of the first instance. Article 143 confers the advisory jurisdiction upon the Supreme Court by the virtue of which the President of India can request for the advisory opinion of the Supreme Court on any question of fact or law that holds public importance. The appellate jurisdiction of the Supreme Court is given under Article 132 of the Indian Constitution and it states that the Supreme Court has the power to decide an appeal against the judgement of a High Court, provided that the High Court certifies that the matter involves a substantial question of law.

The Supreme Court of India also has a provision to consult the President of India in order to regulate the procedure and practice of the court. All the constitutional cases of the country are dealt with by the Constitutional bench consisting of five or more judges whereas all the other cases can be decided by a bench consisting of at least three Supreme Court Judges. According to Article 130 of the Constitution of India, Delhi is declared as the seat of the Supreme Court of India and it has the power to assign any other place as the seat of the Supreme Court. This provision is optional and not mandatory.

Who is a senior advocate

Section 16 of the Advocate Act, 1961 talks about two categories of advocates, namely the senior advocates and the other ones includes all other advocates and junior advocates. An advocate can get a designation of a Senior Advocate if the High Court or the Supreme Court is of the opinion that such an advocate has certain abilities and qualifications, and he possesses special knowledge and experience in the field of law and he deserves to get a distinction from all other lawyers who have less qualification and experience. However, all the senior advocates in the area of practice are being subjected to certain restrictions which are prescribed by the Bar Council of India in the interest of the legal profession. 

A senior advocate is not allowed to file a vakalatnama or present a case in any tribunal or court or before any person of authority as mentioned under Section 30 of the Advocates Act, 1961. Explanation of this rule makes it clear that to act basically means to file for an appearance or application or any pleading in any tribunal or any person of authority mentioned under Section 30 of the Advocates Act,1961 or to do any other act other than the act of pleading that is required or authorised by law to be done by a party in such tribunals or courts. 

This Section further states that a senior advocate is not eligible to appear in the Supreme Court without an Advocate on Record. This rule also states that a senior advocate is free to make any concession or give any kind of undertakings while giving an argument on behalf of his clients on instructions from the junior advocates. A senior advocate also does not have an authority to accept directly from a client, any instruction or brief, to appear in any of the courts or tribunal or before any person or other authority in India.

Guidelines for the designation of senior advocates by the Supreme Court of India

  • A lawyer who wants to become a senior advocate must have a standing at the Bar as an Advocate for a period of at least ten years or he must combinedly be an advocate and a District and session judge for a period of ten years or he should be a judicial member of any tribunal or court in India.
  • A lawyer who wanted to become a senior advocate must primarily practise in the Supreme Court of India, but the advocates who have domain expertise in practising before specialised tribunals may be given some concession.
  • According to the latest guidelines, the age limit for applying for the position of a senior advocate in the Supreme Court of India is forty five years unless the age limit is relaxed. The age limit for becoming a Senior advocate can be relaxed by the Committee for the Designation of Senior Advocates and it can also be done in a case if the appointment of the senior advocate is being recommended by the Chief Justice of India or by any judge of the Supreme Court.

Criteria for becoming a senior advocate

  • The latest guidelines have a revised and new point system for the purpose of evaluating the lawyers who are eligible to become a senior advocate. 
  • The new criteria is inclusive of two factors, and that is the number of years of practice a lawyer has gone through and the body of their work. 
  • The breakup of the point system is as follows:
    • Number of years of practice: All the applicants will receive a maximum of 20 points, of which 10 points will be for 10 years of practice and 1 point each will be for every additional year of the practice.
    • Judgments unreported and reported, work of pro bono nature and the expertise in Constitution domain has 50 points.
    • Test of suitability and personality that is based on the interview consists of 25 points.
    • Publication of academic articles, experience of teaching and assignments in the field of law, guest lectures delivered in law schools and professional institutions connected with law consists of 5 marks.

Selection

  • The selection for the purpose of designation as a senior advocate will be done by the Committee for Designation of Senior Advocates. This committee is headed by the Chief Justice of India (CJI) as its Chairperson.
  • The applications for the purpose of designation as a senior advocate are invited once every year and the committee meets twice every year.
  • The committee will consist of a permanent secretariat, the members of which will be selected by the CJI and the committee members.

Who is an Advocate-on-Record (AOR)

An Advocate on Record (AOR) is a legal professional who has the authority to practise before the Supreme Court of India. They are majorly responsible for filing various applications and representing the matters of their client in front of the Supreme Court. An AOR has a special privilege and that is, they are the only legal professionals who can plead in the premises of the Supreme Court. Even a senior advocate of the Supreme Court can not plead in front of the judges of the Supreme Court until and unless he is assisted by an AOR.

There are various challenges that a lawyer faces in order to become an AOR, and one of them is clearing the AOR exam. In order to become an AOR, a lawyer is required to successfully clear the exam conducted by the Supreme Court of India. The examination conducted by the Supreme Court of India for the appointments of AOR is very competitive and it covers multiple subjects and various topics, such as civil law, constitutional law, procedural law, criminal law etc.

Once a lawyer successfully qualifies the AOR exam, they are registered with the Supreme Court of India and they are assigned with a unique code. These lawyers also have a special responsibility and that is to have a chamber at the premises of the Supreme Court of India.

AORs play an extremely vital role in the legal system of India. They are responsible for making sure that the interest of their clients is safeguarded when they represent them in the Supreme Court to fight for their justice. 

There are various responsibilities and duties that an AOR performs and some of their major responsibilities are as follows:

  • Assisting the Supreme Court of India in maintaining the rule of law and in the proper administration of justice.
  • Drafting and preparing various legal documents such as vakalatnama, appeals, special leave petitions. 
  • Representing and filing matters before the Supreme Court of India.
  • Providing legal advice to their clients on legal matters.
  • Appearing before the Supreme Court of India in order to safeguard the interest of their clients.

Becoming an Advocate on Record in the Supreme Court of India is an extremely prestigious job. In order to become an AOR, a lawyer needs to have a deep understanding of the procedures of the Supreme Court and it also requires a lawyer to have an in-depth understanding of all the legal matters that are being carried out in the Supreme Court. AORs basically serve as a bridge between the Supreme Court and their clients and they also help various organisations and individuals in navigating through the various complex legal processes in the court with the highest authority in India.

How to become a Supreme Court lawyer

Criminal litigation

Most of the legal aspirants dream to have a successful practice in the Supreme Court of India. But there are certain steps that a person must follow in order to achieve their dream and become a Supreme Court lawyer. In this part of the article, we have given a step by step procedure that law aspirants can follow to become a Supreme Court lawyer:

Scoring minimum 45% in 12th boards examination

If you are a school student and have decided to pursue law as a career, you must score a minimum of 45% in your 12th boards examination because the criteria to sit in Common Law Admission Test is to have minimum 45% marks in 12th boards examination and even many reputed private colleges only accept students who fulfil this criteria. Many private colleges also give scholarships to students who have good percentages in their 12th boards examination. However, nowadays private law colleges are accepting students on CLAT scores as well. If you are someone who has completed their bachelors degree from arts, science or commerce and have now decided to pursue law, you can enrol yourself in law colleges or universities that provides 3 years LLB degree like Delhi University, Symbiosis law college (Pune), BHU (Varanasi), ILS law college (Pune), etc.

Enrollment in a law college

In order to become a Supreme Court lawyer, the first important thing you need to do is get into a law school, because this is the place where you will build your base and will create the foundation of your career. After getting yourself enrolled in a law college, you must try to do internships with advocates and good law firms. For those who want to become a Supreme Court lawyer, it is advised to do internships with lawyers from the Supreme Court , as it will provide them with an experience of working in the Supreme Court. If you do regular internships in the Supreme Court, you might get a hang of how things are done there and it will be much easier for you once you start your own practice after law school ends. 

Registration with Bar Council of India after law college

Once you receive your degree from the law college, the first and foremost step that you should take to become an advocate is to get registered with the Bar Council of India. It is mandatory for lawyers to get registered with the Bar Council of India in order to practise in any court of India. Different states of India have their respective Bar Councils and you must get yourself registered with the state where you want to practise.

This article talks about the lawyers of the Supreme Court of India, so these candidates should enrol with the Bar Council of Delhi. One can obtain the enrolment application from head office or branch office of the Delhi Bar Council. The Bar council of Delhi’s library is located at Tis Hazari, Delhi and lawyers can also obtain application form from there after making a payment of Rs. 1000/- 

Passing the All India Bar Exam (AIBE)

Every year the Bar Council of India hosts the All India Bar Exam or the AIBE, and every law student who graduates from law college sits for this exam. Every lawyer who wants to practise law in any of the courts in India needs to clear the All India Bar exam in order to become a certified lawyer in India and practise successfully as a lawyer in the Indian courts. This exam consists of hundred marks and is held every year by the Bar Council of India. In this exam a law student needs to solve a hundred objective type questions within a time period of three hours and thirty minutes. This exam does not contain any negative marking. Once the candidate successfully passes this examination and gets the ABIE certificate, he/she becomes eligible to practise law in any of the courts in India as a lawyer.

Find a job as a junior lawyer under a senior advocate of Supreme Court

After registering yourself with the Bar Council of India, you become eligible to practise in any court of India. It is not easy for new lawyers to start their own practice in the Supreme Court thus, most lawyers always start their practising career as junior advocate of any well renowned Supreme Court lawyer. There are many benefits of starting a career as junior assistant to some experienced lawyer. The first and foremost being that you get to learn the work, be it drafting or arguing in the Court. Senior lawyers always help their juniors in getting familiar with all kinds of work. Also, as a junior lawyer, you will make many connections which will help you to get clients in the future. So, overall taking up a job as a junior lawyer would be the best step if you want to become a Supreme Court lawyer.

Practise in lower courts

Once a lawyer clears the AIBE, he is set to practise law in any of the courts in India. It is suggested for all the budding lawyers to start their career of law practise in lower courts. This is because they will get more opportunities and more knowledge in lower courts, because the Supreme Court is often ruled by the senior advocates and advocates on records. Once you gain enough experience and knowledge from lower and subordinate courts you can move to the Supreme Court. Practising law in lower and subordinate courts have two fold benefits, and that is, lawyers who practise law in lower courts in their initial days, they gain ground level knowledge and it helps the lawyers in understanding the practises and procedures of court in a better manner and also gives the experience that a lawyer can use while practising law in the Supreme Court of India. 

Gain knowledge and practical experience

After you have successfully completed your initial years of practise at the subordinate courts or in the High Court, you can move forward and work under a Supreme Court advocate as a trainee or junior lawyer. By doing this, you will get to know all the important insights of Supreme Court practice and you will also get to know how Supreme Court lawyers deal with their cases. In short it will take around six years to start your practice in the Supreme Court of India.

Qualify the Advocate on Record (AOR) exam

An Advocate on Record is a special category of lawyer in the Supreme Court of India, only these lawyers in India have the authority to plead in the Supreme Court of India on behalf of their clients. Every year the Supreme Court of India conducts this exam for all the lawyers who wish to practise in the Supreme Court of India. This particular test is conducted to check the skills, knowledge and calibre of the lawyers and whether they are fit or not to practise in the court of highest authority of India. After the lawyer or the candidate successfully clears the Advocate on Record exam he is qualified to practise law in the Indian Supreme Court, and he will also be registered as an Advocate on Record member in the Supreme Court Bar Association.

Holding an office

Once the candidate successfully clears the Advocate on Record exam, it becomes mandatory for him to hold an office within 10 miles from the premises of the Supreme Court of India and he is also required to appoint a registered office clerk at his office. Once he has complied with all the formalities, he will be appointed as an Advocate on Record by the Judge of the Supreme Court. 

Practising law in the Supreme Court of India

Once you are done with all the above mentioned things, such as you have qualified the AOR exam, you have established an office within the premises of the Supreme Court, you are all set to practise independently in the court of highest authority and represent their clients and take up cases according to your speciality in the field of law. 

Categories of Supreme Court lawyers as per Advocates Act, 1961 and the Supreme Court Rules, 2013

The legal profession has always been considered as one of the most noble professions and lawyers of the Supreme Court are considered as the pillars of justice in society as they practise law in the Apex Court of the country. The Advocates Act, 1961 contains rules and regulations concerning lawyers of India and also contains their rights and duties. These rules provide the methods for practice and procedure to be followed in the Supreme Court. The above statutory act does not clearly demarcate types of lawyers, but through a bare perusal of the act following types of lawyers have been described.

The Advocates Act has made a provision for distinction between Senior advocates and other advocates. While the Supreme Court Rules, 2013 has made provisions for Advocate on Record. 

  • Senior Advocates- Section 16 of the Advocates Act, 1961 create two classes of lawyers i.e. Senior advocate and other Advocates. The Supreme Court or the High Court may, with the consent of the advocate, designate him/her as a senior advocate if in the opinion of the court, the concerned advocate has required ability, special knowledge or experience in law and he deserves to be designated as such. It is necessary for a senior advocate to appear in the Court with an Advocate on Record in the Supreme Court. Many great advocates have been designated as Senior advocates in the Supreme Court such as Late Shri Fali S Nariman, Late Shri P.P. Rao, Shri K.K Venugopalan etc. These lawyers have left a mark in legal history due to their immense knowledge. The designation of  a Senior Advocate in the Supreme Court is of immense glory and respect in the society and only few deserving advocates are designated as Senior Advocates. 
  • Advocate on Record- It is not a designation given by any court rather one becomes AOR only after passing the AOR exam conducted by the Supreme Court. In order to sit in the exam there are certain eligibility criteria that one has to fulfil. The exam consists of 4 papers and the exam is conducted every year. Not all the practising lawyers in the Supreme Court can file any  document or a Vakalatnama, and only Advocates on Record have the entitlement to file these. Thus, AORs have great value in the Supreme Court as the ordinary advocates cannot file any document in the Court without the help of an AOR. 
  • Other Advocates- Other Advocates are the normal advocates with no special designation. They are usually enrolled as advocates under the Bar Council of any state maintained under the Advocates Act, 1961. In any other court except for the Supreme Court of India, they can appear, argue and file any document, however in the Supreme Court, these lawyers can only argue and cannot file any document or matter before the court. These lawyers are usually referred to as junior advocates in normal parlance. 

Eligibility criteria to become an Advocate-on-Record (AOR)

There are various eligibility criteria that a lawyer needs to follow and comply with in order to become an Advocate on Record in the Supreme Court of India. All the eligibility criteria that a lawyer needs to follow are mentioned under Rules 4 and 5 under Order IV of the Supreme Court Rules, 2013, and the eligibility criteria are as follows:

  • Under the Order IV, it is mentioned that any lawyer who is not a senior advocate, if he fulfils all the conditions that are mentioned in Rule 5, can get himself registered in the Supreme Court of India as an Advocate on Record. Provided that notwithstanding anything that is mentioned under the Rule 5, any lawyer who has already got his name registered with the Registrar as an Advocate on Record can immediately get himself enrolled as an AOR before 8th of September, 1962.
  • Any lawyer who wants to become an Advocate on Record should have a practise of minimum four years as an advocate. Basically his name should be registered under any state bar council for that particular period of time.
  • The lawyer who wants to become an Advocate on Record is required to train under an already existing Advocate on Record for a period of one year. Once he completes his training for a period of one year he will have to appear for the Advocate on Record examination.
  • After the lawyer successfully excels in the Advocate on Record examination, it is mandatory for him to establish his personal office within a radius of ten miles from the premisses of the Supreme Court, and he has followed all these eligibility criterias the judge of the Indian Supreme Court will accept him as a qualified Advocate on Record.
  • The lawyer who wished to become an Advocate on record must be enrolled with any of the state bar councils.
  • Senior lawyers of the Supreme Court can not become an Advocate on Record.

How to practise as an Advocate-on-Record (AOR) in India

An Advocate on Record in the Indian Supreme Court is a legal professional who is registered in the Supreme Court of India, and is eligible to plead on behalf of their clients in front of the Supreme Court. Advocate on Record plays a very crucial role in the legal proceedings of the Supreme Court. There are various procedures that a lawyer needs to perform and various requirements that a lawyer needs to fulfil in order to practise as an Advocate on Record in the Supreme Court of India. They are as follows:

  • Registration- First and the most important thing that a lawyer needs to do in order to practise as an Advocate on Record is to get himself registered with the Supreme Court of India.
  • Eligibility- To become an Advocate on Record, a lawyer also needs to fulfil certain eligibility criteria. such as, he must have practised at the bar for a minimum period of four years and he should have also cleared the Advocate on Record examination conducted by the supreme court of India. 
  • Rights and responsibilities- Becoming an Advocate on record is not an easy task, and once a lawyer clears the Advocate on record examination, he is required to perform various responsibilities during his tenure as an Advocate on record. The main responsibilities of an advocate on record is filing and drafting various applications and petitions, and various other legal documents, as well as representing their clients before the Indian Supreme Court. Advocate on Records are the only legal professionals who are eligible to argue in the supreme court.
  • Expertise- In order to have a successful practice in the Supreme Court of India, an Advocate on Record is required to have expertise on all the legal matters and subjects and he must also be well-versed with all the legal procedures and functioning of the Supreme Court. 
  • Advocate on Record Examination- Every year the Supreme Court of India conducts an Advocate on Record examination to elect the eligible lawyers to become a Advocate on Record. This examination is a very rigorous and competitive one and passing it is not easy for all the lawyers. In this examination lawyers are asked various practical questions, and through these questions the knowledge of the candidate is checked.
  • Client representation- One of the most important work of an Advocate on Record is to  represent their clients and defend them in front of the Supreme Court. The Advocate on Record plays a very crucial role in making sure that all the necessary documents and procedures are followed properly and accurately.  
  • Importance of an Advocate on Record- The Advocate on Record plays a very significant role in the Indian legal system, this is because they are instrumental in pursuing and initiating various legal actions in the Indian Supreme Court, the court with the highest authority in India.

Becoming an Advocate on Record is a very prestigious job in the Indian legal system and especially in the Supreme Court of India and this profession requires a deep understanding of the courts procedure and practises and a high level experience of legal matters. 

If you want to know all about the Advocate on Record examination and how to successfully crack the exam, then click on this link.

What does a Supreme Court lawyer do

The lawyers of the Supreme Court play a very pivotal and critical role in shaping the legal decisions that have far-reaching implications on all the parts of our country. The impact of Supreme Court lawyers is evident through all the cases in which they represent their clients and argue before the court of highest authority, influencing not only the interests of individuals but also setting precedents that guide the future rulings or cases.

One of the key aspects of the influence of a Supreme Court lawyer lies in their skill and ability to present strong persuasive arguments that are grounded in the Constitutional principles and legal precedent. Lawyers extensively research and analyse all the relevant and landmark case laws, Constitutional provisions, statutes to develop a strong foundation for all their arguments. The lawyers of the Indian Supreme Court craft compelling narratives to convince the judges of the position of their clients, often relying on the deep and extensive understanding of legal policies and doctrines. 

The Supreme Court lawyers also have a responsibility of presenting diverse perspectives on various complex legal issues. These lawyers advocate for justice by representing their clients from all kinds of backgrounds and interests, making sure that all the voices of the country are heard during deliberations. This inclusivity strengthens the democracy of the Indian Judicial system while making more well-rounded and reasonable decisions. 

One of the other most important roles of a Supreme Court lawyer is to create social changes in the society by choosing which case they will take on their own or pro bono. Lawyers have the power to address all systemic injustices or champion the rights of marginalised communities. 

The Advocate on Records not only represents their clients in the court of highest authority but they also safeguard the interest of all the citizens of India by fighting for a good cause. Other than arguing before the Supreme Court of India, these lawyers also play a very important behind the scenes role, such as drafting amicus briefs supporting certain positions or providing expert advice on various complex legal matters. Through all these contributions, these lawyers provide valuable insights into various intricate areas of law that may escape scrutiny otherwise. 

Skills required to become a successful Supreme Court lawyer

There are various skills that a Supreme Court lawyer must have in order to establish a successful career. Some of the most important skills are listed below.

  • Networking: Networking is one of the most crucial things in the life of a lawyer. The reason that most lawyers put a lot of emphasis on developing networking skills is because they know that in the field of law, networking is more useful than knowledge. Networking can get you clients and will help you build your reputation. In short, networking will build your whole career if you use it wisely. Make sure to connect with all the seniors in your field and make a strong connection with them.
  • Stay updated: It is very essential for a lawyer to remain updated with all the rules and procedures of the Supreme Court and along with that you should also have an in-depth knowledge about the recent legislations, amendments and case developments. If you do so you can assist your clients in time and help them solve their legal issues. 
  • Legal research: Lawyers are required to do a lot of research work on various complex issues, thus, it is extremely important for a lawyer to develop extraordinary research skills. Having good legal research skills can save you a lot of time in dealing with complex cases. 
  • Drafting and writing skills: Every lawyer is required to have excellent writing and drafting skills in order to become a successful lawyer. Similarly, if you want to have a successful career in the Supreme Court and you want to excel there, then make sure to polish your drafting skills that are commonly used in the Supreme Court. Draftings are a very crucial element in the field of law thus, having proficiency in it can help you a lot in establishing a successful career in law.

How to develop an independent practice in the Supreme Court

Establishing an independent law practice is not an easy task, that is because there are numerous challenges that a lawyer needs to face while establishing his independent practice in the Supreme Court of India, challenges such as financial burden and lack of clients are of biggest concern. Independent legal practice means making solo decisions, self sufficiency, self assessment, self management etc. everything on your own.

If you want to become an Independent lawyer in the Supreme Court of India, then you must prepare yourself before you leave your senior. Strategic planning and proper implementation of plans is very crucial when establishing an independent practice. Here are a few things that you must keep in your mind while going for an independent practice of law in the Supreme Court of India.

  • Strategic planning: Strategic planning is one of the most crucial things for a lawyer when switching to an independent practise of law. Make a plan of saving money that you can use in the initial days of your independent practice, because there is a probability that you won’t be earning enough money to sustain yourself in the initial days of your independent practice if you are a new lawyer. Thus, prepare a plan on how you will establish your career and what steps you will take to procure the clients and how you will build your reputation in the legal field, everything must be pre-planned. If you do not have a proper plan then there is a possibility that your independent practice is not going to flourish.
  • Work under a senior lawyer who has an independent practice: Before you establish your independent practice of law in the Supreme Court of India make sure that you work under a Senior Advocate. Take up independent briefs of the lawyer and try to take additional work from which you can earn and save extra money for your future. By doing this you will get an idea of how things are and how things work in an independent practice. Make sure to gather valuable insights from the senior lawyer during the tenure you work under them, by doing this you will gain extra practical knowledge and you will be able to establish a successful career in law. One more important thing that you must do is to establish a good connection with your senior so that he can help you in your future.
  • Having a good mentor: It is very important for a lawyer who is establishing his independent practice of law in the Supreme Court of India to have a good mentor. Most of the lawyers who have good mentors never fail in their practice because their mentors save them from making mistakes that they have made during their practice. There is a common misconception among all the lawyers that they want to become self-made lawyers without having any mentor or godfather, but that is not the case. Having a good mentor can benefit you in numerous ways. Always try to learn as much as possible from your mentors and seniors, it is not necessary that you follow the same path as them but you can gain some additional knowledge and experience from them, it’s just that you will have someone to guide and you will be able to prevent yourself from any unnecessary problems. If you have a good mentor then he can also help you in procuring clients as well.
  • Build your own brand: When establishing an independent practice of law the most important and crucial thing that a lawyer needs to do is to build a brand and reputation among all the legal professionals in the Supreme Court of India. Being a lawyer you can’t do any kind of advertisement in order to promote yourself or to build a brand because lawyers are restricted from doing any kind of advertisement in India. You can create your brand through delivering exceptional services to your clients, by being consistent and dealing with high stake matters. 
  • Networking: Networking is a very crucial element in the field of law, it is necessary for all the legal professionals to have a strong network consisting of senior lawyers, mentors and other eminent personalities. Having strong networking skills can be a game changer for all the lawyers who want to establish a successful independent practice in the Supreme Court of India because if you have strong networking skills then you will get plenty of clients without any struggle. You can create a strong network through linkedIn, connect with the pioneers of your field and have a conversation with them, making sure that you leave a good impact on them. LinkedIn is one of the most useful tools that a lawyer can use for building his network. 
  • Select your niche area: Finding and selecting a particular niche area in the initial days of your independent practice is very crucial for all the lawyers who want to have a successful career in the Supreme Court of India. Rather than dealing with all kinds of issues it would be ideal for you to stick to two or three particular areas of practice and build your expertise in those fields. It is better to become a master of one than becoming a jack of all trades because if you become a jack of all trades then you will have knowledge in multiple areas of law but expertise in none. Focusing on certain specific areas will help you in reducing your competition and it also increases your efficiency in your area of law. There are also high chances that you will get new clients through referrals from other advocates who don’t deal into that field of practice. 

What is the roadmap to develop a Supreme Court practice

Most of the Indian lawyers don’t know the roadmap they need to follow in order to establish a successful Supreme Court practice. One of the most common mistakes that they make is getting stuck at the knowledge level and assuming that the rest of the things will fall into line automatically over time, but that is not the case. Most of the lawyers don’t focus on developing new skills and they just get stuck with the books and bare acts. Skills are extremely critical for all the lawyers and having only theoretical knowledge is not enough. 

It is suggested for all the new and budding lawyers who want to establish a successful practice in the Supreme Court of India to work with senior advocates, AORs and other organisations to learn more and get more practical knowledge. Publish articles related to the common issues that most of the clients face in the Supreme Court. After this, you must outreach to various people who you think might need your services, similarly reach out to principal associates, partners, AORs and other potential clients and check whether they need your services or not. 

Roadmap for lawyers with an experience of 4 years or more

  • If you are a senior lawyer or you have a practice of four or more than forty years in the field of law and you want to move to the Supreme Court, then your time for preparation is now. Make sure to aim for the latest AOR exam that is going to happen and make a plan and study accordingly. 
  • Along with your exam preparation make sure to build your track record by helping all the other Advocate on Records and senior advocates at the Supreme Court in a remote manner, assisting them mainly in drafting and research work.
  • Develop skills such as arbitration and corporate litigation to help your clients, as in the Supreme Court these skills are in great demand.
  • Start reaching out to all the startups who are at their initial stage and network with them and provide your services to them and create a good reputation.

Roadmap for lawyers with an experience of less than 4 years

  • If you are a lawyer who has just started his career and has an experience of less than four years in the field of law, then you have a longer period of time to prepare for the examination, and this gives you an advantage to prepare for the examination in a more planned and systematic manner.
  • Focus more on developing your skills and make sure to track your record for corporate litigation. Reach out to all the startups and help them with drafting contracts, compliances and various other initial works. This is one of the best ways to develop trust and could hold the key to gaining a lot of your own clients and more matters of arbitration and litigation in the coming next few years.
  • The main goal in the life of a lawyer is to build a position of trust with his clients and make sure that he safeguard their interest and represent them successfully in the court. You can build a  good track record and reputation if you help your client in resolving his disputes. After that, you can start charging and the clients will happily pay you after looking at your track record.
  • Ideally, the goal of a new lawyer should be to go independent as soon as possible, if you are working under a senior lawyer then this can take you around six months. Once you start earning around thirty thousand to fifty thousand rupees per month, you can build the confidence to do this. 
  • Start the preparation for AOR exam in your initial days and make sure to focus on key topics such as drafting, practice and procedure of Supreme Court etc. You can assist AOR’s who are already well established in the Supreme Court with drafting and research work and earn from there too.
  • Double down on the AOR exam preparation as the exam draws near.
  • Once you qualify the AOR exam and get registered as an official AOR in the Supreme Court of India, you can earn additional money from all the Supreme Court matters, higher payments in district/High Courts and you can then charge even more. If you are a successful AOR in the Supreme Court then you can easily earn up to two lakh rupees per month.
  • Plus, if you want to then you can establish your own law firm. If you build a brand and good reputation in the legal field, then most of the law firms will also want to hire you as a partner of their firm in order to expand their litigation practice.

Roadmap for college students

If you are a college student and want to work as a Supreme Court lawyer then, these are things that you must follow for a successful career.

  • Focus more on corporate litigation and assist startups in India that are in their initial stage. Make sure to work under AOR’s as interns and assist them in research and drafting work.
  • Even if you are a law student who has recently graduated, then also you must work under an AOR as you will get to learn a lot of valuable insights.
  • If you are a college student then make sure to do long-term internships in your internships break. Intern after your class hours as well if you have a flexible time table that allows you to do so. You can intern under lawyers who deal with matters of real estate, NCLT, arbitration, tax matters and various other high stakes matters, etc.
  • Keep yourself updated with all rules and procedures of the Supreme Court.
  • Determine if you want to become an AOR then, make sure to prepare for the AOR examination from the beginning because it is not an easy exam.
  • You can get some opportunities to represent your startup clients in arbitration and other commercial matters if they face any such issue. If you are able to help them, then you will build a good reputation in front of them and you will also get a good stipend amount. You can also get opportunities to file Special Leave Petitions as well and you will also get an opportunity to brief your seniors and partners and get experience of arguing yourself.

How to practise as a young lawyer in the Supreme Court

There are various young lawyers in India who want to become a Supreme Court lawyer, but they don’t know that becoming a successful Supreme Court lawyer in India requires a lot of planning and preparation. There are various parameters that are meant to be followed by a lawyer in order to practise in the Supreme Court of India.

In case of a new and young lawyer who has recently started his practise in the Supreme Court of India, he must have a practise of one year under a Advocate on record. It is given in the Certificate of Practice and Renewal Rules, 2014 issued by the Bar Council of India and it lays down certain conditions that are needed to be taken into concern and only after that a lawyer can be enrolled in the Supreme Court of India and continue his practice thereafter. There are various other conditions that must be also followed. 

  • For all the young and new lawyers who are yet to be registered at the Supreme Court of India, must have a post qualification experience of about 5 years which must be inclusive of 3 years of litigation practice in any trial court and two years in any of the High Court. Only after all these requirements are fulfilled the lawyer is supposed to appear in training conducted by the AOR.
  • All the individuals who want to become a Supreme Court lawyer must clear the examination conducted by the Board of Examiners under the governance and regulation of the Supreme Court. Once this examination is cleared, the lawyer is supposed to hold a register office which must be situated within ten miles from the location of the Supreme Court. The office of the lawyer must be accompanied by a registered clerk. 

If you want to know more about the AOR examination and other important details related to it then click here.

Issues and challenges faced by young lawyers in the Supreme Court

There is a lot of competition and politics in the field of law. Especially the young lawyers who come to practise law in the Supreme Court of India face a lot of issues in their initial days of practise. It is not an easy task to sustain and build a successful career in the field of law, especially in the Supreme Court. Some of the issues that are commonly faced by most of the young lawyers in practising law at Supreme Court are:

  • Economic issues: This is one of the greatest concerns for all the young lawyers who want to establish their independent practice of law in the Supreme Court of India. In the Initial stage all the young lawyers have to struggle a lot in order to find clients and any kind of independent work. In litigation especially in the Supreme Court there are various big players with brand value and strong recognition who rule over the legal field and all the clients want to avail their services and none of the clients trust new lawyers. In such cases, it becomes extremely difficult for all the young lawyers to survive in such an atmosphere.
  • Legal Issues: Indian laws are extremely vast and old. There have been various amendments in several statutes and still there are a lot of loopholes that need to be fixed, which means more amendments are required. The young lawyers aim to bring in a change in the legal system, adjusting and applying the old and existing laws have become difficult for the young lawyers.
  • Financial constraints: Starting a law career can be extremely financially challenging for all the young lawyers. Many young lawyers struggle to make their ends meet and earn money that could help them in fulfilling their basic needs, especially in the initial years of the practice. Unpaid internships and low-paying internships are also very common and it makes it even more difficult to cover the expenses of law school, such as rent, student loans, and daily living costs. 
  • Ethical dilemmas: Young advocates often face various ethical dilemmas that are extremely challenging to navigate. Such as winning cases, meeting all the deadlines, and pleasing their clients and these things sometimes collide with their ethical standards. Upholding the professional ethics is paramount, but it can become extremely difficult in the face of competing demands.

Conclusion

Almost hundreds and thousands of lawyers graduate every year in India with a dream to become one of the best Supreme Court lawyers, but they don’t know how and when to start and what all challenges and hurdles that they will have to go through in this journey. Becoming a successful Supreme Court lawyer is not an easy task, and in order to achieve this, a lot of hardwork and dedication is required. Roadmap to a successful practise in the Supreme Court starts from your initial days of practise and you need to determine your field of expertise so that you can build your experience and gain enough knowledge in that field.

Here in this article, the author has highlighted all the necessary things that a lawyer needs to do in order to have a successful practice of law in the Supreme Court. The author has also talked about how young lawyers can become successful lawyers and what are the challenges that they will face in their journey. If you follow all the things that are mentioned in this article then you will surely be able to make a smooth pass for your career as a successful Supreme Court lawyer.

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)

Is there any particular exam that one has to give to become a Supreme Court lawyer?

Although, there is no particular exam for determining eligible advocates who can practise in the Supreme Court, legal aspirants must pass the bar examination conducted by different states to become an advocate to practise in the Supreme Court. 

Can I start practising in the Supreme Court right after completing my LLB?

Yes, you can easily start your practice in the Supreme Court right after you complete your LLB, however, you will have to pass the Bar examination conducted by the Bar Council of India. It is always advised to fresh law graduates to start their practice in the Supreme Court as a junior lawyer to some experienced Supreme Court advocate who has a good clientele and connections. This will help the fresh graduates to garner connections and expose them to quality work which will definitely help them in building their own practice. 

How should law students prepare for AOR exams conducted by the Supreme Court, in order to crack it at first attempt?

The Board of Examiners of the Supreme Court conducts AOR examination every year in New Delhi. The exam consists of four papers which are held for a period of three hours each. As mentioned above, the papers include, Practice and Procedure, Advocacy and Professional Ethics, Drafting and Case Laws. The eligibility criteria for giving AOR examination is that, candidates must have a practice of at least 4 years, newly fresh graduates cannot give AOR examination. However, if you want you can start reading for the subjects from your law school days only. Ideally if you give six months of time to prepare for this examination, you can easily crack this examination. 

What are the skills that I will need to become a Supreme Court Lawyer?

There is no special skill set that Supreme Court Lawyers need, but there are certain skills that every lawyer needs to become a good practitioner. These skills include, logical reasoning, critical analysis, speaking skills, time management, communication skills. As you will gain experience as a practitioner, your skills will keep on polishing. These skills are essential for any lawyer and one must try to improve them as much as possible. 

Can any lawyer file documents in the Supreme Court?

No, not any lawyer can file documents like Vakalatnama or other such documents in the Supreme Court. Only Advocate on record is eligible to file such documents in the Supreme Court. The ordinary lawyers of the Supreme Court can only make arguments and present before the judges. 

How much does a Supreme Court Lawyer earn in a year?

Supreme Court lawyers or any lawyer for that matter do not get a fixed monthly salary per month, and their salary depends on case to case basis. And lawyers take fees from their clients for each hearing. When it comes to junior lawyers, they are paid regularly by the senior lawyers, in whose chamber the juniors practice. But the payment given to junior lawyers isn’t very high, ranging from rs 15000/- per month to anywhere around rs 35000/- to rs 40000/- per month (depending on the skills of lawyers). The senior lawyers or experienced lawyers of the Supreme Court take anywhere around rs. 40,000/- to even  3-6 lacs per hearing. Senior lawyers even charge rs. 15,00,000/- per hearing. 

Does cracking the bar examination require a lot of studying?

Bar examinations are comparatively easier to any other competitive exams that lawyers give. If you have been attentive in your law school and you understand the basic concepts of all the subjects, you will easily be able to pass the Bar examination. Another good point with bar examinations is that they are open book examinations, so you can easily look up the section’s number in case you forget any. 

Is there a difference between a lawyer and an advocate?

Though the words lawyer and advocate are used interchangeably by common people, there is a difference between them. A lawyer is any person who has graduated from law school and got his LLB degree, however, an advocate is a person who has passed the bar examination of India. Only an advocate can act as a legal representative in the court of law and general lawyers who have not passed the bar examination cannot act as legal representative. Thus, every advocate is a lawyer but not all lawyers are advocates. 

How can I establish my own practice in the Supreme Court?

If you are still a school student and you want to become a Supreme Court lawyer in the future, the first and foremost thing that you must do to start your practice is to enrol in a law school recognised by the Bar Council of India. After completing your degree, you may give the bar examination and become an advocate. And soon after, you must join the chamber of some senior advocate in the Supreme Court to gain experience and knowledge. You can also give the AOR examination as, AOR lawyers in the Supreme Court have much greater value. After becoming an AOR you shall continue your practise with the senior lawyer and gain as many connections as possible. The only way to get a good clientele is through connections. In this article we have mentioned the roadmap to become a Supreme Court lawyer in an exhaustive manner.

Is there any benefit of becoming an AOR?

Yes, definitely there are many benefits of passing the AOR examination. It is not an easy examination and requires top notch preparation and that’s why AOR holds value that ordinary Supreme Court lawyers don’t have. Any client will automatically prefer an AOR for his case in comparison to ordinary lawyers. Most AORs even charge higher than the ordinary lawyers, so there is the advantage of earning more than ordinary lawyers. Apart from that, there are certain Delhi based firms that only give their cases to AORs. Thus, the benefits of becoming an AOR are endless and if you are planning to become a Supreme Court lawyer, you must also consider giving the AOR examination. 

What is the earnings of an AOR?

As mentioned above, lawyers do not have a fixed salary and the earnings of an AOR may vary from case to case or even client to client. But according to a report that was given by the Bar Council of India in 2021 on salaries of advocates, the average annual income of Advocate on Record was approximately calculated around INR 20 lakhs to INR 50 lakhs varying on the basis of seniority, connections and experience.  

What is the most useful piece of advice for a young lawyer who wants to establish his career in the Supreme Court?

One of the most important and best pieces of advice for a young lawyer who wants to practise law in the Supreme Court is to save as much money as you can before entering in this field. Saving money is the most important things for a young lawyer and this is because most of the lawyers in their initial days of the practise in the Supreme Court don’t get any clients and eventually they don’t earn any money, thus it is very important for a young lawyer to save extra money to sustain oneself in his initial days of practise,

Who is a senior advocate in the Supreme Court?

Any lawyer who has been practising in the Supreme Court for a long period of time, can suggest his name to the Supreme Court to be designated as a Supreme Court lawyer. The Supreme Court after looking into the experience, skills, knowledge and ability of the lawyer may designate him as a senior advocate if in the eyes of the committee such a lawyer is fit for it. There are certain requirements and criterias that a lawyer needs to fulfil in order to get the designation of a senior advocate, click here to read the criterias. 

What is the salary of an Advocate on Record?

The salary of an Advocate on Record depends upon their years of practise and experience in the field of law. Any experienced Advocate on Record who has successfully dealt with various cases in the Supreme Court and has a good reputation can easily earn up to fifty to sixty lakh rupees per year.

What is the difference between an AOR and a senior advocate?

Both the AOR and a senior advocate work in the Supreme Court and deal with the cases of the Supreme Court but they are not the same. In order to become an AOR a lawyer needs to qualify the Advocate on Record exam conducted by the Supreme Court, and to become a senior advocate a lawyer needs to fulfil certain criterias required by the Supreme Court in order to get the designation of a senior advocate. A senior advocate can not plead and argue in the Supreme Court whereas an AOR is the only legal professional who can argue and plead in front of the Supreme Court.

What is the salary of a senior advocate?

Similarly like an AOR, the salary of a senior advocate also depends upon their years of practise, reputation and trust among the clients. A successful supreme court lawyer can easily earn up to thirty to forty lakh rupees in a year.

References


Students of Lawsikho courses regularly produce writing assignments and work on practical exercises as a part of their coursework and develop themselves in real-life practical skills.

LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals, and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:

https://t.me/lawyerscommunity

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content.

Download Now

Indian lawyers guide to cracking Supreme Court Advocate on Record (AOR) exam

1
aor

This article is written by Ashutosh. It is an exhaustive guide that deals with the Supreme Court AOR exam and all essential information related to this exam such as the eligibility criteria, syllabus, exam pattern, significance, duties of an AOR, benefits of becoming an AOR, process, earnings, tips, and strategies to clear the exam and some FAQs.

It has been published by Rachit Garg.

Table of Contents

Introduction

Advocate on Record, also known as AOR, is a very prestigious profession in the field of law, they are advocates of the Supreme Court and hold a higher position than any other advocate who works in district or high courts.  In this article, we will be dealing with everything related to the AOR exam such as its syllabus, eligibility criteria, benefits of becoming an AOR, previous question papers, etc. 

The Supreme Court of India introduced the AOR system while framing Rule 2, Rule 4, and Rule 6 of the Supreme Court Rules 1966. All the Advocates of the Supreme Court are not AOR, AORs are some special advocates who can plead on behalf of their clients in front of the Supreme Court and are elected through a special examination. The AOR examination consists of four different papers namely, drafting, Supreme Court procedures, professional ethics and the leading and landmark cases, and each of these papers consists of 100 marks. We will be reading in detail about the syllabus and other important stuff further in this article.

Who is an Advocate on Record (AOR)

As per Article 145(1) of the Indian Constitution, the Supreme Court has the power and authority to make rules and regulations with the approval of the President and subject to any Parliamentary law for regulating the procedures and practices of the court, which also includes provisions related to persons practising in the court.  

According to Chapter IV of the Supreme Court Rules, 2013, only an Advocate on Record or AOR can appear or plead on behalf of a party in front of the Supreme Court. But if there is any instruction given by the Supreme Court then in such a case an advocate other than the AOR can also appear in front of the court. Interestingly, every lawyer who practises in the Supreme Court is not an AOR, there are certain conditions and an exam that lawyers need to clear and fulfil in order to become an AOR.

In order to become an AOR, an advocate is required to clear the Advocate on Record examination that is conducted by the Supreme Court itself. The exam that is being conducted is a highly competitive exam and covers a wide range of topics such as criminal law, civil law and also procedural law. 

All the qualified AORs are registered with the Supreme Court of India, and they are assigned a unique code, each AOR gets a personal unique code. The AORs are also required to maintain their chambers at the premises of the Supreme Court of India. 

AOR plays a very important role in the Indian judiciary and in the Indian legal system, and they are also responsible for the smooth and efficient functioning of the Supreme Court. All the AORs also play an important role in safeguarding the rights and interests of their clients and making sure that every one of them gets justice. 

Eligibility criteria to become an Advocate on Record (AOR)

The Supreme Court of India in it’s Order IV under Rule IV and V has prescribed all the eligibility criterias to become an AOR, and they are as follows:

Rule IV:

  • Any advocate who is not a senior advocate may on fulfilling all the conditions that are laid down in rule 5, can get himself registered in the Court as an AOR. Provided that notwithstanding anything that is contained under rule 5, any advocate whose name is already registered with the Registrar as an AOR immediately before the date of 8th September, 1962 shall be registered as an AOR.

Rule V:

  • The candidate who wants to become an AOR  must have a practice of at least 4 years as an advocate. That means his name to be borne on the roll of any State Bar Council for that period.
  • The candidate needs to tell the Supreme Court that he or she has started working and training with a senior advocate on the record because he wants to become an AOR.
  • After the training of one year under the AOR, the candidate has to appear for the advocate on record examination conducted by the Supreme Court of India.
  • After the candidate successfully clears the advocate on record exam, he/she must establish an office within a radius of ten miles from the building of the Supreme Court, and after he has done all these things the judge of the Supreme Court will accept him as an AOR.
  • The advocate must be enrolled with any of the State Bar Council.
  • The advocate who wants to become an AOR must not be a senior advocate

Duties of an Advocate on Record (AOR)

There are various duties that an advocate needs to carry out once he has qualified for the AOR exam. Some of the main jobs and duties of the Advocate on Record are listed below:

  • Representing clients in the Supreme Court- The main and the most important job that an advocate on record performs is to represent their client until and unless he is asked by the AOR to do so, and only an AOR can file a vakalatnama in the Supreme Court of India, they have the exclusive right to conduct the cases in the Supreme Court of India. Rule 1 of the Order 4 of Supreme Court Rules provides that no advocate other than an AOR can appear in the Supreme Court of India and plead in any matter until and unless an AOR instructs him to do so. However, the court may, if it thinks desirable to do so for any reason, permit any person to appear and address the Court in a particular case.
  • Drafting all legal documents– Drafting legal documents is also one of the most important jobs that an Advocate on Record does, he is responsible, and he also drafts various legal documents such as applications, petitions, appeals, vakalatnama, Special Leave Petitions, writs, Curative petitions etc, and other important fillings that are to be submitted to the Supreme Court. 
  • Handling court procedures– The Advocate on Record should be well-versed and has enough knowledge of all the practise and procedures of the Supreme Court. They are responsible for navigating all the procedures of the court, adhering to all the rules and regulations, and they make sure that all the legal formalities of the court are also followed. An advocate can not handle the procedures of the Supreme Court, it is the AOR who handles all the court proceedings. 
  • Advocacy and argumentation- The Advocate on Record has a duty to present the legal arguments and advocate on behalf of their clients in front of the Supreme Court during the hearings. They are highly skilled in articulating legal points and also persuading the court to rule in favour of their clients.
  • Research and case preparation– A lot of time is spent by the AOR in researching and repairing their case so that they can fluently speak and defend their clients, so it is very necessary for all the AORs to do proper research and understand all the underlying issues in the case.
  • Interaction with clients– One of the most important jobs that an AOR does is interacting with the clients and providing correct legal advice to them and providing all the updates of the case to their clients. 
  • Compliance with the ethical standards– It is very necessary for all the AORs to make sure that they maintain and follow the ethical standards of the Supreme Court. They are required to maintain the legal integrity of their profession and adhere to the professional code of conduct.
  • Collaborating and networking with senior advocates- Most of the time, AORs work in collaboration with the senior advocates, who lead the arguments in the court. The AORs play an important role in supporting the senior advocates by handling all the procedural aspects and document preparation.
  • Case management- It is the primary duty of an AOR to manage the cases with full efficiency. They are required to keep a track of all the deadlines related to their case, filing requirements, and they also make sure that all the procedural steps of the case are carried out timely.
  • Remaining updated with all the legal changes– To perform their duties effectively, the AORs keep themselves updated with all the legal changes that occur and keep all the required knowledge that would help in dealing with the issues of their client.

Benefits of becoming an Advocate on Record (AOR)

Becoming an Advocate on Record is a very prestigious thing, and takes a lot of hard work and dedication towards law and its process and procedures. Since it is a challenging task, if you successfully crack it, you will be able to enjoy the various benefits of becoming an AOR. There are multiple benefits of becoming an AOR, and those benefits are as follows:

  • You will have a specialised and focused career, and you will be able to exclusively practise in the Supreme Court. This authorization of being an AOR gives them the ability to practise law exclusively in the Supreme Court.
  • Once you become an AOR, your earning potential is increased, and you will be able to charge more fees for your services. Typically, the fees charged by an AOR is higher than the fees of lawyers practising in lower courts.
  • Getting the designation of an AOR in the Supreme Court is a very esteemed title among all the legal professionals, that signals a level of prestige that every lawyer can not have. It is seen as a truly elite position among the lawyers.
  • The Supreme Court of India provides a national jurisdiction that allows legal representatives of advocacy to handle all the assorted lawsuits with huge national implications.
  • The AORs can practise all kinds of cases whether it be criminal and civil cases, public interest litigations or constitutional matters. Multiple career opportunities also become available after becoming an AOR, esteemed law firms look for AORs who can help them in litigation matters in the Supreme Court.
  • The Supreme Court gives an opportunity to all the AORs to grow intellectually through all the professional challenges in the field of law.
  • The facilities and all the resources of the Supreme Court Bar Association can be availed by those members who have gained admission through an AOR.
  • The AORs get access to the vast legal resources of the library of the Supreme Court, and they can use all these resources for doing their research. 
  • AORs play a very significant role in the development of the Indian legal system, and in the top court of the nation, they serve an indispensable duty in following the regulations of the legal system and in maintaining fairness.
  • AORs have a responsibility to maintain the rule of law and in the administration of justice.
  • Only a registered AOR can file a vakalatnama in the Supreme Court on behalf of the client. In any matter in the Supreme Court the AOR must be the sole advocate to plead and appear unless it is instructed otherwise.
  • The Special Leave Petition under Article 136 can only be filed in the Supreme Court, if an AOR issues a certificate for the same.

Earnings of an Advocate on Record (AOR)

The Supreme Court under Rules 2013, has prescribed a set of fees for filling the cases in the Supreme Court of India. However, the reality is not the same. For instance, the fees that are prescribed under the rules range between five thousand rupees to twenty-four thousand rupees to make drafts and appear before the Supreme Court. 

The AORs who are in practice, charge an amount of fifteen thousand to twenty thousand rupees for each case, just to sign on the vakalatnama or to file a petition. And if they perform any substantial drafting works the charges will be even more.

Generally, an AOR charges a minimum of twenty to twenty-five thousand rupees per case to draft a single petition in the supreme court, though in some cases where they are assisting an senior advocate then in such cases they may charge less. After the AORs have completed 3-4 years of experience, their fees also increase with their experience. They charge almost seventy five thousand to one lakh rupees for complex cases, and if the petitions are more complex they can also charge two lakh rupees. The charges for effective hearings are separate from these charges. Fifty thousand rupees is a common charge, senior advocates can charge up to one lakh rupees. 

These lawyers also charge for conferences such as meeting senior advocates or clients, therefore it is very easy for an AOR to earn almost twenty lakh rupees per year from the work of the Supreme Court even if you are not based in Delhi.

Significance of the Advocate on Record (AOR) exam

An advocate on record can file an affidavit, vakalatnama, and petition or any other application on behalf of the client that he is representing in the Supreme Court. All the process and procedural aspects of a case are to be dealt with the help of a clerk who is registered in the Supreme Court. An advocate on record is held responsible for the proper conduct of a case. An advocate on record is also entitled by the Supreme Court of India to practise anywhere in any court all around India, however if a lawyer wants to practise in the Supreme Court as an AOR then that person needs to have some additional qualifications as mentioned by the Supreme Court. The post of an advocate on record is based on the experience and knowledge of an advocate.

As the Supreme Court of India is the Apex Court of Appeals and the court of last resort in India, it has to deal with all kinds of subjects that evolve in front of it. It will be highly supportive if all these matters are dealt with by an advocate that is highly experienced and knowledgeable, and this is the main reason why the Advocate on Record exam is conducted and AORs are appointed.

How to become an Advocate on Record (AOR)

Read below to know more about the process of becoming an Advocate on Record.

  • In order to qualify and become Advocate on Record on Supreme Court, the applicants must necessarily fulfil all the qualifications and requirements mentioned in the rules of Supreme Court, 2013, mentioned under the Rule 5 Order IV
  • To successfully meet all the eligibility criteria, the applicant must complete one year of training with an Advocate on Record or a court approved representation of AOR and must also have a training of minimum 4 years in the legal field.
  • The applicant who wants to take the Advocate on Record examination must be eligible for it, and he/she can only be eligible if they obtain a minimum of 60% marks, that is 240 marks out of 400 marks. Other than this the applicant must obtain a minimum of fifty percent marks in all the subjects including drafting, procedure and practice, leading cases and professional ethics.
  • Every year around 250-300 lawyers pass this difficult exam and become certified AORs. Other than all these qualifications and conditions, the Advocate on Record must possess an office in Delhi within the radius of 16 kilometres from the Supreme Court of India, and after becoming an AOR the AOR must also appoint a registered clerk after one month of registration as an AOR.
  • After all the things are done and the AOR has its personal office and a registered clerk, he/she will get an unique identification number that must be present in all the documents submitted by the AOR to the Supreme Court.

What are the rules that govern the Advocate on Record (AOR) system in India

Rules that govern the advocate on record system in India are as follows:

  • The first rule is Section 30 of the Advocates Act 1961. This Section in India allows all the advocates and lawyers that are registered in the Bar Council to practise in any court in which they wish to practise in the country. 
  • Article 145 of the Indian Constitution gives certain powers to the Supreme Court Of India to make certain rules and regulations to regulate the proceedings of the court for all the case hearings that are going on.
  • CThe same system is found in the Indian legal system and is found in the legal history of India where a distinction is maintained between people who argue cases and those who handle clients.
  • In India the Senior advocates that are appointed by the Court , follow a same model where the barristers are engaged by the other advocates rather than soliciting the clients on their own.
  • The Supreme Court of India carefully adheres to all the historical traditions and processes in maintaining its rules and regulations for the registration of advocates.
  • Under the regulation number 11 (iv) of the regulations regarding the advocate on record examination, candidates will get five chances to appear for the AOR examination.

Process of Advocate on Record (AOR) exam application

The applicants who want to appear for the Advocate on Record’s examination must fill out the application in compliance with all the terms and conditions of the Supreme Court, the application form can be submitted through both online and offline modes. The terms and conditions for both the modes are different. Now let’s go through the application procedures.

Offline application procedure

  • Under Order IV and Rules 5 (i) of the Supreme Court Rules 2013 and Regulation 2 of the regulations relating to the AOR examination, the date of the AOR examination is provided in an official notice by the Supreme Court. 
  • All the lawyers and advocates who have completed their training for a period of one year starting from the end of the fourth year of the date of their enrolment ending that ends on 30th April 2023, or lawyers who will complete their training before the commencement of the AOR examination, will be eligible to sit in the aforesaid examination.
  • Applications made by the applications should reach the office of the secretary, and examiner’s board by 6th May, 2023. Offline application forms can be obtained from the office of the secretary on any of the working days during working hours. 
  • Acceptance to the application of an advocate is subject to the production of the requisite certificate of training from an AOR under regulation number 6 of the regulations regarding the AOR examination.
  • Under Regulation 11 (ii) of the regulations in regard to the AOR examination, any candidate who fails to appear in all the papers of the exam will not be allowed to appear in the next examination. The candidates who don’t appear in all the papers and also fail in those papers in which they have appeared shall be treated as having failed in all the papers in which they did not appear.

Instructions to fill online application form for the AOR exam

The aspirants who want to appear for the advocate on record examination can as an alternative to the submission of a hard copy of the application, also submit a scanned copy of the application form, along with all the required documents and the fees, through the mode of email. There are a few instructions which all the applicants must keep in mind while submitting the online application form, and those instructions are:

  • The applicants or the advocates who have completed or will complete their continuous training of one year commencing from the end of the fourth year of the date of their enrolment that ends on 30th April 2023, or will complete their training before the commencement of AOR examination, will be eligible to appear in the exam. Acceptance of this application that is submitted by the applicant is subject to the production of the requisite certificate of training from an AOR under Regulation 6 of the regulations regarding the AOR exam.
  • The application form should be filled legibly and should be also duly signed by the applicant-advocate.

This is what the application form looks like, you can get this application form from the official website of the Supreme Court. Scroll down to the last page and you will get it.

  • All the fields that are mentioned in the application form have to be filled by the applicant-advocate. And if any field is not applicable, then that should be struck out. No material information is to be concealed.
  • All the applicant forms that are not complete or are illegible will be directly rejected.
  • The applicant needs to paste one photograph at the top right side of the application form.
  • One self-attested and legible copy of the enrolment certificate has to be annexed to the application form.
  • The applicant who is filling out the application form must make sure that he/she is eligible to apply for the AOR examinations, i.e., they should have completed the mandatory training and had furnished prior intimation to this registry.
  • The applicant is required to submit the scanned copy of the duly filled application form along with a photograph fixed to the application form, and along with a self-attested copy of the enrolment certificate at the mail ID [email protected] on the prescribed date and time mentioned in the official notice.
  • After the application form is submitted the verification of all the documents and application form is done, and it is found out that the application form is correct and there is no default in the application form then the application will be accepted, and the applicant will be informed through an email thereafter he will be asked to deposit the examination fee of 750 rupees within a period of two days from the date of the receipt of the confirmatory email from the registry office. The applicant will be notified about the bank account to which he needs to submit the fees which shall include the account number, IFSC code and bank name. The applicant must keep in mind that while he is submitting the fees he must also mention his name in the column of remarks in the module of online payment. And it is compulsory for all the applicants to submit the prescribed fees within the timeframe of 2 days and in case if the applicant does not submit the fees then his application will be rejected.
  • After the applicant has submitted the fees, he is required to forward the hard copy of the following documents through courier or post. Documents such as: 
    • application form with a photograph
    • self-attested copy of enrolment certificate
    •  receipt of the payment of the prescribed fee
  • The final acceptance of this application form will be subject to the receipt of the hard copy of the application form. 

Advocate on Record (AOR) exam pattern 

The AOR examination is conducted by the Supreme Court in offline mode for a period of four days. The examination consists of a total of four papers of 100 marks each that are taken on the four days consecutively. Candidates have a total of 3 hours for each paper and the questions are of descriptive type. 

Particulars 

Description

Number of Papers

4 papers

Total Time duration of examination

3 hours for each paper

Number of days in which examination is conducted

4 days

Mode of examination

Offline mode

Type of examination

Descriptive type questions

Language of the examination

English

Total Marks

100 marks for each paper

Advocate on Record (AOR) exam result

Every year the Supreme Court of India releases the result of the AOR examination in their official website, in which the serial number, roll number and the name of the candidates who have qualified the AOR examination is mentioned. According to the passing criteria of the AOR exam all the candidates that have secured fifty percent marks in each subject and an aggregate of sixty percent are qualified to become an AOR.

Here below we have attached an image for better understanding, please refer to the same.

This is how the result window looks like, read below to learn how to check the AOR exam result.

How to check AOR exam result

Follow these simple steps to view the AOR exam result.

  • First thing that you need to do is to tap on this link.
  • Once you tap on the link you will be directed to a page where the serial number, name, and roll number of the qualified candidates will be mentioned. Refer to the image above for better clarity.
  • Once you reach the PDF scroll down the whole PDF that has opened and you can see all the names of qualified AOR exam candidates. 

Advocate on Record (AOR) exam syllabus

The syllabus of AOR examination consists of subjects from different areas of law such as civil law, criminal law, constitutional law and administrative law. The exam tests the theoretical knowledge of candidates in these areas of law and also tests their ability to apply the knowledge in different situations. The examination also tests the practical knowledge of the candidates through drafting questions, as they are required to draft pleadings and petitions. The four sets of papers are:

  1. Practice and procedure of Supreme Court;
  2. Drafting;
  3. Advocate and professional ethics;
  4. Leading cases and

Click on this link to view the official document released by the Supreme Court mentioning the AOR syllabus.

Syllabus for each paper in AOR examination

Paper I (Practise and Procedure of Supreme Court) 

For this paper. One must be well-versed with the important provisions of the Indian Constitution related to the jurisdiction of the Supreme Court. In addition to that, the important Acts/statutes to be studied are Supreme Court Rules and provisions of the Civil Procedure Code, 1908, the Limitation Act,1963 and General Principles of Court Fees Act, 1870. 

Paper II (Drafting)

The drafting paper includes the drafting of various petitions such as Special Leave Petition, statements of cases etc. It includes the following topics specifically:

  • Petitions for Special Leave and Statements of Cases, etc. 
  • Decree, petition for appeal, Orders and Writs etc. 
  • Plaint and Written Statement in a suit under Article 131 of the Constitution of India
  • Review petitions under Article 137 of the Constitution of India
  • Transfer Petitions under Section 25 of Civil Procedure Code, Article 139 of the Constitution of India and Section 406 of the Criminal Procedure Code 1973.
  • Contempt petitions under Article 129 of the Indian Constitution
  • Interlocutory application, including criminal miscellaneous petitions for bail
  • Condonation of delay
  • Exemption from surrender 
  • Application for revocation of special leave, etc.

Paper III (Advocacy and Professional Ethics)

This paper shall include questions on the following topics:

  1. The concept of the legal profession and other such questions on topics such as – the nature and purposes of the legal profession, the connection between morality and ethics and professional ethics in general including topics such as:- definitions, general principles, seven lamps of Advocacy, Public Trust Doctrine, the exclusive right to practise in court.
  2. History of the legal professions in India and the statutes that are relevant in historical development. 
  3. a. Laws governing the legal profession, and their relevance and scope. 
  1. Professional excellence and conduct
  2. Professional and criminal misconduct and its punishment under the Advocates Act and prescribed Code of Conduct. 
  3. Duty not to strike
  4. Rules regarding advertisement/solicitation
  5. a. Rules prescribed by the Bar Council of India regarding obligations and duties of the legal profession.
  1. Need to avoid sharp practices 
  2. commercialisation of the legal profession and the role of the Bar Council in promoting legal services as provided by the Indian Constitution. 
  3. Role of Bar Council in regulating ethics in the legal profession. 
  4. Standard of Professional Conduct and Etiquette as per Bar Council rules Chapter- II. 
  5. Different types of duties of an advocate, including the categories given in Bar Council rules. 
  6. Conflict between the kinds of duties and how can law help in resolving them. 
  7. Difference between the following:
  8. Misconduct, negligence, and breach of ethics.
  9. Misconduct and crime 
  1. A comparative study of the legal profession in different countries and the relevance of the profession with the Bar. 
  2. Different perspectives on the role of the legal profession in the Adversary system and criticism of the Adversary system. 
  3. Issues related to advocacy in criminal law adversarial system 
  4. a. Relationship of Lawyer-Client
  1. Confidentiality related rules and issues regarding conflict of interest.
  2. negotiation, mediation, and counselling and their importance in the justice system
  3. Ethical Consideration in Mediation
  4. Role of Amicus Curiae in Ethical Consideration
  1. Any recent developments in the organisation of the legal profession, legal firms, companies etc.
  2. A. Special role as advocates of the Supreme Court and its obligation in the administration of justice. 
  1. Adjournments
  2. Duties of AOR
  3. Supervisory role of Supreme Court
  4. Contempt of Courts 

Paper IV- (Leading Cases)

This paper shall include all the cases that are provided by the Supreme Court on its official website. The candidates need to go through these cases in detail. 

List of important leading cases

Case laws are one of the most important things on which an advocate must focus while preparing for the AOR exam. It is suggested for all the applicants to make sure that they read all the landmark cases and also make a list of all the cases that are frequently asked. Some of the most important and landmark cases that are asked in the AOR exam are as follows.

  • His Holiness Kesavananda Bharati v. State of Kerala (1973)
  • Maneka Gandhi v. Union of India (1978)
  • Minerva Mills Ltd and Ors v. Union of India and Ors (1981)
  • Sharad Birdhi Chand Sarda v. State of Maharashtra (1985)
  • AR Antulay v. R S Nayak and Anr (1988)
  • Kihoto Hollohan v. Zachillhu and Others (1992)
  • S R Bommai and Ors v. Union of India (1994)
  • Indra Sawhney and Ors v. Union of India and Ors (1992)
  • Vellore Citizens Welfare Forum v. Union of India and Ors (1996)
  • Mafatlal Industries Ltd v. Union of India (1996)
  • Githa Hariharan and Anr v. Reserve Bank of India and Anr (1999) 
  • Vishaka and Ors v. State of Rajasthan (1997)
  • Pradeep Kumar Biswas and Ors v. Indian Institute of Chemical Biology and Ors (2002)
  • Rupa Ashok Hurra v. Ashok Hurra and Anr (2002)
  • TMA Pai Foundation and Ors v. State of Karnataka and Ors (2002)
  • P Rama Chandra Rao v. State of Karnataka (2002)
  • Technip SA v. SMS Holding Pvt Ltd and Ors (2005)
  • P A Inamdar v. State of Karnataka (2004)
  • Rameshwar Prasad and Ors v. Union of India and Anr (2006)
  • SBP and Co v. Patel Engineering Ltd and Anr (2005)
  • IR Coelho Dead by LRs v. State of Tamil Nadu (2007)
  • State of West Bengal and Ors v. The Committee for Protection of Democratic Rights (2010)
  • Common Cause v. Union of India and Ors (2008)
  • Selvi and Ors v. State of Karnataka (2010)
  • Republic of Italy and Ors v. Union of India and Ors (2014)
  • Dr Balram Prasad v. Dr Kunal Saha and Ors (2013)
  • Novartis AG v. Union of India and Ors (2013)
  • Lalita Kumari v. Govt of UP and Ors (2013)
  • National Legal Services Authority v. Union of India and Ors (2014)
  • Kailash Nath Associates v. Delhi Development Authority and Anr (2015)
  • Supreme Court AOR Association and Anr v. Union of India (2015)
  • Shreya Singhal v. Union of India (2015)
  • Gujarat Urja Vikas Nigam Limited v. EMCO Limited and Ors (2016)
  • Union of India v. Sriharan (2015)
  • Excel Crop Care Limited v. Competition Commission of India and Another (2017)
  • Mukesh and Anr v. State for NCT of Delhi and Ors (2017)
  • Common Cause v. Union of India and Ors (2017)
  • Justice K S Puttaswamy and Anr v. Union of India and Ors (2017)
  • Shakti Vahini v. Union of India and Others (2018)
  • Municipal Corporation, Ujjain & Anr v. BVG India Limited and Ors (2018)
  • Navtej Singh johar & Ors v. Union of India the. Secretary ministry of law and justice (2018)
  • Joseph Shine v. Union of India (2018)
  • Jarnail Singh & others v. Lachhmi Narain Gupta & Others (2018)
  • Swiss Ribbons Pvt. Ltd. & Anr v. Union of India & Ors (2019)
  • Competition Commission of India v. Bharti Airtel Limited and Others (2018)
  • Ssangyong Engineering & Construction Co. Ltd v. National Highway Authority of India (NHAI) (2019)
  • Ashwani Kumar v. Union of India and Anr (2019)
  • Rojer Mathew v. South Indian Bank Ltd and Ors (2019)’
  • Committee of Creditors of Essar Steel v. Satish Kumar Gupta and Ors (2019)
  • Shanti Conductors Pvt Ltd v. Assam State Electricity Board and Ors (2019)
  • Keisham Meghachandra Singh v. The Hon’ble Speaker and Ors (2020)
  • Dheeraj Mor v. High Court of Delhi (2020)
  • Sushila Aggarwal and Ors v. State NCT of Delhi and Anr (2020)
  • Indore Development Authority v. Manoharlal (2020)
  • Madras Bar Association v. Union of India and Anr (2020)
  • Internet and Mobile Association of India v. RBI (2020)

How to prepare for the Advocate on Record (AOR) exam

If you want to clear the Advocate on Record examination, then the first and the most important thing that you should do is to familiarise yourself with the past years’ papers of the examination, as well as all the topics and subjects that are covered in this examination. Keep yourself updated with the exam pattern and the syllabus of the exam because these things are the must-do while preparing for your AOR examination. These things will give you an idea about the difficulty of the examination and what is the requirement of this examination, and then you can start your preparation accordingly.

While you go through the past years’ question papers of the examination, make sure that you make a list of all the important topics or most frequently asked topics in the examination, and give a little extra focus on those topics. Do your research and prepare extensively because this is not your common law school exam, it is one of the most prestigious posts in the legal field.  Read below to know all about the preparation for the AOR exam.

Study materials

Before you start your preparation, make sure that you have all the necessary study materials handy with you. Most of the materials that you need to prepare for the AOR examination will be provided to you through the photocopiers in the Supreme Court, and sometimes even the Supreme Court provides a list of important cases and other important materials through notices on the Supreme Court of India website. The materials contained in the photocopiers of the Supreme Court may seem like a very lengthy one, but if you approach in the correct manner, then it will be easy for you to manage it.

The materials will consist of landmark and relevant case laws, commentaries, formats of various drafts, procedures, and practice and materials on professional ethics. 

Books and Resources

Subjects 

Book Names 

Links 

Drafting 

1. Supreme Court’s AOR Exam- Drafting 

By- Jayprakash Bansilal Somani

Click here to buy

Judgements (For Leading Cases)

1. Landmark Judgements 

By- Universal

2. Leading Cases For AOR Examination: Volume 1 

By- Prasoon Kumar Mishra

  1. Click here to buy
  2. Click here to buy

Practice and Procedure 

1. Supreme Court Practice and Procedure (Includes Supreme Court Rules AOR Exam Regulations, E-filing) 

By- B.R. Agarwala

2. Practice & Procedure – Paper I- AOR Examination of SC

By- Dr M.K.Ravi

  1. Click here to buy
  2. Click here to buy

Professional Ethics

Professional Ethics for Advocates- Supreme Court Leading Case Laws

By- Jayprakash Bansilal Somani 

Assisted by- Rachit Manchanda 

Click here to buy

Other books

1. The Ultimate Guide to Supreme Court AOR Examination

By- Kush Kalra, Surya Saxena

2. The Supreme Court Rules, 2013 (Bare Act)

  1. Click here to buy
  2. Click here to buy

Guidance to prepare for Paper-1 (procedure and practice)

Civil-Litigation-Practice,-Procedure-and-Drafting_696X293-

This paper in the AOR examination is added to test the knowledge and familiarity of an advocate with all the daily procedures that create the basis of practice before the Supreme Court. This paper is designed in a manner to test the knowledge of the applicant about the functioning of the Supreme Court and also about the various powers and jurisdictions of the Supreme Court. 

Thus, when going for this stage, you should be well versed and prepared with both the substantive and procedural laws that consist of the practice before the Supreme Court. While preparing for this you may feel that it is a very vast topic but when you will start preparing you will find that you already know most of the concepts. While going through the past years papers you will find that most of the topics are frequently repeated and are very common. Here are some of the major topics that will take the bare minimum effort to cover:

  • Writ jurisdiction
  • Article 134- Criminal Appeals in Supreme Court
  • Various jurisdictions of the Supreme Court
  • Ordinary original jurisdiction (Article 131)
  • Article 136- Special leave petition
  • Statutory appeals
  • Court fees
  • Vacation bench
  • Stare decisis (Article 141)
  • Affidavits
  • Miscellaneous
  • Jurisdiction to appoint an arbitrator
  • Powers and duties of the chamber judge and registrar
  • Concept of the curative petitions
  • Powers to do the complete justice (Article 142)
  • Powers of the Supreme Court to punish for the offence of contempt
  • Supreme Court Rules 2013

The topics mentioned above are the mandatory topics that every applicant must prepare before appearing for the examination. 

Types of questions asked in paper 1

You can expect questions like these in paper 1 of the AOR exam.

  1. Which are the statutes under which the Supreme Court exercises appellate jurisdiction? Whether the scope of jurisdiction of the Supreme Court as a statutory appellate body is different from the jurisdiction exercised under Article 136 of the Constitution?
  2. Under which provisions the Supreme Court can transfer a case from one court to another court and under what circumstances? Whether a transfer petition can be heard and finally decided by a single judge of the Supreme Court?

These are the kinds of questions that are asked under paper 1 of the AOR exam, as it is clearly evident that the questions are related to the procedure and practice of the Supreme Court, so it is suggested that to score good marks in the Paper 1 of the AOR exam the candidates must be well versed with all the procedure and practice of the Supreme Court. Refer to the above-mentioned books and resources for better clarity, and practise as many previous year question papers as you can.

Guidance to prepare for Paper-2 (professional ethics and advocacy)

While preparing for this paper, the first thing every applicant must do is to go through the Advocates Act 1961 and the Bar Council of India Rules. Most of the time the lawyers and advocates neglect the Advocate’s Act, 1961 which is a very negative thing for this examination. 

For the additional reading of this paper, applicants can refer to the book of Mr. Raju Ramachandaran (senior advocate) on professional ethics. This book will help you a lot in expanding your knowledge about professional ethics every advocate must have.

While preparing for this paper, there are certain topics which should not be ignored, topics that are mandatory, and those are:

  • Advocate’s right to strike
  • Advocate’s duties to the court
  • Advocate’s duties towards the client
  • Advocate’s duties to their opponent
  • Advocate’s duties to colleagues
  • Right to lien
  • Professional misconduct
  • Right of an amicus curiae
  • Concept of conflict of interest
  • Contempt of Supreme Court

Types of questions asked under paper 2 of AOR exam

These are the kind of questions that are asked under paper 2 of the AOR exam.

  1. What would be the consequence if an Advocate is found guilty of”professional misconduct” or “other misconduct” and under which provision of which Act can action be taken against him ? Discuss with reference to the judgments of the Supreme Court on professional misconduct” and “other misconduct”. (20 marks)
  2. Discuss the scope and limitations of fair criticism or comment by an Advocate on the judgement of the Court. Also state the role and responsibility of the media in reporting on sub-judice matters. (10 marks)

Under paper 2 of the AOR exam you will get to solve questions that are related to the professional ethics and advocacy that an advocate is obliged to maintain in the Supreme Court. If you want to score good marks under this paper then make sure you are well versed with all the mannerisms and conducts of a lawyer that he is obliged to follow as a law professional working under the premises of Supreme Court.

Guidance to prepare for Paper-3 (drafting)

When preparing for this stage, you should start by preparing a sketch out of skeleton drafts of all the different pleadings that can be asked in the examination. Lay out the whole structure of the petition, starting with the cause title of the draft and then moving towards “In the Supreme Court of India” and ending with the “Advocate for the petitioner”. 

While preparing for this paper, try to focus on the details that differentiate between all the drafts. You must know about all the annexures of the appeal and the petition that are marked. One of the most important and significant skills of an AOR is the ability to clearly and concisely draft a synopsis which should summarise all the legal grounds that are raised in the appeal or petition, as the case may be. The purpose behind the synopsis is to lay down the petitioner’s entire case on law at the very outset. And it must not be a mere reiteration of either the questions of law or the grounds that are raised.

Type of questions asked under paper 3 of AOR exam

You can expect a question like this under paper 3 of the AOR exam.

  1. The Hon’ble Supreme Court of India vide Judgment and Final Order dated 11.09.2022 titled “Upmanyu vs. Union of India”, while dealing with a batch of petitions arising out of the impugned judgement of High Court of Judicature of Allahabad inter-alia held that All India Council for Technical Education (AICTE) was the sole repository of power to lay down parameters of qualitative norms for broader concepts of technical education which entails both theory and practical. It further held that AICTE having not laid down the modalities of how practicals could be conducted through distance mode, imparting of technical courses through distance mode could not be permitted through Distance Education Council (DEC).
  2. The Hon’ble Supreme Court was pleased to declare all the degrees and diplomas awarded to all the students from the year 2018 i.e. when such permission were granted to the Universities/Other Educational Institutions till the date of the Supreme Court Judgment i.e. 11.09.2022 to appear in a special examination to be conducted by the AICTE as a one-time measure to get their Degrees/Diplomas validated.
  3. The Applicants are diploma holders from a duly accredited NAAC ‘A’ of a “Deemed to be University” within the meaning of Section 3 of the UGC Act, 1956.
  4. The Applicants were not parties before the Hon’ble Supreme Court.
  5. The Applicants joined the distance course to pursue the advertisement and were duly admitted to the course after a competitive selection process.
  6. The Applicants also attended regular classes, which included practicals.
  7. The Applicants are now gainfully employed in various government services.
  8. The threat of losing their livelihood looms over their heads

Instructions:

  1. DRAFT AN APPROPRIATE REVIEW PETITION BEFORE THE HON’BLE SUPREME COURT WHICH MAY PROVIDE SUCCOUR TO THE APPLICANTS ALONGWITH A BRIEF SYNOPSIS, GROUNDS AND PRAYERS.
  2. LIST OF DATES IS “NOT” REQUIRED TO BE DRAFTED.

This is the kind of question you will be getting under paper 3 of the AOR exam. You will get the whole set of facts and all essential information that are important for drafting, and in the end of the question you will get to see a few instructions upon which you will have to do the drafting. If you go through the above-mentioned question then you can clearly see that there are two instructions given, in which the candidate is asked to draft a review petition before the Supreme Court of India and that petition must contain a brief synopsis, prayers and grounds. 

If you want to score good marks in this paper, then you must have an in-depth knowledge of all the drafts that are used in the proceedings of the Supreme Court.

Guidance to prepare for Paper-4 (case laws)

One of the most difficult and vast subjects of this examination is to prepare for the case laws. The list of all the important landmarks and revised case laws is generally provided on the Supreme Court website and is revealed every year. It is advised to obtain the latest list of case laws before beginning the preparation of this stage. Generally, there are 50-60 case laws that you need to prepare for, yet the advantage the applicants get in this stage is that every applicant is given a Supreme Court Reports Journal for all the cases for the examination.

However, the applicants can not adopt any shortcut while preparing for this stage, all the cases that are listed must be read and the judgements of these cases must be completely read without any shortcut method. 

Start preparing for this stage with a systematic approach. Start the preparation by dividing the list of cases according to their subject such as civil, education, service, criminal, and constitutional. Once this is done, start preparing the list of cases in a chronological manner. This will help you a lot, and you will be reading the case laws like a story, which will be very interesting for you. 

Before you actually start reading these cases, make sure that you watch a lecture by an online expert, or you can also read some good research papers which talks about the growth of law since its inception. Doing this will give you an upper hand because through this you will be introduced to case laws other than the ones which are mentioned in the list of Supreme Court and you will also get a better critical and analytic understanding of law and how it has evolved.

While preparing for the AOR examination, one thing that you should keep in mind is that the examiners expect the applicants to be conceptually clear. Any aspirant who has a grip on the process and procedures of the Supreme Court will always have an advantage over others. 

Types of questions asked under paper 4 of AOR exam

Questions that are asked under paper 4 of the AOR exam are like this:

  1. Summarise the reasons stipulated In the case of Navtej Singh Johar V. Union of India (2018) 10 SCC 1 for declaring Section 377 of IPC as violative of the fundamental rights provided under Articles 14, 15, 19 and 21 of the Constitution.
  2. The doctrine of separation of powers cannot curtail the power of judicial review when fundamental rights are sought to be abrogated. Explain with reference to relevant case laws.

Under paper 4 of the AOR exam, you will get to solve questions related to landmark case laws. Read all the landmark case laws in totality and go through the reasons and the changes that the particular case law brought in the Indian legal system and also the impact it created. Make sure that you are well versed with all the landmark case laws that are mentioned in the official notification of the Supreme Court. Refer to the case laws mentioned in this article.

Challenges faced by an Advocate on Record (AOR)

Everything has its own pros and cons, whether it be a prestigious post or something else. Though the position of an Advocate on Record is a very prestigious job and has so many benefits attached to it, it also has some hindrances which AORs face during their practise. Those hindrances are as follows:

  • As we know that becoming an AOR is not an easy task, the admission process, exam everything is challenging, all the candidates have to clear a written examination and meet all the additional requirements as prescribed by the Supreme Court, for many of the applicants it is a very frustrating and difficult task.
  • Someone who wants to establish himself as an AOR has to go through intense competition because there is a huge competition and there are only a limited number of seats available.
  • While judging a heavy caseload, the AORs are required to perform multiple heavy tasks concurrently, due to which extra workload and extra strain come on the shoulders of an AOR.
  • AORs are always time-bound, and they have various deadlines for different cases which they need to complete on time, thus meeting all the deadlines and the process and procedure requirements is not an easy job.
  • Being an Advocate on Record is a very prestigious job, and maintaining all professional ethics and standards is a very crucial task for all the AORs; maintaining these standards becomes tough in certain situations.
  • Meeting all the requirements of clients in difficult cases can be a very challenging task, keeping all the clients informed and meeting their expectations are also very crucial components.
  • For some of the AORs, keeping up with all the software and legal technology becomes a difficult task.
  • One of the challenges that AORs face is maintaining a work-life balance, because they have an extreme workload and their job is extremely demanding. They are unable to balance their life and work.

Tips and tricks for becoming an Advocate on Record (AOR)

As of now, we already know that cracking the AOR exam is not an easy task, but if the applicant has a systematic approach and knows certain tips and tricks then he can easily do it. There are various tips and tricks that an advocate can follow to successfully crack this examination. Here we have mentioned some specific tips and tricks that you can follow while preparing for the AOR exam, and they are as follows. 

Know your syllabus

Make sure that you are well-versed with the syllabus and the exam pattern. If you know your syllabus, then you will eventually know how to prepare for it. Analyse the whole syllabus and check in which you are strong and which area needs the most preparation. If you do this, you will save yourself a lot of time and will be able to have a good study plan because eventually, the first step of every study plan is to know the syllabus.

Practise previous years’ question papers

Don’t miss out on previous years’ question papers because they can be your game changer. Analyse previous years’ question papers to find out the most important frequently asked topics. Doing this will help you in so many ways, you will get to know all the frequently asked questions and topics from which most of the questions are asked, and then you can focus more on those topics to have a better grip on all such commonly asked topics and questions.

Make a plan

Create a systematic plan and give time to each subject, make sure that your plan is flexible, and you are able to stick with it. Because setting unrealistic goals and having a bad plan can put a lot of pressure on you, but if you have a good and flexible plan you will be able to study more, and you will not get bored of studying. Create a plan according to your workload, and work according to the plan that you have created.

Time management

In all the examination whether it be the AOR exam or any other competitive exam, time management is one of the most crucial thing that every candidate must have, because if you are not able to manage your time properly you will end up losing marks in the examination, and you also won’t be able to attempt all the questions, which will not allow you to succeed in any exam that you give. To improve your time management skills, practise the previous year question papers in a time limit, fix a time limit for yourself and try to finish the questions under that time that you have fixed, and by doing this you will be able to learn time management skills very easily.

Mentorship

Connect with the AORs who have previously cleared the AOR examination and ask them about their strategies, you can learn a lot from these AORS. They will tell you a lot of important things that will help you in cleaning the AOR exam. You can ask them what approach they take while preparing for their exam and how they studied and everything that you need to know about the preparation of the AOR exam.

Online courses

Attend various boot camps and online courses on how to crack the Supreme Court AOR exam, because these boot camps provide some valuable insights that can be extremely helpful for you. These boot camps and online courses will help you a lot in getting an overall understanding of the AOR exam, and you will get to know all the details related to exam pattern, syllabus and many other things. Through these online courses, you will also get access to solve multiple question papers and that will help you to score better marks in the exam. 

Read case laws

Prioritise reading case laws, focus on all the landmark cases and also those cases which are frequently repeated in the examination. Most of the time, candidates don’t take case laws in a serious manner and end up losing a huge amount of marks in the examination. Make sure that you go through all the cases listed by the Supreme Court and all the case laws that are repeated, read the case laws in totality and don’t miss out on anything, read everything from the facts to judgements. 

Answer writing tips

Answer writing is one of the most essential things that every candidate must have, because even if you have enough knowledge, but you don’t know how to frame your answer, you will not be able to qualify this exam. Here we have mentioned some essential answer-writing tips that you must follow while writing an answer.

Paper 1: Practice and Procedure 

  • Make sure to use direct language and don’t use complex words in your answer, make your answer easy to understand. Avoid using convoluted sentences in your answer, and also don’t use legal jargons that are unnecessary.
  • Make sure to organise your answer with proper subheadings and headings, so that your answers become easy to read.
  • Always try to support your arguments in the answer with relevant statutes and precedents.
  • One thing you must keep in mind while writing your answers is to write them in a time-bound manner, so that you don’t miss any question.

Paper 2: Drafting

  • Make sure that you are well-versed with all the important draftings that are commonly asked in the AOR exam. Draftings such as affidavits, Special Leave Petitions, appeals etc. learn proper formatting for all these drafts.
  • Whenever you draft anything, make sure that the words that you use in your draft are not ambiguous and have a clear meaning.
  • Practice drafting which are commonly asked in AOR examination. Proofreading is one of the most essential things when it comes to drafting. So make sure that you carefully proofread the whole draft you make for practice and correct all the grammatical errors, and punctuations for better results. 

Paper 3: Professional ethics and advocacy

  • Go through the rules of the Supreme Court and Bar Council of India and apply all those rules in your daily life so that you don’t miss out on any essential rule.
  • Try to apply all the ethical principles in all the complex scenarios that are presented to you in the AOR exam.
  • Make sure that you explain your answer or the argument with the ethical rules and principles.
  • Use clear and formal language while writing your answer.

Paper 4: Leading case laws

  • Make sure to identify the main principle or the ratio decidendi that was established in the particular case and what is the significance of it.
  • Discuss all the limitations that the case presents and also the relevance of the case in all the contemporary legal situations.
  • In this paper, make sure that you approach the answers in a logical manner. Analyse the logic of the court while deciding this case and what would have been your approach in the same scenario.

Conclusion

AOR is one of the most prestigious posts in the field of law, but to become one, you need to clear the Supreme Court’s AOR exam. To make it easier for all the candidates appearing for the AOR exam, we have mentioned all the valuable information that a candidate must know about the AOR exam in this article. We hope that you have read the whole article and that your concept of AOR and AOR exam is crystal clear.

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)

Does one need to have experience to appear in AOR exams?

Yes, one must have an experience of 4 years before appearing for the AOR exams. 

Is there any fixed salary for AORs?

No, there is no fixed salary for an AOR, and they get paid on the same basis as a normal lawyer in litigation. However, the fees of AORs are mostly higher than the lawyers practising in any other court of India. 

Is there any restriction on the number of attempts in the AOR examination?

Yes, there are only 5 attempts available to a candidate for AOR examination. It should be noted that candidates who were declared to have failed in all papers of the last AOR examination, in which they appeared, are, therefore, not eligible to apply for AOR Examination

Can only AORs practice in the Supreme Court?

Yes, in order to practise in the Supreme Court, one has to pass the AOR examination and take training as an AOR. Once the candidate has qualified the examination, he/she is assigned a unique code by the Supreme Court. 

Are there any restrictions on the number of attempts in the AOR exam?

Yes, there is a restriction on the number of attempts in the AOR examination, any candidate that has already appeared for the AOR exam for a number of five times is not eligible to apply further.

What are the requirements of becoming an Advocate on Record?

In order to become an Advocate on Record in the Supreme Court of India, the candidate must fulfil the following requirements and must also some necessary steps such as:

  • Getting a law degree from any recognised university,
  • The candidate must be a practising advocate with an experience of four years,
  • The candidate must be registered with the State Bar Council of India,
  • The candidate should not have any criminal history, and should not have any kind of charges or instances of professional misconduct in his name.

What is the process of becoming an Advocate on Record?

The process of becoming an advocate on record starts from filling out an application form. After the candidate has successfully filled out the application form, he will have to clear the written examination that is conducted by the Supreme Court of India. Once the candidate has successfully cleared the examination, he will have to go through training and orientation classes organised by the Registry of the Supreme Court.

Are AORs different from normal advocates?

People often confuse AOR with a new category of advocate, but that is not the case. The AOR system does not create a new category of advocate, but it rather designates the advocates with expertise and specific skills in the practice of the Supreme Court. This designation is done to acknowledge the unique requirements of arguing the cases in the Apex Court, promoting proficiency and specialisation among all the practitioners.

 What is the syllabus of the AOR exam?

The syllabus of the AOR exam is divided into four papers, where all the papers deal with different topics. 

  • The first paper deals with the practice and procedure of the Supreme Court;
  • The second paper of the AOR exam deals with different kinds of drafting;
  • The third paper of this exam deals with advocacy and professional ethics; and
  • The last and final paper consists of leading case laws.
Criminal litigation

What kinds of drafting is asked in the AOR exam?

There are various important draftings that are asked under paper II of the AOR exam, some of the most common draftings  are:

  •  Review petitions under Article 137 of the Indian Constitution, 
  • Appeal petitions, 
  • Transfer petitions under Section 25 of the Civil Procedure Code, 
  • Interlocutory applications, and  
  • Applications for revocation of special leave. No

What comes under paper I of the AoR exam?

The first paper of the AOR exam consists of relevant provisions in the Indian Constitution that is related to the jurisdiction of the court, and it also consists of the rules of the Supreme Court and all the relevant provisions of the Civil Procedure Code, general principles of the Court Fees Act and also the Limitation Act.

What to study under paper III of the AoR exam?

Things that you need to study under paper III of the AOR exam are:

  • The Advocates Act, 1961 and all the cases that are reported under it, especially the disciplinary proceeding
  • Cases that are related to contempt of court involving the Advocates
  • The Rules of the Bar Council of India
  • The Supreme Court Rules, 2013

What does paper IV of the AOR exam consist of?

The fourth paper of the AOR exam consists of leading case laws, and all these case laws are made available by the registry and also released through a notification on the official website of the Supreme Court.

Does an AoR earn more than a normal lawyer?

The earnings of an AOR basically depends upon the experience and years of practice, but yes they do earn more than a normal lawyer. AORs get around fifty to seventy-five thousand rupees for just appearing in a case.

Is it difficult to crack the AOR exam?

Yes, to be very frank, cracking the AOR exam is not an easy task, or something that you can crack without preparing for it. In order to crack the AOR exam, you will have to sincerely prepare for it and go through all the papers carefully. Though it is a little difficult, you can easily crack the AOR exam if you prepare sincerely for it.

How to start preparing for the AOR exam?

While preparing for the AOR examination the first thing that you should start with, is the syllabus itself. Make sure that you know each and everything about the AOR syllabus and start your preparation accordingly. Start reading bare acts of all the important subjects and practice answer writing; make sure to solve previous years question papers, and you must read all the important and revised case laws. 

What are the benefits of becoming an AOR?

There are various benefits of being an AOR and some of the best benefits are getting an enhanced salary, getting better recognition and representation in the Supreme Court of India and most importantly you get an AOR tag which makes you different from other normal advocates. 

How much does an AOR charge for a case?

The fees and charges of all the AORs are different and vary from person to person, but most of the time the fees of an AOR is dependent upon his experience and year of practice. On an average, if an AOR is practising in the Supreme Court for more than four years, then he can easily charge approximately 75-80 thousand rupees for appearing in a case.

What are the challenges faced by an AOR?

There are various challenges faced by an Advocate on Record, some of the most common challenges that they face are, dealing with a lot of workloads, managing their daily life and maintaining a balance in their life. 


Students of Lawsikho courses regularly produce writing assignments and work on practical exercises as a part of their coursework and develop themselves in real-life practical skills.

LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals, and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:

https://t.me/lawyerscommunity

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content.

Download Now

A.R. Antulay vs. R.S. Nayak & Anr. (1988) : case analysis

0

This article was written by Oishika Banerji and has been further updated by Shefali Chitkara. This article provides a legal analysis of the landmark case of A.R. Antulay v. R.S. Nayak & Anr (1988). The author aims to give a brief overview of the judgement, facts of the case, important issues raised, contentions made by the parties, and important points that were highlighted by the Court more clearly by referring to various judgements that followed the aforementioned judgement. Further, the author has tried to explore the aftermath and significance of the judgement. The author has also mentioned the legal viewpoints that were considered by the Court while delivering the judgement. 

This article has been published by Shashwat Kaushik.

Table of Contents

Introduction 

The case of A.R. Antulay v. R.S. Nayak & Anr. (1988) is one of the significant judgments in Indian legal history because it established that corruption cases that are tried by a Special Court cannot be referred to a High Court judge for a hearing. Despite much criticism, the Supreme Court of India was certain that justice had been delivered properly. This subsequently led several legal scholars to assert that the law was being hampered by human foresight.

Mr. Antulay, the appellant in this landmark case, was the then Chief Minister of Maharashtra, who resigned and left office on 20th January 1982, while the respondent, Mr. Nayak, was a political figure with political ties. The lawsuit centres on the appellant’s claim that his fundamental rights had been violated. A seven-judge bench of the Supreme Court had issued a landmark decision, stating that the ruling of the Constitutional bench of the Supreme Court violated Section 7(1) of the Criminal Law (Amendment) Act, 1952, as well as the appealing party’s fundamental rights under Articles 14 and 21 of the Constitution of India. This case is interesting to discuss because the Apex Court has provided a different perspective from which this case can be viewed. The three major legal viewpoints that are to be discussed in this article concerning this landmark case are:

  • Constitutional, 
  • Administrative, and 
  • Civil law perspective. 

This case is significant for the reason that there were serious allegations against the Chief Minister of Maharashtra that made him resign from his position in the year 1982 and this case further delved into the doctrine of separation of powers between the judiciary and the executive branch and established the doctrine of pleasure, which directs the removal of judges. 

Case details

Title of the case- A.R. Antulay v. R.S. Nayak & Anr. 

Case citation- AIR 1988 SC 1531

Court- Supreme Court of India

Coram of judges- Hon’ble Justice G.L. Oza, Justice Sabyasachi Mukherjee, Justice M.N. Venkatachaliah, Justice Ranganath Misra, Justice S. Natarajan, Justice S. Ranganatham, Justice B.C. Ray (7-judge bench)

Appellant- A.R. Antulay

Respondent- R.S. Nayak

Provisions involved- Articles 13, 14, 21, 32, 134, 136, 139, 141 and 142 of the Indian Constitution; Sections 161, 162, 163, 164 and 165 (now repealed) of the Indian Penal Code, 1860; Sections 374, 406 and 407 of the Criminal Procedure Code, 1973; Sections 6 and 7 of the Criminal Law (Amendment) Act, 1952; and Sections 5 and 6 of Prevention of Corruption Act, 1947 (now as Prevention of Corruption Act, 1988

Date of decision- April 29, 1988

The case which got overruled- R.S. Nayak v. A.R. Antulay (1984)

Historical background

A resolution was passed by the government of Maharashtra to establish the ‘Indigent Prisoner’s Fund’ for providing legal assistance to indigent prisoners. The fines that were imposed on the convicted persons were used to establish the said fund. This fund was managed by the Chief Minister of Maharashtra, who was the present appellant in this case, namely Mr. A.R. Antulay. In this case, the management of the fund was challenged by one of the members of the legislative assembly, the respondent in the present case, R.S. Nayak. According to him, the management of the said fund was unconstitutional. 

Facts of A.R. Antulay vs. R.S. Nayak & Anr. (1988)

The appellant, A.R. Antulay, has been the Chief Minister of the State of Maharashtra since June 1980. In September 1981, one of the members of the legislative assembly went to the Governor of Maharashtra under Section 197 of the CrPC, 1973 and Section 6 of the Prevention of Corruption Act, 1947, to get a sanction to file a case against the appellant. A complaint was also filed with the Additional Metropolitan Magistrate of Bombay under the offences of Sections 161, 165, 384, 420 read with Sections 109 and 120B of the IPC, 1860 and Section 5 of the Prevention of Corruption Act, 1947. The magistrate refused to take any cognizance of these offences, which led to the filing of a revision petition before the Bombay High Court. 

A similar complaint was filed by Mr. P.B. Samanth in the form of a writ petition under Article 226 of the Indian Constitution in 1981 against the emergency allotment of concrete in the state to the Indira Gandhi Pratibha Pratishthan Trust. The appellant was made the second respondent in this case. The learned Single Judge of the High Court passed the Nisi rule through a speaking order and made it to return on 23rd November 1981. Nisi rule is a court order that comes into force at a future date unless a cause is shown to the contrary. This order was made absolute in the later hearing. These allegations against the appellant regarding the abuse of power resulted in his resignation from the post of Chief Minister in 1982. 

Barrister Abdul Rahman Antulay (hereinafter referred to as “Mr. Antulay” or “appellant”) resigned as Maharashtra’s Chief Minister on January 13, 1982, after the Bombay High Court sentenced him to imprisonment for coercion. The Court found that Antulay had illegally bought Bombay region developers in exchange for more concrete than the quantity distributed by the government to Indira Gandhi Pratibha Pratishthan Trust, which was one of the few trusts he had set up and controlled. The Court eventually released him on bond. However, the Supreme Court later cleared him of the charge. 

A complaint was again filed with the Special Judge with few charges, including the claim which was rejected by the Governor. As a response to this, a process was issued to the appellant by the Special Judge, Sh. P.S. Bhutta. The appellant’s concern over jurisdiction was also dismissed by the Special Judge and he determined three Special judges to hear such cases of corruption. Sh. R.B. Sule was appointed as a Special Judge by the state government. The Special Judge discharged the appellant and stated that a member of the Legislative Assembly comes within the definition of ‘Public Servant’ under Section 21 of the Indian Penal Code, 1860 and no valid sanction was obtained for proceeding against him. An appeal was filed against this order under Article 136 of the Constitution of India on 16th February 1984 and the Constitution Bench of the Supreme Court ruled that a member of the legislative assembly is not a public servant under Section 21 of the IPC, 1860, thereby reversing the last order of the Special Judge. Rather than giving back the case to a Special Judge for disposition as required by law, the Hon’ble Supreme Court suo moto removed it from the Special Judge’s Court and transferred it to the Bombay High Court.

Issues raised in A.R. Antulay vs. R.S. Nayak & Anr. (1988)

The following three major issues were raised before the seven-judge bench of the Hon’ble Supreme Court:

  • Whether the directions given by the Supreme Court’s Constitutional Bench in February 1984 directing the transfer of the case from the Special Judge to the High Court violate Section 7(1) of the Criminal Law (Amendment) Act, 1952?
  • Whether the decision of the Constitutional Bench of the Supreme Court violates Articles 14 and 21 of the Indian Constitution and is inoperative, invalid and illegal?
  • Be that as it may, whether the Supreme Court should recall or set aside the decision in present proceedings and whether the same is within the purview of the powers of the Supreme Court or not? 

Contentions of the appellant in A.R. Antulay vs. R.S. Nayak & Anr. (1988)

The appellant party had claimed that he was forced to deal with bias without being given an opportunity to present any pleadings or contentions in front of the Court, which he claimed was an infringement of his fundamental right under Article 14 of the Indian Constitution. It was also contended that a litigant’s fundamental right to trial by a Special Judge under Article 21 of the Constitution was violated. The appellant further contended that the fundamental rights of equality and justice, which stipulated that no one should suffer from the brunt of technical faults, were blatantly infringed. The appealing party had also lost a few important rights, namely the ability to appeal to the High Court under Section 9 of the Criminal Law (Amendment) Act and the opportunity to appeal to the Supreme Court under Article 136 of the Constitution.

It was further contended that the principles of the administration of justice, namely, “Actus curiae neminem gravabit” (no one should suffer because of the acts of the Court) and that “the procedural technicalities can not overshadow the substantive justice” were also violated. 

This led to the violation of one of the principles of natural justice that encompasses three rights within it:

  • No person shall be a judge in his own case. (Nemo judex in causa sua)
  • Every person should be given the opportunity to be heard. (Audi Alteram Partem)
  • There should always be a reasoned decision. 

On the strength of the above mentioned principles, the appellant argued that he was not given an opportunity of being heard which led to the violation of the basic principles of law as well as his fundamental rights.

Contentions of the respondent in A.R. Antulay vs. R.S. Nayak & Anr. (1988)

The respondent argued that the High Court could withdraw the matter from the Special Judge under the Criminal Law Amendment Act by means of Section 407 of the Criminal Procedure Code in appropriate cases. 

It was further contended that the contention of the appellant that the transfer was done without giving them an opportunity to present the case is unacceptable. The appellant could have made his allegations through his advocate before the order was made or after the directions were given. Thus, there was no illegality in the order and the appellant did not use the opportunity through his own mistakes. 

The issue of whether the superior court had jurisdiction was debated and it was contended that the Court could not be held liable for such allegations unless it had behaved in a Coram non-judice (not before a judge) manner.

Relevant provisions involved

  • Articles 13, 14, 21 and 32 of the Indian Constitution, as contended by the appellant, for violating their right to be treated equally in the courts and right of trial under a Special Judge as per Section 7(1) of the Criminal Law (Amendment) Act, 1952.
  • Sections 374, 406 and 407 of the Criminal Procedure Code, 1973 which provide for the right to appeal in the Supreme Court to any person convicted on a trial and the power of the Supreme Court and High Court to transfer the cases under certain circumstances. This was also invoked by the appellants as favouring their point of contention.
  • Sections 161 and 165 of the Indian Penal Code, 1860 (which have now been repealed) stated that the public servant should not take remuneration from the general public more than what the government provides for and also should not obtain any valuable item without consideration and treated this offence as a cognizable and non-bailable offence.
  • Sections 6 and 7 of the Criminal Law (Amendment) Act, 1952, provided the state government with the power to elect as many Special Judges as required under the law.
  • Sections 5 and 6 of the Prevention of Corruption Act, 1947 (now Prevention of Corruption Act, 1988) provided for the punishment of criminal misconduct by the public servant while performing his official duty and previous sanction that is necessary to be obtained for the prosecution of any public servant.

Judgment in A.R. Antulay vs. R.S. Nayak & Anr. (1988)

The Supreme Court’s decision, in this case, was given by a 7 judge bench. The judgement was delivered by 4:3 in favour of the appellant. The Bench ruled in 1988 that the ruling of 1984 was unreasonable, unlawful, and unconstitutional under Article 21 of the Indian Constitution because Antulay’s right to use the appeal system was curtailed. The Apex Court stated that Section 406 of the Criminal Procedure Code, 1973 allows for the transfer of criminal cases by the Supreme Court. According to the law, the Court may send a specific case from one high court to the other high court, or from a subordinate criminal court to another criminal court of equivalent or upper-level jurisdiction. Subsequently, Article 407 provides for the power of the High Court to transfer cases. Further, Section 6 of the Criminal Law (Amendment) Act, 1952, gives the state government the power to appoint as many Special Judges as required and Section 7 focuses on the cases that are triable by the Special Judges. On the question of the validity of the transfer made by the Court, it was held that the order of transfer of cases to the High Court was not allowed by law and the Apex Court has no power to advise the High Court to take cases that do not fall under its jurisdiction. The Court also noticed that four valuable rights have been infringed upon by the directions of the Constitutional Bench of the Supreme Court:

  • The right of trial before the Special Judge as per the procedure established by law.
  • The right of revision before the High Court under Section 9 of the Criminal Law (Amendment) Act, 1952.
  • The right to appeal before the High Court.
  • The right to file special leave to appeal before the Supreme Court under Article 136 of the Indian Constitution by way of a second appeal.

The Court also noted that the directions were passed without observing the principles of natural justice and therefore reversed the judgement given in R.S. Nayak v. A.R. Antulay (1984). Furthermore, the majority opined that the writ of certiorari cannot be issued by a larger bench to quash the order of another bench of the Supreme Court. 

It was also observed that merely because a criminal trial has been pending for long against the Chief Minister, it cannot be grounds for the acquittal of the accused. An accused cannot demand his trial with the co-accused as a right. 

The Supreme Court lacks the authority to transfer cases to itself. Only the Parliament, by law, has the authority to create or expand the jurisdiction. The judiciary has not been vested with such power. It was also noted that the appellant had the fundamental right under Article 21 of the Constitution for a Special Judge’s trial under Section 7(1) of the Criminal Law (Amendment) Act, 1952, and the right not to suffer as a result of any judgement rendered by the Court in violation of natural justice. 

Legal viewpoints 

The Code of Civil Procedure, 1908 and its viewpoint

The case of A.R. Antulay v. R.S. Nayak & Anr (1988) is commonly referred to while studying Section 9 of the Code of Civil Procedure, 1908, which talks about the jurisdiction of the civil courts. The Supreme Court clarified in this case that the subject matter of jurisdiction of a court has obtained a legislative character, which is to say that the judiciary has no role in widening or narrowing its jurisdiction by itself.

The judiciary has the power to only interpret the laws and in doing so, it cannot modify the jurisdiction of a court. In this case, the consent of a court is not relevant, as the judiciary cannot surpass the legislative decision-making. Along with the power to create and increase jurisdiction, the legislature has also been given the power to confer a right of appeal or take away the same from any court. The Parliament alone has the power to do it under law and no court, whether superior or inferior or both combined, can modify the jurisdiction of the court or divest a person of his or her rights to go for revision and appeal.

Constitutional viewpoint 

The rule of law is at the core of our democracy, which means we need an independent judiciary and judges who can make decisions regardless of the political winds that are blowing. The other branches of the government, including the executive and legislative branches, must not obstruct the judiciary’s ability to do justice. Judges must be able to carry out their duties without fear of reprisal or favour. The primary aim of judicial independence is for judges to be able to settle a matter before them based on the law without being affected by any other element.

Though there is no clear provision in the Indian Constitution in relation to the separation of powers, the independence of the judiciary and the rule of law are fundamental characteristics of the Constitution that cannot be changed, as the Hon’ble Supreme Court observed in the case of S.P. Gupta v. Union of India (1962)

Article 50 of the Indian Constitution specifically mentions the independence of the judiciary, that is, the separation of the judiciary from the executive organ of the government. Although different compartments function with different roles in the parliamentary form of government, hardly can the executive and the legislature be distinguished from each other. What is interesting to note in this viewpoint, when put on the same plate as the present case, is that the determination of jurisdiction does not come under the ambit of judicial independence.

This is because the independence of the judiciary does not signify taking away the legislative power of law-making; instead, what it does mean is to interpret the laws made by the legislature in such a way so that a common man can understand the meaning of the same. Thus although the judiciary is supposed to be independent of the other two organs of the Indian government, it cannot determine its own jurisdiction.

Administrative perspective 

Article 12 of the Indian Constitution defines “State”. It states that the term ‘State’ includes the central and state governments, Parliament and legislatures, and all local or other authorities functioning under India’s government or Indian territory. Whether the judiciary is included in the broad term “State” is a significant question to be addressed in this context. The judiciary’s position under Article 12 is based on judicial and non-judicial decisions, whereby if the judiciary is deciding cases, it cannot be referred to as the State.

However, if it is performing non-judicial functions, it is included in the definition of State, because if the courts are completely exempt from the State, they will have unrestricted power to make laws that violate fundamental rights. This is backed by Article 13, which provides that any law that violates basic rights is unconstitutional, and since courts have the power to establish laws, this suggests that they are performing a State duty. Article 141, on the other hand, states that the Supreme Court’s decision is binding on all courts within India’s territory. As a result, the Supreme Court’s verdicts are unassailable, but the lower court’s decisions can be appealed if they infringe fundamental rights. 

The Supreme Court reaffirmed and ruled in Rupa Ashok Hurra v. Ashok Hurra (2002) that no judicial action could be deemed to violate any fundamental right. It was claimed to be an accepted legal position that superior courts of justice do not fall under the ‘State’ or ‘other authorities’ ambit as provided in Article 12. As a result, while courts execute administrative functions, they remain within the scope of the State’s definition and cannot infringe on citizens’ fundamental rights. But they do not fall under the definition of state when they make judicial decisions.

Therefore, it will be ideal to mention that the argument that the judiciary can expand or contract its jurisdiction while executing administrative functions will not hold much ground as the judiciary has not been vested with the law-making power that the legislature has inherited.

Important judgments referred

Gurcharan Das Chadha v. State of Rajasthan (1966)

There was an identical question in this case before the Supreme Court. The state government directed the trial to be done before the Special Judge of Bharatpur. The petitioner moved the Court for transfer to another state. The Court noted that Section 7 of the Act mandated the trial only by the Special Judge, which is an essential condition for trial under Section 6. Therefore, the Court held that it can transfer a case only from one Special Judge to another Special Judge but this position was limited to the power under Section 527 of the previous Code and is not a relevant precedent for the proposition that it cannot transfer to the Court other than a Special Judge Court or the High Court. 

Kiran Singh v. Chaman Paswan (1954)

To answer the question regarding the challenge to the directions of the Supreme Court to the larger bench of the Supreme Court, the Court observed the findings of this case, wherein it was held that a decree when passed without jurisdiction is nullity and its validity can be set up at any stage. A defect of jurisdiction strikes at the authority of the Court to pass any order. 

Raja Soap Factory v. S.P. Shantharaj (1965)

This case was regarding the jurisdiction of the High Court. It was held that “jurisdiction” means the scope of the power that is given to any court by its Constitution to try any case and it cannot be enlarged or extended because the Judge deemed it to be for an extraordinary situation. Therefore, the Court in the present case noted that the power to transfer any case conferred by Section 406 of the Criminal Procedure Code does not relate to the Special Court. This does not authorise the transfer from the Special Judge to the Supreme Court and then to any of the High Courts. 

Ledgard v. Bull (1885)

In this case, the Apex Court held that under Section 25 of the previous Civil Procedure Code, the superior Court was not able to make an order of transfer unless the court from which the transfer had to be made had jurisdiction over it. Similarly, in the instant case, under Section 407 of the present Code, the High Court cannot transfer to itself any proceedings under Sections 6 and 7 of the said Act. The Supreme Court, by transferring the case to itself, had not acquired a larger jurisdiction and the fact that the objections were not made against the directions cannot act as a waiver. 

Significance of the judgement in A.R. Antulay vs. R.S. Nayak & Anr. (1988)

  • The Supreme Court noted that it has no jurisdiction to suo moto direct transfer any case from the Special Court to the High Court for speedy trial. 
  • This case has established a significant principle regarding the management of funds by the government, subject to transparency, accountability and other constitutional provisions. 
  • The Court also focused on the established principles of separation of powers and rule of law under the Constitution of India by noting that the power of management of public funds lies with the legislature and not the executive.
  • The judgement has made a significant change in the Indian political system and provided for increased scrutiny of the funds by government officials.
  • The judgement has contributed to the growth of constitutional jurisprudence and good governance.
  • The Court also established that the “State” as per Article 12 of the Indian Constitution will include courts only when they are performing non-judicial functions and not while they are performing their judicial functions. 

Brief on the judgement of R.S. Nayak v. A.R. Antulay (1984)

The judgement in this case was given by a five-judge bench of the Supreme Court- D.A. Desia, R.S. Pathak, O. Chinnappa Reddy, A.P. Sen and V.B. Eradi, JJ. On similar facts as mentioned above, the Supreme Court in this case held that sanction for prosecution of a person who has committed the offence in the capacity of Chief Minister is not required. This is because the cognizance of such an offence was taken after he had ceased to be a Chief Minister, although he is still an MLA. The Court also stated that an MLA does not come under the definition of a public servant and, therefore, set aside the order of the Special Judge. MLA is not receiving his remuneration or salary from the government for performing any public duty. Therefore, he does not fall under the definition of “public servant” in Section 21 of the Indian Penal Code. However, the same was overruled in the case of P.V. Narasimha Rao v. State (CBI) (1998) wherein the Court held that an MLA has to be given the status of a public servant for the purposes of the Act, although there is an absence of authority who can give sanction for their prosecution. 

Important judgments which referred to the case of A.R. Antulay v. R.S. Nayak (1988)

There are various judgements that refer to the landmark decision in the case of A.R. Antulay v. R.S. Nayak (1988). A few of the important judgements are:

Asit Kumar Kar v. State of West Bengal & Ors. (2009)

Facts of the case

In this case, the All Bengal Excise Licensees’ Association filed a writ petition in Calcutta High Court challenging the policy of West Bengal of granting additional licences for foreign liquor, however, this was withdrawn. During its pendency, an interim order was passed, which stayed the grant of licences. Further, a contempt petition was filed wherein it was alleged that licences were granted in violation of the stay order but this petition was dismissed. Against this dismissal, a special leave petition was filed and the same was decided by the Court but the directions were given without hearing the persons whose licences were cancelled. A writ petition was filed as per Article 32 of the Constitution of India against the decision. 

Issues raised

  1. Whether the petition filed under Article 32 of the Indian Constitution will be treated as a review petition or a recall petition?
  2. Does the Supreme Court have the power to recall any matter that was passed without fulfilling the principles of natural justice?

Judgement given

The Supreme Court observed that no adverse order should be given against any party without giving them an opportunity to be heard. The Court noted the observation made in the A.R. Antulay v. R.S. Nayak case, in which it was stated that the violation of the principles of natural justice makes the act null. The Court also held that there is a difference between a petition under Article 32 of the Indian Constitution, a review petition and a recall petition. In a recall petition, the court is not obligated to go into the merits of the case but rather look at the matter that was finalised without allowing an affected party to be heard, and this petition was treated as a recall petition. Thus, the directions were recalled by the Supreme Court in this case. 

Khoday Distilleries Ltd. & Anr. v. Registrar General, Supreme Court of India (1995)

Facts of the case

In this case, a writ petition was filed before the Supreme Court as per Article 32 of the Constitution of India after the review petitions were rejected by the Court. The learned counsel for the petitioners submitted that the civil appeals were listed before the Constitution bench for directions and were not heard on merit. It was also stated that the judgement is, therefore, invalid for violating the principles of natural justice. To support the same, reliance was placed on the judgement of this Court given in the case of A.R. Antulay v. R.S. Nayak

Issues raised

  1. Can a writ petition under Article 32 succeed on the ground that civil appeals were decided on merits without giving an opportunity to be heard to the petitioners, rendering a judgement invalid for violation of principles of natural justice?
  2. Whether a decision rendered by the Supreme Court under Article 136 of the Constitution of India becomes final on the dismissal of the review petition?

Judgement given

The Court observed that the orders on appeal clearly showed that the petitioners were given an opportunity to file written submissions on which reliance was sought to be placed on the merits. The same submissions were also answered while rejecting the review petition. Thus, the case of A.R. Antulay had no application in this case. The Court highlighted that the case of Antulay does not hold that any decision, even after attaining finality, can be reopened under Article 32 of the Constitution of India. 

Conclusion 

When the Supreme Court handed down this verdict in 1988, it drew criticism from observers, notably legal professor Upendra Baxi, who believed that India’s anti-corruption legislation protected the guilty. The Court, on the other hand, believed that “finality is fine, but justice is better.” In this instance, the principle of Ubi jus ubi remedium, which states that if a person’s legal rights are violated, he has the right to seek redress in a court of law, has been applied. It is important to remember that judges and judgments play an important role and should not be skewed in any way. As a result, technical faults or ideological differences should not be reflected in judgments, if they are, our fundamental rights will be violated.

Before the present judgement, there was no awareness within the judicial system regarding the nature of the jurisdiction of the Special Courts. However, it has been specified in this judgement that corruption cases cannot be transferred by the Supreme Court from the Special Courts to the High Court. In 2014, in Subrata Roy Sahara v. Union of India, the Supreme Court found the present case to be a precedent that is not relevant and should be used only in consideration of the facts and circumstances of each case. However, it was one of the most prominent corruption cases in Indian history that established that no attempt to weaken the separation of powers between the three organs could survive. 

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)

How many judges decided this case and by what ratio?

A.R. Antulay v. R.S. Nayak was a 7-judge bench case and was decided by 4:3 in the favour of the appellant. 

What was the main ratio of the judgement?

The Court held that corruption cases are to be tried by the Special Judges and such cases cannot be transferred from the Special Courts to the High Court.

Which rights of the appellants were violated?

The petitioner had contended that there was a violation of his fundamental rights as given under Articles 14 and 21 of the Indian Constitution and his other rights like the right to appeal.

Is an MLA a public servant?

Yes, MLA is a public servant under Section 21 of the Indian Penal Code as per the judgement of P.V. Narasimha Rao v. State (1998)

Who has the authority regarding the jurisdiction of the Courts in India?

Only the Parliament has the authority to extend or limit the jurisdiction of the Courts and no Court has the power to do so. 

Can a writ of certiorari be given by a bench of the Supreme Court to quash the order of another bench?

No, this writ cannot be issued to quash the order of one bench of the Supreme Court by another bench.

Which judgement was reversed in the present case?

The judgement given by a five-judge bench in the case of R.S. Nayak v. A.R. Antulay (1984) was reversed by a seven-judge bench of the present case.

What was held in the case of R.S. Nayak v. A.R. Antulay (1984)?

A five-judge bench in this case held that an MLA is not a public servant, therefore, no sanction is required to be taken for prosecuting any MLA. 

In which case did the Court hold that an MLA comes under the definition of a “public servant”?

The Court in the case of P.V. Narsimha Rao v. State (1998) held that an MLA is a public servant under Section 21 of the Indian Penal Code.

Are Courts included within the definition of “State” under Article 12 of the Constitution of India?

Courts do not come under the definition of “State” while performing judicial functions. However, they are considered to be a “State” when they are performing administrative and non-judicial functions. 

Under which provisions do the Supreme Court and High Courts have the power to transfer cases?

Under Sections 406 and 407 of the Criminal Procedure Code, the Supreme Court and High Courts have the power to transfer cases. 

Can the corruption cases be transferred?

The present case laid down this rule that no corruption cases can be transferred to any High Court or Supreme Court from the Special Courts. 

Which essential principles were considered by the Court while delivering the judgement in this case?

The Court considered the doctrine of separation of powers among the three organs and the rule of law while noting that the power of management of public funds lies with the legislature and not the executive.

Who gave the doctrine of separation of powers and which Article talks about the same?

Montesquieu, who was a French judge and a political philosopher, gave the theory of separation of powers and the same is enshrined in Article 50 of the Constitution of India.

Who propounded the principle of ‘rule of law’? 

A.V. Dicey propounded the principle of the rule of law. He defined it as the absolute supremacy or predominance of the regular law as opposed to the influence of arbitrary power and excluded the existence of arbitrariness or even of wide discretionary authority on the part of the government. 

References

Download Now

Data protection and data privacy laws in India

0
data protection

This article is written by Adv. Komal Arora. It covers everything about the data privacy and protection laws in India. The article describes the legal framework for data privacy, its history, applicability, important concepts, etc. It also discusses the rights and obligations of data protection authorities and Data Principals, grounds for lawful processing of personal data, exemptions, penalties and other concepts connected to data privacy and protection.

Table of Contents

Introduction

You have probably come across the expression, “Data is the new oil.” It signifies that data is a valuable asset that is being explored by businessmen in order to extract huge profits. It is naturally unrefined and needs to be converted into something of value. Also, we are now a part of the biggest digital economy, where every person is reduced to data. Data is better than opinions; it is preferred as it is more reliable and predictable. We can predict outcomes based on existing data, get insights for better business performance, make better strategies, etc. But it can be equally disastrous if the data is not handled with care. Data is indeed powerful on its own, but it needs the aid of the law to be regulated. Thus come data protection and privacy laws and India has recently passed its much awaited law on the subject. This article will discuss everything about the data privacy and protection laws in India. 

What is meant by data protection and data privacy

There are two aspects present here: data privacy and data protection. Data privacy means when, how, and to exactly what extent the personal data of a consumer can be shared and communicated to others. The personal information can be name, address, ethnicity, phone number, marriage status, etc. With the increase in internet usage over the years, there is an urgent need for data privacy regulations.

Data protection, on the other hand, is the legal safeguarding of data against any loss, damage or corruption. As data is now collected at an unprecedented rate, there is a serious issue of protecting the data collected from unauthorised sources.

Evolution of data protection laws 

Data privacy is not a new concept. It has been in existence since the Semayne case of 1604, where it was accepted that the house of everyone is to him as his castle and fortress. The concept of privacy evolved thereafter and was again brought to attention through an article titled, “The Right to Privacy,” written by Attorney Mr. Samuel Warren and Justice Louis Brandeis, where protection of the  right to privacy was recognised as the foundation of individual freedom in the modern age. Later in 1984, privacy was recognised statutorily through the Universal Declaration of Human Rights (UDHR) by virtue of Article 12(4). Then came the Organisation for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD) guidelines on protection of privacy and transborder flow of personal data in 1980. Countries started framing their data privacy laws as early as Germany in the year 1970. The landmark General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) came into effect on May 25, 2018, revolutionising the data privacy and protection laws. 

In the Indian context, privacy has been a matter of debate in the judicial courts, with some addressing privacy as a fundamental right and others not admitting it as a right under Article 21 of our Constitution. Finally, in 2017, the celebrated case of K.S. Puttaswamy v. Union of India (2018) pronounced the right to privacy a fundamental right safeguarded under Article 21. We already had some broken parts of the Information Technology Act (2000), the Indian Penal Code (1860), etc. that dealt with the right to privacy. But there was the absence of a standalone, comprehensive law on the subject. Eventually, after seven years of making and three attempts to pass the privacy legislation, India adopted a full-fledged data protection and privacy law on August 9, 2023.

Role of Justice Sri Krishna committee in data protection laws

In the year 2017, the government of India, through its Ministry of Electronics and Information Technology, appointed a committee of ten members under the chairmanship of Justice B.R. Krishna (a retired Supreme Court judge). This committee was supposed to submit a detailed report on the introduction of the data privacy law in India. The committee finally submitted its report on the data protection framework on July 27, 2018.

  • The committee recommended a clear distinction between sensitive personal data and critical personal data and separate provisions for the collection and processing of different kinds of data. It was suggested that the term ‘personal data’ is any kind of data that allows identification of an individual, whether directly or indirectly. However, sensitive personal data is in relation to more intimate matters such as caste, religion and sexual orientation of a person. It was also made clear that the critical personal data should be processed in the centres that are located within the country only.
  • The reports suggested that there is a fiduciary relationship between the service provider and individuals whose data is collected. So, the service provider is always under an obligation to deal with the personal data of the individuals in a fair and transparent manner and also to give the individual notice of data collection at various points. Also, the service provider would be bound by the ‘purpose limitation principle’, which states that personal data should be collected only for limited, explicit and specified purposes.
  • The law was suggested not to have any retrospective effect and would be enforced for the future, but only in a structured manner.
  • The committee strongly suggested that the processing of personal data should have clear, specific and lawful purposes alone. The data should be processed only when it’s consented to by the individual. This consent may, at any time, be withdrawn by the individual.
  • A special mention was made in regard to the data on children. It said there needed to be stricter provisions for protection of their data.
  • It was also pointed out that there may be four situations in which non-consensual processing of data may be allowed. These are: 
  1. When the processing is relevant for the state in order to do its welfare functions.
  2. When it’s required to comply with the law or legal orders within India.
  3. When the processing is necessitated by the need to act upon it promptly.
  4. in the scenario of employment contracts as well.
  • The committee also put forth the idea that all organisations and firms that collect personal data should mandatorily appoint data protection officers. These officers would go on to become the main point of contact for the users who face any grievance in their data collection by the concerned company.
  • The committee also made a key recommendation of imposing higher penalties ranging from 2-4% of the company’s worldwide turnover or fines between Rs. 5 crore and Rs. 15 crore, whichever is higher.
  • Another highlight of the committee’s report was that the data protection law enacted would have jurisdiction over the processing of personal data when that data has been used, stored, disclosed, or collected anywhere in India; it doesn’t matter where the data is actually processed.
  • The report also suggested the setting up of a data protection authority that would be an independent regulatory body responsible for the enforcement and implementation of the data privacy law. This body would be responsible for conducting research and spreading awareness on the issues as well. Any decision rendered by this authority could be appealed against and heard by an appellate body.
  • It was also stated by the committee that there are certain rights of an individual, such as the right to access their data, to correct it, withdraw their consent, right to object to the data processing, right to be forgotten, etc.
  • As per the report of the committee, there would be amendments needed in laws such as the Information Technology Act, 2000; the Census Act, 1948; the Aadhar Act, 2016, Right to Information Act, 2005.

After receiving the recommendations of the committee and a draft privacy law bill, the bill remained in limbo. Its first draft was made public in July 2018 and then revised again in December 2019. The Bill was then referred to a joint parliamentary committee for its report, which submitted its report two years later, that is, in December 2021. Later, the government decided to withdraw the bill as there were too many proposed changes to be incorporated. Later in November 2022, the Ministry of Electronics and Information Technology released a draft bill for public consultations. Finally, in August 2023, the government introduced the Digital Personal Data Protection Bill, 2022. After much consultation and amendment, the Digital Personal Data Protection Bill of 2023 was finally passed and it received the President’s assent after six years. Throughout this span of six years, there were a total of five different versions of the bill, introducing some amendments to each one of the proposed legislations. Let’s take a look at how the Digital Personal Data Protection Act, 2023 (referred to hereinafter as the “DPDP Act”) differs from the committee’s recommendations:

  • It is claimed that the DPDP Act does little for the individuals concerned. It might be useful for government agencies and even for businesses but not for the individuals whose data is collected and processed.
  • The DPDP Act talks about only digital data and not data that’s stored in physical mode. The committee recommended that, irrespective of the format the data is stored in, it must be protected. Section 2 states its applicability. It states that the DPDP Act applies only in relation to the processing of digital personal data or data collected in digital form or non-digital data that is digitised subsequently.
  • Another weak point of the law as compared to the recommendations of the committee is that the DPDP Act exempts the government from its responsibilities under the Act. A privacy law will serve its purpose only when it is equally applicable to private individuals, entities and the government. Section 17(2) of the DPDP Act exempts the government from such obligations in the interests of sovereignty, integrity of India, security of the state, friendly relations with foreign states, maintenance of public order or to prevent commission of any cognizable offence, etc.
  • Not only that, it also states that the Central Government also has the power to exempt certain classes of Data Fiduciaries from the ambit of the DPDP Act, such as startups.
  • Moreover, analysing Section 18 of the DPDP Act, it becomes clear that the Data Protection Board in such a case becomes a ‘captive entity’ of the government and works directly under its direction. This abates the independence of the Board and affects its functioning.
  • Section 36 of the DPDP Act gives the Central Government an upper hand and allows it to call for any information that it may require. Provisions like these may hinder total security of fundamental right to privacy.
  • In addition to a number of rights recommended by the committee, a right to nominate has also been added to the final Act. Section 14 states that the Data Principal has the right to nominate any individual who would, in the event of his death or incapacity, exercise his rights in accordance with this DPDP Act.
  • The DPDP Act, through Section 33, states in detail about penalties. While deciding upon the penalties, the Data Protection Board may consider the nature and gravity of the breach, the type and nature of breach, repetitiveness, gains or losses from breach, etc. As per the schedule attached, these penalties may range from  Rs. 10,000  to Rs. 50 crore to Rs. 200 crore.

Need for data protection and data privacy laws in India

We cannot deny anymore that we live in a digital age where everything is on our screens. From our data to our currency, from movies and songs to shopping, every domain has been digitised. In such a digitalised world, information proves to be significant. In this age of digitalisation, when everything has been transported to our digital devices, our personal and non-personal information has also been transported. As a result, the perils to our data privacy have increased multifold. India is an economy that’s growing spontaneously and with that growth, the importance of our sensitive data has also been recognised. The introduction of strong data privacy laws in India has recently assumed more significance after the Puttaswamy decision, which held that the right to privacy is indeed a fundamental right. 

The need for data protection and privacy laws can be summarised as follows:

  • Provides for protection of personal and non-personal information of people- The data privacy laws are aimed at ensuring proper protection and security of the personal and non-personal information of citizens. These laws regulate how the information is collected and processed, the grounds of consent of the individuals, penalties in case the companies do not protect the data as required by the law, etc.
  • Builds stronger trust and confidence– These laws are also vital as they build a stronger foundation for trust and confidence amongst the people. When companies prioritise privacy of their users data and use their data scrupulously, it showcases their commitment to protecting their personal data, which in turn helps consumer build a better and stronger relationship with the concerned company.
  • Preserves right to privacy- As we have already mentioned, the Indian Constitution acknowledges the right to privacy of an individual as a fundamental right. This implies that every individual has a right to their own data. It allows them to decide how they want their data to be used and when they want to withdraw their consent or object to the processing of their data.
  • Increased digital footprints- India has a population of more than a billion people, and it’s no surprise that a significant part of the population is now connected to the internet. With the extensive use of social media such as YouTube, Instagram, Tik Tok, etc., people are leaving behind digital footprints all over the internet. If not handled correctly, this invites major digital data breaches where our personal data and history may be made public.
  • Lack of awareness- The sheer lack of understanding of data privacy in our nation also becomes another reason to bring up such a law. People use the internet all the time, but they don’t really understand the law behind it. They are unable to comprehend the consequences of their actions at the time. Once such a law is in place, there will be more awareness about the importance of privacy on digital platforms, and it will be easier to educate people about their rights and obligations while they are active on digital platforms.
  • Prevents data breaches, identity thefts, etc.- With the increasing number of people who have joined the digitisation process, there are higher chances of any offence being committed, such as, fraud, identity theft, data breaches, etc. The data privacy laws play a crucial role in putting such mechanisms in place that would help prevent these offences.
  • Promotes innovation and economic growth- A country with properly regulated data protection laws can promote a legal framework that balances the individual’s right to privacy with digital growth. With newer companies finding a place, data privacy will also find its pending significance. More nations and companies will consider investing in our companies if their data protection framework is strong.
  • Maintains the children’s privacy- Children as well have become more active on all the digital platforms, due to which the need for special laws and provisions to ensure the protection of their data is needed. The issues concerning their consent and their rights need special attention as they are quite different from the normal cases of data collection. A lot of games collect diverse personal information about kids easily in order for them to play their game and kids are unaware of the ramifications of the same. A proper law in place would make sure that not only such data is protected but also that there is more awareness about it.
  • Data ethics- These laws not only serve the purpose of data processing and collecting but also data ethics. Data ethics are the principles that ensure that the data collection and  strong processing are all based on ethical standards, there is fair and transparent data processing, and the processing is non-arbitrary and non-discriminatory.
  • Rights of the individuals- The data protection laws empower the individual in more than just one way. They get a right to know about their data, its collection, storage and transfer, and also get a right of redressal in case of any violation. They are properly compensated for any data breach. It sets up an effective grievance redressal mechanism and makes people aware of the rights they possess in relation to their data.
  • Facial recognition and surveillance- New technologies such as facial recognition and surveillance have time and again raised several concerns about the privacy of people’s data. These regulations address these concerns and ensure more responsible data collection by individuals. 

Data protection laws have assumed more and more significance throughout different territories of the world as more people have started engaging online. They need legislation that helps them place their trust and faith in the digital mediums. They need to know how and what data of theirs is collected, how it will be used, transferred, stored, disposed of, etc. Through these laws, they will be able to understand the privacy policies of the companies they are interacting with or purchasing products from.

In summary, data protection and privacy laws are of significance as they ensure that our data is kept safe in this digitalised world. Our data is immensely valuable and shouldn’t be misused or, in fact, used without our express consent. If any deviance happens, action would be taken in accordance with the data protection laws in place. However, if there’s no law in place, the offenders would go scot-free and our personal data would be out in the open. Moreover, the government generally possesses more of our data. Any data breach that occurs would put a lot of data in jeopardy. With these laws in place, not only private companies but also government departments and sectors would be bound by them.

Data protection and data privacy laws in India

Overview of the IT Act, 2000

The Information Technology Act came into effect in 2000 and was amended in 2008. Section 43A of the Act states that if a body corporate that is possessing, dealing or handling sensitive personal data or information of an individual is negligent in ensuring reasonable security in the process, which results in wrongful loss or damage, then such body corporate is liable to pay damages. Also, there are Information Technology (Reasonable Security Practices And Procedures And Sensitive Personal Data or Information) Rules, 2011, which deals with protection of sensitive personal data like: financial information, sexual orientation, medical records, etc. Section 72A of the IT Act provides punishment of a fine extending to Rs. 5,00,000 or imprisonment for a term extending to three years in case of disclosure of information, knowingly and intentionally, without the consent of the person concerned, violating the terms of a lawful contract.

Overview of the Digital Personal Data Protection Act, 2023

The DPDP Act is a recent piece of legislation for the processing of personal data in India. It was finally adopted almost six years after the Supreme Court recognised the fundamental right to privacy in Article 21. The DPDP Act is framed against the backdrop of privacy laws around the world, like the European Union’s GDPR, and thus deals with privacy and protection obligations concerning personal data. It is considered that the DPDP Act borrows some concepts directly from GDPR and has a wide range of applicability extending outside the territory. While on one hand, the Act imposes a stringent obligation for unlawful processing of personal data, on the other hand, there are significant exceptions for governmental bodies. The DPDP Act established a comprehensive framework for the processing of personal data and has replaced the limited provisions of the IT Act. Here are some important aspects of the DPDP Act:

  1. Bodies formed under the DPDP Act: The Act uses various terms, which can look confusing on the outset. It is important to understand the difference between the terms used like: Data processors, Data Fiduciaries, data principles, data controllers, etc. The person whose personal data is collected is called the data principal. The data fiduciary is body that determines the purpose and means behind processing of personal data. Their position is equivalent to that of a data controller.
  2. Exceptions allowed under the DPDP Act: Exceptions in the interest of sovereignty and integrity of India, security of state, friendly relations with foreign states, maintenance of public order and preventing incitement to commit offences are allowed under the DPDP Act.
  3. Applicability of the DPDP Act: The Act has extra-territorial application and has no restriction on international data transfers
  4. Grounds for lawful processing of personal data: Consent is the primary source for lawful processing of personal data. Also, Data Fiduciaries can identify a legitimate claim for lawful processing of data.
  5. Data subject rights and obligations: There are rights for the data principles, like the right to access, right to erasure, and the right to object and then there are also obligations, non compliance of which leads to fines and punishment.

Applicability of data protection and data privacy laws in India

The DPDP Act will apply to those organisations that meet the following conditions:

  • The organisation processes digital personal data that is capable of identifying the data principal to whom the collected data belongs.
  • The data being processed is collected by the organisation in digital form
  • The organisation is processing personal data within the Indian territory, or if processing of personal data is done outside India but processing is in connection with an activity offering the goods or services to individuals in India.

Data protection authorities under the DPDP Act

There are various terms used under the Act, which can be confusing. So, let’s understand the meaning of these terms:

  • Data fiduciary: Defined under Section 2(i) as any person who, alone or in conjunction with other persons, determines the purpose and means of processing personal data.
  • Data Principal: Defined under Section 2(j) as individual to whom the personal data relates and where such individual is-
  1. A child, includes parents or lawful guardians of such a child
  2. A person with a disability includes their lawful guardian acting on their behalf
  • Data Processor: Defined under Section 2(k) as any person who  processes personal data on behalf of a data fiduciary 
  • Data Protection Officer: Defined under Section 2(l) as an individual appointed by the Significant Data Fiduciary under Section 10(2)(a).
  • Consent Manager: Defined under Section 2(g) as one who enables Data Principals to give, manage and withdraw consent through an accessible, transparent and interoperable platform.
  • Significant Data Fiduciary: Defined under Section 2(z) as data fiduciary or class of Data Fiduciary who are notified by the Central Government under Section 10 of the Act.

Innovative facts about the DPDP Act

The DPDP Act is considered to be a transformative legislature, considering that protection of data and ensuring fundamental rights to privacy are sine qua non to our existence. Here are some interesting and innovative facts about the DPDP Act that make it even more imperative in today’s world:

  • The DPDP Act follows the concept of being SARAL, which means it uses simple, plain language, contains illustrations for better explanation, contains no provisos and has minimal cross referencing of provisions.
  • The DPDP Act is an indication of shift towards individuals capacity and authority to control, supervise and protect their personal data.
  • It also instils confidence in the security of data with Data Fiduciaries and ensures diligent processing of data with accountability of authorities.
  • The DPDP Act focuses on consent as an important ground for lawful processing of personal data, so it places high command in the judgement of the Data Principal. 
  • It also allows the Data Principal to rectify their incorrect or incomplete data so given or even withdraw their consent the moment they wish without facing any consequences for it.
  • The DPDP Act is revolutionary as it uses the word ‘she’ instead of ‘he’.
  • It makes all Data Fiduciaries accountable for acts where the data principal withdraws their consent; the previous bills were silent on it.

What is personal data

The term personal data is defined under Section 2(t) as any data about an individual that can identify him. Information such as the name, location, identification number, mental, economic, cultural, social and physical identity of a person is called personal data. There is no provision detailing what is included in personal data and what is not. 

Under the GDPR, Article 4 defines personal data as information that relates to the identifiability of a natural person, directly or indirectly. It doesn’t protect the data of unnatural persons; the DPDP Act specifically provides that the term person as defined under Section 2(s) includes a natural person, a company, a Hindu undivided family, a firm, an association of persons, State or every juristic person. Also, the GDPR focuses on the point of identifiability through data. It means that any piece of information that may be used to identify a person falls under the purview of personal data. This may also include telephone number, credit card number, identification number, address, appearance, number plate, fingerprints, etc.

Sensitive personal data

The term sensitive personal data means any identifiable data which can be considered sensitive to a person, like racial or ethnic origin, sexual orientation, biometric data, health related data, etc. The GDPR  distinguishes between personal data and sensitive personal data. Article 9 of the GDPR deals with the processing of sensitive personal data. In the Indian context, at present, the provisions regarding the processing of sensitive personal data are missing from the DPDP Act, 2023. 

The 2019 draft of the Personal Data Protection Bill, which included such provisions based on the recommendations of the Sri Krishna Committee, made a classification of data related to sex life, sexual orientation, transgender or intersex status, caste or tribe, religious or political belief or affiliation as sensitive personal data. The data is classified as sensitive personal data depending on factors like potential risk, expectation of confidentiality, potential to suffer significant harm, etc. When any data falls under any of these factors and is considered not safe to be revealed to the public, it is protected as sensitive personal data and is thus processed differently than personal data. 

Earlier, we had provisions specifically relating to sensitive personal data in the Personal Data Protection Bill, 2019 and also the IT (sensitive personal data) Rules, 2011. Section 43A of the IT Act, 2000 also allowed compensation due to negligence in the processing of sensitive personal data.

But the eventual DPDP Act, which came into force, surprisingly had no provision for sensitive personal data. There is no reference to the term in the whole Act, no definition, no processing guidelines and no compensation in case of any damage.

Key principles of data protection

With the unprecedented significance that data has taken in recent times, abiding by the principles that aim to protect data protection and privacy has become paramount. Let’s take a quick look at the indispensable principles governing data protection laws.

Data minimization

Considered to be one of the most crucial principles that aims to minimise data collection, this principle forms the bedrock of recent legal developments throughout the world. The purpose of the principle is to focus on the collection of the required data alone and disallow any such gathering if it has no purpose to serve. The reason behind this is that any unnecessary data increases potential societal risks and might breach an individual’s privacy. Following this approach, it’s significant for the data collectors to mention the reason for their data collection too, so that the data isn’t collected for one reason and then used for another without the valid consent of the data principle. This principle tries to strengthen the trust and faith posed by people in organisations that collect their personal data.

Valid consent

Consent is undoubtedly the cornerstone of any data collection. For the collection of private data by any person to be legit, it must be accompanied by a valid and express consent. The user can only give valid consent when they are not kept in the dark about the data collection, their usage, their rights, etc. Once the relevant information is given to them, only then can the data principles offer their explicit consent for any purpose. It is for this reason that most of the laws now have preferred opt in clauses over opt out clauses. 

It means that every individual has the power to select if they wish to share their information; their inaction doesn’t substitute for explicit consent. This promotes proper transparency between the concerned parties and allows users to make well-informed decisions about their information. This principle has recently been recognized in the recently enacted Indian privacy law in Section 4, to be read with Section 6. It states that the consent given should be a free, specific, informed and unambiguous indication of one’s wishes.

Lawful data collection

This principle states that the purpose of data collection should be lawful and fair. Whatever the reason for data collection, it should be legit and not contrary to the law. For example, data collection in furtherance of contractual purposes or legal obligations is considered lawful. The collection should not result in discrimination or any harm or injury to individuals. This doesn’t mean that only the purpose of collection should be lawful but also that the data collection should have strict adherence to local and global laws that may impact data collection. This data aims to promote ethical standards and practices that must be followed for data collection and processing. This principle also finds place in the Indian privacy law under Sections 4 and 7 of the DPDP Act. The Section explains that a lawful purpose means any purpose that’s not expressly forbidden by law.

Accuracy

The collected data should also be accurate and up to date. The data controller should make an effort to ascertain that the data collected, if inaccurate, must be corrected with regard to the purpose for which the data was collected. The data controller should take active measures to ensure that the information isn’t only correct but also complete and reliable. Any data collection can serve its true purpose only if the information is reliable and correct. This also means that the data should be verified time and again. There should be mechanisms in place to regularly review and update the information. Proper documentation of accuracy measures also must be maintained. Section 8 of the DPDP Act also states a similar principle. It states that the Data Fiduciary should make reasonable efforts to ensure its completeness, accuracy and constancy.

Limitations on the storage of the data

This principle makes sure that the data is collected only for a limited duration and isn’t kept for infinity. The data should be gathered, stored for minimum time and later disposed of safely. The data should not be kept for a time that’s longer than necessary so once the purpose for which the data was collected is fulfilled, the data should be accordingly disposed of. So, when the data has reached the end of its retention period, it can be disposed of using secure methods such as data shredding, encryption or other secure methods. The principle of data retention can be seen in Section 8 of the DPDP Act as well. It was mentioned that the Data Fiduciary shall delete the retained data when the consent for the same is withdrawn or when it serves the purpose for which it was collected.

Confidentiality

Confidentiality is considered one of the most vital principles governing data protection. It states that the personal data should be collected, stored and transferred in a manner that is confidential and prevents any unauthorised access. This principle doesn’t just mean that the Data Collector must be meticulous in data collection but should also maintain the security of the storage system. Using proper encryption, access and storage systems are major players in maintaining confidentiality. Not only that, it also ensures that the transfer of the data is secure and protected. A similar provision can be seen in Section 8 of the DPDP Act as well, which states a bunch of general obligations of the Data Fiduciary which are detailed below.

Accountability

Another principle that forms a very important facet of data protection law is the principle of governance and accountability. It refers to the obligation on the data collectors to establish a robust framework for data collection that not only outlines their receptibilities but also a system for grievance redressal. It mandates the appointing of data protection officers, conducting data protection assessments, and doing proper monitoring and auditing of the processing activities. All of these additional obligations of a data fiduciary can be noticed in Section 10 of the DPDP Act. Where the fiduciaries are expected to appoint data protection officers and independent data auditors, undertake data protection impact assessments, periodic audits and other measures.

To summarise, these principles of data protection and privacy in the digital age demand a more open and holistic approach. These principles are the pillars on which the laws of data protection stand strong and robust. As we delve deeper into technological advancements, relying on these principles becomes increasingly crucial. 

Rights of data principals

In this digital era, our data flows quite smoothly through different channels for different purposes, even if we are not aware of it. Data privacy laws fulfil quite an essential purpose in this situation, which is safeguarding the right to privacy of individuals. The individuals are generally referred to as the data subjects. As our societies become more and more reliant on digitalisation, there is a growing need to recognize certain principles that ensure that our data is treated carefully. These laws thus have a plethora of rights accorded to individuals for better handling and processing of their personal information. These rights may differ from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.  However, there are a few common rights that are provided under Chapter 3 of the DPDP Act, which include the following:

Right to information

Individuals have a right to be well informed about any collection, processing and storage of their personal data. They should know the purpose of the collection, the categories of data involved, the confirmation of the processing, a summary of the information collected or any other information such as the transfer of the data to any third parties as may be needed under the specific laws. This ensures better transparency in the data collection process, which is vital for individuals to gain trust in the companies that collect their data. Once people have this requisite information, they can exercise better control over their data. 

Right to access

The individuals also have a right to access their personal data, even when it has been collected by the organisation. This gives them power over their acquired data and ensures that the information they have collected is true and accurate. The companies that collect the personal data are obligated to give them access to their data, too, within a reasonable time period. This right doesn’t just guarantee them a right to get all the requisite information but also a copy of it. It gives the individual crucial information such as the purpose of data collection, categories of data, period for which it will be stored, if it’s used for automated processing, source of data collection, etc.

Right to rectify the information

The data subjects also have a right to correct the information if it is inaccurate or old. This right has been included in the DPDP Act under Section 12. It states that a data collector or fiduciary, as the Act provides, shall be bound to correct the incorrect or misleading personal data or complete any incomplete personal data. He is also bound to update any information that may be outdated. 

Right to be forgotten

The individuals also have a right to be forgotten, where they can claim that any information that pertains to them is deleted if it’s no longer necessary, if it has fulfilled the purpose that it was collected for, or when the consent has been withdrawn. This right directly links to the principle of data minimisation which states that less data should be collected from individuals and only that data must be collected that has a purpose to serve. These rights can be seen in Section 12 of the DPDP Act. It states that if a data fiduciary receives a request from the data principal to erase personal data that’s no longer necessary for the purpose, he must be removed unless its retention is necessary for some legal purpose. 

Right to data portability

The individuals have another right to request a copy of their personal data in a readable format that also allows them to transfer the data to another person. This right as well tries to uplift the rights and control of individuals over their own data so that they can facilitate the sharing of their data as per their needs and wishes.

Right to object to the processing of the data

The data subject also has the right to object to the processing of their data. If there are legit grounds to deny such processing, then they can object to the processing of the information. This right grants the individual ownership over their data so that they can curtail its access and limit unwanted users of their data. Their rights give a similar consequence to the case when the individual withdraws his/her consent. The reasons for such withdrawal should be accompanied by the objection application.

Data Protection Impact Assessment (DPIA)

The data privacy laws also provide for organisations to conduct data protection assessments for any activities that may pose a high threat to the privacy of individuals. These assessments are aimed at analysing the necessity, proportionality and compliance of the companies with the data privacy laws. By means of these assessments, companies that collect our data can take active measures to identify any data privacy risks and address those risks before they result in major breaches.

Right to lodge complaint

The individuals have a right to lodge complaints with the data protection authorities. In the DPDP Act, Section 13 grants the right of grievance redressal to individuals, where they can register their grievances with the Data Fiduciary. The DPDP Act also provides that if the data principal isn’t satisfied with the response of the data fiduciary, he may, within seven days, register a complaint with the Data Protection Board. Though the data protection laws grant individuals these rights, there are certain points that must be kept in mind while exercising these rights to reap their maximum benefits. While exercising these rights, you should act in a spontaneous manner, without any delay. Whenever your right arises, try exercising it as soon as possible. Sitting over your breaches creates an estoppel against you.

If you communicate with your data controller or fiduciary in reference to any of these rights, then that communication must be clear, concise and intelligible. Try keeping records of every communication and engagement with them. While exercising these benefits, keep proofs of your identity handy, as they may be required to confirm your identity. As the world delves deeper into digitalisation, these rights serve as the bedrock of a fair, accessible and transparent data system. It protects the individuals from various breaches and reinforces their faith in the collector and the system. It makes them more vigilant about their rights and how to exercise them. These rights have been designed in such a manner that they emphasise the privacy of an individual, help maintain their autonomy and also commit to a responsible culture of data collection. These rights undoubtedly help create a delicate balance between innovation, growth and individual autonomy.

Obligations and responsibilities of data fiduciary

A Data Fiduciary is an important part of the framework. They are responsible for non- compliance of legal provisions, for failure to perform duties assigned to the data principles, etc. Their obligations are covered under Chapter 2 of the DPDP Act and can be summarised as follows:

  • A Data Fiduciary may engage or appoint a Data Processor to process the personal data on its behalf for offering goods and services to the Data Principals.
  • A Data Fiduciary is under obligation to ensure that the data is complete, accurate and consistent when it is to be used to make a decision that affects data principal or is disclosed to another data fiduciary.
  • He must carry out his duties and responsibilities, irrespective of agreement to the contrary.
  • He shall adopt appropriate technical and organisational measures to make sure that there is effective observance of the provisions of this Act and its rules.
  • He shall protect personal data in his possession or under his control, which also includes processing undertaken by him or on his behalf by a data processor, by taking reasonable safeguards to prevent personal data breach.
  • When there is any data breach, the Data Fiduciary is under duty to give intimation regarding it to the Board and Data Principal in manner and form prescribed under the DPDP Act.
  • The Data Fiduciary shall erase personal data when the Data Principal withdraws consent or when it is reasonable to assume that the purpose specified is no longer being served, whichever is earlier, and make the Data Processor erase personal data made available by the Data Fiduciary. The exception is when retention of data is required under the law. For example: A decides to close her savings account with a bank. The bank is required by law to maintain the record of A’s identity for a term of ten years beyond closing of account. It is permissible to retain the data.
  • Data Fiduciary shall publish business contact information of the data protection officer or any person who is able to answer on behalf of data fiduciary about any questions raised by the data principal regarding processing of personal data.
  • Data Fiduciary shall also establish a mechanism for redressing grievances of the Data Principles.

There are also some additional obligations for the Significant Data Fiduciary given under Section 10 of the DPDP Act. The significant Data Fiduciaries are notified by the central government on the basis of assessments of factors such as:

  1. Volume and sensitivity of personal data processed
  2. Risks to the data principal
  3. Potential impact on the sovereignty and integrity of India
  4. Risk to electoral democracy
  5. Security of the state
  6. Public order.

The additional obligations of a significant Data Fiduciary include the following:

  • He shall appoint a Data Protection Officer who
  1. Shall represent the Significant Data Fiduciary under the provisions of the DPDP Act
  2. He should be based in India
  3. He should be an individual responsible to the Board of directors or similar governing body of Significant Data Fiduciary
  4. He should be the point of contact for the grievance redressal mechanism under the provisions of this Act
  • He shall appoint an independent data auditor to carry out the data audit and who shall evaluate the compliance of Significant Data Fiduciary with the Act
  • He shall undertake the following measures:
  1. Periodic data protection impact assessment
  2. Periodic audit
  3. Such other measures which are consistent with the provisions of the DPDP Act.

Grounds for collecting data

Section 4 of the DPDP Act provides for two basic grounds for collecting personal data, one is consent and the other is legitimate use. 

Consent 

Definition of consent 

Consent as a ground is also mentioned in the GDPR and Article 4 (11) defines consent as a freely given, specific, informed and unambiguous indication of an individual’s wishes by which they signify agreement to the processing of their personal data through a statement or clear affirmative action. Section 7(1) of the DPDP Act defines consent on quite similar lines and also adds the element of a specified purpose. It means that the purpose for which personal data is processed should be specified in the notice through which consent is sought.

Notice

Section 5 of the DPDP Act provides for the requirements for a notice. It states that every request made to a Data Principal under Section 6 for consent shall also be accompanied by a notice given by the Data Fiduciary with these essentials:

  • Information about the personal data and the purpose for which it is proposed to be processed,
  • Manner in which the Data Principal may exercise their rights under Sections 6 and 13’ and 
  • Manner in which the Data Principal may make a complaint to the Board, in such a manner and as maybe prescribed. 

The notice can be in electronic form, a separate document or part of the same document through which personal data is sought to be collected. 

Duty of Data Fiduciary

Article 7 of the GDPR and Section 7 of the DPDP Act both provide that in case any question of consent arises in any proceedings, the Data Fiduciary will be required to prove that he has provided appropriate notice and that consent has been obtained pursuant to the notice.

Withdrawal of consent

Under Section 6(4) of the DPDP Act, Data Principals have a right to withdraw consent anytime with ease, comparable to the ease of giving consent. Further, Section 6(5) provides that the consequences of such withdrawal are to be borne by the data fiduciary. Subsection (6) states that in cases where the data principal withdraws her consent, the data fiduciary shall, within a reasonable time, cease and desist from the processing of personal data of such principal. There is also a Consent Manager who will manage the process of withdrawal of consent.

Similarly, Article 7 of the GDPR provides for withdrawal of consent, but it doesn’t specifically state that the consequences of withdrawal are to be endured by the data fiduciary. So, it is considered to be fresh and required to take on responsibility for withdrawal of consent.

Consent Manager

The DPDP Act creates an important authority called the Consent Manager after the recommendation of the J. Sri Krishna committee. Section 2(g) defines the term as a person registered with the Data Protection Board who is the sole contact between the data principal and the data fiduciary for consent. His role is to enable an individual to give, manage, review and withdraw consent through a platform that is transparent, accessible and interoperable. It is not mandatory to appoint a consent manager under the Act. A data fiduciary may elect to appoint a consent manager to give, manage or withdraw consent. There is no set of obligations for consent managers; however, Section 40 provides that the Central Government has the power to make rules on it.

The Reserve Bank of India made Account Aggregators (AAs) in September 2021. These AAs are launched in order to facilitate the consented transfer of financial data between financial entities like banks or insurance companies. Their function is to manage the consent of the customers for the sharing of their financial data. Some people agree that the roles of AAs and consent managers are almost the same, except that they exist in different fields. 

There are three entities in the framework for consent managers. 

  • Information providers: These are the original custodians of data who collect and store data of individuals.
  • Information users: These are entities that require data from the Data Principals in order to provide certain services.
  • Consent managers: These entities facilitate consent for the sharing of personal data. 

The process begins with the Data Principals selecting information for users to opt for a service. The information user then sends an electronic data transfer request to the Consent Manager. Once reviewed and consented to, the Consent Manager will intimate it to the information provider, who then transfers the data to the information user in encrypted form.

Legitimate use 

The second ground for lawful processing of data, as given in Section 4 of the DPDP Act, is that of legitimate use. Section 7 provides details on the concept by listing out the legitimate uses of the data collected:

  1. Voluntary giving of data: The data can be collected for a specific purpose for which the Data Principal has voluntarily provided personal data to the Data Fiduciary, and where it is not indicated by the Data Principal that she does not consent to use of personal data. For example: When A goes to a pharmacy, he voluntarily gives his personal data while making payment for the purchase or if A contacts B, a real estate broker, to find a suitable accommodation, he shares his personal data for this purpose. It is said that A has voluntarily given personal data in such scenarios.
  2. State and its instrumentalities: The State and its instrumentalities can collect the data for providing benefits, services, certificates, licences, subsidies or permits in these cases:
  • If Data Principal has previously consented to the processing of personal data by the state or its instrumentalities
  • Such personal data is available in digital form or in non-digital form and digitised subsequently from database, register, book or other document maintained by the state or its instrumentalities.

For example: A is a pregnant woman who enrols herself on a website to avail herself of the government’s maternity benefits scheme and thus consents to sharing her personal data. The government may process her personal data to determine if she is eligible for the benefit.

  1. Performance of legal obligation: Another legitimate use mentioned is when the State and its instrumentalities have to perform any function under law for time being in force in India or in interest of sovereignty and integrity of India or the security of India.
  2. In accordance with disclosure provisions: Personal data can also be collected for fulfilling an obligation under law for the time being in force on any person to disclose information to the state or its instrumentalities, subject to it being in accordance with provisions for disclosure of information in any other law for time being.
  3. Compliance with the court’s order: It is permissible to collect personal data to comply with the judgement, order or decree issued under any law for time being in force in India, or any judgement or order that is related to claims of a contractual or civil nature under any law for time being in force outside India.
  4. Medical emergency: Personal data is permitted to be collected in cases of medical emergencies that may involve a threat to life or an immediate threat to the health of the data principal or any other individual.
  5. Medical treatment: Also, other than collecting personal data for the purpose of a medical emergency, it can be allowed to take measures to provide medical treatment or health services to any individual during epidemic, outbreak of disease or any other threat to public health.
  6. Ensuring safety: Personal data is allowed to be collected for taking measures to ensure safety, providing assistance or providing services to any individual during a period of disaster or breakdown of public order.
  7. Employment: The last legitimate use for collecting data is for the purpose of employment or safeguarding employers from loss or liability. For example: prevention of corporate espionage, maintenance of confidentiality of trade secrets and intellectual property, or providing benefits sought by the data principal who is an employee, etc.

Processing personal data of children

When the data principal is a child, it also includes their parents or lawful guardian; similar is the case for persons with disabilities. A minor or person with special abilities cannot consent to the processing of their personal data. It is essential in such cases for the Data Fiduciary to obtain the verifiable consent of the parent or guardian under Section 9 of the DPDP Act. It also provides that a Data Fiduciary shall not undertake any processing of personal data that is likely to cause detrimental effects on the well-being of a child. He shall also not undertake tracking or behavioural monitoring of children or targeted advertisements directed at children. 

Data Protection Board of India

Chapter 5 of the DPDP Act deals with the Data Protection Board of India (DPBI). Section 18 establishes DPBI by the Central Government. It shall be a body corporate with perpetual succession and a common seal that can contract, sue or be sued. 

Composition and term of Board

The Board comprises a Chairperson and other members as notified by the Central Government. In order to be eligible, the Chairperson and other members shall be persons of ability, integrity and standing who have special knowledge or practical experience in the field of data governance, administration or implementation of laws that relate to social or consumer protection, dispute resolution, information and communication technology, digital economy law, regulation or techno-regulation or in any other field that, in the opinion of the Central Government, may be useful to the Board and at least one among these people must be an expert in the field of law. The term of the Chairperson and other members is two years, and they are eligible for re-appointment.

Powers of the Chairperson

By virtue of Section 26, the Chairperson shall have the following powers:

  • He can exercise general superintendence and give direction with respect to all administrative matters of the Board.
  • He can authorise any officer of the Board to scrutinise any intimation, complaint, reference or correspondence addressed to the Board.
  • He can authorise performance of any functions of the Board, conduct its proceedings by an individual member or group of members and allocate proceedings among them.

Powers and functions of the Board

Section 27 of the DPDP Act details the powers and functions of the Board, in the following manner:

  • On getting intimation of any personal data breach, under Section 8(6), the Board shall direct urgent remedial or mitigation measures, inquire about such personal data breach and impose penalties as provided.
  • When a complaint is made by a Data Principal regarding personal data breach, or breach in observance by Data Fiduciary of its obligations, or reference is made by Central Government or State Government, or in compliance with court’s orders, to inquire about such breach and impose penalty accordingly.
  • When a complaint is made by the Data Principal for breach of obligations by the consent manager, then the Board has to inquire into such breach and impose a penalty as per the provisions of the Act.
  • On getting intimation of breach of any condition from Consent Manager, the Board will inquire into breach and impose penalty.
  • In case of reference made by the Central Government regarding the breach of Section 37(2), the Board will inquire into it and impose a penalty.

It also further clarifies that for the effective discharge of its functions, the Board shall give the person concerned the opportunity of being heard and record its reasons in writing, and then it shall issue such directions as considered necessary. Such direction can be modified, suspended, withdrawn or cancelled by the Board on a representation made by such person and also impose conditions for it.

Exemptions

Section 17 of the DPDP Act deals with exemptions by stating that Chapter II (obligations of data fiduciary) shall not apply in these cases:

  • The processing of personal data is necessary to enforce any legal right or claim.
  • The processing of personal data is required in accordance with a Court’s or tribunal’s order entrusted with performance of any judicial, quasi-judicial or regulatory or supervisory function.
  • The processing of personal data is done in the interests of prevention, detection, investigation or prosecution of any offence or contravention of any law for time being in force in India.
  • When processing of personal data relates to the Data Principals not within the territory of India in accordance with a contract entered into with any person outside the territory of India by any person based in India.
  • When processing is necessary for a compromise, arrangement, merger or amalgamation of two or more companies or reconstruction by way of demerger or otherwise of a company or transfer of undertaking of one or more companies or involving division of one or more companies approved by court, tribunal or other authority competent to do so by any law for time being in force.
  • When processing is necessary for the purpose of ascertaining the financial information and assets and liabilities of any person who has defaulted in payment due to account of a loan or advance taken from a financial institution, subject to provisions relating to disclosure of information.

Further, Section 17(2) provides when the provisions of this Act shall not apply, for instance:

  • Processing of personal data by an instrumentality of the State as Central Government notifies in the interest of sovereignty and integrity of India, friendly relations with foreign states, maintenance of public order or preventing incitement to any cognizable offence relating to any of these and processing by the Central Government of any personal data that such instrumentality may furnish.
  • Processing of personal data is necessary for research, archiving or statistical purposes if the personal data is not to be used to make specific decisions by Data Principal.

Important cases 

Though now we recognise the right to privacy as the bedrock of our democracy, it wasn’t always the case. The Indian jurisprudence has developed a lot throughout the years. The Supreme Court of India, through a slew of landmark decisions, has allowed the organic growth and expansion of the right to privacy. Let’s take a look at the legal development of the right throughout the years:

  • M.P. Sharma v. Satish Chandra (1954): It is one of the first cases in India that dealt with the right to privacy in India. An eight judge bench of the highest court of the land sat down to decide upon the constitutionality of the search and seizure provisions of the Code of Criminal Procedure. The Court here doesn’t recognise any right to privacy and held that the search and seizures weren’t, in fact, violative of the right to privacy. As there is no provision in the Indian Constitution that deals with the right to privacy, it can’t be violated as well. 
  • Kharak Singh v. State of UP (1962): Another case where the Apex Court decided in relation to privacy rights. The Court examined the wide powers of police surveillance and its overarching powers in relation to privacy. Here, the Court for the first time, was faced with issues pertaining to the right to privacy as a part of Article 21. The court didn’t explicitly recognise any right to privacy, but J. Subba Rao stated in his dissent that the right to privacy is inherent in our Constitution. This famous dissent helped initiate the growth of the right to privacy. 
  • Gobind v. State of MP (1975): This is the decision where the Supreme Court was again faced with a similar question of right to privacy. The facts of the case were such that it dealt with police surveillance by domiciliary visits. The Supreme Court recognised the significance of the right to privacy but said that it should give way to a larger state interest. It states that the right to privacy has its own set of restrictions, such as public order, morality, national security, etc.
  • In the decision of Maneka Gandhi v. Union of India (1978): The Hon’ble Court, speaking through a bench of seven judges, said that the term ‘personal liberty’ includes a variety of rights within its ambit. The rights so recognised must fulfil the triple test, that is, they must prescribe a procedure; that procedure must follow the test of fundamental rights under Article 19 and also withstand the tests of Article 14.
  • Another landmark decision pertaining to the matter was that of People’s Union of Civil Liberties v. Union of India (1996).This decision rendered in 1997 was decided in favour of the right to privacy of an individual. The case centred around telephone tapping of people without their consent and whether doing so infringed on their right to privacy. It was a PIL filed against rampant phone tapping by the CBI. The Court disallowed such phone tapping without consent, stating that it is an important facet of Article 21. The Court declared that doing so amounts to a rather serious infringement of the right to privacy. In declaring the same, the Court marked an important step in the journey of protection of the right to privacy. 
  • Another popular case is that of R. Rajagopal v. State of Tamil Nadu (1994), where the Apex Court  recognised the right to privacy of prisoners as well. More popular than the ‘Auto Shankar case’, it allowed the prisoner the right to publish his autobiography without any restrictions. In declaring the same, the court emphasised on the right to be left alone and, more particularly, to be in jail. This also includes an individual’s right to control the dissemination of information regarding their private life and the power to control any unwarranted intrusion into their rights.
  • Mr. X v. Hospital Z (1998) was another case where the court was faced with a clash between two different fundamental rights: the right to privacy on the one hand and the right to public morality on the other. The appellant was a patient whose diseases were announced in public by the hospital. The Court recognised the right to privacy in such circumstances, stating that every person has a right to life and a healthy lifestyle under Article 21. It was mentioned that disclosure of even true private facts has the capability of breaching someone’s peace of mind and privacy.
  • Such another case is that of District Registrar and Collector, Hyderabad v. Canara Bank (2004), where the Hon’ble Court rules on the significance of financial privacy of an individual. It stated that the right to privacy also extends to maintaining the confidentiality of bank account details and related information as well. This decision basically widened the scope of the right to privacy and also covered the financial aspects of the right.
  • The Naz Foundation v. Government of NCT of Delhi (2009) decision that was given by the Delhi High Court turned out to be a significant development on the issue of consensual homosexuality. The Court gave its verdict on the validity of Section 377 of the Indian Penal Code, 1860. The Court ruled that Article 21 also protects a person’s right to become whoever he wants and to remain himself. They said that all individuals need a place of sanctuary where they can be free from societal expectations. Then this case was overturned by the Court. However, in Navtej Singh Johar v. Union of India (2018), the Apex Court through a five judge Bench, unanimously struck down Section 377 of the IPC to the extent  that it criminalised the same -sex relations between two consenting adults. In doing so, it was declared that the State can’t intrude into one’s choice of partner, personal intimacy or love. The right to privacy is a fundamental right and the right to sexual orientation is an intrinsic part of that right.
  • The case of Selvi & Ors v. State of Karnataka (2010), also serves as a crucial stepping point in the growth of privacy as a fundamental right. The Supreme Court here made a distinction between physical and mental privacy. The Court here decided that no individual should be forced to take any tests, such as narcotics or polygraph tests, against their own consent, as allowing that amounts to an intrusion into one’s personal space and liberty.
  • Even though in most of the cases, courts didn’t explicitly recognise the right to privacy, the highest court of the country ruled in favour of the existence of the right in the landmark decision of K.S. Puttaswamy v. Union of India (2018).The decision delivered in 2018 by a 9 judge bench read the right to privacy within the ambit of Article 21, which is the right to life and liberty. In declaring that the right to privacy is intrinsic to life and personal liberty, the Court overruled earlier decisions of MP Sharma and Kharak Singh that held that privacy wasn’t protected as per the Indian constitution. The Bench declared the following in the decision:
  1. The recognition of the right to privacy in no way means amending the Constitution or granting a new freedom; it is just the interpretation of already existing provisions.
  2. Privacy aims to protect personal intimacies, sanctity of personal life, marriage, reproduction, sexual orientation, etc. 
  3. Privacy also means the right to be left alone.
  4. Just because a person sets out his foot in a public place doesn’t mean he surrenders all his rights to privacy. It is attached to a person, no matter where he is or goes.
  5. The Constitution must be interpreted liberally to allow growth and development with technological changes.
  6. However, even though the right to privacy is a basic right, it’s not an absolute right. Like every other fundamental right, it also has a set of reasonable restrictions imposed upon its usage.
  7. Privacy has both positive and negative connotations. The negative part restricts the state from doing any act that may violate an individual’s right to privacy and the positive connotation denotes the proactive duty imposed on the state to protect the right to privacy.
  8. The recognition of the right to privacy as a fundamental right protects the inner sphere of an individual from interference by state and non-state actors.
  9. The right to privacy can’t be denied, even if there’s a tiny fraction of people who are affected by it.
  • Unique Identification Authority of India v. Central Bureau of Investigation (2014): The court in this fascinating case decided on the issue of whether collection of biometrics by the UIDAI without the consent of the person violated the right to privacy. The court upheld the constitutionality of the Aadhar but also imposed certain restrictions on the data collection to allow people to safeguard their privacy. The decision assumes even more significance as it tries to maintain a delicate balance between the aim of the government with that of an individual’s privacy rights.
  • The significance of the right to privacy can also be seen in the decision of Joseph Shine v. Union of India (2018), where the Apex Court decriminalised adultery mentioned in Section 497 of the IPC. Justice Chandrachud, writing the concurring opinion on the subject matter, stated that Section 497 criminalises adultery that was put in place to reinforce the idea that in marriage, a woman loses her autonomy and agency. She loses her own identity and is restricted to the patriarchal norms of society. J. Chandrachud employed the concept of right to privacy in deciding to decriminalise adultery as an offence.  
  • In a recent case of X v. The Principal Secretary, Health and Family Welfare Department, Govt. of NCT of Delhi & Anr. (2022), rendered by the Apex Court, the reproductive autonomy of an unmarried woman was upheld. As per the facts of the case, the Bench permitted a 25 year old woman to undergo abortion as her right to bodily autonomy is guaranteed in Article 21 of the Constitution. The right to privacy enables a person to exercise bodily autonomy under Article 21.
  • In a case, more popularly titled as, the Hadiya marriage case (2018), the Apex Court noted that an individual’s right to marry a person of one’s choice is a part of her privacy and that the state has no role and no power in interfering with the right. It was held that the right to privacy also includes an essential aspect of making decisions on close matters of one’s life.
  • Internet Freedom Foundation v. Union of India (2019): Considered to be another landmark decision in the realm of the right to privacy, the case dealt with the issue of internet shutdowns and how they impact the right to privacy. The Supreme Court held that the suspension of internet services is against our fundamental rights and must not be permitted unless they adhere to the principles of necessity and proportionality.

The cases mentioned above highlight the evolution of the right to privacy in the Indian context. These decisions reflect how the right to privacy has adjusted to different societal concerns, technological advancements and constitutional values. As can be seen from the start, there was indeed an absolute resistance to recognise the right to privacy, as it didn’t find an explicit place in the Indian constitution. But overtime, the judiciary, speaking through different Benches, underlines the role of the right to privacy in one’s right to life and personal liberty enshrined under Article 21. It can’t be doubted that as we go forward, there will emerge more and more technological challenges and to face them head on, these decisions will go a long way in guiding us towards a better and more secure future.

Penalties and fines for violating data protection laws

Chapter 8 of the DPDP Act deals with penalties and adjudication. Section 33 provides that the Board will impose a monetary penalty after concluding an inquiry on the breach of provisions of this Act and after giving the person concerned a reasonable opportunity of being heard. In order to decide the amount of the monetary penalty, the Board shall consider the following factors:

  • Nature, gravity and duration of the breach.
  • Type and nature of the personal data affected by the breach.
  • Repetitive nature of the breach.
  • Whether the person, due to consequences of such breach, has gained or avoided any loss.
  • Whether the person concerned took any action in order to mitigate the effect and consequences of the breach, and timeliness and effectiveness of such action.
  • Whether the monetary penalty to be imposed is proportionate and effective considering the need to ensure observance of provisions and to have a deterrent effect.
  • Considering the likely impact of the imposition of a monetary penalty on the person concerned.

Further, the amount of compensation is provided under Schedule 1, as follows:

Subject matterSection of the DPDP ActPenalty
Failure to take reasonable security safeguards to prevent personal data breachSection 8 (5)May extend to Rs. 250 crores
Failure to notify the board and affected Data Principals of a personal data breachSection 8 (6)May extend to Rs. 200 crores
Non- fulfilment of additional obligations in relation to processing of data of children Section 9May extend to Rs. 200 crores
Non- fulfilment of additional obligations of significant data fiduciarySection 10May extend to Rs. 150 crores
Violation of user dutiesSection 15May extend to Rs. 10,000
Breach of any term of voluntary undertaking accepted by the boardSection 32Up to an extent applicable for beach in respect of proceedings were instituted under Section 28
For all other non compliance under the ActEvery other sectionMay extend to Rs. 50 crores

Is the DPDP Act adequate in Indian landscape 

The DPDPA, the first ever domestic data privacy legislation, took more than six years to make. It is a set of robust provisions focused on granting the right to privacy to individuals within India. The Act is a sincere effort to construct comprehensive and detailed legislation that leaves no stone unturned in this battle of privacy. The DPDP Act has been initiated with promising momentum, showcasing these key features:

  • The scope of the DPDP Act is pretty wide, and it even has extra-territorial application as it is applicable when the data is processed beyond India if it relates to goods or services within India.
  • It provides a comprehensive definition of personal data—that’s any data that pertains to an identifiable individual. Not only that, the Act has widened the scope of the data principal and now it also includes parents, lawful guardians of children, and persons with disabilities as well.
  • The DPDP Act has a separate provision for dealing with the processing of personal data about children. It states that before doing so, it requires consent of the lawful guardian.  The Data Fiduciary shall not undertake any processing of data that may cause a detrimental effect on the well-being of the child. Also, they shall not undertake tracking or behavioural monitoring of data or targeted advertising directed at the children.
  • The DPDP Act accommodates start-ups and creates an exemption for them. This way, it recognises the issues faced by these start-ups in implementing this dynamic legislation to motivate creativity and innovation.
  • The DPDP Act has separate provisions for stating the obligations imposed on the Data Fiduciaries such as implementing the provisions of this Act, implementing reasonable security measures to prevent any breach, giving of notice for consent, etc.
  • The DPDP Act has granted the Data Principal a slew of rights that they can exercise in relation to their data. These rights include the right to access information, right to correct data, complete data, right to nominate and right to grievance redressal, etc.
  • The Act requires consent to allow processing and collection of personal data. In case of processing of personal data in relation to a child, it calls for verifiable parental consent. This consent must be free, specific, informed, unconditional and unambiguous. This consent can later be withdrawn as well. Moreover, the Act imposes a duty on the data fiduciary to provide a detailed notice to the data principal either during or before seeking consent. This notice should explain what data is collected and for what purposes, description of their rights and grievance redressal.
  •  The DPDP Act also introduced the concept of consent managers. These managers are the ‘managers’ of consent and act as intermediaries for consent collection, modifications and revocation.
  • The DPDP Act makes a distinction between data fiduciary and a significant data fiduciary. This distinction is based on a number of factors, such as data volume, sensitivity, risk involved, security, etc. These significant Data Fiduciaries have additional obligations, such as having to appoint data protection officers, conduct data protection impact assessments and undergo periodic compliance audits.
  • The DPDP Act introduces Data Protection Boards. It sets out the framework for the constitution of the board, qualifications of the members, salary and allowances given to the members, cases where they may be disqualified, resignation by members, etc. This board has the power to take urgent remedial or mitigation measures in cases of breach of personal data, initiate inquiry in cases, impose penalties, etc. The Act declares the board to be an independent body that would function as a digital office.
  • The DPDP Act furthermore states that in a case where the complaint may be resolved through mediation, then the board has the power to direct the parties to attempt a resolution that they want.

Criticism of DPDP Act

While initially, the DPDP Act seems like a commendable effort to acknowledge privacy and its allied rights, in reality, it has more gaps than the significant void that existed in its absence. It’s imperative to take a look at these shortcomings:

  • It deals only with digital data or non-digital data that is digitised later, but not otherwise. This means that the Act has a biassed application and would protect your right to privacy only when that data is in digital format somewhere and not when it is offline.
  • The DPDP Act doesn’t make categories of data such as sensitive data, critical personal data, etc. These distinctions were introduced in the bill of the Act but were later removed. This alteration is definitely a huge setback for privacy rights. The more serious and private the data, the more robust it should be. However, the Act fails to recognise that.
  • The DPDP Act has significant exemptions, and it’s not just limited to start-ups to promote innovation and growth; these exemptions also cover government and other government instrumentalities that result in unrestricted and unchecked power with the government to collect and process data.
  • Another criticism that the DPDP Act faced is that it curtails access to information under the Right to Information Act. Section 8 of the RTI Act provides for an exemption clause where personal information is exempt from disclosure if it has no relation to public activity. However, the DPDP Act exempts all personal information from disclosure. This goes to strike at the very root of transparency and accountability in the system.
  • Though the DPDP Act provides for a separate provision for data transfer, it doesn’t do much to protect the data from breaches that may arise at the time of transfer. In reference to the cross border transfers, the Act states that the Central Government has the power to restrict it. Following this approach, not enough protection is granted to the personal data of an individual through the Act.
  • Another serious concern raised in the Act was the issue of the independence of the Data Protection Board. The Act states it to be an independent body, but considering the term of the appointment and the role of the government in its functioning, it’s hard to accept that the board would be independent.
  • The success of the DPDP Act depends on people’s awareness about their rights and duties. They should be aware about the significance of their personal data, how it is collected and processed and how to redress their grievances as well. The Act is a new addition to the Indian privacy landscape and not a lot of people are aware of its existence and how it works. There is no provision in the legislation that imposes an obligation on the concerned Government or the Data Protection Board to sensitise people about their data and their rights.

The DPDP Act marks a historic step in the battle to safeguard our right to privacy. It addresses the gigantic chasm that existed before the Act. Its comprehensive provisions demonstrate a sincere attempt at addressing the growing concerns of the digital age. The Act has promising features, as discussed above. It can’t be denied that the Act also comes with a few concerns. The Act’s limitation to only digital data, lack of distinction between categories of data, and exemption of the government from its applicability raise concerns about its fairness. 

Comparison of DPDPA with GDPR

The General Data Protection Regulation, more popularly referred to as the GDPR, is touted as one of the most robust data privacy legislation that there is. It is the privacy legislation of the European Union and was made effective on May 25, 2018.

The GDPR and the DPDP Act are pretty comprehensive legislations that have quite a few similarities between them. The provisions that are similar in both of them are as follows:

Provisions General Data Protection Regulation(GDPR)Digital Personal Data Protection Act (DPDPA)
Personal dataArticle 4(1) of the GDPR defines the term personal data as any information that may directly or indirectly relate to an identified natural person.Section 2(t) of the DPDP Act defines personal data as any data by the virtue of which an individual may be identified.
ExtentArticle 3 of the regulations spells out the applicability of the GDPR to establishments even outside the European Union. It states that when these organisations target citizens of the European Union, they will be governed by the GDPR even if they are not themselves based in the EU. Also, the GDPR has extra territorial jurisdiction and applies in respect of European citizens, residents and institutions that have a presence in the EU.But it also must be noted that, pursuant to Section 3, the Act is applicable to digital data alone and not for offline personal data or non-automated processing of personal data.
Data collection and processingArticle 5 of the GDPR requires that the personal data of an individual be collected only for lawful, fair and transparent reasons. Furthermore, Article 6 states the situations in which the processing would be considered to be lawful. These are as follows:When the data subject has given consent for the processing of their personal data.When the processing is necessary for the performance of the contract.When processing is necessary for compliance with legal obligations to which the data controller is bound.When processing is necessary to protect the vital interests of the data subject.When processing is necessary for the performance of tasks carried out in the public interest pursued by the controller.Section 4 of the Act states that for any processing of the data to be in accordance with the Act, it needs to be done for lawful purposes for which the data principal has given consent.Section 5 requires a notice to be given to the Data Principal regarding what information about him is being collected and for what purposes.As per Section 7 of the Act, the Data Fiduciary may process the personal data of the data principal if voluntary consent has been provided in respect of the same or for the state to issue or provide to the Data Principal subsidy, benefit, licence or permit as prescribed under the Section or for the performance of functions of the state under any law for the first time, or fulfilling obligations under any law for the time being in force in India, for compliance with any judgement or decree or order issues under any law for the time being in force, for responding to a medical emergency, for taking measures to ensure safety or to provide assistance to individuals during any disaster.
Data minimization The principle of data minimization was introduced for the first time in the GDPR. It states that the personal data collected shall be adequate, relevant and limited to what is actually necessary and in relation to the purpose of the collection. The same can be seen in Article 5 of the GDPR.There is no similar provision to be seen in this Act.
Consent GDPR predominantly relies on consent to verify if data has been collected and processed lawfully or unlawfully. Consent in these cases would be considered valid only when it’s freely given, clear, affirmative and capable of easy withdrawal.It does have a provision to withdraw consent at any point and it finds its place in Article 7 of the GDPR.Section 7 of the Act elaborates on the requirements of valid consent. Here as well, the consent seems to be freely given, informed, specific, and unambiguous, and it must indicate the data principal’s wishes regarding the processing of the data.
Rights of individualsThe GDPR was the very first legislation that accorded rights to data subjects.As per the regulations, the following rights have been granted to the data subjects:Article 15 grants the data subjects the right to request information from the data controller about what personal information has been collected and how it will be used or processed.Article 16 provides the right to rectify any inaccurate or incomplete data.Article 17 of these regulations allows the data subjects to erase their personal data when it is no longer required and has served the purpose for which it was collected.The right to restrict the processing of personal data has been enshrined in Article 18.By virtue of Article 20, the people also have a right to request a copy of their personal data, and that too in a readable format.As per Article 21 of the regulations, the data subjects can also object to the processing of their personal data.Following the path of the GDPR, the DPDP Act has granted people a bunch of rights. Though not all of them, a few of them, such as:Section 11 of the Act grants the Data Principal’s right to information about their personal data. He has a right to obtain information about the processing of his personal data, summary of the data being processed, categories of data shared or other information as needed.Section 12 provides for the right to correct and erase personal data when it’s no longer required or for the purpose for which it was collected. The data principal can correct the misleading data, complete any incomplete personal data or even update the data.Section 13 states the right to avail grievance redressal as soon as possible.Section 14 of the Act provides for the right to nominate. It states that the Data Principal has a right to nominate any other individual who, in case of his death or incapacity, may exercise his rights in accordance with the Act.
Assessment Article 35 of the GDPR provides for a data protection impact assessment.It states that if any business does any work that involves a high risk to data privacy, then they need to conduct a data protection impact assessment. It is mandatory when the business is involved in automated decision making, or is processing special categories of information or criminal records or is monitoring in a public area.As per Section 10, not every Data Fiduciary is required to appoint a data protection officer. Only a Significant Data Fiduciary is required to go through the process of appointing a Data Protection Officer. To decide what constitutes Significant Data Fiduciary, these have to be considered:Volume and sensitivity of personal dataRisk of harm to the data principalPotential impact on the sovereignty and integrity of IndiaRisk to electoral democracySecurity of the statePublic ordersOr other factors as it may consider necessaryThese data protection impact assessments are essentially a process that describes the purpose, harm, measures taken to manage the risk, etc. 
Role of data controllerArticle 24 of the regulations states that a data controller has the responsibility of ensuring compliance with the GDPR.Article 25 similarly imposes a duty on the data controller to ensure that he uses adequate data protection measures and safeguards to protect the data of the data subjects.Section 8 of the DPDP Act prescribes the general obligations of the data fiduciary. He is obligated to protect the personal data and take reasonable security safeguards to prevent any breach of the data. He is bound to appoint a data processor. In case any breach of the personal data occurs, he is also meant to give notice of such breach to the Board in the manner and form as prescribed.
Penalties In case organisations do not comply with the regulations, they can be fined up to 4% of their global turnover or €20 million, whichever is greater.As per Section 33 of the DPDP Act, the data protection authority can impose penalties on organisations if they fail to comply with the Act. This penalty may be up to 5% of their annual turnover or Rs. 500 crores, whichever is higher. While determining the amount of the monetary penalty, the Board will consider these:Nature and gravity of breachType and nature of the personal data affected by the breachRepetitive nature of the breachGain or loss from the breachWhether the penalty is proportionate and effective or notLikely impact of the monetary penalty on the person

It can be safely said that both of these legislations work on similar patterns on the major vital areas such as consent, personal data, processing and collection of personal data, data protection impact assessment, penalties, etc. However, there are a few provisions that differ in both the legislations as well. These are as follows:

  • The GDPR has different categories of personal data; however, the DPDP Act applies the same way to all the data. There is no categorization as such. Article 9 of the GDPR is about the processing of special categories of data, while Article 10 is about then processing of personal data in relation to criminal offences.
  • As per the GDPR, a notice is required to be given to the data subject regarding the processing of their personal data. The notice requirements aren’t linked only to the consent of the individual. The details provided to the data subject in that notice are much wider in ambit. In the DPDP Act, notice must contain the requisite information that allows the person to exercise their consent.
  • Unlike the GDPR, DPDP Act also lists out duties of the Data Principals, not just their rights. These duties include the following:
  1. To comply with the provisions of all the applicable laws for the time being in force.
  2. To ensure not to impersonate another person while providing their personal data
  3. To not suppress any material information while giving the personal data
  4. To not register a false or frivolous complaint with the data fiduciary or the Board
  5. To furnish the information that’s authentic
  •  The right to nominate isn’t seen in GDPR, which allows a person to nominate another person to exercise rights under the law in case of the death or incapacity of the data principal.
  • The GDPR has more stringent requirements for the transfer of personal data outside the EU. However, the provisions for out of border transfers in the DPDP Act are not that strict. Section 16 of the DPDP Act states that the central government shall have the power to restrict the cross-border transfers. However, Section 17 grants the exemptions to above stated provision. These exemptions may include the processing of personal data for enforcement of legal claims or rights; processing of personal data by court or tribunal; if it’s in the interests of prevention, detention, etc., it’s necessary for a scheme of compromise, arrangement, merger or amalgamation of two or more companies; or its necessary for ascertaining financial information and assets and liabilities of a person.
  • While the GDPR also applies to offline personal data, the DPDP Act protects only digital data and not offline personal data. 
  • Unlike the DPDP Act, the GDPR doesn’t impose a duty on the data subjects to resolve their grievances before making a complaint to the supervisory authority mentioned in the regulations.
  • There is a new concept of consent managers introduced in the DPDPA. These are people registered with the Data Protection Board of India who would be the contact point between the Data Principals and data subjects.

Career opportunities in data protection and data privacy

Data protection and privacy management are indeed critical aspects of running a successful business and their non-compliance can lead to huge fines, loss of business, and a negative impact on reputation. So, there is no doubt that law firms and businesses across the world are building up a team to specifically cater to privacy regulations. Hence, there is a huge career trend in privacy law and now, with the DPDP Act, the career opportunities in the field are exploding. Remember, a career in privacy is not limited to the legal field; it actually expands to healthcare, technology, pharmaceuticals, media, hospitality, etc., as every business needs to cater to privacy laws. Let’s take a look at the prevalent career opportunities: 

Data protection officer (DPO)

Who is DPO

A data protection officer is a mandatory authority under the DPDP Act to make sure that the company is following the data privacy laws. And there are various upcoming career opportunities, such as:

What is the role of DPO

As a DPO, your role is to fulfil the following responsibilities:

  • Ensuring that data principals, data controllers and everyone else involved in the process are duly informed of their rights and responsibilities.
  • They have to maintain records of all processing operations and their compliance with privacy laws.
  • They also serve as the main contact for the organisation and the relevant public authorities on data protection.
  • Making sure that the institution they are working with complies with the laws helps them be aware of the consequences of failure of non compliance
  • Their role also includes making training plans, framing guidelines for employees and promoting a culture of data protection and compliance. 

How to become DPO

To become a DPO, you must fulfil these requirements:

  • Obtain a degree in a relevant field; remember that law, information technology or computer science are all acceptable degrees.
  • It is crucial to get a deep understanding of privacy laws in India as well as GDPR.
  • Get a certification in data protection, such as Certified Information Privacy Professional (CIPP) or Certified Data Protection Officer (CDPO). Please note that the certification or course requirements may change with the job.
  • After completing the certificate course, you are eligible to start looking for jobs in companies that require a DPO.
  • Some companies require a few years of experience in the field of data protection and security compliance, so it is recommended to get experience in the role.

Pay scale of a DPO

As a DPO, you may earn approximately Rs. 30,000 per month. Please note that this figure is just an average estimate and may vary according to the job description.

Privacy lawyer

Who is a privacy lawyer

A privacy lawyer is a professional who helps in compliance with privacy laws and regulations and may be employed by the data subjects in case of a data breach.

What is the role of a privacy lawyer

A privacy lawyer ensures compliance with privacy laws and advises on the best practices and policies for collecting, storing, using and sharing personal data. They also guide individuals towards remedies in unfortunate cases of data breaches. Their role is to represent the best interests of tier clients in court. They also draft data privacy, compliance and protection agreements. 

How to become a privacy lawyer

To become a privacy lawyer, you must acquire the following qualifications:

  • Complete your law degree from any institution duly recognised by the Bar Council of India.
  • It is mandatory for the candidate to clear the All India Bar exam and enrol with the Bar Council of your state.
  • To become a privacy lawyer, you should be familiar with privacy laws, threats, principles, etc. Many jobs require a certain number of years of experience or a course dedicated to data privacy.
  • It is recommended to take part in a certificate course, or privacy impact assessments, reviewing privacy policies, etc., which offers practical exposure to the field. Also, networking and taking guidance from experienced privacy professionals can increase your credibility.

Pay scale of a privacy lawyer 

As a privacy lawyer, you may earn approximately Rs. 35,000 per month. Please note that this figure is just an average estimate and may vary according to the job description.

Chief privacy officer 

Who is chief privacy officer 

A chief privacy officer (CPO) is a senior-most executive who is responsible for developing, managing and implementing data privacy compliance regulations in order to protect data from unauthorised access.

What is the role of chief privacy officer

A CPO is the central decision making authority in any privacy related decisions. Their role is to increase the organisation’s data security measures and monitor and process the data to comply with legal requirements.

How to become chief privacy officer

To become a CPO, you must fulfil these requirements:

  • To become a CPO, you can have a bachelor’s degree in computer science, IT law, or cybersecurity.
  • You may also obtain a Master’s degree in data privacy and cybersecurity, as it will add to your knowledge and skills.
  • Get a certification in data protection, such as Certified Information Privacy Professional (CIPP) or Certified Data Protection Officer (CDPO). Please note that the certification or course requirements may change with the job.
  • Working as a CPO is a high level profession and requires expertise and skills that can be developed through working in the field and gaining practical insights.

Pay scale of a Chief Privacy Officer

As a CPO, you may earn approximately Rs. 35,000 per month. Please note that this figure is just an average estimate and may vary according to the job description.

Privacy  managers 

Who is a privacy manager 

A privacy manager is someone who manages the data and its privacy concerns within the company. The role of a privacy manager is incredibly in demand. Take a look at these opportunities:

What is the role of a privacy manager 

As a privacy manager, your responsibilities include the following:

  • Conducting comprehensive review of the existing privacy policies of the company and assessing its compliance with applicable practices.
  • Developing data privacy policies and conducting data privacy audits.
  • Ensuring data subject rights management, including data request, data rectification, etc.
  • Conducting employee training and awareness courses in the company.

How to become a privacy manager 

To become a privacy manager, you must fulfil these requirements:

  • To become a data privacy manager, you can have a bachelor’s degree in computer science, IT law, and cybersecurity, and having a master’s degree in data privacy and cybersecurity is preferable.
  • Professional certifications like CIPP, CIPT, etc. are also preferable.
  • Generally, the companies require certain years of experience in data privacy management and a strong understanding of global data privacy regulations. 

Pay scale of a privacy manager 

As a privacy manager, you may earn approximately Rs. 40,000- 50,000 per month. Please note that this figure is just an average estimate and may vary according to the job description.

Privacy analysts 

Who is a privacy analysts 

A privacy analyst is someone who manages the legal risks surrounding critical and sensitive information and assesses business operations. The role of a privacy analyst is in high demand. Take a look at these career opportunities:

What is the role of a privacy analysts 

A privacy analyst works on ensuring compliance, testing it with the team, working with stakeholders on the remedies and helping manage the projects of the company. They work with the managers and directors to schedule the compliance audits and testing of updated privacy regulations.

How to become  a privacy analysts 

To become a privacy analyst, you must fulfil these requirements:

  • Obtaining a degree in a relevant field, for example, law, information technology or computer science, are all acceptable degrees.
  • It is crucial to get a deep understanding of privacy laws in India as well as GDPR.
  • Having privacy compliance experience or professional experience in a privacy correlated field is also required, as the job demands that expertise. 
  • Understanding privacy tools and technology, data platforms, etc. is also required.

Pay scale of a privacy analysts 

As a privacy analyst, you may earn approximately Rs. 40,000- 50,000 per month. Please note that this figure is just an average estimate and may vary according to the job description.

Conclusion

In conclusion, the data privacy and protection laws in India reflect the global landscape of the emerging supremacy of data in a digitally advanced age. The implementation of the DPDP Act  is a step forward to protect personal data, allow greater autonomy for Data Principals over  their data and establish accountability for data protection authorities. The Act emphasises key principles such as data minimisation, accuracy, accountability, purpose limitation, etc. and also introduces the rights of Data Principals. It keeps a check on the execution of  obligations of Data Fiduciaries and imposes a penalty for non compliance with provisions. In its entirety, the DPDP Act serves the purposes for which it was made, but it is also not immune from criticism. The provisions on sensitive personal data have disappeared from the original bill while making it an Act. Many claim that the DPDP Act is ambiguous on how consent is collected and how data is processed and it creates wide exemptions for the government, so it is basically a missed opportunity. It is expected that the Act would find the right balance between its achievements and criticism and uphold the Supreme Court’s judgement on privacy.

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)

What are different laws governing data protection and privacy in India?

Before the current legislation, the only law that dealt with privacy was the Information Technology Act of 2000. Other than that, we have the Sensitive Personal Data Information Rules, 2011 and the Information Technology Rules, 2011. But now, it is the Digital Personal Data Protection Act (DPDP) 2023 that prevails in respect of data protection and privacy.

What is the decision of KS Puttaswamy judgement vis-a-vis privacy?

The landmark case of KS Puttaswamy upheld the fundamental right to privacy under Article 21 of the Constitution. Before the judgement, our privacy laws were restricted but with recognition of privacy as a fundamental right, the laws were framed through the DPDP Act in order to protect and safeguard it.

When was the DPDP Act enforced?

The Act was enforced on August 11, 2023.

What kind of information is protected under the law?

The law protects ‘personal data’, which is defined under the Act as information that can identify a person. Personal data may include details like name, address, age, contact number, etc. The Act is silent on the applicability of sensitive personal data.

Who is required to comply with the provisions of the DPDP Act?

Section 3 of the DPDP Act states that it applies only in reference to digital personal data and not offline personal data. It does apply to business conducted within India and even outside India if it involves goods or services within India. The Act applies to organisations that meet the following conditions:

  • The organisation processes digital personal data which is capable of identifying the data principal, to whom the collected data belongs.
  • The data being processed is collected by the organisation in digital form.
  • The organisation is processing personal data within the Indian territory, or if processing of personal data is done outside India but processing is in connection with an activity offering the goods or services to individuals in India.

In what circumstances does the DPDPA not apply?

Section 3 of the DPDP Act states that it doesn’t apply in the following circumstances:

  • when personal data is processed by an individual for personal or domestic purposes.
  • Personal data that is made publicly available by the person himself to whom the data relates.

What are the key principles provided under the Act?

The DPDP Act is based on the following key principles:

  • Principle of consent for lawful and transparent use of personal data.
  • Principle of data minimization.
  • Principle of limiting data usage to the purpose for which it was collected.
  • Principle of data accuracy.
  • Principle allowing data storage only till the time it’s necessary.
  • Principle of accountability.
  • Principle of securing data from any breach.

What is the difference between a data fiduciary and a data processor under the Act?

Data  fiduciary is defined under Section 2(i) as any person who, alone or in conjunction with other persons, determines the purpose and means of processing personal data. And a Data processor is defined under Section 2(k) as any person who  processes personal data on behalf of a data fiduciary. It is important to understand that it is the data fiduciary who complies with the provisions and the same is given under Chapter 2 of the Act under the heading obligations of the data fiduciary.

What rights do Data Principals have as provided under the Act? 

Chapter 3 of the Act provides the rights of Data Principals, such as:

  • Right to information.
  • Right to access.
  • Right to correction of personal data.
  • Right of grievance redressal.
  • Right to be forgotten.
  • Right to data portability.
  • Right to object to data processing.
  • Right to lodge a complaint.

Does the Act apply to foreign companies operating in India?

Yes, the Act has extra-territorial jurisdiction, which means that it applies to foreign companies offering goods and services to Indian Data Principals.

What are the provisions of the consent manager?

Section 2(g) of the Act defines the term as a person registered with the Data Protection Board of India who is the sole contact between the data principal and the data fiduciary for consent. His role is to enable an individual to give, manage, review and withdraw consent through a platform that is transparent, accessible and interoperable. It is not mandatory to appoint a consent manager under the Act. 

What are the penalties for non compliance under the Act?

Chapter 8 of the Act deals with penalties and adjudication. Section 33 provides that the Board will impose a monetary penalty after concluding an inquiry on the breach of provisions of this Act and after giving the person concerned a reasonable opportunity of being heard.

What kinds of transactions are exempt from the purview of law?

Section 17 of the Act provides exemptions in situations such as:

  • The processing of personal data is necessary to enforce any legal right or claim.
  • The processing of personal data is required in accordance with court’s or tribunal’s order entrusted with performance of any judicial or quasi-judicial function.
  • The processing of personal data is done in the interests of prevention, detection, investigation or prosecution of any offence or contravention of any law for time being in force in India.
  • When processing personal data relates to Data Principals not within the territory of India in accordance with a contract entered into with any person outside the territory of India by any person based in India.
  • When processing is necessary for a compromise, arrangement, merger or amalgamation of two or more companies.
  • When processing is necessary for the purpose of ascertaining the financial information and assets and liabilities of any person who has defaulted in payment due to account of a loan or advance taken from a financial institution, subject to provisions relating to disclosure of information.

References

Download Now

Liquidated damages in a contract

0

This article is written by Naincy Mishra. The article discusses the meaning and importance of liquidated damages in contracts and some of the famous judicial pronouncements related to it. 

It has been published by Rachit Garg.

Table of Contents

Introduction 

In every contractual agreement, there exists a presumption that the parties to the contract will fulfil their part of the duties and obligations mentioned in the contract. In fact, Section 37 of the Indian Contract Act, 1872 (hereinafter referred to as the “Act”) also mentions that the parties to a contract must perform/offer to perform their respective promises, unless such performance is either dispensed with or excused under the provisions of the Act, or of any other law. However, this is not the case every time. That is why there is a need for some recourse with the parties, which can be sued by them when there is a ‘breach’ of contract. 

A breach is nowhere defined in the Act, but as per Section 39, the promisee may put an end to the contract when another party to such contract has refused to perform/has disabled himself from performing his promise in its entirety. But the story doesn’t end here. Many times, due to such non-performance/breach of contract by a party, the other party might suffer damages arising in due course of time, and thus, the Act also provides for ‘compensation’ for loss or damage to the party complaining of the breach. 

Damages in a contract

The term damages means a form of monetary compensation caused due to a breach, loss, or injury [Common Cause v. Union of India (1999) 6 SCC 667]. Importantly, it must not be confused with the word ‘damage’, which simply means a loss or injury for which a compensation is sought. In the Contract Act, the word ‘compensation’ has been used to refer to damages, and it is provided in the context of ‘liquidated’ as well as ‘unliquidated’ damages. Damages can be of following types:-

  • General Damages – arose in the normal course of events
  • Special Damages – arose under situations that were reasonably anticipated by the contracting parties while they were entering into the concerned contract. Specific proof of such damage is mandatory to be established in this case
  • Nominal Damages – granted in a case where the party has not suffered actual or substantial loss or even if it has, it can’t be calculated with mathematical accuracy
  • Substantial Damages – involves considerable amount of money for the breach of contract 
  • Speculative Damages – damages that are definitely attributable to the wrong but are uncertain in respect of their amount
  • Aggravated Damages – where the loss incurred by the plaintiff are aggravated due to the mala fide conduct of the other party
  • Liquidated and Unliquidated Damages – While the above types of damages can be understood under general classifications, the damages that have been used in the Act are categorised as ‘Liquidated’ and ‘Unliquidated’ damages which will be discussed in detail hereunder. 

What are liquidated damages 

In a contract, when there are stipulations relating to the payment of a certain amount in case of breach of the contract, it is called liquidated damages. Under Black’s Law Dictionary, the clause of liquidated damages is defined as “a contractual provision that ascertains in advance the measure of damages in case a party breaches the agreement.” These stipulations are those terms of the contract that deal with certain circumstances that would be deemed a breach by the parties. 

For example, non-performance due to delay, discrepancy in certain quality or quantity standards, etc. Compensation to be given becomes easy in contracts involving these damages as the amount is already ascertained by the parties mutually during the formation of the contract. 

Section 74 of the Indian Contract Act

Section 74 of the Indian Contracts Act deals with liquidated damages. As per this rule, when a sum is named in a contract payable in case of its breach, regardless of the fact whether it is a penalty or not, the aggrieved party thereby suffering from the breach is entitled to receive reasonable compensation that must not exceed the amount so mentioned in the contract. Thus, the sum constitutes the maximum limit of liability. It can be understood by looking at some illustrations below.

Illustration 1: A contracts with B that if he fails to pay B Rs. 500 on a given day, he will pay B Rs. 2000. A fails to pay B Rs. 500 on such a day. Thus, B is entitled to recover from A a compensation not exceeding Rs. 2000, as the Court would consider reasonable. 

Illustration 2: X contracts with Y to pay Rs 3000 if X practises as a surgeon within Calcutta. X practises as a surgeon in Calcutta. Y is entitled to such compensation, not exceeding Rs. 3000, as the Court would consider reasonable.

Exception to Section 74 of the Indian Contract Act

Section 74 of the Act also mentions an exception to the provision as per which if a party concludes a contract (which includes  any bail-bond, recognizance, or other instrument of the same nature) with the State or Central Government under any law or order of such government to carry out an act in the interest of the general public, then a breach of such a contract or instrument makes the party responsible for paying the entire amount as specified in the contract.

When the stipulated amount is more than actual damage 

When the stipulated amount of compensation is more than the loss/damage occurred to the aggrieved party, the issue arises as to whether such an amount is reasonable or enforceable. In Fateh Chand v. Balkishan Das, AIR 1963 SC 1405, the Apex Court, while discussing the meaning of liquidated damages, stated that if a genuine pre-estimate of damages is made by the contracting parties at the time of entering into a contract and the stipulated amount is not extravagant or unconscionable, then it would be considered valid and enforceable as liquidated damages. This is because a significantly higher stipulated amount than the actual damage caused could indicate that the clause is operating as a penalty rather than a means of compensation.

Explanation to Section 74 states that a stipulation in the contract for an increased interest from the date of the default may be a stipulation by way of penalty. In such a case, the court might refuse to enforce the clause as mentioned in the contract. 

In case the stipulated amount of compensation is more than the loss/damage occurred to the aggrieved party, the concept of waiver or forfeiture might come into existence. In Chuni Lal Mehta & Sons v. Century Spinning and Manufacturing Co., AIR 1962 SC 1314, it was observed that where the parties to the contract have deliberately specified the amount of liquidated damages, there can’t be a presumption that simultaneously, they intended to allow the plaintiff to give a go-by to the sum so specified and claim instead an amount that was not ascertained/ascertainable at the date of the breach.

Calculation of liquidated damages

Mere presence of a clause of liquidated damages and pre-determined sum to be awarded doesn’t actually make the story easy. The court also takes into consideration factors such as reasonability of the sum, mitigation of losses, and other facts and circumstances in order  to compensate the aggrieved party adequately as he would have been in the case of performance of the contract and not to put him in any profitable position as a result of breach of the contract.

Essential conditions to claim liquidated damages 

In order to claim liquidated damages, the following conditions need to be fulfilled:- 

Existence of a valid contract

The first and foremost condition is that there must be a valid contract between the parties concerned. A valid contract is one where there is free consent of the parties and involves valid consideration. Basically, the contract must fulfil all the conditions of a valid contract under the Indian Contract Act 1872, i.e., valid offer and acceptance, competent parties, intention of the parties to create a legal obligation, valid consideration, lawful object, etc. 

Breach of contract

Secondly, the contract must be breached by any of the contracting parties. This  essentially means that there must be contravention of any terms of the contract. In other words, if there is no breach, there cannot be any argument for damages. Moreover, the plaintiff does not need to show that actual damage has been caused to him due to the breach. However, the court surely takes into consideration the degree of loss/damage suffered in certain cases. 

In Maula Bux v. Union of India (1969) 2 SCC 554, the Hon’ble Apex Court held that where the court is unable to assess the compensation to be given, the sum named by the contracting parties may be taken into consideration as the measure of reasonable compensation if it is regarded as a genuine pre-estimate, but not if the sum so named is in the nature of a penalty. Where the loss in terms of money can be ascertained, the party claiming compensation must prove the loss suffered by him. In State of Kerala v. M/s United Shippers and Dredgers Ltd., AIR 1982 Ker, it was held that there cannot be an award of any compensation if there is no legal injury to the party.

Clause of Liquidated Damages

Such a breach must be mentioned in the contract and secured against a stipulated amount of compensation. 

Reasonable relationship with the Actual Damage

The compensation sought through the clause of liquidated damages must be reasonable to make it enforceable. Unconscionable and extravagant agreements are generally struck down by the courts. The courts thus have the discretion to reduce the amount of damages to what appears to be reasonable in the circumstances. In Kailash Nath v. Delhi Development Authority (2015) 4 SCC 136, the Apex Court ruled that the plaintiff can recover the damages only to the extent of the claim being reasonable compensation for the damage caused to him, and he cannot claim the entire sum laid down as liquidated damages in the contract. As per Section 74, the amount mentioned as liquidated damages reflects the upper limit beyond which the party can’t claim damages. 

In ONGC v. Saw Pipes Ltd. (2003), the Supreme Court held that if there is no proof or an honest estimate by the claimant (party seeking damages), the court must award compensation that is less than the stipulated liquidated damages in the contract, and it must be based on a reasonable assessment of the consequences of the breach of such a contract.

It must be noted that in Indian law, unlike English law, the court does not reject the amount if it appears unreasonably high. It may either accept it or reduce it to what appears reasonable. 

Is actual loss necessary for liquidated damage 

As stated in the provision itself, “whether or not actual damage or loss is proved to have been caused” due to the breach of contract is not necessary. Therefore, generally, the plaintiff does not need to show that actual damage has been caused in the scenario for him to seek damages. But the damages sought must not be exorbitant or unreasonably high by taking advantage of the ‘upper limit’ as stipulated in the contract. In that case, it would be treated as a penalty, and the court shall assess the extent of the loss/damage caused to the aggrieved party and shall award a reasonable compensation to it, as held in Fateh Chand’s case (supra). In this case, it was said that giving compensation is to make good the loss, and thus, there can be no compensation when there is no loss. Thus, while showing that there has been some loss due to breach would be a prerequisite to claiming damages, it is not necessary to prove the extent of it strictly. 

Liquidated damages where no loss is caused or loss is not proven

As already stated, where there is no loss or injury, there cannot be a question of damages. Thus, while the court has stated in Fateh Chand and Maula Bux that the aggrieved party would be awarded some reasonable damages owing to the breach of contract even if actual loss was not proven, he surely has to show that there has been some loss or injury incurred to him due to such a breach. In Union of India v. Motor & General Sales Ltd. (2019), there was a delay in providing delivery of certain goods, and the issue involved was whether such a delay in the performance of a promise would attract the provisions of Section 74 of the Act. The Bombay High Court in this case refused to give any reasonable compensation to the claimant as they were unable to “prove” the loss incurred by them.
In Haryana Telecom Ltd. v. Union of India AIR 2006 Delhi 339, when the contractor delayed in supplying the cables and the Government had to procure the same from other sources but ultimately got it at cheaper rates, it was held by the Delhi High Court that there can be no damages for breach as there was no loss caused.

Importance of liquidated damages clause in a contract

The following advantages can be laid down for having a clause for liquidated damages in a contract:-

  • Ensures transparency and certainty 

In every contract, the most important thing is to ensure transparency between the parties in order to make them clearly aware of their part of the obligations to be fulfilled as well as to prevent any future conflicts. By mutually deciding the events of breach and the specified amount to be compensated in such a case, the certainty increases with respect to the same and, hence, saves the time of the parties as well as the courts.

  • Security of the plaintiff against a breach 

By laying down the situations that the parties can reasonably foresee and ensuring that they are secured for any loss or injury that occurs to them in case of non-performance of the contract as decided, the importance of stipulating liquidated damages becomes all the more important in the contractual transactions. 

  • Promotes fulfilment of obligations under the contract 

The clause of liquidated damages will promote the fulfilment of the mutual obligations of the contracting parties as it increases their accountability. This would cast a mandatory and deterrent effect on the parties against non-fulfillment/performance of their obligations. 

  • Protects defendant against any arbitrary claims for a breach of contract 

This not only helps the parties make a genuine and reasonable claim that the other party cannot refuse, but it also assists the court in determining the claims when a case is instituted before it. Moreover, since it signifies the upper limit within which the court can grant reasonable compensation, it also protects the defendant from any arbitrary claim by the plaintiff in order to gain undue advantage of the clause. 

Mode of recovering liquidated damages 

Forfeiture of earnest money 

The term forfeiture generally means loss or giving up something as a penalty for wrongdoing. In the contractual agreements, parties usually set up a clause regarding forfeiture of the money (for example, earnest money in the case of sale deeds or security amounts in other cases) if the contract is broken in the future due to their fault or failure. The amount involved is the money paid to confirm the contract. The courts in India upheld the validity of such a forfeiture in cases of failure to perform the party’s obligations. For example, due to a delay in the completion of the work, as in the case of Mountain Movers v. State of HP (2008).

In Fateh Chand, the court observed that the expression “contract containing any other stipulation by way of penalty” is comprehensively applicable to every covenant involving a penalty, irrespective of whether it is for payment on breach of contract of money/delivery of property in the future or for a forfeiture of the right to money/other property already delivered. Therefore, in all the cases where there is a stipulation in the nature of a penalty for forfeiture of an amount deposited pursuant to the terms of the contract, the court has jurisdiction to award such a sum only as it considers reasonable, but it must not exceed the amount specified in the contract as liable to be forfeited.

Other relevant cases in this respect

Conditions when liquidated damages can’t be recovered

1. When the contract is frustrated 

As per Section 56 of the Act, if the party knows or is likely to know with reasonable diligence that the act (to be performed under the contract) per se is impossible or unlawful to be done, then such a contract becomes void and the aggrieved party cannot, for the non-performance of such an act, seek damages/forfeiture of any advance paid from the other party. In Thiriveedhi Channaiah v. Gudipudi Venkata Subba Rao, AIR 2007 SC 2439, it was held that since the performance of the agreement had become impossible, the forfeiture of the advance paid would be improper. In this case, the deed of sale of land could not be completed due to a government notification for the acquisition of the said land.

2. Existence of force majeure event

Force majeure is an event that is outside human control and thus relieves the parties from performing their respective obligations under the contract. The Indian Contracts Act doesn’t explicitly mention the term ‘force majeure’ but it is implicit in Section 32 of the Act, as per which, if an uncertain event becomes impossible, the contract contingent on such an event becomes void. Thus, damages cannot be given in cases involving force majeure because the breach due to non-performance is outside the control of the parties. However, such should not become an easy excuse for the parties, as was seen often during COVID times. In Standard Retail Pvt. Ltd. v. M/s G. S. Global Corp. & Ors. (2020), it was held that mere hardship to perform obligations of the contract cannot be covered under the definition of impossibility to avoid relief under the force majeure clause.

3. Waiver of the breach

In case of a breach of a contract, the aggrieved party has the option to affirm such breach and claim damages or to waive the breach and continue with the contract. If the party waives the breach, he loses his right to claim any damages, even if the clause for damages exists in the contract. In a recent judgement by the Supreme Court in Welspun Specialty Solutions Limited v. ONGC (2021), it was held that ONGC was not entitled to recover the liquidated damages as they had waived their imposition while granting the first two extensions.

4. Aggrieved party himself at fault

There may be circumstances in which the aggrieved party may himself be at fault for leading the other party to breach the contract. In such a case, it would be difficult to claim damages from the breaching party, as it was he who put the other party in such a position. 

Difference between liquidated and unliquidated damages

While the damages are clearly stipulated in the contract in the case of liquidated damages, the court comes up with an ascertainment of the compensation in cases where there aren’t any stipulations relating to the damages for breach of contract, and this is known as ‘unliquidated damages’. Thus, the unliquidated damages would be considered to be given in two cases. First, when the parties have not mentioned any terms for compensation in case of breach of contract; and second, when there is breach of contract due to any unforeseen circumstances about which the parties might not have thought but the damages should definitely be provided. 

Section 73 of the Act deals with  unliquidated damages, wherein the amount for compensation is decided as such to make good the loss or damage naturally arising in the usual course of business or which the parties knew to be likely to result from a breach at the time of making the contract. Therefore, the damages are awarded by the courts based on an assessment of the injury/loss caused to the party against whom the breach has occurred.

Moreover, there is no need to show actual loss or damage caused in the case of liquidated damages, but on the other hand, the plaintiff must necessarily prove the loss due to the breach of contract in the case of unliquidated damages. Therefore, loss or damage is important here, and there must be a reasonable connection between the breach and the damage caused.

Serial No.Basis of DifferenceLiquidated DamagesUnliquidated Damages
1.Provision Governed by Section 74 of the Indian Contract Act, 1872.Governed by Section 73 of the Indian Contract Act, 1872.
2.DefinitionA pre-estimated amount of damages specified in the contract and payable in case of its breach.Damages that are determined by a court as compensation for actual losses suffered due to a breach.
3.EnforcementCan be enforced even if actual damage/loss has not occurred. However, the amount sought should be genuine and not exorbitant.Can be enforced only when actual losses are proved and on their basis 
4.CertaintySince it is already stipulated, it provides certainty about the compensation to be sought.Causes uncertainty as the estimates are not known 
5.SettlementCan be settled within the parties themselves, as the amount stipulated is already mutually decided between the parties.Might lead to legal proceedings, and the courts will ascertain the actual losses and appropriate compensation.
6.ExamplesConstruction contracts, lease agreements, and commercial contracts etc.Applicable to various contracts where actual losses can be proven, such as sales of goods or services.

Difference between penalty clause and liquidated clause in a contract

Section 74 of the Act also provides for a penalty to be received by the party who has suffered the loss/damage due to the breach of contract by the other party. While the liquidated damages are payable as a pre-ascertained amount of compensation for the loss, the penalty is generally disproportionate to or higher than the loss that could result from the breach of the contract. For example, A borrows from B Rs. 200 and gives him a bond for Rs. 500 payable in ten yearly instalments of Rs. 50, with the stipulation that the whole shall become due in default of payment of any instalment. This can be said as a stipulation by way of penalty. 

Another example can be given in the form of an explanation in the provision itself that a stipulation for increased interest from the date of default may be a stipulation by way of penalty. E.g., X gives Y a bond for the repayment of Rs. 2000 with interest at 15 per cent at the end of 10 months, with a stipulation that interest shall be payable at the rate of 70 percent in case of default from the date of such default. This is also a stipulation by way of a penalty, and Y is only entitled to recover from X such compensation as the Court would consider reasonable.

Discussing the difference between liquidated damages and a penalty, the Apex Court in BSNL v. Reliance Communication Ltd. (2011) 1 SCC 394 observed that to treat a provision of a contract as a penalty is a matter of construction, and it has to be resolved by asking whether the predominant contractual function of the provision, at the time of formation of the contract was to deter a party from breaking the contract or to compensate the innocent party for a breach. It can also be determined by considering the stipulated sum. That is, if it bears a reasonable correlation to anticipated loss, it would be construed as a liquidated damages clause and, if not, then as a penalty clause [M/s 3I Infotech Limited v. Tamil Nadu E-Government Agency, 2019 SCC Online Mad 33295]. Thus, the alleged penalty clause must pass muster as a genuine pre-estimate of loss.

The Court in Fateh Chand v. Balkishan Das, AIR 1963 SC 1405, has held that statutorily under Section 74, the duty of the courts is only to award reasonable compensation and not to enforce the penalty clause. The expression ‘stipulation by way of penalty’ used in the provision only applies where a sum is named as ‘penalty’ to be paid in the future for a breach,and not to cases where a sum is already paid and thus liable to be forfeited by a term in the contract. 

It can therefore be said that the question whether a particular stipulation shall operate as a penalty would be answered by the court while considering a variety of factors such as intent of the contracting parties, the character of the transaction concerned, consequential injury to the plaintiff, etc.

Serial No.Basis of DifferenceLiquidated DamagesPenalty
1.DefinitionA pre-estimated amount of compensation specified in the contract and payable in case of its breachA kind of specified sum in the contract which acts as a punishment for a breach
2.PurposeTo ascertain and compensate for actual losses suffered due to a breach of the contractTo deter the other party from committing a breach by imposing a punitive cost.
3.EnforceabilityIf they are genuine pre-estimates of damage, they are enforceable and held valid by the courtsThese are generally non-enforceable by the courts as they are considered punitive in character
4.Calculation of damagesGenerally, based on a reasonable estimate of the actual damages that are likely to occur from the breachUsually, the amount is arbitrary and is not based on a genuine estimate of damages
5.Modification of the amount by the courtIf the amount appears high and disproportionate to the actual damages caused, the court can reduce itThe court would always avoid putting unreasonable penalties on the defaulting party, so requisite modifications are generally executed

Judicial pronouncements 

Bharat Sanchar Nigam Ltd. v. Motorola India Ltd., 2009 (2) SCC 337 

Facts 

In the case of Bharat Sanchar Nigam Ltd. v. Motorola India Ltd. (2009), parties entered into an agreement by way of bidding that included the terms for the payment and the schedule for delivery of the goods. It also provided for liquidated damages in the event of failure on the part of the respondent to meet the delivery schedule. Later, the appellant invoked the clause of liquidated damages due to a delay in the purchase of goods. 

Issue 

Whether the liability of the respondent to pay the Liquidated Damages and the entitlement of the other party to collect the same from the respondent are excepted matters for the purposes of the concerned clause in the contract?

Judgement 

The Apex Court held that the question of holding a person liable for Liquidated Damages and the question of assessing the amount payable by way of Liquidated Damages are entirely different. While fixing the liability is primary, the quantification of the amount that is provided for is secondary. The court held that quantification of liquidated damages could be an exception, as argued by the appellant, but there has to be a delay in the first place for the levying of the liquidated damages. Therefore, it cannot be treated as an excepted matter because it does not provide for any adjudicatory process for a decision on a question, dispute, or difference, which is the condition precedent to the stage of quantification of the damages.

Sir Chuni Lal Mehta & Sons v. Century Spinning and Manufacturing Co., AIR 1962 SC 1314 

Facts 

This case revolved around a contract for the sale of goods in a managing agency agreement wherein the respondent wrongfully terminated the agreement before the stipulated period could end, and therefore, the appellants filed a suit for the recovery of damages for a breach of contract based on the stipulated amount in the agreement. 

Issue 

The issue was regarding the calculation and validity of damages for the breach of contract.

Judgement 

It was observed that where the contracting parties have knowingly specified the amount of liquidated damages in such a contract, there can’t be a presumption that, at the same time, they intended to allow the plaintiff to give a go-by to the sum specified and claim instead an amount that was not ascertained/ascertainable at the date of the breach. The court further stated that by providing for the compensation in express terms, the right to claim damages is necessarily excluded under the general law. Therefore, the seller’s claim for damages was held valid, and they were entitled to the difference between the contract price and the resale price as compensation for the buyer’s breach of contract.

Maula Bux v. Union of India (1969), 2 SCC 554

Facts

In this case, Maula Bux had entered into a contract with the Indian Government for the supply of certain goods and had deposited a certain amount of security for its due performance. It was stipulated in the contract that such an amount was to be forfeited if the appellant neglected to perform his part. Maula Bux defaulted on the supply. The government didn’t only rescind the contract but also forfeit the security deposit. 

Issue 

Issue was related to the validity of such a forfeiture of the security deposit for due performance of the contract.

Judgement

The Supreme Court pointed out that a case of forfeiture of earnest money was different from forfeiture of the security deposit for due performance of the contract and held that under Section 74, only a reasonable amount can be forfeited if a contract is not performed. But where, under the contractual terms, the party in breach has undertaken to pay an amount or to forfeit a sum of money that he has already paid to the party complaining of such a breach, the undertaking is in the nature of a penalty. Thus, performance of the contract could not be regarded as earnest money. 

Kailash Nath Associates v. Delhi Development Authority and Another (2015)

Facts

This case involved a public auction of land conducted by the DDA, wherein the highest bidder was required to pay a sum as earnest money, and such a sum was to be forfeited in case of default, breach, or non-compliance with any of the terms and conditions of the auction. The appellant, Kailash Naith, paid the earnest money and sought to extend the date for the rest of the payment, which was even granted, but later the land was auctioned. The appellant thus approached the Court to seek a refund of the earnest amount and the specific performance of such a contract.

Issues

Whether Section 74 of the Act can be applied to contracts demanding forfeiture of the earnest money upon a breach of the terms of the contract?

Judgement

The Supreme Court held that where a contract incorporates provisions for liquidated damages, such an amount can be received in totality only if the amount of damages suffered by the aggrieved party is similar to the pre-established amount of damages. It was further observed that the compensation awarded by the court must not at any point exceed the amount mentioned in the contract in the form of liquidated damages. The court in this case held that there was no breach of contract on the appellant’s part, and thus no penalty can be imposed in order to forfeit the earnest amount under Section 74 of the Act. The law does not provide for a windfall in the case of a breach when there is no damage suffered by the parties to the contract.

Conclusion 

In the dynamic landscape of modern business and commerce, where time and resources are of the essence, including a clause for liquidated damages contributes to the overall effectiveness of the contracts. The contracting parties can thus enter into agreements with greater confidence, knowing that the potential consequences of non-performance of the contractual obligations have been carefully contemplated and agreed upon. Such clauses promote transparency and ultimately foster trust between the parties.

However, it is important to understand the necessity of a clear and reasonable clause for  liquidated damages in the contract. The risk of such clauses being struck down or deemed unenforceable by the courts due to ambiguity or exorbitant fees further emphasises the need for thoughtful drafting. Legal practitioners and contract drafters therefore must necessarily be aware of the evolving jurisprudence relating to liquidated damages, ensuring that such clauses reflect not only the parties’ future intentions but also adhere to the legal parameters set forth by the statute and precedents.

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)

Can I get damages for breach of contract by the other party?

Yes. Under the Contract Law (of any country), damages are provided for a breach committed by one of the contracting parties. This is done to make up the loss incurred by the aggrieved party. In the Indian Contract Act, damages can be sought under Sections 73 and 74.

Which section talks about liquidated damages in the Indian Contract Act?

Section 74 of the Act talks about liquidated damages in the Indian Contract Act of 1872.

Which section talks about unliquidated damages in the Indian Contract Act?

Section 73 of the Act talks about unliquidated damages in the Indian Contract Act of 1872.

Are damages and indemnity the same things?

No. While damages can be claimed for the actions of the parties to the contract, indemnity can be claimed for the actions of the third party even if the contract is not breached. 

Are liquidated damages and penalties the same things?

No. Liquidated damages are a genuine pre-estimate of loss incurred due to breach of contract, but penalties are generally disproportionate to the loss incurred. 

Is it mandatory to include a clause for liquidated damages in a contract?

No. It’s totally at the discretion of the parties to include such a clause in the contract. However, it is definitely recommended to have the clause in order to avoid future conflicts in case of breach of the contract and to easily make a claim and get compensation for the same.

References


Students of Lawsikho courses regularly produce writing assignments and work on practical exercises as a part of their coursework and develop themselves in real-life practical skills.

LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals, and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:

https://t.me/lawyerscommunity

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content.

Download Now

Section 14 of Hindu Marriage Act, 1955

0
Marriage

This article has been written by Naveen Talawar, a student at Karnataka State Law University’s Law School.  The article deals with Section 14 of Hindu Marriage Act, 1955, which prohibits filing a divorce petition with the court before a year has passed since the date of marriage. Further, the article deals with its scope, application, exceptions, and judicial pronouncements.

It has been published by Rachit Garg.

Introduction

Marriage, according to all matrimonial laws, is the union of a man and a woman that imposes certain marital duties and confers certain legal rights on each of them. It was regarded as a samskara, or holy sacrament, in ancient Hindu law. The idea of divorce was not present because marriage was thought to be a union divine in nature. Divorce is not mentioned in either of the Smritis or in the Vedic texts. When two people were united through the sacramental ceremony of marriage, there was no such thing as separation or divorce; instead, they were bound to abide by the laws and rules that were imposed on them as part of the institution of marriage.

However, marriage as we understand it today is entirely different. The couples start thinking about getting a divorce whenever there is a disagreement between them. As a result, Section 14 of the Hindu Marriage Act, 1955 was enacted, which states that no divorce can be filed within a year of marriage in order to prevent hastily made mistakes and poor decisions.

The Hindu Marriage Act permits divorce on the grounds of dissatisfaction or if the marriage can no longer be maintained. Normally, a divorce petition can only be filed after the completion of one year of marriage. A court may, however, permit a petition to be filed earlier than one year in certain exceptional circumstances, such as when the petitioner is harmed or the respondent is mentally unstable. Section 14 of the Hindu Marriage Act, 1955, prohibits the filing of a divorce petition within the first year of marriage. Since temperamental differences between the partners can be resolved over time and should not be used as grounds for divorce, it establishes a window for reconsideration and reconciliation.

Scope of Section 14 of Hindu Marriage Act,1955

Section 14 establishes the principle of a fair trial, which states that provisions of law that are advisory rather than mandatory in nature can be said to be complied with if there is sufficient, rather than absolute, compliance with those provisions of law. Although Section 14(1) of the Hindu Marriage Act begins with a non-obstante clause (a non-obstante clause is added to a provision to support its enforceability over another provision that conflicts with it), the provision to that subsection changes the nature of the provision of law so that it is “directory” rather than “mandatory.” Once a provision of law is directory in nature, as previously stated, what is to be seen is sufficient and/or ample compliance with the provision of law, not strict compliance with the relevant provision of law.

This Section states that no court shall entertain a divorce petition before the one-year of the marriage. Before the Marriage Laws (Amendment) Act, 1976, no court could entertain a divorce petition three years from the date of marriage; however, the aforementioned Amendment Act reduced the waiting period to one year.

The Section also states that in cases of exceptional hardship to the petitioner or exceptional depravity on the part of the respondent, the court may consider a petition even before the passing of a year. If it is discovered that the leave was obtained through misrepresentation or withholding of information, the court has the discretion to dismiss the main petition or postpone the implementation of the decree for a year from the date of marriage.

The court shall also consider the interests of any children born of the marriage and the likelihood of a peaceful reconciliation between the parties while deciding an application made under Section 14(2).

Subject matter of Section 14 of Hindu Marriage Act, 1955

According to Section 14, a divorce petition cannot be filed within the first year of marriage. Therefore, one year might be seen as the time allotted by the law for resolving, classifying, comprehending, and communicating problems with one another. Therefore, until a year has passed, no court may hear a divorce petition. The Court may permit the petition to be presented after receiving an application in accordance with the rules of the High Court in cases of exceptional hardship to the petitioner or great depravity on the part of the respondent.  However, the court may decide to dismiss the petition without prejudice if it finds that there has been a misrepresentation of facts or concealment of the nature of the matter after hearing the petition.

No divorce petition within a year of marriage

The rules enumerated in this Section are meant to give each marriage a fair chance to succeed. The general rule established in Section 14(1) is that until the one-year period specified by this Section has passed, the court cannot entertain a petition for a decree of divorce based on any of the grounds specified in Section 13 for divorce. Apart from exceptional cases covered by the proviso, the court would have no jurisdiction to entertain any such petition before the statutory period expired. 

Section 14(1) states that no petition for dissolution of marriage may be presented to the court unless one year has passed since the date of marriage. According to Derrett, “this one-year period is illusory. It is woefully inadequate given that, in Indian circumstances, animosity within the first year is frequently caused by “in-law” and dowry manoeuvring rather than other factors. The “in-law” problem will, without a doubt, be resolved over time, especially in the beginning.” However, it is argued that the one-year embargo does not mean that divorce will be possible after a year but rather that the aggrieved spouse will be able to file for divorce after that time period has passed.

In the case of Meganatha Nayagar v. Shrimathi Susheela (1957), the Madras High Court noted that Section 14 contains restrictions presumably intended to prevent parties’ recourse to legal proceedings before they have made sincere efforts to save their marriage from dissolution. The objective is to prevent hasty legal action taken by spouses without giving them enough time to adjust and give their marriage a trial. It is based on public policy because marriage is the cornerstone of civil society, and no part of the laws and constitution of a country can be more crucial to its citizens than the rules governing the manner and conditions of forming and, if necessary, dissolving marriage contracts.

Provision is only directory and not mandatory 

The requirement in Section 14 that there must be a year between the date of marriage and the filing of a divorce petition is only a directory, not mandatory. Section 14 opens the door to reconsideration and reconciliation. It acknowledges that temperamental differences between the parties can be addressed over time and should not be used to end a marriage. The mandatory one-year period provided by the Section encourages couples to calm down and reconsider their marriage in order to save it.

In the case of Rabindra Nath Mukherjee v. Iti Mukherjee (1991), the husband filed a suit against his wife on the ground of cruelty under Section 13 of the Act. The trial court dismissed the petition on the grounds that it was filed just a few days before the completion of one year from the date of marriage, in violation of the provisions of Section 14(1). In an appeal to the  Calcutta High Court, it was determined that the provision is not mandatory.

In Indumathi v. Krishnamurthy (1998), it was held by the Madras High Court that if a petition for divorce is filed within one year of the marriage, that is, within a few days of the marriage, without any application under Section 14 seeking leave of court to entertain the divorce petition, then there is no harm in entertaining such an application by the court because Section 14(1) of the Hindu Marriage Act, 1955, is only directory in nature, and by filing a subsequent application there is considerable adherence.

The High Court of Delhi ruled in Sankalp Singh v. Prarthana Chandra (2013) that the court may permit a petition to be filed before one year of the marriage in certain circumstances of unusual hardship or depravity on the part of the respondent.

Discretion of the court

The proviso confers discretion on the court. The court may allow such a petition to be presented pending a preliminary determination of the matter. The first issue that would come up is whether the situation falls under the category of “exceptional depravity” or “exceptional hardship.” If the case fits into one of the aforementioned categories, the court may, at its discretion, allow the petition to be presented. The court has the discretion to decide whether to grant leave under this Section and whether to grant an ex parte order. If the court decides to grant leave, it must first determine if there is a chance that the parties will reconcile. Furthermore, the court must consider the interests of any children of the marriage during this preliminary stage of granting leave, as expressly provided in Section 14(2).

The possibility of reconciliation is a crucial factor in all applications for divorce. If there is a child from the marriage, the interests of the child should be a very important factor to take into account. The appellate court will not interfere with the district court’s discretion unless it followed the wrong legal principle, neglected to take into account a crucial factor, or committed a grave injustice. The proviso is meant to change the impact of the one-year limit in extremely rare circumstances. It enables the court in these situations to consider a petition for a divorce decree before the completion of the statutory period.

The procedure for requesting special leave to file such a petition will be governed by any rules the High Court may make in this regard. Rules regarding the application for special leave under the Section, service of the order granting leave ex parte, and the subsequent procedure have been developed by various courts in the event that the respondent desires to contest the divorce petition on the grounds that the leave for filing the petition has been improperly obtained or erroneously granted.

When leave is obtained by misrepresentation

The proviso also states that, even though the court may grant a divorce, it may suspend the decree’s effectiveness by adding a provision stating that it will not take effect until after the passing of a year. If it appears to the court during the hearing of the petition that leave had been granted and not revoked due to misrepresentation or concealment of the true nature of the case, the court will be satisfied that the grounds for relief exist. However, the court is not required to do so and may, at its discretion, completely reject the divorce petition. In this case, a petition may be filed on the same grounds after the time period specified in the Section has expired.

In Rabindra Nath Mukherjee v. Iti Mukherjee (1991), the court stated that when permission to file a petition within a year has been obtained through misrepresentation or concealment of the facts of the case, the court may, if it grants a divorce, delay the implementation of the decree until the end of the expiry of the period. The provision to Section 14(1) states that “the court may dismiss the petition,” but without prejudice to any petitions that may be brought after the expiration of one year. A leave obtained by suppressio veri (suppression of the truth) or suggestio falsi (suggestion of an untruth) should be treated as vitiated to the extent of being non-est.

Applicability of Section 14 of Hindu Marriage Act, 1955

This restriction only applies to divorce petitions that may be filed under Sections 13 or 13(B) of the Act; it does not apply to petitions filed under Section 12 seeking a decree declaring a marriage voidable on the basis of voidability.

In Ravulapalli Yogamma v. Thellamekala Venkata Ratnam (1998), the wife filed a petition for the dissolution of marriage on the grounds that there had been no consummation because of the husband’s impotence. It was denied by the trial court since the application was submitted within a year of the date of her marriage. Since the said court denied her request for a review, she appealed. Accepting the appeal, the Andhra Pradesh High Court determined that the Section only applies when a divorce decree is sought to dissolve a marriage, not when an annulment on specific grounds is sought.

Exceptional situations under Section 14 of Hindu Marriage Act, 1955

Although it is a good idea to prevent hasty divorces, the provision does not completely prohibit divorce petitions filed before the end of the first year of marriage. The provision of the Section comes to the aid of exceptional cases, and the court will decide on each case based on the merits because there may be difficult cases that justify early court adjudication. Exceptional circumstances could include:

  1. Exceptional hardship to the petitioner; or,
  2. Exceptional depravity on the part of the respondent.

The Act doesn’t define the terms “exceptional hardships” or “exceptional depravity.” These expressions cover a wide range of topics and are filled with extraordinary circumstances. Therefore, it would be possible to grant a divorce decree without waiting for the predetermined one-year period to pass in cases where the petitioner is experiencing so many hardships that life has become an absolute tragedy or the respondent has committed such a heinous moral offence that it has become completely intolerable to the petitioner.

The court must determine whether the allegations made in the petition are of such a nature that, if proven, they would constitute exceptional hardship or depravity. While doing so, it is anticipated that the court will decide the application based on the preliminary facts and contentions and will exercise its discretion in accordance with that decision. The term “exceptional hardship,” as used in the Section, can refer to allegations that, while speculative, may be sufficient to support a prayer for a divorce decree. The trial court must specify the reasons that it found to be of exceptional hardship in order to consider a petition for divorce filed within a year of the marriage. 

Section 14 is based on public policy that adopted language similar to that found in the Matrimonial Causes Act, 1950, in England, including the provision for reconciliation. Following Denning, L.J.’s observations in Bowman v. Bowman (1949), the Madras High Court stated in Meghanatha Nayagar v. Shrimathi Susheela (1956) that some general principles in English law can be used as a guide in determining what could be considered exceptional hardship or depravity:

  1. It was observed that the use of the word “exceptional” will determine the answer. This entails an investigation into the level of alleged depravity or hardship which, it is obvious, may prove to be a challenging task, or both. Naturally, adultery or cruelty are the only situations in which the issue is raised.
  2. Adultery committed by one of the spouses within a marriage may be regarded as ordinary depravity. It may not involve exceptional hardship on the innocent spouse.
  3. However, if the adultery is combined with other matrimonial offences, such as if a husband not only engages in adultery but also deserts his wife in favour of another woman or abuses her, not only causing her pain through his adultery but also harm through his abuse,  constitutes exceptional hardship to the wife.
  4. Even if adultery is not coupled with desertion or cruelty, it may still be committed in circumstances that show “exceptional depravity” and even if adultery is not coupled with another matrimonial offence, the consequences may still result in exceptional hardship for the applicant, as in the case of a wife who has a child by another man as a result of her adultery.
  5. The husband who commits adultery within a few weeks after getting married, or who does so in a promiscuous manner with multiple women, or with his wife’s sister, or with a servant, may be considered to be exceptionally depraved.
  6. Again, cruelty by itself is not exceptional.  If it is combined with aggravating factors like neglect or drunkenness and it is particularly brutal or harmful to health, combined with perverted lust, it does not show the respondent’s exceptional depravity but results in exceptional hardship for the applicant. 

Determining whether there is a chance for reconciliation in each of these cases is a significant factor. It is important to find out what the applicant has already done to try to make the marriage successful or find reconciliation at that point. The application may be rejected by the court if it determines that nothing reasonable has been done in his favour.

In Chandrima Guha v. Sumit Guha (1994), it was observed by the Calcutta High Court that allegations that the wife was an ultra-modern lady, unfit for a simple middle-class family. Her conduct and actions caused members of the husband’s family to suffer mental and physical pain and torture, to the point that the matter had to be brought to the police on multiple occasions. It was held not to constitute hardship within the meaning of the Section.

In Vinod Arora v. Manju Arora (1982), the Delhi High Court observed that the hardship required to move an application under Section 14 of the Act must be exceptional. The husband would not be entitled to move the petition for dissolution before the expiration of one year from the date of marriage based solely on the fact that the wife refused to engage in sexual intercourse with him after three days of marriage or that she frequently avoided the matrimonial home without a valid reason or justification.

The Kerala High Court ruled in Gijoosh Gopi v. Shruthi S. (2013) that Section 13(B) of the Act is subject to Section 14.  In a joint petition for divorce, the parties in this case, who had been living separately for two weeks after their wedding, claimed that there had been no mutual coordination and that they had never shown each other any love or affection during their marriage. This, according to the Court, clearly represents an exceptional hardship for them. It was ruled safe to invoke the proviso to Section 14 as they could not possibly stay together.

Thus, while under Section 13(B), a period of one year should elapse from the date of marriage, Section 14 is an exception to this necessity. The family court had dismissed the divorce petition on the ground that the parties had not been living separately for at least one year since the solemnization of the marriage. On appeal, the proviso to Section 14 was invoked, and divorce was granted.

In Rishu Aggarwal v. Mohit Goyal (2022), the Delhi High Court made the observation that a  mere incompatibility of marriage or one with irreconcilable differences resulting from temporal or behavioural differences would not, in and of itself, result in the causing of exceptional depravity by either party to the other. A mere denial of sex by one or both parties to the other cannot be characterised as an act of exceptional depravity. The denial of sex by one spouse to the other, or by both of them to each other, may undoubtedly result in “hardship,” but it cannot be deemed to be “exceptional hardship” under Section 14(1).

Recent judicial pronouncement

Rishu Aggarwal v. Mohit Goyal (2022)

Facts

In the aforementioned decision, the Family Court denied the wife’s application for dissolution of marriage by mutual consent filed under Section 13(B) of the Hindu Marriage Act, 1955. The appellant, the wife, filed the current appeal under Section 19 of the Family Courts Act, 1984, in an attempt to overturn and nullify the order of the Family Court.

The respondent and appellant barely cohabited as husband and wife and had no children of their own. Due to temperamental issues, the parties allegedly began living separately. A petition under Section 13(B)(1) of the Act was filed, along with an application for permission to file the petition before the one-year cooling-off period under Section 14.

By asserting that both parties denied having any sexual interactions, which resulted in a situation of ‘extraordinary hardship’ and ‘extreme depravity.’ Hence, the parties attempted to satisfy the requirements of exceptional conditions under Section 14.

Issue

The issue raised before the Court was whether it was possible for a married couple’s refusal to engage in sexual activity due to a temperamental difference to be deemed ‘extraordinary’ enough to result in the dissolution of the marriage without even waiting a year for a chance to reconcile. In response to the same, the Court said that it is reasonable to assume that a married couple will not be able to maintain a good conjugal relationship if they have significant, temporal, or behavioural challenges.

Judgement 

The Delhi High Court observed that a marriage with simple incompatibilities or one with irreconcilable differences caused by temporal or behavioural inequalities would not, in and of itself, result in either party inflicting extreme depravity upon the other. An act of extraordinary depravity cannot be deemed to have occurred when one or both parties simply refuse to engage in sexual activity with each other.

Although the refusal of sex by one spouse to the other, or by both of them to each other, can be deemed ‘hardship,’ it is not ‘extreme hardship’ as defined by Section 14(1). The High Court ruled that denying cohabitation within a marriage cannot be justified as an instance of ‘exceptional hardship’ or ‘extraordinary depravity.’ As a result, a one-year requirement cannot be waived. The waiver must instead be granted as an exception as opposed to a rule.

The refusal to enter into or failure to complete a conjugal relationship due to behavioural or temperamental differences is the only cause for divorce if done with cruelty, according to the Court. The decision of the Family Court was therefore upheld, and the appeal was denied.

However, the Court reserved the rights of the parties to move before it after the expiration of the mandatory waiting period.

Conclusion

Restrictions present in Section 14 of the Hindu Marriage Act are presumably intended to prevent parties from seeking legal action before they have made an honest effort to save their marriage. It is based on public policy because the rules governing how marriage contracts are created and, if necessary, dissolved are among the provisions of a nation’s laws and constitution that are most important to its citizens, as marriage is the cornerstone of civil society.

The expressions cover a broad range of subjects and are filled with extraordinary circumstances. The interests of children born out of a marriage and the question of whether there is a real possibility of a reconciliation between the parties must be taken into consideration by the court while making a decision. These factors are unrelated to the assessment of exceptional hardship or depravity. The likelihood of reconciliation must always take precedence in every circumstance.  Even if there is no immediate chance of a reconciliation and relations between the spouses are strained, the child’s best interests should always come first.

References


Students of Lawsikho courses regularly produce writing assignments and work on practical exercises as a part of their coursework and develop themselves in real-life practical skills.

LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals, and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:

https://t.me/lawyerscommunity

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content.

Download Now

M&A boosting purchasing capacity of the company

0
Image source: https://blog.ipleaders.in/structure-merger-acquisition/

This article is written by Muskan Khandelwal, pursuing a Diploma in M&A, Institutional Finance, and Investment Laws (PE and VC transactions) from Lawsikho. The article has been edited by Tanmaya Sharma (Associate, LawSikho), Ruchika Mohapatra (Associate, LawSikho), and Indrasish Majumder (Intern at LawSikho).

This article has been published by Shoronya Banerjee.

Introduction

Mergers and acquisitions (hereinafter referred to as “M&A”) are deals in which two or more firms merge in some way. Even though the terms mergers and acquisitions (M&A) are sometimes used interchangeably, they have distinct legal definitions. Two firms of equal size unite to establish a distinct single company in a merger. A merger occurs when the board members of two firms agree to merge and request necessary approvals from the shareholders. For instance, in 1998, the Digital Equipment Corporation and Compaq agreed to merge, with Compaq absorbing the Digital Equipment Corporation. An acquisition, on the contrary, occurs when a larger corporation buys a smaller corporation and absorbs the smaller corporation’s operations. M&A transactions can be amicable or hostile, based on the target company’s board of directors’ consent. In a straightforward acquisition, the purchasing corporation acquires a majority interest in the acquired company, which retains its name and organizational structure. Manulife Financial Corporation’s acquisition of John Hancock Financial Services in 2004 is an instance of this sort of deal, in which both firms kept their identities and organizational structures.

Types of M&A

For several objectives, businesses will combine and purchase one another. Here are four of the most common methods for businesses to collaborate:

1. Horizontal merger / acquisition

A horizontal merger occurs when two firms are in direct competition with one another. Horizontal mergers are used to gain market share, create economies of scale, and take advantage of merger synergies. Compaq Computers was purchased by Hewlett Packard in 2002 for $24.2 billion. By integrating the PC products of both firms, the goal was to establish the leading personal computer provider.

2. Vertical merger / acquisition

A vertical merger occurs when two firms that operate in a similar supply chain combine forces. A vertical merger is the joining of firms in a company’s manufacturing and distribution processes. Higher quality control, greater circulation of knowledge along the supply chain, and merger synergies are all reasons for a vertical merger.

In the year 2000, America Online and Time Warner merged vertically for the first time. Because of each company’s various activities in the supply chain – Time Warner supplied information through CNN and Time Magazine, while AOL delivered information via the internet – the transaction was classified as a vertical merger.

3. Conglomerate merger / acquisition

To increase their variety of services and goods, two firms in different industries combine forces or one takes over the other. By merging back-office tasks and functioning in a variety of sectors, this method may help cut costs and risk.

4. Concentric merger / acquisition

Two firms may share consumers yet provide distinct services in specific instances. Sony, for example, is a DVD player manufacturer that also owns the Columbia Pictures film studio, which it purchased in 1989. Sony could now make movies that could be played on its DVD players. Furthermore, this was a crucial component of Sony’s Blu-Ray DVD player launch plan.

Reasons for M&A

There are numerous reasons behind an M&A deal. The most common reasons are mentioned below:

1. Unlocking Synergies

Mergers and acquisitions (M&A) are commonly used to produce synergies that make the merged firm worth more than the two enterprises separately. Synergies can occur as a result of cost savings or increased income.

Cost synergies are achieved through economies of scale, whereas revenue synergies are achieved by cross-selling, expanding market share, or boosting pricing. Cost synergies are easier to quantify and estimate of the two.

2. Higher growth

When opposed to organic growth, inorganic growth from mergers and acquisitions (M&A) is typically a speedier technique for a firm to obtain bigger sales. A corporation can benefit from purchasing or merging with a corporation that has cutting-edge capabilities rather than risk cultivating those skills organically.

3. Stronger market power

A horizontal merger will provide the new organization with a larger market share and the ability to affect prices. Vertical mergers also provide a corporation with more market power since it has more control over its supply chain and can prevent outside supply disruptions.

4. Diversification

Companies in cyclical sectors feel compelled to diversify their cash flows to prevent severe losses during a downturn. A corporation can diversify and decrease market risk by buying a company in a non-cyclical sector.

5. Tax benefits

When one firm has a lot of taxable income and another has a lot of tax-loss accruals, the tax incentives are investigated. The acquirer can use the tax losses to reduce its tax burden by acquiring the firm with the tax losses. Mergers, on the other hand, are rarely done only to save money on taxes.

M&A effects

1. Capital structure

M&A activity has longer-term consequences for the acquiring business or the prevailing organization in a merger than for the target firm in a merger or the organization that is swallowed in a merger.

An M&A deal provides the acquired corporation’s shareholders with the option to cash out at a high premium, — particularly if the acquisition is all-cash. The target firm’s investors get a share in the acquirer and hence have a real stake in its long-term performance if the acquirer pays half in cash and half in its own shares.

The consequence of an M&A deal on the buyer is determined by the deal size concerning the corporation’s size. The danger to the buyer increases as the prospective target grows greater. A corporation may be capable of surviving a small-scale acquisition catastrophe, but a large-scale acquisition failure might risk the corporation’s long-term viability.

Based on how the M&A deal was structured, the acquirer’s capital structure will fluctuate when the deal closes. An all-cash transaction will significantly decrease the acquirer’s cash reserves. However, few corporations have enough cash on hand to pay for an acquired company in full, all-cash mergers are frequently funded through debt. While this raises a company’s debt, the increased cash flows generated by the acquired corporation may justify the greater debt load.

Several M&A deals are funded in part with the acquirer’s shares. An acquirer’s shares must frequently be premium-priced, to begin with, if it is to be used as payment for an acquisition; otherwise, making acquisitions would be excessively dilutive. In addition, the target company’s managers must be persuaded that taking the acquirer’s shares rather than actual money is a sensible option.

2. Market reaction 

Market reaction to the announcement of an M&A deal can be positive or negative, based on market people’s perceptions of the deal’s characteristics. Usually, the target’s shares will climb to a value near that of the acquirer’s bid, given that the acquirer’s bid is a large premium to the target’s prior share price. Indeed, the target’s stock may trade above the initial offer if it is believed that the buyer has undervalued the target and will be obliged to increase it, or if the target firm is prized enough to draw a competing bid.

In some cases, the target firm may trade at a lower price than the offer price. This usually happens when a portion of the acquisition price is paid in the acquirer’s stock, and the stock drops when the acquisition is publicized. Assume that Targeted ABC Co.’s acquisition price of Rs. 25 per share is made up of two stocks of an acquirer for Rs. 10 each and Rs. 5 in cash. Targeted ABC Co. will most probably be valued at Rs. 21 rather than Rs. 25 if the acquirer’s stock is only worth Rs. 8.

Whenever a buyer publishes an M&A acquisition, its stock may drop for a variety of factors. Perhaps market players believe that the buying price is too high. Alternatively, the transaction may be viewed as being not advantageous to earnings per share (EPS). Alternatively, investors may feel that the buyer is trying to take on too much indebtedness to fund the deal.

The purchases that an acquirer undertakes should preferably improve the acquirer’s economic capabilities and earnings. Because a succession of acquisitions can disguise degradation in a firm’s core sector, investors and analysts frequently look at the company’s “organic” revenue and operating margin growth rate, which eliminates the influence of M&A.

When a buyer makes a hostile offer for a target firm, the latter’s executives may suggest that the purchase be rejected by its stakeholders. Amongst the most prevalent causes for such refusal is that the acquirer’s offering is significantly undervalued by the target’s leadership. However, as the famous Yahoo-Microsoft example demonstrates, rejecting an unexpected offer can occasionally backfire.

M&A : an important instrument for business expansion and boosting purchasing capacity

M&A may be a powerful tool for boosting purchasing power, establishing scale, boosting a target’s productivity, and reducing surplus industry resources, as well as fueling long-term, profitable expansion. By analysing the reason for M&A and its effect, we deduce that M&A transactions lead to the growth of the company which boots its purchasing capacity. It increases its revenue and thus, leads to an increase in purchasing capacity.

The market reaction, if favorable to the company, also boosts its purchasing capacity. M&A should be considered as a key arrow in the business bow, ready to be released when needed, because of its multiple economic advantages. The attraction of M&A is enhanced by the slow rate of global economic expansion. In reality, the most popular motivations given by CEOs for investing in M&A are to increase purchasing capacity, acquire access to new client bases, enter more geographic marketplaces, and enhance goods and services.

When two companies merge, by consolidating marketing expenditures, it may lower its costs and overhead. Due to the huge number of purchases, the company will have more purchasing power and reduced purchasing expenses. As a result, the more money the company has, the simpler it is for the company to save money. Another benefit of M&A is that larger order size and accompanying bulk-buying discounts result in purchasing economies.

Conclusion

In this article, we have critically analysed what are the reasons for M&A and what are its effects. We can finally conclude that it has a significant impact on the purchasing capacity of the company. It boosts the company’s purchasing power tremendously. Reasons for the boost are an increase in revenue and growth, purchasing economies, discounts, synergies, etc. M&As are one of the best tools for growth and increased purchasing capacity. 

References


Students of Lawsikho courses regularly produce writing assignments, and work on practical exercises as a part of their coursework and develop themselves in real-life practical skills.

LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals, and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:

https://t.me/lawyerscommunity

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content.

Download Now

Criminalization of transgender people in colonial India : Criminal Tribes Act

0
Image source - https://bbc.in/33fVaJp

This article has been written by Suhasini Singh from SKTD Law College, Raipur. This article discusses how and why the British government criminalized transgender people in colonial India. Further, this article also talks about how the “Criminal Tribes Act” impacted the transgender community.

Introduction

Transgender persons are the people who are still struggling for their rights in our society as a result of society’s failure to accept their gender identities. As a result, they continue to suffer discrimination, social oppression, and physical abuse. However, National Legal Service Authority v. Union of India (2014) is a landmark judgment of the Supreme Court of India that declared transgender people as the ‘third gender’, and also affirmed that fundamental rights granted under the Indian constitution applies to them equally, and gave them the right to self-identify their gender as male, female or third gender. 

Moreover, In Indian society, transgender people have existed for centuries. It was also recorded in ancient Indian texts that “third sex” or persons not conforming to male or female gender existed. For instance, in the Ramayana and the Vedas, there is an explicit mention of the LGBTI community. Even in Mahabharat the sexual transition of ‘Arjuna’ the warrior during the ‘agyatvas’ period was duly respected and loved. 

In the Mughal period, transgender also known as Hijras (or Kinnars) played a crucial role in the politics of empire-building. In the Mughal era, they occupied high positions as many influential figures such as officials, administrators, generals, and guardians of harems. Hijras were considered trustworthy, loyal, clever, and had access to all members of the populace. For this reason, they played an important role in Mughal-era empire building. Transgender people were given respect during the Mughal era.

But, after the onset of colonial rule in the 18th century, the situation of transgender people drastically changed. It was seen that early European travellers reacted negatively to Hijras, and they were baffled as to why they were given so much respect by the royal courts. British colonial administrations actively pursued criminalizing the Hijra community and denied them their civil rights during the second half of the 19th century. In different parts of India, the colonial authorities classified Hijras as separate castes or tribes. In 1871, the first Criminal Tribes Act (CTA) was passed by British India’s governor-general (the supreme ruler of the colonial authorities) which targeted ‘eunuchs’ (a stigmatizing colonial term for transgender). The policy which was initially implemented in northern India had been expanded several times, covering nearly the entirety of colonial India by the mid-1920s.

Why was the Criminal Tribes Act passed

Many laws were passed by the British to divide and treat Indians according to their religion and caste identification. The Criminal Tribes Act (or CT Act/CTA) is one of these laws. The British passed three Criminal Tribes’ Acts during colonial rule. These were:

  1. Criminal Tribes Act, 1871
  2. Criminal Tribes Act, 1911
  3. Criminal Tribes Act, 1924 

In 1865, the secretary to the North-Western Provinces(NWP) wrote to the inspector general of police indicating that the administration aimed to prevent an increase in the number of hijras/eunuchs as that would gradually lead to their extinction. The CT Act in 1871, thus aimed to eliminate eunuchs by preventing initiations, castrations (because the British erroneously thought castration was essential to Hijra-hood), and by making Hijras invisible in public spaces.

The British government enacted these laws for various reasons, which can be summed up as follows:

  • Those in charge of the British administration viewed wandering people with suspicion.
  • Additionally, the British government was strictly against mobile craftsmen and traders (who hawked their products in communities), and pastoralists (who had to move from one place to another in search of fresh pastures for their cattle). Therefore, in order to stop these activities, the government passed the Criminal Tribes Act, 1871 and listed many tribal groups in India as Criminal Tribes. 
  • The main purpose of the Act was to regulate and monitor pastoral people.
  • Consequently, to force these pastoral people to live in notified settlements and ban them from moving out without permission from the government. Due to this, their grazing grounds were restricted and their stock animals deteriorated.
  • By implementing the Criminal Tribes Act, the government aimed to rule over a settled population.
  • The government wanted the rural population to live in villages, in fixed places with fixed rights on specific fields as it was relatively easy to control and identify such a population.
  • There was a strong argument put forward that it was part of an entire model to preserve law and order in colonial India. Having used to a highly centralized society, the British viewed India as a volatile place with its complex array of castes and communities, each functioning as autonomous, self-governing units, following different lifestyles and social norms.
  • The most resistant communities to pax-Britannica were targeted in different ways for such special treatment. The worst victims were the communities that did not have sedentary lifestyles, which made it harder to demand subservience from them.

In 1952, the government of India replaced the Criminal Tribes Act with the Habitual Offenders Act. As a result of the enactment of this law, the former Criminal Tribes Act was denotified. In the contemporary world, most of these tribes are known as ex-criminal tribes or vimukta jatis.

The reason provided for the criminalization of transgender community

The Hijra community became a concern of certain provincial governments in British India around the middle of the 19th century, first in Bombay in the 1830s and then in northern India around the 1850s and 1960s. During the 1860s, the colonial government started getting anxious about the Hijra community as it intensified due to the 1857 rebellion. They also panicked due to their lack of knowledge of Indian society, and they considered the Hijra community as criminal, deviant, or marginal groups. British India criminalized homosexuals too. The Hijra community was really seen as being ungovernable and in these sorts of multiple, manifold ways. 

  • To begin with, they cast the Hijra community as embodying sexual disorder and portrayed them as ‘habitual sodomites’(a term which disregarded Hijras’ feminine gender identities and portrayed them as ‘men’ who were ‘addicted’ to sexual intercourse with men) and also as being prostitutes. 
  • Moreover, there is also another story that is connected to, namely that certain discipleship-based communities are being construed as being a type of sexuality, including the Hijra community.
  • Alternatively, tantric and devadasi communities were considered problematic as well. Furthermore, and in connection with this, Hijra’s gender expression was also considered problematic because of the ways that it challenges a binary conception of gender.
  • Hijra performance and badhai practices are frequently referred to as ‘begging’, which leads to them being regarded as ‘obscene’ and even ‘unclean’ in public places because of colonial anxieties.
  • Another noteworthy aspect of this colonial discourse is that the Hijra community is portrayed as being the kidnappers, castrators, and even pimps for male assigned children. This is a very disturbing discourse. However, it does frame the criminalization of the Hijra community as being a child-saving measure.

Provisions of the Criminal Tribes Act

There were several provisions of the Criminal Tribes Act that did injustice to the transgender community at large. Such as:

  • According to the Criminal Tribes Act, 1871, the police were required to register the names and residences of all ‘eunuchs’ reasonably suspected of sodomy, kidnapping, castration, or of committing offenses under Section 377 of the Indian Penal Code, 1860.
  • For example, in Queen Empress v. Khairati (1884), a transgender was arrested and prosecuted under the provision of Section 377 on the suspicion that the said person changed into a ‘habitual sodomite’. However, in this case, an acquittal was granted on appeal.
  • These activities were punishable by up to two years in prison and a fine or both. In the contemporary world, this pre-partition history influences hijra’s vulnerable circumstances.
  • Furthermore, Section 27 of the Criminal Tribes Act permitted the arrest of transgender individuals without a warrant and their imprisonment if found with a boy below the age of 16. This leads to re-instilling the stereotype of hijras to be perverse, deviant, and criminal.
  • Section 3 of the Criminal Tribes Act authorized the local government to designate any class of people who were addicted to the systematic commission of non-bailable offenses as criminal tribes.
  • Every registered Criminal Tribes Act member was supposed to report himself either once in a week or when the District Magistrate deems it necessary to do so, to the police or the village authority in whose neighborhood the registered member happens to be at that moment.
  • As a result, these people’s freedom of movement and privacy was drastically restricted.

Impact of the Act

This Act had a drastic effect on the Criminal Tribes. Such as:

  • Transgenders were deprived of both their primary source of income and any kind of rights under colonial law. This further became the reason behind their poverty and social exclusion. In fact, till now there are estimated to be 100 million people living under the cloud of the Criminal Tribes Act.
  • Transgender people were deemed a suspect merely for dressing in women’s clothes or performing in public. It affected Hijras’ day-to-day lives in profound ways.
  • Even though all members of the group were not criminals, still this act was passed, because of which it has been condemned. Though the fact that some criminals were in all groups cannot be denied, it is improper for the government to label a group as a criminal simply because a few in it were involved in criminal activity. Since a couple of people in a group were criminals, the government should have not denounced the entire group. 
  • Furthermore, the punishment prescribed for breaking the rules of being monitored, i.e. rigorous imprisonment, and whipping- demonstrates the cruelty of the policy.
  • The policy’s implementation was even worse than its bad intent. The people assigned to monitor these tribes ended up actually exploiting them.
  • According to a report in 1874, several transgender people complained to the district officials in Ghazipur that they were starving.
  • Also, due to the forced settlement of the tribes, often in new areas and often in the edges of towns and villages, the tribal people were unable to live according to their traditional lifestyles. The lack of work opportunities led to their desperation of work and this further created opportunities to exploit them.
  • Some of the village leaders used tribal members to beat up or steal from their rivals. Moreover, leaders/heads from these villages targeted the transgender community as they could easily fit into the tribal reputation as “criminals” and “thugs”.
  • In other instances, the newly settled tribes were compelled to clean the homes of the upper caste and forced to become manual scavengers.
  • In terms of geography and social order, they lived at the 10 peripheries of society. Several cases were reported in which low-level police officers used newly settled tribes to share their loot.
  • They were exploited when they needed travel passes to travel.
  • Similarly, the newly settled ‘criminal tribes’ were used by railway companies as captive labor.

Analysis

Colonial policies and laws did major injustice to the transgender community. It is evident that there was very strict enforcement of the law or even illegal policing practices, such as criminalizing unregistered people under the Criminal Tribes Act due to their gender identity or for wearing women’s clothes and performing in public. Similarly, we find that British officials and Indian police neglected and deprioritized the anti-Hijra campaign. 

This colonial law labeled some communities as so-called “criminal tribes” just because of their nomadic lifestyle. British judges characterized ‘Eunuchs’ as cross-dressers, beggars, and prostitutes in an unnatural way. It’s evident that the British tried to eradicate India’s third gender.

While the Criminal Tribes Act was primarily directed at tribal communities, several incarnations of the Criminal Tribes Act also imposed on the rights of transgender people and gender non-conforming individuals and communities in India. In this contemporary world, transgender suffers the consequences of pre-partition history. 

It is not uncommon to say that in post-independent India, the legal system was influenced by the contexts of colonial rule and law. Transgender people became marginalized over time. Public places and ceremonies that once waited for their divine blessings were gradually driven apart from society. The colonial cases of the transgender community demonstrate what is at stake in legal struggles. It illustrates how the law produces identities and then tries to control them, it also shows that the law can also serve as a vehicle for prejudice. 

It is clearly seen that transgender people faced many challenges in colonial India. In fact, they still face many challenges in the modern era as well, which leads to the questions that:

Why are they considered less than any normal ‘human being’? 

Why has society still not accepted them?

Conclusion

Transgender people are among the most socio-economically deprived groups in the country; they are frequently harassed and face violence by the police and the public at large. It is underrepresented at the state and central levels. 

This year during Pride Month, the Madras High Court has proposed measures to sensitize people about the LGBTQIA+ community so they can become part of mainstream society. Further, The Madras High Court has suggested changes in the school curriculum to educate students about the community.

In preparation for delivering the judgement, Justice N Anand Venkatesh engaged himself and undergone an educational training session with a psychologist to gain a better understanding of same-sex marriage. Justice Venkatesh also recommended several reforms for educational institutions, including holding Parents Teacher Association (PTA) meetings to raise awareness of issues facing the LGBTQ community and gender non-conforming students along with changes to the school curriculum. 

Despite the efforts of the government to prevent discrimination, the goals of compensatory discrimination-social justice, reducing inequality, and reintegrating the marginalized into society have largely not been accomplished. For instance, recently, the National Council of Educational Research and Training (NCERT) took down a publication titled “Inclusion of Transgender Children in School: Concerns and Roadmap” from its website as several conservative users on social media tore into the report and accused the NCERTof playing at being “woke” and trying to comply with “western norms”. Therefore, NCERT has withdrawn the said manual as a result of the pressure that conservative people have created online. 

Referring back to the quote of Nirmal Singh, president of the All India Tapriwas and Vimukt Jati Federation in 1981, he said compensation for discrimination had been ‘badly defeated’.

For generations, this community was subjected to widespread social stigmas and discrimination. In addition, it is evident that resolving such major problems requires substantial time and effort. 

However, with continued legal efforts and public relations campaigns, India can acquire the ability to fully embrace and support people from all backgrounds regardless of sexuality or gender orientation.

References


LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:

https://t.me/joinchat/L9vr7LmS9pJjYTQ9

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content.

Download Now

Effects of NIA Act on federal system in case of Unlawful Activities (Prevention) Act cases

0

This article is written by Divyanshi Singh, from Symbiosis Law School, Noida. This article discusses the Unlawful Activities (Prevention) Act and whether the NIA Act affects the federal system.

Introduction

The National Investigation Agency (NIA) was established through the National Investigation Agency Act, 2008  as an aftermath of the 2008 terrorist attacks in Mumbai. The aim was to develop a national police force to investigate a selected class of criminal offences that constitute a direct threat to national safety. The erstwhile United Progressive Alliance Government launched the NIA to fight against terrorism.

UAPA or the Unlawful Activities (Prevention) Act, 1967 is one of the Acts introduced to the NIA Act schedule. The Agency has jurisdiction over all crimes covered by the statutes of India. Legal and political opinions disagree as to whether law permitting the Central Government to delegate an inquiry to any agency without the agreement of the State Government is permissible.

It is because public order and police are institutionally deemed to be the responsibility of the State government. Both governments have simultaneous authority in the realm of criminal legislation and criminal proceedings.

Investigations rerouted through NIA

The NIA Act gives the Central Government the right to take over an investigation under Section 6. It states that if a case of scheduled offences is lodged at a police station in India, the officer-in-charge of the station must submit the matter to the State Government. That state, in turn, will send it to the federal government as soon as possible, and the latter will determine whether the offence is a scheduled offence or not within 15 days of receiving it, based on information provided by the former or information obtained from other sources. It must also decide if the case is one that the Agency should investigate.

If the Central Government believes it should be investigated by the Agency, it must direct the Agency to conduct the investigation. Apart from that, if the Central Government believes a listed offence has been committed that requires investigation under the NIA Act, it may direct the Agency to investigate it suo motu.

After the Central Government has made its judgement, the State Government and the police officers investigating the crime must immediately forward all relevant documents and data to the Agency.

The officer-in-charge of the police station will be responsible for continuing the investigation until the Agency takes over. The Central Government may ask the NIA to register a case and conduct an investigation as if the offence had been committed in India for offences covered by the NIA Act. As a result, it is clear that State Governments have no influence on whether or not the NIA investigates the charges brought by the federal government.

The federal system and the separation of powers

The federal system of government was created to bring the country together as a political union made up of various independent, distinct, separate, and diverse political entities or administrative bodies.

The division of legislative powers between the Central Government and the states is the most essential, if not the most important, feature of every federal government. The three lists that make up the Constitution’s Seventh Schedule: the Union List, State List, and Concurrent List, reveal this crucial characteristic of the federal structure. Infringing on the jurisdiction assigned to one by the other would have a negative impact on the federal system’s smooth operation.

When it comes to investigating crimes committed in a state, the Supreme Court decided that given the many provisions in List I of the Constitution’s Seventh Schedule, there can be no dispute that the Central Government’s authority is limited in such circumstances.

Petitions challenging the UAPA’s constitutionality

In 2019, in order to declare it unlawful in that it breaches basic fundamental rights, Sajal Awasthi launched a Public Interest Litigation (PIL) against UAPA. He stated that implicitly restricting the right of dissent was in contradiction with Article 14 (the right to equality),19 of the Indian Constitution (the right to freedom of expression), and 21(the right to life). Moreover, it does not offer the so-called terrorist any chance to justify his case prior to his arrest.

The APCR (Association for Protection of Civil Rights) also submitted a petition stating that new Section 35 enables the center to identify a person as a terrorist and add his/her identity under Schedule 4 of the Act, whereas previously only terrorist organisations, groups may be notified. The amendment does not set forth the reasoning of a person being considered a terrorist; “conferring of such discretionary, unfettered and unbound power upon the Central Government is an antithesis to Article 14.”

Another instance of the draconian UAPA being used was when the Delhi Police arrested Umar Khalid (JNU student leader) and Meeran Haider and Safoora Zargar (two other Jamia Millia Islamia (JMI) University students) under UAPA. The JMI students were arrested for allegedly plotting to instigate community unrest over the CAA, which the police described as a “premeditated conspiracy.”

NIA Act’s constitutional validity 

In Pragya Singh Thakur vs. State of Maharashtra (2011), the constitutional validity of the NIA Act was challenged before the Bombay High Court. The argument in the case was that because police are listed in the State List of the Constitution’s Seventh Schedule, the parliament lacks the authority to establish an agency for investigating crimes.

By taking note of the entries in Lists I and III and reading them together, the court dismissed the argument. It was decided that the NIA Act should be enacted by the parliament.

The court also stated that it has the authority to establish an agency to investigate the offences listed in it. The court also looked at Entry 8 of List I (Union List), which was titled “Central Bureau of Intelligence and Investigation.”

It was observed that if the parliament could establish such a Central Bureau of Investigation, then its powers could not be limited when it decides to enact legislation to establish a national investigating agency to investigate and prosecute offences affecting India’s sovereignty, security, and integrity, the security of states, and friendly relations with other countries.

Furthermore, the court stated that even if the state has the right to make a law relating to police, the broad wording of Entry-1 and Entry-2 of List-III, the Concurrent List, clearly shows that the parliament has the authority to implement the NIA Act, 2008.

The UAPA and Human Rights guarantees

The Executive Director of Amnesty International responded to the news that the Jammu and Kashmir police had invoked UAPA against journalist Masrat Zahra under Section 13 for ‘uploading anti-national posts on Facebook with criminal intentions to induce the youth and glorifying anti-national activities’ and Peerzada Ashiq for stories on ‘diversion of COVID testing kits’ by saying that it “signals the authority”. This intimidation of journalists jeopardises efforts to combat the COVID-19 outbreak. The police verified the journalists’ charges, stating that Masrat Zahra’s post may “provoke the public to break law and order” and Peerzada Ashiq’s tale “could cause fear or alarm in the minds of the public.” He also said that UAPA was used to “target journalists and human rights defenders who criticise government policies.”

The Jammu and Kashmir police had also used Section 13 of the UAPA against persons who were using VPNs to avoid the government’s longest-ever internet ban, which was enforced when it repealed Article 370 of the Indian Constitution, which divided the state into two centrally governed UTs. The government stated that it was done “to curb the misuse of the sites by miscreants for propagating false information/rumours.” If a person is charged under this Section, there must be a serious threat to India’s security, and any remark on social media should not be considered one “which causes or is intended to cause disaffection against India.”

Reasons for the problematic nature of UAPA

As a form of ‘security legislation,’ UAPA authorises the government to arrest citizens who may commit the crimes listed in it. For a variety of reasons, this legislation is problematic.

  • To begin, it prohibits disagreement. It criminalises even the most innocuous beliefs and political protests that produce “disaffection” with the state. It is a violation of citizens’ right to express themselves, as well as the collective right of groups and unions to broadcast their opinions, and UAPA primarily targets this right. 
  • Secondly, it can simply be utilised to circumvent basic rights and procedures. Those apprehended under UAPA, for example, can be imprisoned for up to 180 days without being charged. As a result, it is a direct violation of Article 21 of the Constitution. 
  • Thirdly, it grants the government vast discretionary powers and enables the establishment of “special courts with the ability to use secret witnesses and to hold closed-door hearings.”
  • It is being used to repress dissent through intimidation and harassment, endangering public discussion and press freedom and criminalising the exercise of civil liberties.
  • The UAPA authorises the parliament to limit individuals’ rights and freedoms in order to maintain India’s “sovereignty and integrity.” The government said that the amendment was introduced because it is individuals who perform terrorist acts and having just the authority to designate organisations as terrorist organisations would be useless because those persons might continue their operations under a different name. However, the question remains whether the parliament can ever categorise an individual as a terrorist simply because it feels he is implicated in terrorism without conducting any sort of investigation or trial.

Allegations of political affability

The NIA has already been accused of political prejudice, despite the fact that it is still in its early stages. Rohini Salian, the Special Public Prosecutor, was the first to make a surprising announcement. She has testified against Hindu radicals in the 2008 Malegaon bombing case. She claimed that once the new administration assumed power at the Centre, the Agency directed her to go light on the case on June 25, 2016.

In another case involving individuals with substantial ties to the RSS (the Ajmir Dargah bombing case), the majority of the key defendants were acquitted. It was alleged that the public prosecutor, in this case, was also dissatisfied with the NIA’s lack of attention during the trial.

In other cases, including the bombing of the Samjhauta Express and the bombing of the Mecca Masjid in Hyderabad, the NIA’s actions have been questioned. It’s worth noting that various state investigators and the CBI have conducted thorough investigations into terror-related crimes. The investigation of the Bombay assault (Ajmal Kasab’s case) and the parliament attack cases were done by state investigative agencies before the foundation of the NIA.

Conclusion

To crush opposition, the government has often invoked severe laws such as sedition and criminal defamation. These rules are ambiguous and unduly broad, and they have been used as political tools against critics, indicating a shift toward “thought-crimes.” In order to achieve the aim of this Act, the legislature has degraded human rights. The Amendment also runs counter to the mandates of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights and the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights. The preceding arguments have demonstrated how the amendment jeopardises its citizens’ fundamental rights and threatens the very existence of opposition.

When such heinous legislation breaches and deprives citizens of their rights, it is the Supreme Court’s responsibility to intervene and restore faith in democracy. This Amendment demonstrates the goal with which laws were enacted during the colonial administration in order to stifle various liberation movements under the guise of maintaining public order. The Act primarily criminalises activities based on ‘ideology’ and ‘association.’ As can be observed, the aforementioned are symptoms of a shift from democracy to dictatorship.

References


LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:

https://t.me/joinchat/L9vr7LmS9pJjYTQ9

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content.

Download Now

Equity carve-out v. spin-off- finding the best

0
Image Source: https://rb.gy/mz5gjn

This article has been written by Esha Barua Chowdhury, pursuing the Diploma in M&A, Institutional Finance, and Investment Laws (PE and VC transactions) from LawSikho. This article has been edited by Tanmaya Sharma (Associate, Lawsikho) and Smriti Katiyar (Associate, Lawsikho).

Introduction

Corporate entities go through various phases of restructuring which requires separating the additional business units. It is essential that such restructuring happens for a definitive goal and is for the benefit of the entity. Corporate actions also tend to affect the operations of the market therefore, market participants and investors need to make sure of the effects of such corporate restructuring and divestitures. As a matter of fact, both equities carve out and the spin-off is divestitures, meaning, by such action, the parent company tends to dispose of the subsidiary business unit through sale, exchange, or closure. A company restructures, either to strategically gain more than what it was already making or, to hive off a subsidiary that might have become a liability, more than an asset. 

Reasons for divestitures

Divestitures happen by way of partial or full disposal of a subsidiary, the reasons being the need to focus on the main business or to strategically earn profits by way of separating two competent businesses. Attachment with the subsidiary might at times undermine the value of the parent company and therefore separation becomes imperative. Divestiture might be essential to achieve the full potential of each business as opposed to a consolidated entity. The reasons for divestiture can be as under:

  1. To address financial or liquidity issues,
  2. To separate operations for better management,
  3. To scale up profits,
  4. To focus on core operations,
  5. To gain tax advantages,
  6. To emerge out of a faulty acquisition.

Removal of subsidiary or disinvestment is required when it is: 

a) Not contributing, 

b) Destroying value, 

c) Loss-making, 

d) Expensive, or 

e) is more profitable individually. 

At times, the reasons can be any number of combinations of the mentioned points. Divestitures can take the form of a spin-off, split-off, or equity carve-out. This article is concerned with analysing and discussing the difference between a spin-off and an equity carve-out to find out which is the better.

What is a spin-off?

A spin-off refers to the process in which a parent company sells/ distributes all of its existing shares within a subsidiary company to its existing shareholders as a result of which a completely new and independent company is formed out of it. This distribution of shares is done on a pro-rata basis, i.e., the shareholders would get an equivalent ratio of shares that they already own within the parent company. The spun-off company will have a new management structure with a new name and would be an entirely new entity altogether. It would, however, have the same or similar assets, same human resources, and intellectual property that it used to have earlier, before the spinoff. In most cases, the parent company still continues to provide financial and advisory support to the spun-off entity.

Besides the distribution of shares,  the parent company can also offer the shareholders the shares of the subsidiary company at a discount price. This is done through the process of exchange where the shareholders purchase a higher amount of stock in the subsidiary company while exchanging it with a lower value of stock in the parent company.  

Example: – An investor can exchange Rs 100 of stock in the parent company for Rs. 110 worth of stock in the subsidiary company. When a division is converted into a separate entity, the existing shareholders of the parent company get all the benefits of owning the shares of the subsidiary company. The parent company, at times, does something similar to buyback of its shares from the shareholders by offering them shares of the new company in exchange.

Features of spin-off

  • The parent company does not receive cash considerations for undertaking the spin-off.
  • The shareholders enjoy the dual holding.
  • The Spun-off company has a distinct and independent identity altogether.
  • A parent company can spin off 100% or less of the interest up to 80% of voting and non-voting shares.  Minority interest of the holding is kept back at times.

What is the purpose of corporate spin-off?

During the process of a spin-off, a completely new independent company is formed which retains its identity as being different from that of the parent company as a result of which, the work, management, and assets of such get differentiated from that of the parent body. The main reason for a spin-off by the parent company is because it thinks that the divestiture would be lucrative. The work of the parent company gets limited to financing and providing advice to the company. As the company becomes independent, spin-off tends to increase the returns for the shareholders as the subsidiary as well as the parent company both focus on their own products/services.

The parent company spins off due to 2 main reasons:-

a) To improve the performance of the parent company.

b) To improve the performance of the subsidiary company.

1) Improved performance of the parent company

A parent company may conduct a spin-off so that it can focus better on the complete utilization of its resources. As a result, when the subsidiary becomes a new independent entity, the resources that are present with the parent company are better utilised by it resulting in growth and improved performance of the parent company. Additionally, companies that aim at streamlining their businesses or wish to venture into new areas, often separate their existence from the less performing or low productive or subsidiaries that have reached their complete potential by the mode of spinoff where the subsidiary becomes a completely different entity from that of the parent company.

2) Improved performance of the subsidiary company

A spin-off creates a company with a new name though with the same human resources and the same intellectual properties as that of the parent company. Establishing the subsidiary as a completely new company requires the parent company to take a reduced role in providing finance and advice on how to run the subsidiary. This in turn increases the returns of the subsidiary company and provides for its growth as the subsidiary can now focus on their individual products and items independent from that of the parent company.

Types of spin-off

There are 2 types of spin-off which are as follows:-

  1. No ownership retained (pure spin-off)

A pure spin-off refers to a process of corporate restructuring in which a parent company distributes 100% of its owned shares in the subsidiary among its shareholders. The spun-off company gets more autonomy as the parent company no longer holds any form of shares in the subsidiary.

  1. Minority ownership retained

In this type of spin-off, the parent company only retains 20% of its owned shareholdings in the subsidiary company and the remaining 80% of the shares held are distributed among the parent company’s shareholders at a pro-rata basis. By using such a form of spin-off the parent company still retains some shareholdings and some form of decision making power in the subsidiary company. Sometimes the parent company can also act as an advisor to the subsidiary company.

Impact of spin-off on a company

Immediately after a spinoff, share prices of the parent company go down as it involves the transfer of assets from the parent company. It reduces the book value of the parent company, thus resulting in a fall in share price.

Pros and cons of spin-off

Pros

  1. Certain subsidiaries of the parent company might have promising business goals and strategic priorities. To understand their true potential and streamline their business, companies choose a spin-off.
  2. It helps the parent companies in cutting off/ removing underperforming, non-promising subsidiaries.
  3. A company may go for a spin-off when it fears that any of its subsidiaries are underperforming and has a chance of going into debt. In such cases, to prevent the parent company from bearing the burden of their debt, spins  off are opted.

Cons

  1. Share  prices of spin-offs  tend to be highly volatile and chances exist that  they may suddenly drop even though the company may be promising.
  2. A spin-off is usually very costly as there are many legal and institutional matters involved.
  3. The shareholders may be dissatisfied as they might not want the shares of the spun-off company as they may not match their investment standards.
  4. There are a lot of uncertainties of employment associated with employees in case there is a spin-off. 

Examples of spin-off:

A lot of well-known companies have spun off which led to the growth of the subsidiary. Some examples are:

  • Hewlett-Packard Co spun-off Agilent technologies Inc (1999)
  • Viacom created spinoff company Viacom Inc (2006)
  • Expedia created spinoff company TripAdvisor (2011)
  • Kraft Foods Inc created spinoff company Kraft Foods Group Inc (2012)
  • eBay created spinoff company PayPal (2017)
  • Alcon, an eye care business was created and spun off by Novartis 

Spinoff can be beneficial to the company if it is planned minutely. In 1991 HCL enterprise had spun off HCL Technologies and made it into an IT services firm, which has shown greater growth in later years. Aditya Birla Group spun off its financial services to Aditya Birla financial service services. There is no transfer of cash.

Another term that is similar to spin-off is split off. Shareholders in the parent company are offered the shares of the subsidiary company and can hold shares of either company. The distribution of subsidiary shares is not on a pro-rata basis. Subsidiaries should go for IPO and based on the market price the shares can be exchanged. The main difference between a spin-off and a split-off is that in a split-off, shareholders must exchange their existing shares for the new company whereas, in a spin-off, the existing shareholders are given shares in the new company. Now that we have understood spin-offs, let us know what an equity carve-out is.

What is carved out?  

A carve-out also called equity carve out refers to the divestiture of a business unit in which a parent company sells a minority interest of its share in the subsidiary company to investors outside of the company. Such sale of shares is done by way of an Initial Public Offering (IPO) where the shares of the divested unit are sold to the public. As a result, the subsidiary company becomes a standalone company with a new set of investors and a completely new financial statement. However, since only a minority share of the subsidiary is offered via IPO, the control still remains within the hand of the parent company. The parent company, subsequent to carve out, takes the stand of an advisory body and advises the standalone company upon its further dealings.

In general parlance, a Carve-Out usually precedes a complete spin-off, however, to satisfy the conditions of the 80% divestiture of shares to the shareholders no more than 20% of the shares held in the subsidiary company by the parent company can be offered through IPO.

Features of carve-out

  • The parent company does not sell all of its shares in the subsidiary company.
  • The subsidiary company so carved out becomes a public company with its own set of teams, management, human resources etc.
  • A completely new set of shareholders (public) are introduced within the company.
  • The parent company retains its controlling interest.

What is the purpose of equity carve-out?

Either purpose of the process of equity carve-out or spin-off or any other divestiture strategy is to completely divest the shares of a particular company and become independent however, it is not often possible to find a single buyer who would follow up with the entire transaction and to find and do so might often take years. Sometimes companies want to commission certain shares in their subsidiaries while retaining control, in such cases, companies often revert to the strategy of equity carve-out. Through such a process the parent company could easily get the money in return for the already released shares in the market while retaining their control.

Deloitte Corporate Finance finds 64% of companies engage in carve-outs for cash or capital requirement and such carve-outs can be done because the entity is “not considered core to the [parent] company’s business strategy.” 

Impact of equity carve-out

Equity carve-out amounts to the establishment of the Subsidiary as an independent public entity as a result of which the shares of the company become listed in the stock exchange and they can now be publicly traded. Carveout might precede spin-off. But such future spin-offs need to have 80% control, meaning, no more than 20% of the subsidiary’s stock can be offered in an IPO.

Pros and cons of equity carve-out

Pros

  1. The control of the subsidiary company still lies with the parent company as only a part of the shares are divested to the public through IPO.
  2. Carve-outs help the existing companies in focusing on their own activities and simultaneously help the subsidiaries to stabilize themselves.
  3. It improves the overall capital strength of the parent company.

Cons

  1. Divestiture or dilution of ownership of the parent company in the subsidiary company does not change the controlling power even though the subsidiary becomes independent. Since only a minority share held by the parent company is offered during the IPO, the controlling power still remains in the hand of the parent company and the subsidiary cannot function in a completely independent manner.
  2. A conflict of interest could arise between the two management teams of both companies  due to differences in their management style, goals and operations.
  3. It involves some restructuring costs which sometimes makes its implementation a costly affair.

Examples 

  • Las Vegas Sands carved out its Sands China subsidiary to raise capital over $3 billion.
  • GlaxoSmithKline sold its consumer healthcare business, including its health food drinks portfolio, to Hindustan Unilever.
  • L&T’s has hived off its electrical and automation business by selling it to Schneider Electric. Kalpataru’s power transmission assets were sold to CLP for debt reduction and to focus on strategic diversification 
  • Indiabulls carved out commercial office business into a separate firm under the name of Indiabulls commercial assets limited.

Difference tabulated

Sl.NoSpin-OffCarve Out
The parent company dispenses 100% of its interest in the holding.Parent Company dispenses only 20% of its interest in the holding.
Shares of the subsidiary business unit are provided to the existing shareholders on a pro-rata basis (proportionate to their shareholding in the parent company).Shares of the subsidiary are given to the public by way of an Initial Public Offering  (IPO).
Shares are enjoyed by the shareholders in the parent as well as in the subsidiary company. No exchange of shares.Shares of the subsidiary are publicly traded and no obligation of holding such shares is created within the parent company.
A spin-off is aimed at establishing the subsidiary’s identity independent of the parent company.A carve-out does not aim at accomplishing the parent company’s main objective but aims at achieving its organizational and capital objectives.
Spin-off aims to provide the benefit of progress to shareholders in both the parent and the subsidiary company.Carve out aims to provide the benefit of enjoyment of increasing the value of the shareholders.

Equity carve-out v. spin-off : which to choose?

The better mode of divestiture or the mode of right corporate restructuring depends upon the goals a promoter wishes to achieve. Equity Carve-out is opted for when the parent company is searching for an opportunity to “sell” the subsidiary company through total divesture or by selling shares within the subsidiary without giving up complete control. 

As mentioned above, fulfilling the first mentioned condition, which is to find a single buyer who will make a purchase in its entirety at one go, is fairly impossible. The parent company, therefore, goes for a Carve-Out by offering partial shares through IPO. If any promoter has such goals, then, carve out is the suitable option to choose.

On the other hand, promoters who choose to go for Spin-off, look at creating a separate existence of the parent from the subsidiary company as doing so would be lucrative for them both. It is done when the parent company realizes that the subsidiary company has no further scope of growth being associated with the parent or it has reached its complete potential and both the companies can now only grow further if they are separated. 

The goal of the spin-off, initially, is not to make money but to sell or buy equity creating a distinct independent identity of the entities. This is done by offering shares of the subsidiaries by the parent company to its shareholders on a pro-rata basis. Pro-rata allocation also allows for a non-taxable event. If any promoters’ goals are aligned to such a cause, then spin-off is the most suitable option for them to choose.

Conclusion

In such kinds of divestitures, non-core businesses are hived off/sold from the parent resulting in more and more merger & acquisition activity. Generally, a holding company holds shares of a subsidiary company from 50 to 100 percent. The holding company sells the shares of the subsidiary to the public or to its existing shareholders to restructure. Therefore, the question, whether to spin off or carve out can only be answered depending on the progress of the company and the condition of its core business. Primarily, the focus should be on the core business. If a business unit or asset is not performing, it can cause a hindrance to the growth of the core business. Hence, companies find it imperative to sell off non-synergistic businesses. It might also be the case that the subsidiary is performing better than the main business. In such a scenario it is prudent to separate it from the parent in order to focus on both the businesses strategically. When management becomes difficult and the holding company is not economically doing well, they are given to the public to raise capital. In the end, it’s the ultimate call of the promoters to decide whether to spin off or to carve it out.

References


Students of Lawsikho courses regularly produce writing assignments and work on practical exercises as a part of their coursework and develop themselves in real-life practical skills.

LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals, and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:https://t.me/joinchat/J_0YrBa4IBSHdpuTfQO_sA

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content.

Download Now

Repeat appointment of arbitrators as a ground of challenge : HRD Corporation v. GAIL (India) Limited

0
Image source - https://bit.ly/2YvmeyN

This article is written by Aanya Kameshwar, pursuing a Certificate Course in Arbitration: Strategy, Procedure and Drafting from LawSikho. This article has been edited by Aatima Bhatia (Associate, Lawsikho) and Smriti Katiyar (Associate, Lawsikho). 

Introduction

One of the important reasons why parties involved in a dispute decide to opt for arbitration as an alternative dispute resolution is that they are given the opportunity to select their own decision-maker. The fact that parties get to nominate their own arbitrator is one of the most distinctive characteristics of the arbitral process. As the parties to a dispute are allowed to choose their own decision-maker, they try to nominate the person who would best support their position in the disputed matter. In layman’s terms, an arbitrator is someone who, being neutral to the matter between the parties, provides an objective, unbiased and wise solution to the dispute in the proceedings of arbitration.  

In the midst of the parties opting more for arbitrations, the issue of repetitive appointments of arbitrators is gaining more and more significance. The fact that the neutrality of an arbitrator is directly compromised when he is appointed by the same party on several occasions, makes this situation a sensitive matter. Item 22 of the fifth schedule of the 1996 Act deals with ‘repetitive appointment of arbitrators’ as a ground to challenge the appointment. The said item no. is reproduced hereunder: –

“22. The arbitrator has within the past three years been appointed as arbitrator on two or more occasions by one of the parties or an affiliate of one of the parties.”

A person entrusted with a duty to judge a matter must be impartial & independent. The fifth schedule of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 (“1996 Act”) lays down various grounds giving rise to justifiable doubts as to the independence and impartiality of the nominated arbitrator(s) and the seventh schedule of the 1996 Act lays down the grounds which immediately renders a person ineligible to act as an arbitrator. The intention of this article is to offer a brief description of one of the important grounds to challenge the appointment of the arbitrator i.e. ‘repetitive appointment of arbitrators’ and to analyse the findings of the Court in the case  HRD Corporation (Marcus Oil and Chemical Division) v. Gail (India) Limited (“HRD Corporation”) and how its interpretation of the Schedules and the challenge procedure can affect the arbitration in India.

Can arbitrators be reappointed?

The issue of ‘repeat arbitrators’ is the situation where an arbitrator has been previously appointed on several occasions by the same party. 

For example, if Mr. A has been nominated or is proposed to be nominated by party X as an arbitrator in March 2021 (third arbitration) and it was found from the declaration made by the nominated arbitrator under Section 12 of the Act, that he had also been appointed by the said party A in July 2019 (second arbitration) and in 2017 (first arbitration), then while determining the nominated arbitrator’s independence and impartiality in the third arbitration, would the appointment of Mr. A be challenged under item 22 of the fifth schedule of the Act or can Mr. A be reappointed as an arbitrator for the third time as an arbitrator?

 In the case of Sudesh Prabhakar and Ors. v. EMAAR Constructions Pvt. Ltd., the Delhi High Court, while relying on HRD Corporation (supra), has held that even an arbitrator who has been appointed on two or more occasions by a party or its affiliates in the past three years, may yet not be disqualified if it is shown that the nominated arbitrator was impartial and independent on the earlier two arbitrations.

Rule to make disclosure

As per Section 12 of the Arbitration Act, 1996, the person who is nominated in connection with his possible appointment as an arbitrator should make a disclosure under section 12. This disclosure should be in the format prescribed in the Sixth Schedule which requires the person to disclose:

  1. whether there are any circumstances that may give rise to justifiable doubts as to his independence or impartiality; and
  2. whether the person can devote sufficient time to complete the entire arbitration within a period of twelve months.

The Hon’ble Supreme Court in the case of HRD Corporation (Marcus Oil and Chemical Division) v. Gail (India) Limited, has interpreted Sections 12, 13, and 14 of the Act and the said Schedules. The Supreme Court has also interpreted the procedure for a challenge to the appointment of an arbitrator. Below we try to analyse the findings of the Court in the HDR Corporation case and how its interpretation of the Schedules and the challenge procedure can shape Arbitration in India. 

arbitration

Background of the case

On the 1st of April, 1999, HRD corporation and GAIL entered into a contract for the wax supply which was produced at GAIL’s plant in Uttar Pradesh. The contract was for a time period of twenty years. During the business few disputes arose between the parties which resulted in three arbitrations. For the first two arbitrations, the tribunal consisted of Justice N.N. Goswamy, Justice J.K. Mehra, and Justice A.B. Rohtagi as the presiding arbitrator. Even for the third arbitration, the same tribunal was chosen by the parties, but due to the sudden demise of Justice Goswamy during the pendency of the proceedings, Justice T. Doabia was appointed in his place. Also, Justice. S.S. Chadha was appointed in the place of Justice Rohtagi because he resigned from his position. The third arbitration proceedings came to end in the year 2015.

In the fourth arbitration, GAIL nominated Justice Doabia whereas Justice K. Ramamoorthy was nominated by HRD. As the presiding arbitrator Justice K.K. Lahoti was appointed by the two judges. Subsequently, Justice K. Ramamoorthy resigned, and to fill his vacancy, Justice Mukul Mudgal was appointed by HRD.  Justice Lahoti disclosed after his appointment that he had previously given a legal opinion to GAIL in an unrelated matter. HRD challenged the appointment of Justice Justice Doabia and K.K. Lahoti before the Arbitral Tribunal. The challenge was dismissed. Thereafter, before the Hon’ble Delhi High Court, HRD challenged the appointment of the said two arbitrators which was also dismissed. Then, before the Hon’ble Supreme Court, the dispute was appealed on the grounds mentioned below.

Grounds for challenge 

It was argued by the HRD corporation that the appointment of Justice K.K. Lahoti is unfavourable because of the appointment of K.K. Lahoti attracts Item 20 of the Fifth Schedule and Items 1, 8, and 15 of the Seventh Schedule as previously he has given a legal opinion to GAIL in an unrelated matter. Further, the appointment of Justice Doabia also attracted Items 1, 15, and 16 of the Seventh Schedule because Justice Doabia was an arbitrator in the previous rounds of arbitration in the same dispute.

Outcome of the case

The Court held that to attract any items mentioned under the Fifth Schedule to a challenge, the appointment of the arbitrator is not permissible before the Court until and unless an award is issued by the Arbitral Tribunal. This is so because the parties are allowed under Section 13 of the Act to raise the issues of “impartiality” and “independence” before the Arbitral Tribunal only. However, parties can approach the Court directly to raise issues attracting Seventh Schedule. This is so because the items in Seventh Schedule, when attracted, can make the arbitrator de jure ineligible to act as an arbitrator. Hence, the Court proceeded with the allegations in respect to the items mentioned in the Seventh Schedule only which were raised against the two arbitrators.

The Court ruled that merely providing a legal opinion in an unrelated matter will not attract Items 1, 8, and 15 of the Seventh Schedule in respect to the challenge to the appointment of Justice K.K. Lahoti. The Court also said that to attract these items the advice should be “regular” and the opinion should be “qua the dispute at hand.” Furthermore, the court said that to constitute a professional relationship and not a business relation the advice should be related to business relationships and a legal opinion on a matter only. Hence, the challenge against Justice K.K. Lahoti was dismissed.

The Court ruled in respect of the appointment of Justice Doabia, that his involvement in a previous arbitration between the same parties would not, by itself make him ineligible to be an arbitrator in a subsequent arbitration. The fact that an arbitrator has previously decided a case is not enough to lead to a conclusion of apparent bias. What is required is that the involvement should be in that particular dispute. Accordingly, the Apex Court ruled that Justice Doabia and Justice Lahoti’s appointment cannot be terminated. 

Analysis 

The decision in HRD Corporation (Marcus Oil and Chemical Division) v. Gail (India) Limited., will be looked upon in the future for adjudication of disputes on the issue of appointment of arbitrators. The major takeaways of this judgment are that the fact that an arbitrator has been on a panel of an arbitral tribunal in a different dispute, but amongst the same parties, should not lead to an automatic assumption of bias against that arbitrator. In order to further promote arbitration as an efficacious process, clearly, there has to be a belief in their ability to be neutral and impartial. 


LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals, and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:

https://t.me/joinchat/J_0YrBa4IBSHdpuTfQO_sA

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content.

Download Now

Elements of a corporate sentence and punishment

0

This article is written by Himanshu Mahamuni, a student of Government Law College, Mumbai. This article analyzes the grievous business crimes of non-compoundable nature in India and provisions for their penalties.

Introduction

A corporate sentence or white-collar crimes become more prevalent in any jurisdiction when the laws are incompetent or have lots of loopholes to evade. These crimes are committed by the elite or educated class of people who have money, power and good knowledge of the law. E.H. Sutherland defines these crimes as committed by people of socio-economic groups because committing such crime directly or indirectly has an effect on society at large. These are targeted mainly because of greed but it does not affect only those people, but thousands of people or the society as a whole. Some of the infamous corporate crimes committed in India were the Harshad Mehta scam, Satyam scam, Fodder scam, etc. which have shrunken the country’s economy to shambles and directly affected the pockets of common people, who are the taxpayers of the country.

Governments being hit by these crimes have framed various legislations for the purpose of enumerating the sentence for such crimes. Some of these are the Companies Act, 2013, Income Tax Act, 1961, etc. As the crimes here affect the innocent people at large, punishments for the same are made rigorous for the compensation to the people, which include civil and criminal punishments both. In this article, we will discuss those crimes, the crimes given under the Companies Act as the corporate sector is governed by the same, conviction of the culprit and punishment provisions.

Business crimes in India

A corporate entity has a status of separate legal entity from that of its promoters or directors. A person can’t claim the assets, profits or any money of the business as its own because the entity has its rights to own it. However, people misuse this concept to commit business crimes by hiding behind the veil. In such instances, the government deems it necessary to lift the corporate veil to catch the real perpetrators. Some of the business crimes that emerged in recent times are:

Fraud 

Frauds are aimed to mislead and gain an inappropriate advantage. These usually include financial frauds against the banks. These crimes affect both the public who keep their money in the bank and the government. Frauds emerge because of misuse of technological resources and misuse of money for unauthorized purposes. Frauds also discourage foreign investors from investing in the domestic market. The prominent frauds in the corporate sentences are the following

  1. Securities Fraud

Fraud in securities may include contravention of any provisions of Securities and Exchange Board of India Act(SEBI), 1992 in issue, purchase or sale of securities. The SEBI Act contains provisions that prohibit fraudulent or unfair trade practices in the securities market and punishment for offences like failure to furnish information, redress investor’s grievance, etc which is usually a hefty penalty.

  1. Accounting Fraud

The Companies Act, 2013 deals with any accounting fraud committed by companies such as disclosing material facts in financial statements, professional misconduct, etc. The Central Government is empowered to direct necessary investigation against such companies where they can inspect books of account, direct special audit and any other necessary procedure which is punished by the provisions of forgery under IPC. 

Money Laundering 

Money Laundering Act, 2002 administers the crime committed under the same. This method is used to convert black money into white by showing illegal money as legal through legitimate means. This makes it difficult for the investigation agencies to trace the source of money when invested in the market which is eventually used to spend and bring into the financial system.

Tax Evasion

Tax evasion is done with the intention to not reveal one’s real taxable income and honest taxpayers. The tax crimes may consist of various tax-related crimes such as tax evasion, smuggling, customs duty evasion, value-added tax evasion, and tax fraud. The Chapter XXII of the Tax Act, 1961,  deals with the offences related to tax evasion which may result from fine to imprisonment. 

Insider Trading 

Insider Trading is the trading done by a person in securities of a listed company based on Unpublished Price-Sensitive Information(UPSI) which will give an unfair advantage compared to ordinary investors of the company. The SEBI Act prohibits insider trading and passed a regulation SEBI (Prohibition of Insider trading Regulations), 2015 to introduce strict norms and prosecute the offenders of laws regarding insider trading. 

Bribery

Bribery can be termed as money paid to the authority in exchange for a favour to do or not to do something which would not have been possible through legitimate means. It can be termed as the most common type of white-collar crime amongst the high ranking officials in business. This type of income goes unreported and does not form part of a financial statement. The Prevention of Corruption Act (PMLA), 2002 deals with the offences related to bribery against any person contrary to the provisions of the Act and attracts heavy penalties. Such other acts dealing with the prosecution of offenders in bribery are IPC, Benami Transaction (Prohibition) Act, 1988 to punish the offenders. 

Cybercrime 

In the digital age of computers, cybercrimes have emerged as the leading type of crime in the country. These crimes are committed by the people who are well versed with the technology and fraud the innocent individual and are a threat to the security of the nation. Damages due to this may range from damage to reputation to huge financial losses. Businesses commit cybercrimes to usually cause harm to rivals and stop them from progressing. Such offences are dealt with under the Information technology (IT) Act, 2000 which prescribes punishment for crimes in the field of e-commerce, e-governance and cybercrimes. This act extends outside India too where offence committed involves a computer, computer system or any computer network located in India.

Law enforcement authorities for corporate sentences

Ordinarily, the law enforcement at the state level is investigated by the Police force where the crime has been committed. The law enforcement authority for the investigation of crimes at the central level is the Central Investigation Bureau (CBI). The unified legislation for the whole country for criminal offences is Criminal Procedure Code (CrPC),1973 and for civil offences is ruled by the Code of Civil Procedure (CPC), 1908. For specialised offences for determining corporate sentences, specialised authorities are delegated with required power and CBI can assist such specialised authorities in particular serious offences. The CBI shall investigate the crimes of a particular state either by prior consent of the state or without consent through direction of the High Court or the Supreme Court. Such authorities are formed under the Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA) who specialise in the field of tax, company law, securities law, information technology and any such other required qualifications as prescribed by the ministry for detection of white-collar offenders. 

Some of the important specialized authorities set up by the government under various departments of ministry are:

  1. The Central Economic Intelligence Bureau (CEIB);

CEIB works for the investigation of various economic offences, and the implementation of the Conservation of Foreign Exchange and Prevention of Smuggling Activities Act (FEMA), 1974;

  1. The Directorate of Enforcement (DOE);

The DOE department works against foreign exchange and money laundering offences, and implementation of the Federal Emergency Management Agency and Prevention of Money Laundering Act, 2002 (PMLA);

  1. The Securities and Exchange Board of India (SEBI);

SEBI works towards protecting the interests of investors in securities and promoting their development, and regulating the securities market and matters connected therewith;

  1. The Directorate General of Income Tax;

This Department works to Investigate offences relating to tax;

  1. The Financial Intelligence Unit, India (FIU-IND);

FIU-IND works for the collection of financial intelligence to combat money laundering and related crimes;

  1. The Competition Commission of India (CCI);

CCI works to curb unfair trade practices and anti-competitive trade practices.

Judicial authorities for the disposal of corporate cases

The structure of courts in India dealing with criminal offences is of federal structure which gives authority to resolve cases in their jurisdiction as allowed by law. Districts within the states have Session courts to adjudicate cases in the districts which further have courts of Judicial Magistrate first class and Judicial Magistrate second class which deals with the cases within the prescribed jurisdiction. The cases in session court can be appealed in the High Court of the state and further in the Supreme Court.

Like the specialized law enforcement authorities, the government has formed special courts or tribunals to adjudicate white-collar crimes with the delegation of power. For instance, National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT) deals with the offences related to any provision of Company law which are further appealable in the National Company Law Appellate Tribunal (NCLAT). 

Non-compoundable offences under the Companies Act

Crimes done by business entities are punished by the provisions given under the Companies Act, 2013. Companies Act gives a chance to compound the offence under Section 441 to avoid long legal proceedings in the form of payment of a fine. The Act lays down various offences and their punishments. Non-compoundable offences are offences that can’t be settled by paying money and shall be punished with imprisonment or imprisonment and fine. These offences are serious and threaten the interest of the public. Some of these offences are:

Refusal to register the transfer of securities (Section 58)

  1. If a private company limited by shares refuses to register the transfer of securities or interest of a member of the company, then the company needs to send a notice with reasons of such refusal to the transferee and transferor or give intimation of such transmission within 30 days from which the instrument of transfer or intimation of transmission was delivered to the company:

Remedy

The transferee may appeal to tribunal within 30 days from the notice or 60 days in case no notice was sent regarding refusal to transfer with reasons from the instrument of transfer or intimation of transmission.

  1. If a public company refuses to register the transfer of securities, the company must send a notice within a period of 30 days with sufficient cause for such refusal from the date of the instrument of transfer or intimation of transmission.

Remedy

The transferee may appeal to the tribunal within 60 days from the notice or 90 days from the delivery of an instrument of transfer or intimation of transmission of the securities where no notice with reasons was received. 

Punishment

The tribunal may dismiss the appeal after hearing both sides or order to direct to:

  1. Transfer or transmission to be registered by the company within 10 days; or
  2. Rectify the register and pay any damages suffered, if any, to the company.

If a person contravenes with the orders of the tribunal, he shall be punishable with imprisonment of not less than 1 year which may extend to 3 years and with a fine, not less than Rs. 1 lakh which may extend to Rs. 5 lakh.

Tampering with the minutes (Section 118)

The minutes are a written record of the meeting of the company concerning any business transaction. It shall be prepared, signed and kept at every general meeting of the company as these are the evidence of the proceedings recorded in a meeting to give a fair and correct summary of the proceedings. The chairman of the meeting has discretion over inclusion or non-inclusion of the matters which may be of the nature as defamatory of any person, irrelevant or detrimental to the interest of the company in the minutes. Tampering with the minutes to not show a fair and correct summary is strictly punishable.

Punishment

If any person is found guilty of tampering with the minutes of the proceedings of any meeting, he shall be punishable with imprisonment which may extend to 2 years and a fine which shall not be less than Rs. 25 thousand and may extend to Rs. 1 lakh.

Failure to distribute dividends (Section 127)

Once a dividend is declared by a company it becomes debt and compulsorily to be paid. The declared dividend is to be paid or warrants in respect thereof within 30 days of the declaration to any shareholder entitled to it. 

Punishment

If a company fails to distribute the dividends then every director, who is knowingly a part of the default, shall be punishable with imprisonment which may extend to 2 years and with a fine which shall not be less than Rs. 1 thousand for each day during which the default continues and the company shall be liable to pay simple interest at the rate of 18% p.a. during which such default continues.

Prohibition and restriction on political contribution (Section 182)

A company that is a government company and a company that has been in existence for less than 3 financial years shall not contribute any money directly or indirectly to any political party.

If a company other than above makes a contribution of any percentage to a political party, it shall be by an account payee cheque or an account payee bank draft or electronic system through a bank account. Such companies are required to disclose the contribution through their profit and loss account during the financial year. 

Punishment

If a company contributes anything contravening the provisions of Section 182, the company shall be punishable with a fine which may extend to 5 times to the amount of contribution made and every officer who is in default shall be punishable with imprisonment for a term which may extend to 6 months and fine which may extend to 5 times to the amount of contribution made.

Loans and investment of companies (Section 186)

A company is allowed to invest in only up to two layers of investment companies. The companies are required to follow the procedure involved in taking loans by giving guarantees and providing security. No company shall directly or indirectly give a loan to any person or body corporate, give guarantee or security and acquire by way of subscription exceeding 60% of its paid-up share capital and free reserves and securities premium account.

Punishment

If a company contravenes with the provisions of this Section 186, the company shall be punishable with fines which shall be not less than Rs. 25 thousand and may extend to Rs. 5 lakh and every officer who is in default shall be punishable with imprisonment which may extend to 2 years and with fine which shall not be less than 25 thousand and may extend to Rs. 1 lakh. The above mentioned are some of the non-compoundable offences which are serious in the eyes of the law. However, fraud is one of the most serious and prevalent offences committed by a business. 

False statements (Section 448)

If the company in its report, return, certificate, financial statement, prospectus, statement or other documents which are required has made any statement that is:

  • False in any material particular, knowing that it is false; or
  • Omits any material fact; knowing that it is false

The person shall be liable for fraud under Section 448 under provisions of fraud.

Limitation for the provisions of corporate sentences

There are certain limitation periods for the provisions to convict an accused for the offences in certain situations. These provisions are given in Section 468 of CrPC where no court can take cognisance of the offence after the expiry of,

  1. Six months where accused is punishable with fine,
  2. One year where accused is punishable with imprisonment of one year,
  3. Three years where the accused is punishable with imprisonment of one to three years.

The Economic Offences (Inapplicability of Limitation) Act, 1974 provides for certain offences committed under all the Tax related Acts, where the provisions of CrPC of limitations shall not apply.

An offence committing in continued nature shall be given a fresh period of limitation at every moment the offence continues to be committed.  

Investigation procedure in cases of corporate crimes

  • The first step to investigation is the First Information Report(FIR) filed with the police. The police initiate investigation based on the procedure described in the CrPC.
  • The authorities have the power to furnish any records and documents from banks related to the transaction related to the criminal offence involved of the accused. Further, an order under PMLA can be passed to freeze any property in possession of the accused.
  • Any kind of electronic document or evidence required in the proceeding can be requested under the IT Act from any computer situated outside or inside India for the investigation of the case. The government also has the power to intercept any information transmitted through computers in the interest of the sovereignty of the state, public order, etc.
  • The Enforcement Directorate is enforced to conduct raids if any person is under suspicion to be involved in any kind of prohibited transaction. 
  • Certain information which falls under privileged communication cannot be requested to be presented as evidence, such as communication between husband and wife, lawyer and client. However, such confidential information can be demanded by the court after scrutiny of relevance or admissibility of the document ordered to be produced.
  • The authorities are empowered to investigate any individual authority based on the circumstances and relevancy of such individuals to the case under the CrPC. Such admissions usually take place at the office of the authorities under oath.
  • Any confession given to police is inadmissible as evidence and any coerced admission is not allowed in the course of an investigation. The individual during questioning is entitled to an advocate and not to be present the whole time.
  • The person can choose to be silent except during interrogation. Any person accused is innocent until proven guilty.

National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT)

NCLT is a quasi-judicial authority set up by recommendation of the Eradi Committee which hears the civil proceedings of companies. This body was introduced after an extensive debate of 10 years in the Companies Act, 2013. NCLT is empowered to order an investigation of the affairs of the company on an application of 100 members. NCLT can freeze the assets of the company on an order of investigation or scrutiny by members. Conversion of a company from a public limited company into a private limited company has to be undergone through the confirmation of NCLT. It can cancel the registration or deregister any company which contravenes the provisions of the  Companies Act. People aggrieved by the conduct of business or misconduct can complain against the company in the NCLT. NCLT has jurisdiction over insolvency proceedings and complaints of LLP. People not satisfied with the order of NCLT can appeal in National Company Law Appellate Tribunal (NCLAT) and further in the Supreme Court to seek justice.

Conclusion

The elements of sentences in the corporate sector to punish white-collar crime are rigorous. There are combinations of fine and imprisonment provisions depending on the severity of the crime. However, these strict laws disrupt the ease of doing business and discourage people from entering because of compliances. In a move to give relief to businesses, the Ministry of Corporate Affairs has released a report to decriminalise and re-categorisation of certain offences. The MCA has re-categorized 16 out of 81 compoundable offences to an in-house adjudication framework wherein defaults would be subject to a penalty levied by adjudicating officers. Whereas no non-compoundable offences were re-categorized. This move to decriminalise the technical and procedural compoundable offences is beneficial to the company for a smooth and worry-free business.

Whereas non-decriminalisation of non-compoundable offences which affect the public is a necessary omission because it strengthens the governance framework and assures security to the investors and members of the company. Tribunals such as NCLT have given all the necessary powers to deal with the matters related to companies and it further should expand more to relieve the overburdened judiciary.

References


LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals, and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:

https://t.me/joinchat/J_0YrBa4IBSHdpuTfQO_sA

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content.

Download Now

Compulsory registration of marriage and its feasibility

0
Image Source -https://bit.ly/3cAIxc6

This article is written by Harit Gandhi. The article has been edited by Ruchika Mohapatra (Associate, LawSikho).

Introduction

Civil registration of events like birth, death, marriage, and so on is primarily done to provide the legal records needed by law. In India, Section 30 of the Births, Deaths and Marriage Registration Act, 1886, mandates compulsory birth registration. However, as far as marriages are concerned, their registration is not made obligatory since they are connected to consanguinity, and their solemnization is unrelated to registration. Non-registration of marriage provides a breeding ground for social evils like bigamy, desertion, denial of a matrimonial right, child marriage, etc. which has a disproportionate effect on women. Law commission of India (Hereinafter referred to as Law Commission), in its report 270, has expressed concerns regarding the current state of affairs and has come up with suggestions, which can help frame national law.

Thus, for this article, the author will first look at a global overview on compulsory registration of marriages, followed by the central and state laws on registration of marriage, and lastly, determine the feasibility of a national law mandating registration. The author has heavily relied on Law Commission reports while approaching the problem.

Global view on registration of marriages

The United Nations has given primacy to creating a civil registry of social events like birth, death, and marriage. Such a civil registry creates and safeguards individual rights, which also helps in the creation of a database containing vital statistics.

In countries where marriage registration is compulsory, governing norms stipulate either creating a household register/family album or enacting civil laws (individual registrations) mandating compulsory registration. In countries following the former system, formal acknowledgement of one’s status or family-related events such as marriage is only provided after all such occurrences have been recorded and documented in the family or civil registry. For example, when a marriage takes place in Japan, the household record must be amended to reflect the event. This system is known as Koseki. As a result of the family registry, policies can be effectively aimed at the family rather than the individual, with household heads accountable for execution. Though such a system presents its problem, e.g. process of registration may become discriminatory and exclusionary and may involve complex questions when dealing with a person of other nationality. Children born from an unregistered relationship are deemed illegitimate and are not entitled to family property or inherited titles, as used to happen in Koseki. Other examples include countries like Germany (familienbuch), France (livret de Famille), China (hukou).

Whereas countries following a system of non-family registration often have the provision of fines and imprisonment on non-registration of marriage. E.g. As per Section 5(2) of The Muslim Marriages and Divorce Registration Act, 1974 of Bangladesh, non-registration is punished by up to two years of simple imprisonment, a fine of up to 3000 Taka, or both. On the other hand, in countries like France, Italy, Brazil, Portugal, etc., marriage must be celebrated and registered before a governmental body, and a marriage certificate is the only permissible proof of marriage. This effectively makes the non-registration of marriage null and void. 

Indian laws on registration of marriage

In India, at the central level, no law makes marriage registration compulsory. As per the commission, marriage registration in different parts of the country is governed by either one of the three central laws (Births, Deaths and Marriage Registration Act, 1886; Registration Act of 1908; and Registration Births and Deaths Act 1969) or local law, or a combination of the two. This leads to a lot of confusion among authorities and those who wish to or have been mandated by law to register their marriages.

As far as personal laws are concerned, marriage registration guidelines are given by The Indian Christian Marriage Act, 1872, The Kazis Act 1880(Muslim), The Anand Marriage Act, 1909, The Parsi Marriage and Divorce Act, 1936, The Special Marriage Act, 1954, The Hindu Marriage Act, 1955. Except for the Parsi Marriage and Divorce Act, 1936, Christian Marriage Act, 1872 and The Special Marriage Act, 1954, no other marriage act mandates compulsory marriage registration. Parsi Marriage and Divorce Act, 1936  and Christian Marriage Act, 1872  have largely taken recourse to the provision of The Birth, Death and Marriage Registration Act, 1886 to provide compulsory marriage registration for maintaining records and statistics.

Section 12 of the Parsi Marriage and Divorce Act, 1936 provides that the priests must periodically transmit their records to Marriage Registrars. A priest who fails to certify a marriage or submit its copy to the Marriage Registrar commits an offence punishable by simple imprisonment for up to three months, a fine of up to one hundred rupees, or both. Furthermore, the State Government will select Marriage Registrars for various districts, and they will be obligated by Section 9 of the Act to send their data to the registrar general of Births, Deaths, and Marriages. Concerning the Indian Christian Marriage Act, 1872, Extracts of marriages registered under the act are forwarded to the Inspector General of Registration. Section 34 mandates transmitting registration records of various kinds of marriage to the Registrar-General of Births, Deaths, and Marriages act 1886.

Given the country’s cultural richness, states under Entry 30, List-3, Schedule 7 of the Indian Constitution have the power to make laws on the registration of marriages. The Supreme Court in Seema v. Ashwani Kumar observed the same and directed the states to compulsorily register marriages solemnized in their jurisdiction. Himachal Pradesh became the first state to introduce a law on compulsory marriage registration in 2004. Following the Supreme Court ruling, many states have developed relevant statutes or made amendments in rules to provide for compulsory marriage registration, with UP (2017) as the latest in the list. Most of them have made registration necessary with a penalty for late registration, but no state has made any law that makes an unregistered marriage invalid or void.

Feasibility of registration

The Commission in para 8.11 recommends amending the Registration of Births and Deaths Act, 1969, to include marriage registration within its scope so that the existing administrative machinery for registration of birth and death can be used for marriage registration, without imposing a substantial financial burden to set up any separate infrastructure. However, addressing financial viability wouldn’t be enough; problems that impact cultural and religious diversity and procedural documentation must also be addressed to ascertain the feasibility of a uniform law.

Legal lacuna on age and impact on social diversity

If implemented, then compulsory marriage will significantly help in reducing child marriages. Delhi HC in Lajja Devi v. State NCT of Delhi observed that compulsory marriage registration would deter guardians from marrying off their underage children as a written record of their ages would show the illegality of such weddings. 

There looms uncertainty over the legal age of marriage that authorities must register because of various personal laws and Central laws dealing with the subject. The Special Marriage Act, Section 5(iii) of the Hindu Marriage Act, 1955, and Section 2(a) of the Prohibition of Child Marriage Act, 2006 stipulate 18 and 21 as the minimum age for women and men. However, when it comes to the status of this marriage, there is much ambiguity.

 According to Sections 11 and 12 of the Hindu Marriage Act 1955, marriages in which one or more parties are minors are lawful and punishable by a monetary fine. Whereas as per Section 3 of the Prohibition of Child Marriage Act, marriage is voidable at the option of minor. Then there is Muslim Personal Law, which states that a Muslim who has reached puberty and is of sound mind can contract marriage. There itself is much ambiguity on the age of puberty in Muslim law. As per Hanafi, the legal age is presumed to be on completion of the fifteen years, unless puberty is attained before fifteen. The Hedaya, on the other hand, states that the earliest age for a male is twelve years and for a girl nine years. The situation is even more deplorable for Shia females, where the age of puberty begins with menstruation. In NabadSadiq Ali Khan v. Jai Kishori, the court held that puberty starts at nine for girls. 

In the lack of a defined status for child marriages – whether invalid, voidable, or lawful – the necessary age for registration remains an open topic. Other than that, the registration age raises a larger question of interference with the customary practice of a different community. The Law Commission is cognisant of the issue and accordingly in para 6.14 recommends regulations that ensure that weddings under all cultures and religions can be recorded instead of meddling with any existing personal law systems. This recommendation can be problematic, as some states might frame laws or rules giving legal effect to child marriage. E.g. Rajasthan government recently amended section 8 of the Rajasthan Compulsory Registration of Marriages Act, 2009, which mandates families to register the marriage of bride below 18 and groom below 21 within 30 days of solemnisation of marriage.

 Many activists have raised concerns that it will increase the number of child marriages. The state government responded by saying that the act will ensure marriages happening underground will come under a legal framework and ensure rights to married couples. Again, we need to look at the main objective; our objective is to eliminate child marriages; in essence, the Rajasthan government uses the exact mechanism to fight the evil of child marriage held by Seema v. Ashwini Kumar be a benefactor of child marriage.   

The committee in para 3.1 also emphasizes the concept of encouraging legal awareness among the public so that these essential ceremonies might be preceded or followed by marriage registration. However, there are cases where even the registration process might affect some prevailing customs of the community, e.g. Uttar Pradesh Marriage Registration Rules-2017 mandates all residents of the state, regardless of faith or community, to register their marriages. One of the rules mandated that the bride and groom furnish their photograph. The Muslim community objected to this rule, as nikanama (the Islamic marriage contract) doesn’t carry bride and groom images. The commission, however, is silent on such kinds of situations.

Procedural documentation

While framing provision for permanent registration, it needs to be ensured that neither does provision become too stringent nor does it become too lax that it gets exposed to fraudulent documentation that potentially hampers the cause of redressing social evils. For example, under rule 4(b)(i) of the Tamil Nadu Registration of Marriages Rules, 2009, the document required for proof of legal age to marry can be as simple as a mark-sheet or a birth certificate, so the possibility of submitting fake documents cannot be ruled out. Take the contrasting case of Mumbai; in Mumbai, marriage has to be registered for the issue of passport, but since registering the marriage is tedious, couples instead get their surname officially changed through a notarized affidavit and a notification in the government gazette. Thus, the government needs to account for these extreme circumstances while framing provisions on compulsory marriage registration.

Furthermore, failing to recognize unregistered marriages as genuine may disproportionately impact vulnerable women since it significantly increases the likelihood of legal claims of women failing due to failure to register the marriage, e.g. refusal of maintenance rights. Accordingly, the Law Commission in para 3.2 proposes that an unregistered marriage should not be regarded as ‘illegal,’ but that small fines for non-registration should be imposed to promote registration. Further, given the country’s vastness, a decentralized registration process may better help implement the rule and serve the purpose. The Law Commission in para 8.10 considers this point and suggests that the Sarpanch or Panchmukh may be called to oversee the duty of marriage registration. Kerala Registration of Marriages (Common) Rules, 2008, is modeled on the same principle which under rule 3 makes the Director of Panchayat the Chief Registrar of marriage.

Conclusion

After thoroughly analysing the topic, the author concludes that Parsi, Christian, and Special Marriage Acts are the only central legislatures that mandate compulsory marriage registration. The majority of enactments for compulsory registration are made at the state level. Whereas on the issue of feasibility of national law, the author makes the following observation:-There is a need for a national law on compulsory marriage registration that is neither stringent nor too lax. The law needs to solve the present ambiguity on the legal age of marriage without interfering in the prevailing customs of a community. The implementation of the law should be decentralised for its effective enforcement.

References 


Students of Lawsikho courses regularly produce writing assignments and work on practical exercises as a part of their coursework and develop themselves in real-life practical skills.

LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals, and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:

https://t.me/joinchat/J_0YrBa4IBSHdpuTfQO_sA

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content.

Download Now

Blog competition winner announcement (Week 2nd August 2021)

0

So today is the day! We are finally announcing the winners of our Blog Writing Competition for 2nd week of August 2021 (From 9th August 2021 to 15th August 2021). 

We’d like to say a big thanks to everyone for participating! It has been a great pleasure receiving your articles on a different legal topic, they were all amazing! 

And now we’d like to congratulate our top 5 contestants, who have become the undoubted winners. They will receive Prize money of Rs 2000, LawSikho store credits worth Rs. 1000 and a Certificate of Merit from team LawSikho.

They will also get an opportunity to intern at iPleaders under the mentorship of Ramanuj Mukherjee, Abhyuday Agarwal, Harsh Jain, and Komal Shah. Their articles will get published on iPleaders blog (India’s largest legal blog). Click here to see other perks available to them.

Their entries (see below) received maximum marks based on the average marks given by the panel of editors, and have been crowned the winners!

S.noNameAbout AuthorArticle
1Gyaaneshwar JoshiInternAll about the Maharashtra Electric Vehicle Policy, 2021
2Anushi AgarwalInternCan someone upload your video on the internet or Youtube without your consent
3Dnyaneshwari PatilInternRecent judgements passed by the Supreme Court of India on arbitration
4Sachin Kumar Student who is pursuing a Diploma in Cyber Law, FinTech Regulations, and Technology Contracts from LawSikho.Analysis of NPCI guidelines in different UPI apps
5Aparna JayakumarInternGrowing need for ADR in light of some recent notable case laws

Meet our next 5 contestants who made it to top 10 here. They will receive a Certificate of Excellence from team LawSikho.

They will also get an opportunity to intern at iPleaders under the mentorship of Ramanuj Mukherjee, Abhyuday Agarwal, Harsh Jain, and Komal Shah. Their articles got published on iPleaders blog (India’s largest legal blog). Click here to see other perks available to them.

S.noNameAbout AuthorArticle
6Priyanshi SoniInternDelhi Chief Minister’s Advocates’ Welfare Scheme
7Aporva ShekharInternControversy related to the election of External Affairs Minister S. Jaishankar to Rajya Sabha and related provisions in Indian Law
8Amrit KaurInternThe National Education Policy 2020 and Students’ and Teachers’ Holistic Advancement through Quality Education (SARTHAQ)
9Akshita GuptaInternInstances of animal cruelty in India
10Sneha AsthanaStudent pursuing Diploma in Business Laws for In-House Counsels from LawSikho.Resolving settlement matters under the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, 2016 in the light of Lokhandwala Kataria vs. Nisus Finance

Click here to see all the contest entries. Click here to see our previous week’s winners.

Our panel of judges, which included editors of iPleaders blog and LawSikho team, chose the winning entry based on how well it exemplified the entry requirements.

Certificates will be sent on the email address given by the contestant while submitting the article. The contestants have to claim their prize money by sending their account details as a reply to the mail in which they received their certificate within 1 month (30 days) of the date of declaration of results and not afterwards. 

For any other queries feel free to contact Vanshika (Senior Managing Editor, iPleaders) at [email protected]

LawSikho credits can be claimed within twelve months from the date of declaration of the results (after which, credits will expire).

Congratulations to all the participants!

Regards,

Team LawSikho


LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals, and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:

https://t.me/joinchat/J_0YrBa4IBSHdpuTfQO_sA

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content.

Download Now

IICA Independent Director Exam 2026: Syllabus, Fees & Complete Guide

0

Every individual whose name appears in the Independent Directors Databank maintained by the Indian Institute of Corporate Affairs must pass the Online Proficiency Self-Assessment Test within two years of registration — or face removal from the databank entirely. This requirement, introduced through Rule 6(4) of the Companies (Appointment and Qualification of Directors) Rules, 2014, applies to anyone who has been appointed as an independent director, is about to be appointed, or intends to seek appointment. The test itself is straightforward — 50 multiple-choice questions, 75 minutes, a 50 percent passing threshold, and unlimited attempts — but the consequences of ignoring it are not. Failure to pass within the prescribed window results in permanent deletion of the profile, requiring complete re-registration and fresh fee payment. This guide covers every aspect of the IICA independent director exam for 2026: the registration process, current fee structure with GST breakdowns, the four-domain syllabus, preparation resources including the 42 official e-learning modules, exam-day logistics, and the compliance obligations that follow certification.



What Is the IICA Independent Director Online Proficiency Self-Assessment Test

The Online Proficiency Self-Assessment Test is an MCQ-based examination conducted by the Indian Institute of Corporate Affairs under Section 150(1) of the Companies Act, 2013, read with Rule 6(4) of the Companies (Appointment and Qualification of Directors) Rules, 2014. The test was designed to verify that individuals registered in the Independent Directors Databank possess a minimum level of competence across company law, securities law, basic accountancy, and corporate governance — the four foundational areas that any functioning independent director must understand.

The test has been operational since March 1, 2020. It runs on a proctor-based assessment platform that issues an e-certificate upon successful completion. The most significant practical feature of this test is accessibility — it can be attempted from the candidate’s home or office at a time of their choosing, without requiring a visit to any physical test centre. Two daily slots are available throughout the year: afternoon (2:00 PM to 3:00 PM) and late evening (8:00 PM to 9:00 PM).

The legal basis for the test is important to understand because it determines who must take it and what happens if they do not. Section 150(1) of the Companies Act, 2013 empowers the Central Government to prescribe conditions for inclusion of names in the databank. Rule 6(4) implements this by requiring every individual in the databank to pass the online proficiency test within two years of inclusion. The two-year window is not discretionary — it is a statutory deadline, and failure to meet it triggers automatic removal of the individual’s name from the databank.

The purpose of the test is not to serve as a gatekeeping examination in the traditional sense. It is structured as a self-assessment — a mechanism to ensure that individuals who hold themselves out as available for independent director positions have engaged with the basic legal and governance framework within which they will operate. The difficulty level reflects this purpose: the test is designed to be passable by any professional who has reviewed the prescribed study material, regardless of their educational background.


Who Must Take the Test — Eligibility and Exemptions

The requirement to take the IICA independent director exam applies to every individual whose name is included in the Independent Directors Databank — whether they are currently serving as an independent director under the Companies Act, 2013, are about to be appointed, or are registering with the intention of being considered for future appointments. There is no minimum educational qualification requirement. Candidates from any professional background — legal, financial, engineering, medical, academic, or otherwise — are eligible. Non-graduates are also eligible, provided they possess relevant expertise and experience as contemplated under Section 149(6) of the Companies Act, 2013.

There is no minimum or maximum age limit for registration or for taking the test. Foreign nationals are also eligible to register on the databank and take the proficiency test. They may register using either a Director Identification Number or a Passport Number as an alternative identifier on the databank portal.

The Rules provide for exemptions for individuals with substantial professional experience. The following categories of individuals are exempt from taking the proficiency test:

Individuals who have served for a minimum period of three years as a director or key managerial personnel in a listed company, or in an unlisted public company having a paid-up share capital of ten crore rupees or more, or in a body corporate listed on any recognised stock exchange, or in a statutory corporation set up under an Act of Parliament or any State legislature. Concurrent directorships during the same period are counted only once — the three-year requirement refers to the total period of service, not cumulative years across multiple appointments.

Individuals who have served at the level of Director or above in the Central Government or State Government, handling matters related to commerce, industry, corporate affairs, finance, or any other field related to the functions of an independent director.

Individuals who have been practising as an advocate, chartered accountant, cost accountant, or company secretary in practice for a period of not less than ten years.

If an individual falls within any of these exemption categories, they are not required to take the proficiency test. However, they must still register on the Independent Directors Databank — the exemption applies only to the test, not to databank registration.


Databank Registration — Step-by-Step Process

Registration on the Independent Directors Databank is a two-part process involving the Ministry of Corporate Affairs portal and the IICA databank portal. The process requires a Director Identification Number, so individuals who do not already hold a DIN must obtain one before beginning registration.

The first step is to create an account on the MCA services portal at mca.gov.in. This requires providing a valid email address, mobile number, and basic identity information. The MCA portal serves as the authentication gateway — the DIN and DIR-3 KYC details maintained by MCA are used to auto-populate several fields in the databank registration, reducing the information that candidates need to enter manually.

The second step is to register on the Independent Directors Databank portal at independentdirectorsdatabank.in. The registration form requires the following categories of information: DIN and PAN details, full name and father’s name, date of birth, gender, nationality, occupation, residential and correspondence address, contact details (email and mobile), educational and professional qualifications, areas of experience or expertise, details of any pending criminal proceedings, and details of current and past directorships, key managerial personnel positions, or LLP designations. Much of this information auto-populates from the DIR-3 KYC data maintained by MCA.

Candidates must also set their privacy preferences during registration — the databank allows individuals to control which fields are visible to companies searching the databank and which remain hidden.

Upon successful registration and fee payment, the databank generates a registration certificate with a unique identification number. This certificate is available for download from the dashboard. The registration also generates a GST invoice automatically if the candidate has entered their GSTIN in their profile before making the payment.

The process of appointment of independent directors requires the appointee to be registered in the databank, making this step a prerequisite to any formal board appointment.

Registration to Certification — Step-by-Step

Your roadmap from DIN to e-Certificate

1
Obtain DINApply via MCA Portal (Form DIR-3)
2
Create MCA AccountRegister at mca.gov.in
3
Register on Independent Directors Databankindependentdirectorsdatabank.in
4
Pay Registration FeeChoose: 1-Year / 5-Year / Lifetime plan
5
Complete 42 E-Learning Modules + Mock TestSelf-paced online learning on IICA portal
6
Book Slot & Take Proficiency Test50 MCQs • 75 minutes • Online proctored • Slots at 2 PM & 8 PM
7
Result: Pass or ReattemptScore 50%+ to clear — e-Certificate generated instantly
✓ PASS (50%+)
E-Certificate Generated
✗ FAIL
Review weak areas → Reattempt after 1 day


Fee Structure — Registration, Renewal, and Other Charges

The databank registration fee depends on the subscription plan selected. The following fee structure is currently applicable:

Subscription Plan Base Fee GST (18%) Total Payable
1 Year Rs 5,000 Rs 900 Rs 5,900
5 Years Rs 15,000 Rs 2,700 Rs 17,700
Lifetime Rs 25,000 Rs 4,500 Rs 29,500
Late registration or renewal Rs 1,000 Rs 180 Rs 1,180
Profile restoration after non-compliance Rs 1,000 Rs 180 Rs 1,180
1-year extension for test deadline Rs 1,000 Rs 180 Rs 1,180

The one-year extension deserves particular attention. If an individual has not passed the proficiency test within two years of registration, they may apply for a one-year extension by paying Rs 1,000 plus GST. This extends the deadline to three years from the date of registration. If the individual still fails to pass the test within this extended period, their profile is permanently deleted from the databank. Re-registration requires a fresh application and full fee payment — the extension fee is not adjustable.

Accepted payment methods include credit card, net banking, UPI, and digital wallet (currently only MobiKwik). Debit card payment is currently unavailable following Government of India instructions on payment gateway usage. Candidates seeking GST input tax credit should ensure their GSTIN is entered in their profile before making the payment, as the GST details are printed on the invoice generated at the time of payment and cannot be modified retrospectively.

Subscription renewal is required for one-year and five-year plans. If the subscription lapses, the individual’s name remains in the databank only for the duration of the active subscription. The lifetime plan eliminates renewal obligations entirely. For individuals who anticipate long-term involvement in independent director roles in India, the lifetime plan offers the best value proposition given that the total cost is equivalent to five years of annual subscription.


Exam Pattern — Format, Duration, Passing Score, and Attempts

The IICA independent director exam follows a fixed pattern that has remained consistent since its introduction:

Parameter Detail
Total questions 50 MCQs
Total marks 100
Duration 75 minutes
Passing score 50% aggregate (50 marks out of 100)
Mode Online, proctor-based
Location Home or office (no test centre required)
Available slots 2:00 PM – 3:00 PM and 8:00 PM – 9:00 PM daily
Attempts Unlimited
Gap between attempts Minimum 1 day

A point of clarification is necessary regarding the passing score. Several third-party websites and preparation resources state the passing threshold as 60 percent. This is incorrect. The official Independent Directors Databank FAQ, maintained by IICA, explicitly states: “An individual who has obtained a score of not less than 50% in aggregate shall be deemed to have passed such test.” The 50 percent threshold is the authoritative figure.

The test is conducted on a proctor-based platform, meaning the candidate’s activity is monitored during the test through their webcam and microphone. External help, secondary devices, and reference materials are not permitted during the examination. The proctoring is automated — there is no live proctor watching in real time, but the system flags irregularities for review.

Two important rules apply to attempts. First, there is no limit on the number of attempts an individual may take. An individual who fails can rebook and reattempt after a mandatory one-day cooling period. Second, once an individual passes the test, they cannot retake it to improve their score. The first passing attempt is final, and the certificate reflects the score achieved in that attempt.

The questions are drawn from the four syllabus domains — companies law, securities law, basic accountancy, and corporate governance. The test does not publish a fixed weightage distribution across domains, but based on the structure of the 42 e-learning modules (which form the basis of the test), companies law and corporate governance carry the heaviest representation.

IICA Independent Director Exam — At a Glance

Everything you need to know in 60 seconds

50 MCQs
100 Marks Total
75 Min
Duration
50%
Passing Score
Unlimited
Attempts (1-day gap)
2 Slots/Day
2:00 PM & 8:00 PM
Online
Proctored (Home / Office)
4 Exam Domains
1 · Companies Law
2 · Securities Law
3 · Basic Accountancy
4 · Corporate Governance
Registration Fee Structure
Validity Fee (incl. GST)
1 Year ₹ 5,900
5 Years Best Value ₹ 17,700
Lifetime ₹ 29,500

Source: IICA / MCA — Updated for 2026 • blog.ipleaders.in


Syllabus — The Four Domains Covered

The IICA independent director exam syllabus is organised into four domains. The test is based on the 42 e-learning modules available on the Independent Directors Databank portal, making these modules the most authoritative and complete source of study material.

Domain 1 — Companies Law

This is the most extensive domain, covering the provisions of the Companies Act, 2013 that are directly relevant to the functioning of an independent director. Key topics include: incorporation of companies and types of companies, share capital (allotment, transfer, buy-back), debentures and deposits, board meetings (notice, quorum, minutes, frequency), roles and responsibilities of independent directors under Section 149, directors’ duties under Section 166, disqualification of directors under Section 164, related party transactions under Section 188 and Audit Committee oversight under Section 177, constitution and functions of the Nomination and Remuneration Committee under Section 178, accounts and audit provisions, mergers and amalgamations under Chapters XV and XVI, and oppression and mismanagement remedies under Sections 241–246. Special attention should be given to the independent director-specific provisions: Section 149(6) (qualifications), Section 149(10)–(11) (tenure and reappointment), Section 149(12) (liability safe harbour), and Schedule IV (Code for Independent Directors).

Domain 2 — Securities Law

This domain covers the SEBI regulatory framework as it applies to independent directors serving on the boards of listed companies. The principal areas include: SEBI (Listing Obligations and Disclosure Requirements) Regulations, 2015 — particularly the provisions on board composition (Regulation 17), audit committee (Regulation 18), nomination and remuneration committee (Regulation 19), stakeholders relationship committee (Regulation 20), and risk management committee (Regulation 21). Insider trading regulations under SEBI (Prohibition of Insider Trading) Regulations, 2015 are covered, including the definition of unpublished price-sensitive information, trading window restrictions, and the reporting obligations of directors. Disclosure requirements for material events, related party transactions, and governance reports also fall within this domain.

Domain 3 — Basic Accountancy

This domain tests the ability to read and interpret financial statements — a skill that is essential for any independent director participating in audit committee discussions or reviewing quarterly results. Topics include: structure and components of the balance sheet, profit and loss statement, and cash flow statement, key financial ratios (debt-to-equity, current ratio, return on equity, return on capital employed, interest coverage), reading and analysing audit reports and auditor qualifications, understanding the functions of the audit committee, and the basics of internal financial controls and risk assessment. This domain does not require professional accounting expertise — it tests the literacy level needed to engage meaningfully with financial reporting.

Domain 4 — Corporate Governance

This domain covers the principles, practices, and ethical framework within which independent directors operate. Key topics include: principles of good corporate governance (transparency, accountability, fairness, responsibility), the fiduciary position of directors, conflicts of interest and how to manage them, board evaluation processes (self-evaluation, peer evaluation, committee evaluation), corporate social responsibility provisions under Section 135, professional ethics and the Code for Independent Directors under Schedule IV, risk management frameworks and the board’s oversight role, and stakeholder engagement. The MCA capacity building initiative for independent directors provides additional context on the governance expectations that this domain tests.

Syllabus — Four Domains at a Glance

What the IICA Proficiency Test covers in 2026

1

Companies Law

  • Companies Act 2013 provisions
  • Board meetings & directors’ duties
  • Related party transactions
  • Mergers & amalgamations
Key: Sections 149, 164, 166, 177, 178, 188

2

Securities Law

  • SEBI LODR Regulations 2015
  • Insider trading (SEBI PIT)
  • Disclosure requirements
  • Board composition rules
3

Basic Accountancy

  • Financial statements (BS, P&L, Cash Flow)
  • Key financial ratios
  • Audit committee functions
  • Internal financial controls
4

Corporate Governance

  • Governance principles
  • Board evaluation
  • CSR under Section 135
  • Ethics & Code (Schedule IV)
  • Risk management

Source: IICA / MCA — Updated for 2026 • blog.ipleaders.in


How to Prepare — E-Learning Modules, Mock Tests, and Strategy

The most important preparation resource is the one most candidates overlook: the 42 e-learning modules available on the Independent Directors Databank portal itself. These modules are free for all registered users and, critically, the proficiency test is based on their content. The databank FAQ explicitly states this. Candidates who complete all 42 modules before attempting the test have a significant advantage over those who rely solely on external preparation resources.

The modules are organised into five broad categories: Core Governance (board structure, composition, fiduciary duties), Compliance and Risk (statutory obligations, internal controls, risk management), Financial Literacy (reading financial statements, ratio analysis, audit committee functions), Ethics and Professional Conduct (conflicts of interest, code of conduct, whistle-blower mechanisms), and Sectoral modules covering industry-specific governance considerations.

Each module concludes with a post-assessment quiz. Taking these quizzes is not mandatory, but doing so serves a dual purpose — it reinforces the material covered and provides a low-stakes way to identify knowledge gaps before attempting the actual proficiency test.

The mock test is the second essential preparation tool. It is available on the databank dashboard and can be taken an unlimited number of times. The mock test replicates the interface, question format, and time constraints of the actual exam, allowing candidates to familiarise themselves with the platform and calibrate their time management. The mock test also verifies that the candidate’s system meets the technical requirements for proctored testing — webcam functionality, internet speed, and browser compatibility.

A practical preparation sequence for candidates with limited time: complete the 42 e-learning modules over two to four weeks, take the post-assessment quiz for each module and note weak areas, attempt the mock test under timed conditions, review weak areas using the relevant modules, attempt the mock test again, and then book the actual test slot. This sequence typically requires four to six weeks for working professionals allocating one to two hours daily.

Background-specific preparation guidance: legal professionals will generally find the companies law and securities law domains comfortable but should invest additional time in the basic accountancy domain, particularly financial ratio analysis and audit committee functions. Finance and accounting professionals will find the accountancy domain straightforward but should focus on the corporate governance and companies law domains, specifically the independent director-specific provisions under Sections 149 and 166 and Schedule IV.


Booking Your Slot and Exam-Day Process

Slot booking is done through the Independent Directors Databank dashboard after logging in. The process involves selecting an available date and choosing one of the two daily time slots — 2:00 PM to 3:00 PM or 8:00 PM to 9:00 PM. The slots are available seven days a week, throughout the year.

A mandatory one-day gap applies between slot bookings. If a candidate books a slot for Monday and either completes the test or cancels, the next available booking date is Wednesday (one clear day must intervene). This gap applies regardless of whether the previous attempt resulted in a pass, a fail, or a cancellation.

Before the test, candidates should verify their system requirements using the check tool available on the databank portal. The requirements include: a stable broadband internet connection (minimum recommended speed varies, but 2 Mbps or higher is advisable), a functioning webcam and microphone (the proctor system will not allow the test to begin without these), a supported web browser (typically Google Chrome, updated to the latest version), and a quiet, well-lit room where the candidate will not be interrupted for the duration of the test. The proctoring system may flag the session if it detects background noise, additional faces in the webcam frame, or the candidate leaving the screen.

On exam day, candidates should log in to the databank at least 15 minutes before the scheduled slot to complete the system check and identity verification. The 75-minute timer begins only after the system check is complete and the test is officially started. During the test, candidates can navigate between questions, mark questions for review, and change answers before final submission. The test auto-submits when the timer expires.


After the Test — Certificate, Compliance, and What Happens If You Fail

On passing the test, an e-certificate is generated immediately and stored in the candidate’s databank dashboard. The certificate can be printed and includes the score obtained, the date of passing, and a unique certificate number. The Ministry of Corporate Affairs has not notified any expiry period for this certificate — as of March 2026, the certificate is treated as valid indefinitely once issued.

An important rule that candidates should note: once an individual passes the proficiency test, they cannot retake it to improve their score. The first passing attempt is final. This means candidates who are borderline should consider whether an additional round of preparation might yield a more comfortable pass, rather than relying on the unlimited-attempts structure to serve as a practice mechanism.

If a candidate fails, a detailed performance report is generated. This report indicates the candidate’s strengths and areas requiring improvement, broken down by domain. However, the correct answers to the MCQs are not disclosed. The candidate can use this report to identify which of the four domains needs additional study, revisit the relevant e-learning modules, and reattempt the test after the mandatory one-day gap.

The compliance timeline is critical. Every individual must pass the test within two years of the date their name was included in the databank. If the two-year deadline is approaching and the individual has not yet passed, they may apply for a one-year extension by paying Rs 1,000 plus 18 percent GST. This extends the total available period to three years. If the individual still fails to pass within this extended period, their profile is permanently deleted from the databank, and they must apply for re-registration with a fresh application and full fee payment.

Beyond the proficiency test, registered independent directors have ongoing compliance obligations. Any change in particulars — address, contact details, qualifications, directorship positions — must be updated in the databank within 30 days of the change. IICA also prepares an annual capacity building report for each registered independent director, containing information regarding e-learning modules, online training programmes, courses, colloquia, workshops, and events attended. This report is sent to the individual and may be considered during board evaluation processes.

For individuals whose relaxation from the proficiency test has been granted based on their experience, the compliance obligations relating to databank registration, profile updates, and capacity building continue to apply — only the test itself is waived.


Regulatory Context — Key Provisions Affecting Independent Directors

The IICA independent director exam does not exist in isolation — it is one component of a broader regulatory framework that has evolved significantly since 2014 and continues to develop. Understanding this framework is valuable both for exam preparation and for the practical exercise of independent director responsibilities.

Section 149(6) of the Companies Act, 2013 defines the qualifications for an independent director. The provision requires that an independent director possess appropriate skills, experience, and knowledge in one or more fields including finance, law, management, sales, marketing, administration, research, corporate governance, technical operations, or other disciplines related to the company’s business. This is a wide formulation that does not mandate any specific educational qualification, which is why the IICA exam is open to candidates from all professional backgrounds.

Section 149(12) provides a safe harbour for independent directors — they are liable only for acts of omission or commission by a company which have occurred with their knowledge, attributable through board processes, and where they have not acted diligently or have consented to or connived at an act. This provision is frequently tested in the corporate governance domain of the exam and is critical for practitioners to understand in operational terms.

Schedule IV of the Companies Act sets out the Code for Independent Directors, covering their guidelines of professional conduct, role and functions, duties, manner of appointment, re-appointment, resignation, and separate meetings. The code mandates that independent directors hold at least one meeting per year without the attendance of non-independent directors and management, and that they review the performance of non-independent directors and the board as a whole.

The SEBI LODR Regulations, 2015, as amended through 2025, impose additional obligations on independent directors of listed companies. Regulation 17 prescribes board composition requirements including the minimum number of independent directors. Regulation 25 deals specifically with obligations of independent directors including restrictions on the total number of listed company boards an individual may serve on (maximum seven, or three if serving as whole-time director in any listed company).

The appointment and roles of independent directors under the Companies Act 2013 provide additional context on how these statutory provisions translate into practical board-level responsibilities.


Disclaimer: This article is for informational and educational purposes only and does not constitute legal or professional advice. Rules, fees, and test parameters are subject to change by IICA and the Ministry of Corporate Affairs. For the most current information, refer to the official Independent Directors Databank portal (independentdirectorsdatabank.in) and the IICA website (iica.nic.in). Information is current as of March 2026.

Frequently Asked Questions

Fundamentals

What is the IICA independent director exam?

The IICA independent director exam is an Online Proficiency Self-Assessment Test conducted by the Indian Institute of Corporate Affairs under Section 150(1) of the Companies Act, 2013. It is mandatory for individuals registered in the Independent Directors Databank and consists of 50 MCQs covering companies law, securities law, basic accountancy, and corporate governance.

Is the independent director exam mandatory?

Yes, for individuals registered in the Independent Directors Databank who do not qualify for an exemption. Every registered individual must pass the test within two years of inclusion in the databank, extendable by one year on payment of Rs 1,000 plus GST.

Which section and rule govern the independent director exam?

Section 150(1) of the Companies Act, 2013 empowers the Central Government to prescribe conditions for databank inclusion. Rule 6(4) of the Companies (Appointment and Qualification of Directors) Rules, 2014 implements this by mandating the proficiency test.

Exam Details

What is the passing score for the IICA independent director exam?

The passing score is 50 percent aggregate — 50 marks out of 100. Some third-party websites incorrectly state the passing score as 60 percent. The official figure of 50 percent is confirmed on the Independent Directors Databank FAQ page maintained by IICA.

How many questions are in the independent director proficiency test?

The test consists of 50 multiple-choice questions carrying a total of 100 marks. The duration is 75 minutes.

How many attempts are allowed for the independent director exam?

There is no limit on the number of attempts. A mandatory one-day gap must be maintained between consecutive slot bookings. However, once an individual passes, they cannot retake the test to improve their score.

Eligibility and Registration

Can I take the exam without a law or commerce background?

Yes. The test is open to candidates from any educational or professional background. No specific degree or qualification is required to register on the databank or to take the proficiency test.

Who is exempt from the IICA independent director exam?

Individuals with three or more years of experience as a director or KMP in listed or large public companies, individuals who have served at Director level or above in Central or State Government in relevant departments, and professionals (advocates, chartered accountants, cost accountants, company secretaries) with ten or more years of practice are exempt.

Is a DIN mandatory for registration?

Yes. A Director Identification Number issued by the Ministry of Corporate Affairs is required for registration on the Independent Directors Databank. Individuals who do not have a DIN must apply for one through the MCA portal before beginning the databank registration process.

Practical Questions

Can I take the exam from home?

Yes. The test is fully online and can be taken from home or office. No physical test centre visit is required. You need a computer with a webcam, microphone, stable internet connection, and a quiet environment for the proctored session.

What subjects are covered in the IICA exam syllabus?

The syllabus covers four domains: Companies Law (Companies Act 2013 provisions relevant to directors), Securities Law (SEBI LODR, insider trading regulations), Basic Accountancy (financial statements, ratios, audit), and Corporate Governance (board practices, ethics, CSR, risk management). The test is based on 42 e-learning modules available on the databank portal.

What happens if I do not pass within two years?

Your name is removed from the databank. You may apply for a one-year extension by paying Rs 1,000 plus 18 percent GST. If you still do not pass within this extended third year, your profile is permanently deleted and you must re-register with a fresh application and full fee payment.

Can I retake the exam after passing to improve my score?

No. Once an individual passes the proficiency test, they cannot retake it. The score obtained on the first successful attempt is final and reflected in the e-certificate.

Can foreign nationals register and take the exam?

Yes. Foreign nationals may register using either a DIN or a Passport Number as an alternative identifier on the databank portal. They follow the same examination process as Indian nationals.

What is the difference between the mock test and the actual exam?

The mock test replicates the interface, question format, and time constraints of the actual proficiency test. It can be taken an unlimited number of times and is designed to familiarise candidates with the platform and verify system compatibility. The mock test score does not count toward the proficiency requirement — only the actual test result determines pass or fail status.



Download Now

M&A Process in India: Step-by-Step Guide 2026

0

The mergers and acquisitions process in India follows a structured legal framework governed primarily by Sections 230 to 240 of the Companies Act, 2013, with regulatory oversight from the National Company Law Tribunal, the Competition Commission of India, and — for listed entities — the Securities and Exchange Board of India. Whether you are a corporate lawyer advising on your first scheme of arrangement, a company secretary managing the compliance workload of an amalgamation, or a business professional evaluating an acquisition target, understanding the end-to-end M&A process in India is essential for executing transactions that are legally sound, tax-efficient, and commercially viable. This guide walks through every stage of the merger procedure under the Companies Act 2013, from initial strategy and due diligence through NCLT sanction and post-merger integration, reflecting the latest regulatory developments as of 2026.

What Is M&A Under Indian Law

The term mergers and acquisitions in India encompasses several distinct transaction structures, each with its own legal treatment, tax implications, and procedural requirements. Understanding these distinctions at the outset is critical because the choice of structure directly determines the regulatory approvals needed, the tax burden on both parties, and the timeline for completion.

A merger, referred to in Indian corporate law as an “amalgamation,” involves the absorption of one company (the transferor) into another (the transferee), with the transferor company ceasing to exist upon completion. The Income Tax Act, 1961 defines amalgamation under Section 2(1B) with three mandatory conditions: all properties of the amalgamating company must become properties of the amalgamated company, all liabilities must transfer, and shareholders holding at least 75 per cent in value of shares in the amalgamating company (other than shares already held by the amalgamated company) must become shareholders of the amalgamated company. When these conditions are met, the transaction qualifies for tax-neutral treatment under Section 47 of the Income Tax Act.

A demerger operates in the opposite direction — it involves the separation and transfer of one or more undertakings from an existing company to a new or separate resulting company. Defined under Section 2(19AA) of the Income Tax Act, a tax-neutral demerger requires that all properties and liabilities of the undertaking transfer at book value, and that shareholders of the demerged company receive shares in the resulting company in proportion to their existing holdings. Demergers have become increasingly popular in India for corporate restructuring and value unlocking, particularly among listed conglomerates.

A share acquisition involves purchasing a controlling stake or the entire shareholding in a target company, with the target continuing to exist as a subsidiary or being subsequently merged. For listed companies, the acquisition of shares beyond specified thresholds triggers open offer obligations under SEBI’s Substantial Acquisition of Shares and Takeovers Regulations, 2011 — the initial trigger is at 25 per cent, with a 5 per cent creeping acquisition limit for holders between 25 and 75 per cent.

A slump sale, defined under Section 2(42C) of the Income Tax Act, involves the transfer of one or more undertakings as a going concern for a lump sum consideration without individual valuation of assets and liabilities. Capital gains on a slump sale are computed under Section 50B as the difference between the consideration received and the net worth of the undertaking. Following the Finance Act 2024 amendments effective from July 23, 2024, long-term capital gains on slump sales are taxed at 12.5 per cent without indexation benefit for transfers on or after that date.

An asset purchase, by contrast, involves acquiring specific identified assets and assuming specific liabilities, allowing the buyer to cherry-pick assets while avoiding unknown liabilities. Each asset requires separate conveyance and stamp duty, and individual asset transfers attract GST — unlike a going concern transfer, which is exempt.

Practitioners and aspiring corporate lawyers frequently discuss on professional forums how the choice between these structures can fundamentally alter a transaction’s viability. One common observation across legal communities is that many first-time acquirers underestimate the difference in timeline and cost between a share acquisition (which can close in weeks) and a scheme of amalgamation (which typically requires 8 to 12 months through NCLT), leading to misaligned expectations with clients and counterparties.

The most significant challenge in this area remains the interplay between corporate law, tax law, and regulatory approvals. A structure that is tax-efficient may require additional regulatory clearances, while a structure that is procedurally simple may carry a higher tax burden. This is precisely why Indian M&A demands multidisciplinary expertise spanning corporate law, tax planning, securities regulation, and competition law.

The M&A process in India operates within a layered regulatory architecture where multiple statutes, regulatory bodies, and procedural requirements intersect. No single law governs all aspects of a merger or acquisition — instead, practitioners must navigate a complex framework that combines corporate law, securities regulation, competition law, tax law, and foreign exchange management.

The Companies Act, 2013 provides the foundational framework through Sections 230 to 240. Section 230 covers schemes of compromise or arrangement between a company and its creditors or members. Section 232 specifically addresses mergers and amalgamations, providing the procedural requirements for NCLT-sanctioned schemes including share exchange ratios, transfer of property and liabilities, dissolution of the transferor company, and accounting treatment. Section 233 introduces the fast-track merger route for specific categories of companies, while Section 234 enables cross-border mergers subject to RBI approval and FEMA compliance. Sections 235 and 236 contain the squeeze-out and sell-out provisions — where a scheme has been approved by holders of 90 per cent in value of shares, the transferee can compulsorily acquire the remaining shares, and conversely, minority shareholders can require the acquirer to purchase their holdings.

The Companies (Compromises, Arrangements and Amalgamations) Rules, 2016 prescribe the procedural details — the forms to be filed, the documents to accompany NCLT applications, the notice requirements, and the timeline for regulatory responses. Rule 25A specifically governs cross-border mergers under Section 234.

The Competition Act, 2002, as amended by the Competition (Amendment) Act, 2023, requires mandatory pre-merger notification to the CCI when a combination exceeds specified asset, turnover, or deal value thresholds. The 2023 amendment introduced a deal value threshold of INR 2,000 crore to capture high-value acquisitions — particularly in the technology and digital sectors — that may not meet traditional asset or turnover thresholds.

For transactions involving listed companies, SEBI’s regulatory framework adds additional requirements. The SEBI (Listing Obligations and Disclosure Requirements) Regulations, 2015 — particularly Regulations 11 and 37 — mandate specific disclosure and approval requirements. SEBI’s Master Circular on Schemes of Arrangement (SEBI/HO/CFD/DIL2/CIR/P/2023/34, dated February 1, 2023) requires listed companies to obtain a No-Objection Letter from SEBI through the stock exchanges before filing with NCLT, and mandates an independent valuation report, a fairness opinion from a Category I merchant banker, and separate counting of public shareholder votes.

The Income Tax Act, 1961 governs the tax treatment of M&A transactions through several provisions — Section 47 (tax-neutral transfers), Section 72A (carry-forward of losses and depreciation), Section 50B (slump sale taxation), and Section 56(2)(x) (exclusion from gift tax for scheme-based share allotments). The Foreign Exchange Management Act, 1999 and its regulations — particularly the Foreign Exchange Management (Cross Border Merger) Regulations, 2018 — apply to any transaction involving foreign companies, foreign investment, or cross-border transfers.

One issue that regularly surfaces in professional discussions is whether India’s multi-regulator framework creates unnecessary delays compared to single-window clearance systems in other jurisdictions. The consensus among experienced practitioners is that while the framework is comprehensive, the sequential nature of approvals — SEBI NOL before NCLT filing, CCI clearance as a condition precedent, RBI approval for cross-border elements — can stretch timelines significantly, particularly when regulatory bodies raise queries or seek additional information.

The practical challenge for less experienced practitioners is keeping track of all applicable laws simultaneously. Missing a CCI filing deadline or failing to obtain SEBI’s no-objection before approaching NCLT can set a transaction back by months, and in time-sensitive deals, can jeopardise the entire arrangement.

The 10-Step M&A Process in India

The M&A process in India, when structured as a scheme of arrangement under the Companies Act 2013, follows a broadly standardised sequence of ten steps. While the specifics vary based on whether the transaction is a merger, demerger, or acquisition — and whether it involves listed or unlisted companies — the following framework captures the end-to-end process from initial strategy through post-merger integration.

Step 1 — Strategic Planning and Target Identification. Every M&A transaction begins with a clearly defined strategic rationale. The acquiring company identifies whether the objective is horizontal expansion (same industry), vertical integration (supply chain), or conglomerate diversification. Potential targets are identified through industry analysis, market mapping, and — in many cases — existing business relationships. A preliminary feasibility assessment considers the strategic fit, the estimated valuation range, and any obvious regulatory obstacles such as FDI sectoral caps or competition concerns.

Step 2 — Preliminary Assessment and Non-Binding Offer. Once a target is identified, the parties execute a non-disclosure agreement and the acquirer conducts a preliminary review of the target’s financial and operational profile. This stage typically concludes with a non-binding Letter of Intent or Term Sheet setting out the indicative valuation, the proposed structure (merger, share acquisition, or slump sale), key conditions, and a timeline. While non-binding, the LOI establishes the commercial framework for all subsequent negotiations.

Step 3 — Due Diligence. This is the most intensive investigative phase, covering legal, financial, tax, regulatory, HR, intellectual property, and environmental aspects. The target company opens a virtual data room providing access to corporate records, contracts, financial statements, litigation files, regulatory correspondence, and employee information. Due diligence findings directly inform the valuation, the risk allocation in definitive agreements, and the decision on whether to proceed at all.

Step 4 — Valuation and Deal Structuring. Based on due diligence findings, an IBBI-registered valuer conducts a formal valuation using recognised methodologies — typically a combination of the discounted cash flow method, net asset value approach, market multiple method, and comparable transactions analysis. For mergers, the valuation determines the share exchange ratio. The structure is finalised at this stage — merger, demerger, share acquisition, slump sale, or asset purchase — based on tax efficiency, regulatory requirements, and commercial objectives.

Step 5 — Negotiation and Definitive Agreements. The parties negotiate and execute the definitive agreement — a Scheme of Arrangement for mergers, a Share Purchase Agreement for acquisitions, or a Business Transfer Agreement for slump sales. These documents contain the binding terms including purchase price or exchange ratio, representations and warranties, indemnification provisions, conditions precedent (regulatory approvals, shareholder consent, material adverse change clauses), and closing mechanics.

Step 6 — Board and Committee Approvals. The boards of directors of both the transferor and transferee companies pass resolutions approving the scheme or transaction. For listed companies, the audit committee must also review and approve the scheme, and the board must evaluate the fairness opinion from the independent merchant banker.

Step 7 — Regulatory Filings and Approvals. This step involves filing with all applicable regulators. For mergers, the first motion petition is filed with NCLT. If CCI thresholds are triggered, a combination notice must be filed with CCI (Form I or Form II). Listed company schemes require filing with stock exchanges for SEBI’s No-Objection Letter. Cross-border transactions require RBI approval. Sector-specific approvals — from IRDAI for insurance, DoT for telecom, or PFRDA for pension entities — are obtained in parallel where applicable.

Step 8 — Shareholder and Creditor Approvals. For NCLT-sanctioned schemes, meetings of shareholders and creditors are convened as directed by the Tribunal. Notice of at least 21 days must be given. The scheme requires approval by a majority in number representing 75 per cent in value of creditors or members present and voting at each meeting. For listed companies, e-voting must be provided, and the votes of public shareholders are counted separately — a scheme voted against by a majority of public shareholders cannot proceed.

Step 9 — NCLT Sanction and Completion. After all approvals are obtained, the second motion petition is filed with NCLT. The Tribunal considers representations from the Regional Director, the Registrar of Companies, and any other interested parties, and satisfies itself that the scheme is fair, reasonable, and not contrary to law or public interest. Upon sanction, the NCLT order specifies the effective date. The certified copy must be filed with the ROC within 30 days, at which point the transferor company stands dissolved without a separate winding-up process.

Step 10 — Post-Merger Integration. The final step involves integrating operations, systems, and people. All licenses, permits, and regulatory registrations are transferred or re-obtained. ROC filings are completed, stamp duty is paid on the NCLT order, share allotments are processed, PAN and TAN changes are made, GST registrations are amended, and employee benefit transfers (PF, ESI, gratuity) are executed. For transactions relying on tax neutrality under Section 72A of the Income Tax Act, the amalgamated company must continue the acquired business for at least 5 years and hold at least three-fourths of the book value of fixed assets for 5 years.

10-Step M&A Process in India

Mergers & Acquisitions under the Companies Act, 2013

Companies Act 2013 · Sections 230–240

1

Strategic Planning & Target Identification
Define strategy, identify targets, preliminary assessment
2

Preliminary Assessment & Non-Binding Offer
NDA, preliminary review, Letter of Intent / Term Sheet
3

Due Diligence
Legal, financial, tax, regulatory, HR, IP, environmental review
4

Valuation & Deal Structuring
Registered valuer, share exchange ratio, structure selection
5

Negotiation & Definitive Agreements
SPA / BTA / Scheme of Arrangement, reps & warranties, indemnities
6

Board & Committee Approvals
Board resolutions, audit committee (listed cos), fairness opinion review
7

Regulatory Filings & Approvals Critical
CCI notification, SEBI NOL (listed), NCLT first motion, RBI (cross-border)
8

Shareholder & Creditor Approvals
75% in value approval, e-voting (listed), separate public shareholder count
9

NCLT Sanction & Completion
Second motion, sanction order, file with ROC within 30 days
10

Post-Merger Integration
License transfers, stamp duty, employee matters, tax compliance, ROC filings
Standard NCLT Route8 – 12 months
Fast-Track (S.233)3 – 5 months
blog.ipleaders.in

NCLT Procedure for Mergers and Amalgamations

The National Company Law Tribunal is the central adjudicating authority for all schemes of merger and amalgamation under the Companies Act, 2013. Understanding the NCLT procedure is essential because every court-sanctioned M&A transaction in India — other than fast-track mergers under Section 233 — must pass through this process.

The procedure begins with the First Motion Petition, which is an application under Section 230 read with Section 232, filed in NCLT Form No. NCLT-1 before the bench having jurisdiction over the registered office of the company. This application must be accompanied by the draft scheme of arrangement, the valuation report from an IBBI-registered valuer, an auditor’s certificate confirming that the proposed accounting treatment complies with applicable accounting standards, the latest audited financial statements, a complete list of creditors and members, disclosure of all material interests of directors, and an affidavit of solvency. For listed companies, additional documents include the fairness opinion from a Category I merchant banker, the audit committee report, and a complaints report.

Upon hearing the first motion petition, NCLT directs the convening of separate meetings of shareholders and creditors for each class. The Tribunal fixes the date, time, and venue for these meetings, appoints a chairperson, and directs the issuance of notices. Simultaneously, notice of the scheme must be sent to the Central Government through the Regional Director, the Registrar of Companies, the Income Tax authorities, and — depending on the nature of the transaction — to RBI, SEBI, CCI, the Official Liquidator, and relevant sectoral regulators.

The meetings must be convened with at least 21 days’ notice. At each meeting, the scheme requires approval by a majority in number representing 75 per cent in value of the creditors or members present and voting, whether in person or by proxy. The chairperson of each meeting files a report with NCLT on the results.

After obtaining all meeting approvals and any regulatory clearances, the Second Motion Petition is filed with NCLT. At the sanction hearing, the Tribunal considers the results of the meetings, any representations or objections from the Regional Director, ROC, or other parties, and whether the scheme meets the legal standards of fairness, reasonableness, and public interest compliance. The typical timeline from filing of the second motion to NCLT order is 3 to 6 months, though complex matters or regulatory objections can extend this period.

A recurring concern in practitioner forums is the variability in processing times across different NCLT benches. The Mumbai and Delhi benches tend to process schemes more efficiently due to higher volume and established practices, while some regional benches may take longer. Planning for this variability is important when advising clients on transaction timelines. The overall NCLT process typically takes 8 to 12 months from initiation to completion, though practitioners should be prepared for 12 to 18 months in complex matters involving regulatory objections or cross-border elements.

Fast-Track Merger Under Section 233

Section 233 of the Companies Act, 2013 provides a simplified merger procedure that bypasses the full NCLT process, offering a significantly shorter timeline — typically 3 to 5 months compared to 8 to 12 months for the standard route. This provision was introduced to reduce the compliance burden for straightforward corporate restructurings where the risk of prejudice to creditors and minority shareholders is minimal.

The fast-track merger route is available only to specific categories of companies. First, it applies to mergers between two or more small companies as defined under Section 2(85) of the Companies Act — companies with paid-up share capital not exceeding INR 4 crore and turnover not exceeding INR 40 crore, as per the latest threshold revisions by the Ministry of Corporate Affairs. Second, it applies to mergers between a holding company and its wholly-owned subsidiary, which are by definition non-contentious since there are no minority shareholders in the subsidiary whose interests need protection. Third, it applies to any other class of companies that the Central Government may prescribe by notification. It is important to note that Section 233 is not available to listed companies or companies whose merger raises public interest concerns.

The procedure under Section 233 differs substantially from the regular NCLT route. The boards of both companies approve the draft scheme. The scheme is then sent to all members and creditors, who have 30 days to file objections. Approval requires consent of members holding at least 90 per cent of the total number of shares (significantly higher than the 75 per cent threshold under Section 232) and no objection from creditors — or, where objections are raised, approval of a majority of creditors representing nine-tenths in value. The scheme, along with the registered valuer’s report, is filed simultaneously with the Regional Director of MCA and the Registrar of Companies. If neither the Regional Director nor the ROC raises objections within 30 days of receipt, the Regional Director issues a confirmation order, and the scheme takes effect from the specified date. If objections are raised by either authority, the matter is referred to NCLT and follows the regular process.

The most common question that arises in professional discussions about Section 233 is whether the higher shareholder approval threshold (90 per cent versus 75 per cent) makes it impractical for companies with dispersed shareholding. In practice, the fast-track route works best for closely-held companies and group restructurings where achieving 90 per cent approval is feasible. The real advantage is the elimination of NCLT proceedings, which saves both time and significant legal costs.

One important practical challenge is that some Regional Directors have been cautious in issuing confirmation orders, preferring to refer matters to NCLT rather than take responsibility for approving schemes. This can negate the time advantage of the fast-track route if the referral occurs, as the process then reverts to the standard NCLT timeline.

Regulatory Approvals Required for M&A in India

Indian M&A transactions may require approvals from multiple regulatory bodies depending on the nature of the transaction, the industries involved, and whether the parties are listed or foreign-owned. Identifying the applicable approvals early — ideally during the due diligence phase — is critical for accurate timeline planning and for structuring conditions precedent in definitive agreements.

The Competition Commission of India requires a mandatory pre-merger notification under Section 6(2) of the Competition Act when a combination exceeds specified thresholds. As revised effective March 2024, the thresholds operate on three alternative bases. The first is asset and turnover based — the parties jointly must have assets exceeding INR 2,500 crore or turnover exceeding INR 7,500 crore in India, or globally, assets exceeding USD 1.25 billion (with at least INR 1,250 crore in India) or turnover exceeding USD 3.75 billion (with at least INR 3,750 crore in India). The second is the deal value threshold introduced by the Competition (Amendment) Act, 2023 — notification is required when the transaction value exceeds INR 2,000 crore and the target has substantial business operations in India, a provision designed to capture high-value digital and technology acquisitions. The third is a de minimis exemption — no notification is required if the target has assets below INR 450 crore and turnover below INR 1,250 crore in India. CCI must form a prima facie opinion within 30 working days (Phase I review). If a detailed investigation is ordered (Phase II), the total period extends to 150 working days, with deemed approval if CCI fails to act within that timeframe. The Green Channel mechanism, introduced in 2019, provides automatic approval for combinations with no horizontal overlaps, vertical relationships, or complementary activities — the filing fee is INR 20 lakh for Form I (short form) and INR 65 lakh for Form II (long form).

For transactions involving listed companies, SEBI’s requirements add a significant compliance layer. Under the Master Circular on Schemes of Arrangement, listed companies must file the draft scheme with the stock exchanges, which forward it to SEBI for a No-Objection Letter before the company can approach NCLT. The filing must include a valuation report from an independent registered valuer, a fairness opinion from a Category I merchant banker, an audit committee report, and a complaints report. SEBI scrutinises schemes to ensure they are not used as backdoor listings — if an unlisted entity is effectively achieving listing through a merger with a listed entity, compliance with SEBI’s Issue of Capital and Disclosure Requirements Regulations becomes mandatory. Public shareholders’ votes are counted separately, and no scheme that is voted against by a majority of public shareholders can be sanctioned.

RBI approval is required for cross-border mergers under Section 234, governed by the Foreign Exchange Management (Cross Border Merger) Regulations, 2018. These regulations apply to both inbound mergers (foreign company merging into an Indian company) and outbound mergers (Indian company merging into a foreign company in a notified jurisdiction). The resultant company must comply with sectoral FDI caps and pricing guidelines. RBI approval is also mandatory for mergers involving banking companies (under the Banking Regulation Act, 1949), non-banking financial companies, and other RBI-regulated entities.

Sector-specific approvals may be required from IRDAI for insurance companies under the Insurance Act 1938, from the Department of Telecommunications for telecom companies, from PFRDA for pension fund entities, and from the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India if any party is undergoing insolvency proceedings. Stock exchanges (BSE and NSE) also provide their approval for listed entity transactions.

Companies Act, 2013

Regulatory Approvals Map for M&A in India

Key regulatory bodies, triggers, and timelines governing mergers and amalgamations under the Indian legal framework.

Sequential Flow for Listed Company M&A
CCI Approval
SEBI NOL
NCLT Sanction
RBI / Sector Clearance
SEBI no-objection must be obtained before filing with NCLT for listed companies.
1

CCI

Competition Commission of India

When RequiredCombination exceeds asset/turnover/deal value thresholds
Thresholds
  • Assets > INR 2,500 Cr or
  • Turnover > INR 7,500 Cr (India)
  • Deal value > INR 2,000 Cr
Timeline
  • Phase I: 30 working days
  • Phase II: 150 working days
Green Channel: auto-approval for non-overlapping deals
2

SEBI

Securities and Exchange Board of India

When RequiredAny scheme involving listed companies
Requirements
  • NOL from stock exchanges
  • Independent valuation
  • Fairness opinion (Cat I merchant banker)
  • Audit committee report
Key Rule

Public shareholder votes counted separately

Must be obtained BEFORE NCLT filing
3

NCLT

National Company Law Tribunal

When RequiredAll merger/amalgamation schemes (except fast-track under Section 233)
Process

First Motion → Meetings of Members/Creditors → Second Motion → Sanction Order

Approval Threshold

75% in value of members/creditors present & voting

Typical Timeline

8 – 12 months

4

RBI

Reserve Bank of India

When RequiredCross-border mergers (Section 234), banking/NBFC mergers
Requirements
  • FEMA compliance
  • FDI cap adherence
  • Registered valuer
Framework

FEMA Cross-Border Merger Regulations, 2018

5

Sector-Specific Regulators

Industry-Level Clearances

When RequiredM&A involves regulated industry participants
Regulators
IRDAI — InsuranceDoT — TelecomPFRDA — PensionIBBI — Insolvency
Note

Sector approval timelines and requirements vary; early engagement recommended.

blog.ipleaders.in

The sequential nature of these approvals — SEBI before NCLT, CCI as a condition precedent, RBI in parallel for cross-border elements — means that any delay at one regulatory node cascades through the entire transaction timeline. Experienced practitioners typically initiate all regulatory filings in parallel wherever possible, and build regulatory contingencies into the definitive agreements through well-drafted long-stop dates and condition precedent clauses.

Due Diligence Checklist for M&A Transactions

Due diligence is the investigative foundation of every M&A transaction. The scope and depth of the exercise directly determines the quality of risk assessment, the accuracy of valuation, and the adequacy of protections negotiated in definitive agreements. In Indian M&A, due diligence spans seven distinct areas, each requiring specialised expertise.

Legal due diligence examines the target’s corporate structure and charter documents including the memorandum and articles of association, certificates of incorporation, and all board and shareholder resolutions. Material contracts are reviewed with particular attention to change-of-control clauses that could be triggered by the transaction, assignment restrictions, and termination provisions. Ongoing and threatened litigation is catalogued with exposure estimates. Regulatory licenses and permits are verified for validity and transferability. Compliance with the Companies Act, SEBI regulations (for listed companies), and FEMA (where foreign investment is involved) is assessed. Related-party transactions are reviewed for arm’s length compliance.

Financial due diligence analyses audited financial statements for the past 3 to 5 years, management accounts, and financial projections. Working capital requirements are assessed, the debt structure is mapped across secured, unsecured, and convertible instruments, and off-balance-sheet liabilities including contingent liabilities and corporate guarantees are identified. A quality of earnings analysis separates recurring from non-recurring items, and cash flow sustainability is evaluated.

Tax due diligence covers income tax assessments and pending demands, GST compliance and assessment status, transfer pricing documentation and disputes, the availability and transferability of tax holidays and incentives, stamp duty exposure on property transfers, and withholding tax compliance. This workstream directly informs the structuring decision — certain structures provide tax neutrality while others trigger immediate tax liability.

Regulatory due diligence verifies sector-specific licenses (telecom, insurance, banking, FSSAI, drug licenses), FDI compliance including sectoral caps and pricing guidelines, CCI and antitrust exposure, environmental clearances, and land and zoning approvals.

HR and employment due diligence reviews employee headcount, key managerial personnel contracts, non-compete and non-solicitation agreements, ESOP and ESAR schemes with vesting schedules, provident fund, ESI, and gratuity compliance, applicability of the Industrial Disputes Act, standing orders, and union agreements.

Intellectual property due diligence maps all registered and unregistered IP assets including patents, trademarks, copyrights, and designs. IP licensing agreements — both inbound and outbound — are reviewed, along with domain names, trade secret protections, and any ongoing or threatened IP infringement claims.

Environmental due diligence examines environmental clearances under the Environment Protection Act 1986, consent to establish and operate from State Pollution Control Boards, hazardous waste management compliance, and any environmental litigation. With ESG compliance becoming increasingly important under SEBI’s BRSR framework, this workstream has gained greater significance in recent years.

A common frustration voiced in professional communities is the inadequacy of due diligence in mid-market Indian transactions, where targets often lack organised records, have pending compliance issues, and do not maintain comprehensive contract management systems. The practical implication is that due diligence timelines in India tend to be longer than comparable exercises in more developed markets, and the risk allocation in definitive agreements must be correspondingly robust.

Key Documents in an M&A Transaction

Every M&A transaction generates a substantial documentation trail, with specific documents serving distinct legal and commercial functions. Understanding what each document does and when it is required helps professionals manage the documentation workflow efficiently and avoid omissions that can delay or jeopardise the transaction.

The Scheme of Arrangement or Amalgamation is the core legal document in any NCLT-sanctioned merger. It sets out the complete terms of the transaction — the share exchange ratio, the appointed date and effective date, the treatment of all assets, liabilities, and contracts, the mechanism for share allotment, employee transfer provisions, and all terms and conditions of the arrangement. This document is filed with NCLT, circulated to all shareholders and creditors, and — once sanctioned — becomes a legally binding order.

The Share Purchase Agreement governs share acquisition transactions and contains the purchase price and payment mechanism, representations and warranties from both parties, indemnification provisions with caps and baskets, conditions precedent to closing, material adverse change clauses, non-compete and non-solicitation covenants, and detailed closing mechanics. For Indian transactions, the SPA typically includes specific provisions addressing regulatory approvals, FEMA compliance, and tax withholding obligations.

The Business Transfer Agreement is used in slump sale transactions where an entire undertaking is transferred as a going concern. It identifies the undertaking being transferred, allocates the lump sum consideration, and addresses employee and contract transfer provisions.

The Valuation Report, prepared by an IBBI-registered valuer, determines the fair value of shares and the share exchange ratio for mergers. The valuation must employ recognised methodologies — typically a combination of discounted cash flow, net asset value, market multiples, and comparable transactions analysis. For listed companies, a separate Fairness Opinion from a SEBI-registered Category I merchant banker is required, confirming that the share exchange ratio is fair and reasonable.

Board Resolutions of both the transferor and transferee companies formally approve the transaction and authorise the filing of applications with NCLT and regulatory bodies. Shareholder and Creditor Meeting Notices, issued as directed by NCLT, must include the scheme, the valuation report, the auditor’s report on accounting treatment, and an explanatory statement. The Auditor’s Certificate confirms that the proposed accounting treatment complies with applicable accounting standards.

Regulatory filings include the CCI Form I or Form II for combination notices, the SEBI application for No-Objection Letter, RBI applications for cross-border transactions, and applications to sector-specific regulators. Each regulatory filing has its own prescribed format and documentary requirements.

The practical challenge with M&A documentation is coordination. Multiple documents are being negotiated and finalised simultaneously across different workstreams, and inconsistencies between documents — particularly between the scheme and the definitive agreement, or between the valuation report and the share exchange ratio — can create complications at the NCLT hearing or with regulators.

Post-Merger Integration: Legal and Compliance Requirements

Post-merger integration is where transactions succeed or fail in practice. While considerable attention is devoted to the deal-making phase — due diligence, negotiations, regulatory approvals — the legal and compliance requirements that follow NCLT sanction are equally critical and often underestimated in terms of complexity and timeline.

The first compliance requirement is filing the certified copy of the NCLT order with the Registrar of Companies within 30 days of the order, as mandated by Section 232(5) of the Companies Act. The ROC records the dissolution of the transferor company, and no separate winding-up process is required. The transferee company must also file updated charter documents (memorandum and articles of association) if amended by the scheme, and submit an allotment return in Form PAS-3 if new shares are allotted to the shareholders of the transferor company.

Stamp duty represents a significant post-merger cost and a frequent source of practical difficulty. Stamp duty is a state subject in India, meaning rates vary substantially across states. The NCLT order is typically treated as a conveyance, and stamp duty is payable on the market value of the property or undertaking transferred. Some states — such as Maharashtra — have specific provisions under their respective stamp acts, and certain states offer reduced rates for tribunal-sanctioned schemes. Stamp duty must be paid before or at the time of filing the NCLT order with the ROC, and failure to pay can delay the registration of the order.

Transfer of licenses and permits is one of the most operationally intensive aspects of post-merger integration. While the NCLT order typically provides that all contracts, licenses, and permits of the transferor company stand transferred to the transferee, several regulators require fresh applications or formal intimation. This includes GST registration (new registration or amendment), PAN and TAN changes with the Income Tax authorities, FSSAI and drug license transfers, environmental clearances, shops and establishment registrations, and sector-specific licenses. Each transfer operates on its own timeline, and some — particularly environmental clearances — can take several months.

Employee matters require careful handling to maintain workforce continuity and legal compliance. The scheme typically provides that all employees of the transferor company become employees of the transferee on terms no less favourable than their existing terms. Continuity of service is preserved for all statutory purposes. Provident fund trust merger or transfer of PF accumulations must be coordinated with the EPFO. ESI and gratuity liabilities transfer to the transferee. ESOP adjustments — conversion of options in the transferor company to equivalent options in the transferee — must follow the scheme terms and comply with SEBI ESOP regulations for listed companies.

The tax implications of post-merger integration extend well beyond the initial tax neutrality assessment. For amalgamations meeting the Section 2(1B) conditions, Section 47(vi) ensures that the transfer of capital assets by the amalgamating company is not treated as a transfer for capital gains purposes, and Section 47(vii) provides similar treatment for shares allotted to shareholders. Section 72A allows the amalgamated company to carry forward and set off the accumulated business losses and unabsorbed depreciation of the amalgamating company, provided the amalgamated company continues the business of the amalgamating company for at least 5 years and holds at least three-fourths of the book value of fixed assets for 5 years. GST implications are generally favourable — the transfer of a business as a going concern is not treated as a supply of goods or services, and therefore does not attract GST.

The most frequently discussed post-merger challenge across professional forums is the sheer volume of administrative tasks — dozens of license transfers, regulatory intimations, and compliance filings — each with its own timeline, documentation requirements, and potential for delay. Companies that do not establish a dedicated integration workstream with clear ownership and tracking often find themselves dealing with compliance gaps months after the transaction is ostensibly complete.

Recent Developments in Indian M&A (2024–2026)

The Indian M&A landscape has seen several significant regulatory and procedural developments over the past two years, reflecting the government’s continuing effort to modernise the corporate restructuring framework while strengthening safeguards against anti-competitive transactions and protecting minority shareholders.

The Competition (Amendment) Act, 2023, which came into effect in phases through 2024, introduced the deal value threshold for CCI notifications — any transaction with a value exceeding INR 2,000 crore where the target has substantial business operations in India now requires mandatory CCI notification, regardless of whether traditional asset or turnover thresholds are met. This provision directly targets high-value acquisitions in the technology and digital sectors where targets may have significant market position but relatively modest revenues. The amendment also expanded penalty provisions, allowing CCI to impose penalties based on global turnover, and introduced settlement and commitment mechanisms for antitrust proceedings.

The CCI’s Green Channel mechanism, operational since 2019, has been increasingly utilised, with a significant proportion of combination approvals now coming through this route. The Green Channel provides automatic deemed approval upon filing for transactions where there are no horizontal overlaps, vertical relationships, or complementary activities between the parties, substantially reducing timelines for non-contentious combinations.

NCLT digitisation has progressed significantly, with the e-filing portal now operational across most NCLT benches. Virtual and hybrid hearings, accelerated during the pandemic, continue to be available, reducing the logistical burden of multi-bench proceedings. Some NCLT benches — particularly Mumbai and Delhi — have achieved notable improvements in processing times for scheme applications.

SEBI has continued tightening its regulatory framework for listed company M&A. Enhanced requirements for independent valuation and fairness opinions, greater scrutiny of schemes that effectively result in backdoor listings of unlisted entities, and stricter enforcement of public shareholder protection provisions have characterised SEBI’s recent approach. The consolidated Master Circular on Schemes of Arrangement from February 2023 remains the base regulatory document, with periodic amendments addressing specific compliance gaps identified through enforcement experience.

The Ministry of Corporate Affairs has revised the small company thresholds under Section 2(85) of the Companies Act, raising the limits to paid-up capital not exceeding INR 4 crore and turnover not exceeding INR 40 crore. This expansion has increased the number of companies eligible for the fast-track merger route under Section 233, making this simplified procedure available to a broader range of mid-market restructurings. The continuing decriminalisation of various offences under the Companies Act has also simplified the compliance environment for M&A transactions.

The cross-border merger framework under Section 234, read with the FEMA Cross-Border Merger Regulations 2018, has gained increasing traction. Inbound mergers — where a foreign company merges into an Indian company — have been more common than outbound mergers, reflecting India’s growing attractiveness as a consolidation destination. The key practical challenges remain stamp duty computation for cross-border transactions and the valuation methodology reconciliation between Indian and international standards.

A notable trend across Indian M&A is the increased use of demergers for value unlocking, particularly among listed conglomerates seeking to create focused business entities. Tax authorities have also been scrutinising schemes more closely, particularly regarding compliance with the Section 2(1B) conditions for amalgamation and the commercial rationale underlying restructuring transactions. For the most current regulatory position on any specific provision, practitioners should refer directly to the official MCA, SEBI, CCI, and RBI websites.

Comparative Analysis

M&A Deal Structures in India — Which One Fits Your Transaction?

Under the Companies Act 2013, Income Tax Act 1961 & allied laws

Factor Merger /
Amalgamation
Demerger Share
Acquisition
Slump Sale Asset
Purchase
Legal Provision Sections 230-232,
Companies Act 2013
Section 2(19AA),
IT Act
Contract Act,
Companies Act,
SEBI SAST
Section 2(42C),
IT Act
Contract Act,
Transfer of Property Act
Transferor Status Ceases to exist Continues (minus undertaking) Continues as subsidiary Continues (minus undertaking) Continues
NCLT Required? Yes Yes No No No
Tax Treatment Tax-neutral under S.47(vi)/(vii) Tax-neutral under S.47(vib)/(vid) Capital gains on seller S.50B — 12.5% LTCG (post July 2024) Capital gains per asset
GST Impact Going concern — exempt Going concern — exempt No supply Going concern — exempt GST on each asset
Stamp Duty On NCLT order
(state-specific)
On NCLT order
(state-specific)
On share transfer
(0.015% listed)
On conveyance
(state rates)
On each asset
(state rates)
Timeline 8–12 months 8–12 months Weeks to months 1–3 months 1–3 months
Liability Transfer All liabilities transfer Undertaking liabilities transfer Target retains all Undertaking liabilities transfer Only specified liabilities
Best For Full consolidation Value unlocking, restructuring Quick control acquisition Going concern transfer Cherry-picking assets

Tax-neutral / Favourable

Moderate / Conditional

Taxable / Less favourable

Neutral / Informational

Disclaimer: This article is intended for informational and educational purposes only. It does not constitute legal advice. Readers should consult a qualified legal professional for advice specific to their circumstances. Legal provisions, rules, thresholds, and regulatory requirements discussed in this article are based on the position as known at the time of writing and may have been amended subsequently. For the most current position, refer to the official websites of the Ministry of Corporate Affairs, SEBI, CCI, RBI, and the relevant regulatory bodies.

Frequently Asked Questions

Fundamentals

What is the difference between a merger and an amalgamation under Indian law?

In Indian corporate law, the terms merger and amalgamation are often used interchangeably, though “amalgamation” is the term used in both the Companies Act, 2013 and the Income Tax Act, 1961. A merger involves one company absorbing another, with the absorbed company ceasing to exist. The specific conditions for a tax-neutral amalgamation are defined under Section 2(1B) of the Income Tax Act.

Which sections of the Companies Act 2013 govern mergers and acquisitions?

Sections 230 to 240 of the Companies Act, 2013 govern M&A transactions. Section 230 covers schemes of compromise and arrangement. Section 232 specifically addresses mergers and amalgamations. Section 233 provides the fast-track merger route. Section 234 enables cross-border mergers. Sections 235 and 236 contain squeeze-out and minority sell-out provisions.

What is the meaning of “scheme of arrangement” in M&A?

A scheme of arrangement is the legal document that sets out the terms and conditions of a merger or restructuring, including the share exchange ratio, transfer of assets and liabilities, and employee provisions. It must be approved by shareholders (75 per cent in value), creditors, and sanctioned by NCLT to become legally binding.

Process and Requirements

How long does the M&A process take in India?

A standard NCLT-sanctioned merger typically takes 8 to 12 months from initiation to completion, though complex transactions involving regulatory objections or cross-border elements can extend to 12 to 18 months. Fast-track mergers under Section 233 can be completed in 3 to 5 months. Share acquisitions, which do not require NCLT approval, can close in a significantly shorter timeframe.

What approval threshold is required for a merger under the Companies Act?

The scheme must be approved by a majority in number representing 75 per cent in value of members or creditors present and voting at each meeting convened by NCLT. For fast-track mergers under Section 233, the threshold is higher — 90 per cent in value of shareholders must consent.

What documents are required for filing a merger application with NCLT?

The NCLT application must include the draft scheme of arrangement, a valuation report from an IBBI-registered valuer, an auditor’s certificate on accounting treatment, the latest audited financial statements, a complete list of creditors and members, disclosure of material interests of directors, and an affidavit of solvency. Listed companies additionally require a fairness opinion and audit committee report.

Is CCI approval mandatory for all mergers in India?

CCI approval is mandatory only when the combination exceeds the thresholds specified under Section 5 of the Competition Act — either the asset/turnover thresholds or the deal value threshold of INR 2,000 crore. A de minimis exemption applies when the target has assets below INR 450 crore and turnover below INR 1,250 crore in India. The Green Channel provides automatic approval for non-overlapping combinations.

What is the role of SEBI in M&A transactions involving listed companies?

SEBI requires listed companies to obtain a No-Objection Letter through the stock exchanges before filing with NCLT. This requires submission of an independent valuation report, a fairness opinion from a Category I merchant banker, and an audit committee report. SEBI ensures protection of public shareholders by requiring separate counting of public shareholder votes and scrutinising schemes for backdoor listing concerns.

Are cross-border mergers permitted in India?

Yes, Section 234 of the Companies Act, 2013 permits both inbound mergers (foreign company merging into an Indian company) and outbound mergers (Indian company merging into a foreign company). Cross-border mergers require RBI approval under FEMA, compliance with sectoral FDI caps, and valuation by a registered valuer using internationally accepted methodologies.

Practical Applications

What is a fast-track merger and which companies can use it?

A fast-track merger under Section 233 is a simplified merger procedure available to small companies (paid-up capital up to INR 4 crore, turnover up to INR 40 crore), holding company and wholly-owned subsidiary mergers, and other prescribed classes. It bypasses NCLT proceedings, instead requiring Regional Director confirmation, and can be completed in 3 to 5 months.

How is stamp duty calculated on mergers in India?

Stamp duty on mergers is a state subject, with rates varying across states. It is typically levied on the market value of the property or undertaking transferred, treating the NCLT order as a conveyance. Some states provide reduced rates for tribunal-sanctioned schemes. Stamp duty must be paid before filing the NCLT order with the ROC.

What happens to employees during a merger?

The scheme of arrangement typically provides that all employees of the transferor company become employees of the transferee on terms no less favourable than their existing conditions. Continuity of service is preserved for statutory purposes. PF accumulations, ESI coverage, and gratuity entitlements transfer to the new employer. ESOP holders receive equivalent options in the transferee company as per the scheme terms.

Advanced and Future

What tax benefits are available for mergers under the Income Tax Act?

Tax-neutral treatment is available under Section 47(vi) and (vii) for amalgamations meeting the Section 2(1B) conditions — no capital gains tax on asset transfers or share allotments. Section 72A allows carry-forward of accumulated losses and unabsorbed depreciation, subject to continuing the business for 5 years. Shares received are taxed on a substituted cost basis under Section 49(1).

What is the deal value threshold introduced by the Competition Amendment Act 2023?

The Competition (Amendment) Act, 2023 introduced a deal value threshold of INR 2,000 crore — any combination where the transaction value exceeds this amount and the target has substantial business operations in India requires mandatory CCI notification, regardless of whether traditional asset or turnover thresholds are met. This provision targets high-value acquisitions in the technology and digital sectors.

How is the M&A regulatory framework in India expected to evolve?

Key trends include increased NCLT digitisation and faster processing times, broader applicability of the fast-track merger route following expanded small company thresholds, enhanced SEBI scrutiny of listed company schemes, growing utilisation of the CCI Green Channel, and maturation of the cross-border merger framework under Section 234. For the most current regulatory position, practitioners should check the official websites of MCA, SEBI, CCI, and RBI.

Conclusion

The M&A process in India under the Companies Act, 2013 is a multidisciplinary exercise that demands expertise across corporate law, tax planning, securities regulation, and competition law. From selecting the right transaction structure — merger, demerger, share acquisition, or slump sale — to navigating the NCLT procedure, obtaining regulatory approvals from CCI, SEBI, and RBI, and executing post-merger integration, each stage carries specific legal requirements and practical challenges. The introduction of the fast-track merger route, the deal value threshold for CCI notifications, and the continuing digitisation of NCLT proceedings reflect India’s evolving regulatory framework. Professionals who invest in building practical M&A skills — understanding not just the law but how transactions actually work in Indian practice — will be well-positioned to serve the growing demand for specialised M&A expertise.


Download Now

Anticipatory Bail Under BNSS: Section 482 Explained

0

The introduction of the Bharatiya Nagarik Suraksha Sanhita, 2023 has fundamentally altered how anticipatory bail operates in India. Section 482 of the BNSS, which replaced Section 438 of the Code of Criminal Procedure, 1973, does not merely carry forward the old provision under a new number — it deliberately widens the scope of pre-arrest protection, removes several restrictions that existed under state amendments, and grants courts broader discretionary powers than they previously held. For criminal law practitioners, this transition creates an immediate professional challenge: applications drafted under the old CrPC framework may miss the expanded protections available under BNSS, while clients facing arrest in serious offences — including those punishable with death or life imprisonment — now have remedies that simply did not exist before July 1, 2024. This guide covers every aspect of anticipatory bail under BNSS Section 482, from the statutory changes and judicial interpretation through practical filing procedure and special statute interactions, reflecting judgments delivered through March 2026.


What Is Anticipatory Bail Under the BNSS

Anticipatory bail is a pre-arrest legal remedy that allows a person who reasonably apprehends arrest in connection with a non-bailable offence to obtain a direction from the court that if arrested, they shall be released on bail. Under the BNSS, this remedy is governed by Section 482, which came into effect on July 1, 2024, replacing the erstwhile Section 438 of the CrPC. The fundamental purpose of anticipatory bail remains unchanged — it protects personal liberty by preventing unnecessary incarceration before trial — but the statutory framework within which this protection operates has been significantly restructured.

The right to seek anticipatory bail is available to any person, not limited to an accused against whom an FIR has already been registered. The Supreme Court has consistently held that even a person who merely apprehends that an FIR may be filed can approach the court under this provision. This distinction matters in practice because many anticipatory bail applications are filed at the stage of apprehension, before any formal accusation exists, and the BNSS does not alter this position.

Applications for anticipatory bail under Section 482 BNSS can be filed before either the Court of Session or the High Court. The choice of forum is strategic — Sessions Courts are the first port of call for most applications, while High Courts are typically approached when the Sessions Court has rejected the application, when the case involves complex legal questions, or when the applicant has reason to believe that the Sessions Court may not provide an impartial hearing due to local pressures.

The practical significance of anticipatory bail in the Indian criminal justice system cannot be overstated. Arrest in a non-bailable offence can result in prolonged pre-trial detention, loss of employment, social stigma, and in some cases, physical harm. The law recognises that the process of criminal prosecution can itself become a form of punishment when arrest is used as a tool for harassment, coercion, or settling personal scores. Anticipatory bail serves as a constitutional safeguard against this misuse, rooted in the fundamental right to personal liberty under Article 21 of the Constitution.

A recurring concern among practitioners following the BNSS transition is whether existing anticipatory bail orders granted under Section 438 CrPC continue to remain valid. The position, as clarified by multiple High Courts including the Allahabad High Court, is that anticipatory bail orders passed under the CrPC continue to operate and do not require fresh applications under the BNSS. New applications, however, must be filed under Section 482 BNSS.

The most significant challenge for practitioners in this transitional phase is recalibrating their understanding of the available protections. Many criminal lawyers, particularly those practising in states like Uttar Pradesh where state amendments had severely restricted anticipatory bail, are now operating under a substantially more expansive statutory framework than they were accustomed to — and the full implications of this expansion are still being worked out through judicial interpretation.


Section 482 BNSS vs Section 438 CrPC — What Changed

The transition from Section 438 CrPC to Section 482 BNSS is not a mere renumbering exercise. Parliament made deliberate choices in drafting Section 482 that expand the scope of anticipatory bail in several material respects. Understanding these changes is essential for any practitioner filing applications under the new regime, because arguments that were unavailable under the old law may now succeed, and restrictions that previously barred relief no longer apply.

The most consequential change is the removal of the proviso to Section 438(1) of the CrPC. Under the old law, this proviso empowered the police officer in charge of a police station to arrest the applicant even while an anticipatory bail application was pending, if the court had not granted interim protection. Section 482 BNSS does not contain any equivalent provision. This means that the police no longer have a statutory basis to arrest an applicant merely because the court has not yet heard the anticipatory bail application, provided the application has been filed and is pending.

Equally significant is the omission of Section 438(6) of the CrPC — the provision that several state governments, most notably Uttar Pradesh through its 2019 Amendment Act, had used to impose an absolute bar on anticipatory bail in offences punishable with death or life imprisonment. Section 482 BNSS contains no such bar. The Allahabad High Court, in its landmark ruling in Abdul Hameed v. State of U.P. on July 3, 2025, explicitly held that this omission was intentional and that the BNSS overrides the state amendment restrictions. This single change has restored anticipatory bail as an available remedy for hundreds of cases involving murder, robbery, and other serious offences in Uttar Pradesh and states with similar restrictions.

The third major change relates to judicial discretion. Section 438 CrPC contained specific guiding factors that courts were required to consider — the nature and gravity of the accusation, the antecedents of the applicant, the possibility of the applicant fleeing justice, and whether the accusation was made with the object of injuring or humiliating the applicant. Section 482 BNSS does not reproduce these guiding factors in the statute. The Chhattisgarh High Court has observed that this deletion widens the discretionary powers of courts while deciding anticipatory bail applications. However, this does not mean courts have abandoned these factors — they continue to apply them as judicially established principles, but the statutory mandate to do so has been removed, giving courts greater flexibility in weighing the factors relevant to each case.

Feature Section 438 CrPC Section 482 BNSS
Core provision Pre-arrest bail direction Pre-arrest bail direction
Police arrest during pendency Proviso permitted arrest if no interim order No such proviso — arrest power removed
Bar on death/life imprisonment cases Section 438(6) — states could impose bar (UP did) No equivalent provision — bar removed
Guiding factors in statute Nature of accusation, antecedents, flight risk, mala fide accusation — listed in statute Removed from statute — retained as judicial principles
Conditions on grant Listed conditions Expanded conditions + cross-reference to Section 480(3)
Embargo for specific offences Not expressly stated Section 482(4) — embargo for offences under Section 65 and 70(2) BNS

Practitioners and legal commentators have noted in professional discussions that the BNSS approach represents a philosophical shift. The old CrPC framework treated anticipatory bail as a restricted remedy — available in limited circumstances, hedged with conditions, and subject to state-level curtailment. Section 482 BNSS treats it as a broader right of personal liberty, with fewer statutory restrictions and greater judicial discretion. Whether this shift produces better outcomes for the accused without compromising the interests of victims and the investigation process is a question that will be answered over the coming years of judicial application.

The practical challenge this creates is one of awareness. Many district court practitioners, particularly in UP and other states with restrictive amendments, are still filing applications citing Section 438 CrPC or arguing within the constraints of the old framework. Courts have been largely accommodating in treating such applications as filed under Section 482 BNSS, but practitioners who understand the expanded protections available under the new law are better positioned to secure relief for their clients.

Section 438 CrPC vs Section 482 BNSS

What Changed for Anticipatory Bail

Section 438 CrPC
Section 482 BNSS

New protection
Removed
Same / similar
New addition

1 Core Provision
Pre-arrest bail direction to be released on bail if arrested
Pre-arrest bail direction to be released on bail if arrested

2 Police Arrest During Pendency
Proviso permitted arrest if no interim order was passed by the court
No such proviso — arrest power during pendency removed entirely

3 Bar on Death / Life Imprisonment Cases
Section 438(6) — states could bar anticipatory bail (e.g., UP exercised this bar)
Bar removed entirely — anticipatory bail now available even in death/life cases

4 Guiding Factors for Grant
Nature of accusation, antecedents, flight risk, mala fide — listed in statute
Factors removed from statute — retained only as judicial principles through case law

5 Conditions on Grant
Listed conditions that court may impose when granting anticipatory bail
Expanded conditions with cross-reference to Section 480(3) for additional requirements

6 Specific Embargo on Certain Offences
Not expressly stated in the provision
Section 482(4) — express embargo for Section 65 and Section 70(2) BNS offences

blog.ipleaders.in

Grounds for Granting Anticipatory Bail Under Section 482

While Section 482 BNSS does not enumerate specific grounds in the way Section 438 CrPC did, courts continue to apply a well-established framework of considerations when deciding anticipatory bail applications. The Supreme Court’s jurisprudence on anticipatory bail, developed over decades of interpreting Section 438, remains fully applicable under the new provision, as multiple High Courts have confirmed that Section 482 BNSS is pari materia with Section 438 CrPC in its core purpose.

The primary ground for any anticipatory bail application is the existence of a reasonable apprehension of arrest in connection with a non-bailable offence. The applicant must demonstrate that this apprehension is genuine and not merely speculative. Courts assess this by examining whether an FIR has been registered, whether the investigation is directed at the applicant, whether summons or notices have been issued, or whether credible information suggests that arrest is imminent. The apprehension need not be based on an existing FIR — it can arise from a complaint, a threat of filing an FIR, or circumstances that objectively indicate that criminal proceedings are likely.

The nature and gravity of the accusation remain a central consideration despite their removal from the statutory text. Courts examine the seriousness of the alleged offence, the maximum punishment prescribed, and whether the accusation is supported by prima facie evidence or appears to be motivated by extraneous considerations. A critical development in this regard is the Madhya Pradesh High Court’s ruling in the Qureshi and Patidar v. CBI matter, where the court held that anticipatory bail under Section 482 BNSS hinges on the necessity of custodial interrogation, not the gravity of the allegation alone. This principle reframes the analysis — instead of asking whether the offence is serious enough to deny bail, courts should ask whether the investigation genuinely requires the applicant’s custody.

The antecedents of the applicant — including prior criminal history, conduct during previous investigations, and general reputation — are examined to assess the likelihood of the applicant cooperating with the investigation if released on bail. An applicant with no prior criminal record and strong community ties is more likely to secure anticipatory bail than one with a history of absconding or non-cooperation.

The possibility of the applicant fleeing from justice is assessed based on the applicant’s residential stability, family ties, professional commitments, and whether they have previously attempted to evade legal process. Courts also consider whether the applicant has a passport, foreign assets, or connections that might facilitate flight.

Whether the accusation has been made with the object of injuring or humiliating the applicant is a ground that carries particular weight in cases involving family disputes, property conflicts, commercial rivalries, and political vendettas. Courts recognise that the criminal process is sometimes weaponised for collateral purposes, and anticipatory bail serves as a check against this misuse.

One ground that has gained prominence in recent jurisprudence is the conduct of the applicant after learning of the accusation. Courts view favourably an applicant who has cooperated with the investigation, responded to notices, and demonstrated willingness to participate in the legal process. Conversely, an applicant who has been evading process or attempting to destroy evidence is unlikely to secure anticipatory bail regardless of other favourable factors.

The challenge practitioners face is that these grounds are inherently fact-specific. No two anticipatory bail applications present the same combination of factors, and courts exercise significant discretion in weighing them. The removal of statutory guidance under Section 482 BNSS makes this discretion even broader, which means that the quality of the application and the persuasiveness of the oral arguments carry greater weight than under the more structured framework of Section 438 CrPC.


Conditions the Court May Impose

When granting anticipatory bail under Section 482 BNSS, courts are empowered to impose conditions to ensure that the relief is not misused and that the investigation is not compromised. The BNSS has restructured the conditions framework compared to the CrPC, incorporating both specific conditions within Section 482 and a cross-reference to the general bail conditions under Section 480(3).

The conditions that courts typically impose under Section 482 BNSS include the following. The applicant must make themselves available for interrogation by a police officer as and when required — this is the most universal condition and ensures that the investigation can proceed despite the applicant not being in custody. The applicant must not, directly or indirectly, make any inducement, threat, or promise to any person acquainted with the facts of the case so as to dissuade them from disclosing such facts — this protects the integrity of witness testimony. The applicant must not leave India without prior permission of the court — this addresses flight risk concerns. Additional conditions under Section 480(3) BNSS may be imposed as the court deems fit based on the circumstances of the case.

A significant development in the law of bail conditions came from the Supreme Court in March 2026, in the case concerning an appeal against the Allahabad High Court. The Supreme Court held that when a condition imposed while granting anticipatory bail is onerous, the same cannot be sustained in law, especially when dealing with a case pertaining to the liberty of a person. In that case, the lower court had imposed a condition requiring the applicant to pay a substantial sum to the informant as a pre-condition for bail — the Supreme Court struck down this condition as going beyond the legitimate purposes of bail conditions.

This ruling establishes an important principle for practitioners — bail conditions must be proportionate and related to the legitimate objectives of ensuring the applicant’s presence, protecting the investigation, and preventing flight. Conditions that effectively amount to punishment before trial, or that impose financial burdens unrelated to these objectives, are susceptible to challenge.

Courts have also been increasingly attentive to the practical enforceability of conditions. A condition requiring daily attendance at a police station, for example, may be appropriate for a local applicant but impractical and oppressive for one who resides in a different city. Similarly, conditions requiring surrender of a passport are appropriate where flight risk is demonstrated but disproportionate where the applicant has no history of foreign travel.

A commonly discussed issue in professional forums is whether conditions imposed on anticipatory bail can be modified after the order is passed. The answer is yes — both the court that imposed the conditions and the appellate court can modify conditions if circumstances change or if the original conditions prove unduly burdensome. Practitioners should not hesitate to file modification applications when conditions become impractical or when the investigation has progressed to a point where certain conditions are no longer necessary.

The practical challenge with bail conditions is compliance monitoring. Courts impose conditions but often lack effective mechanisms to verify compliance. This creates a situation where technically non-compliant applicants continue to enjoy bail protection, while genuinely compliant applicants face the burden of demonstrating compliance. Maintaining a contemporaneous record of compliance — attendance records, travel permissions, cooperation with investigation — is essential for protecting the anticipatory bail order against cancellation applications.


Procedure for Filing an Anticipatory Bail Application

Filing an anticipatory bail application under Section 482 BNSS follows a structured procedure, though the specific requirements vary between Sessions Courts and High Courts, and between different states. Understanding this procedure is essential for practitioners because procedural deficiencies can delay hearings, result in return of applications, or — in the worst case — leave clients without protection during the critical period when arrest is imminent.

The application must be filed in the court having jurisdiction — either the Court of Session for the sessions division where the offence has been committed or is apprehended, or the High Court exercising jurisdiction over that area. The application is typically filed through a criminal miscellaneous petition or a specific anticipatory bail application form prescribed by the respective court.

The application itself must contain several essential elements. It must identify the applicant with full particulars including name, parentage, age, occupation, and address. It must state the FIR number, the police station, the sections under which the offence is registered (or, if no FIR exists, the facts giving rise to the apprehension of arrest). It must set out the grounds on which anticipatory bail is sought, with specific reference to the facts of the case that justify the relief. It must disclose the applicant’s criminal antecedents, if any, including any prior anticipatory bail or regular bail applications in the same or related matters. The application must be supported by an affidavit verifying the facts stated.

The documents that should accompany the application include a copy of the FIR (if registered), a copy of any notice issued by the police under Section 35(3) BNSS (corresponding to old Section 41A CrPC), identity and address proof of the applicant, any documentary evidence supporting the applicant’s case (medical records in assault cases, financial records in cheating cases, property documents in land disputes), and the vakalatnama or power of attorney in favour of the advocate filing the application.

Upon filing, the court may grant interim protection immediately — directing that the applicant shall not be arrested pending the hearing of the application — or it may list the application for hearing on the next available date without interim protection. The decision on interim protection depends on the urgency of the case and the prima facie merits disclosed in the application. Practitioners must clearly articulate the urgency in the application itself, because if interim protection is not sought or not granted, the applicant remains vulnerable to arrest during the pendency of the application.

The hearing of an anticipatory bail application involves submissions from the applicant’s counsel and the public prosecutor. The public prosecutor typically presents the investigation’s perspective, including the gravity of the offence, the evidence collected, and the reasons why custodial interrogation may be necessary. The court may also seek a status report from the investigating officer. After hearing both sides, the court either grants anticipatory bail with conditions, rejects the application, or adjourns the matter for further hearing.

The timeline from filing to disposal varies significantly across courts. Some Sessions Courts dispose of anticipatory bail applications within 3 to 7 days, while others may take 2 to 4 weeks. High Courts typically list the matter within a week of filing, with final disposal within 2 to 6 weeks. In urgent cases, courts have been known to hear applications on the day of filing.

One procedural concern that practitioners regularly discuss is the adequacy of disclosure. An applicant who fails to disclose material facts — such as a prior rejected anticipatory bail application, pending cases, or the existence of a co-accused — risks having the anticipatory bail cancelled for suppression of material facts. Full and frank disclosure, even of unfavourable facts, is essential for maintaining the credibility of the application and the durability of the bail order.

Step-by-Step Procedure for Filing Anticipatory Bail

Under Section 482, Bharatiya Nagarik Suraksha Sanhita (BNSS), 2023

Typical: 3 – 7 days (Sessions Court)
Typical: 2 – 6 weeks (High Court)

1Apprehension of Arrest
Identify that the offence in question is non-bailable. Gather credible evidence demonstrating a reasonable apprehension of arrest — e.g., FIR copy, summons, witness statements, or police communications.

2Choose the Appropriate Forum
  • Sessions Court — first instance; mandatory to approach before the High Court in most states
  • High Court — for complex cases, grave offences, or after rejection by the Sessions Court
3Draft the Application
The petition must include:

  • FIR details (number, date, police station, sections invoked)
  • Specific grounds for seeking anticipatory bail
  • Affidavit of the applicant
  • Disclosure of criminal antecedents (if any)
  • Supporting documents & case-law references
4File & Seek Interim ProtectionCritical Step
File the petition before the chosen court and simultaneously request an interim direction restraining arrest until the application is heard. This safeguards the applicant during the pendency of the main hearing.

5Hearing
  • Defence counsel presents arguments on merits and grounds
  • Public Prosecutor opposes or consents on behalf of the State
  • Court examines the nature of the offence, severity, prima facie case, and likelihood of the applicant absconding or tampering with evidence
6Court Decision
The court may pass one of the following orders:
Grant with Conditions
Reject
Adjourn for Further Hearing

7Post-Grant Compliance
  • Serve a certified copy of the order on the Investigating Officer (IO) and Station House Officer (SHO)
  • Maintain meticulous compliance records of all bail conditions
  • Attend court / police station as and when required by the order


Anticipatory Bail in Special Statutes Under BNSS

The interaction between Section 482 BNSS and special criminal statutes creates some of the most complex and contested areas of anticipatory bail jurisprudence. Several special statutes contain express bars on anticipatory bail, and the question of whether Section 482 BNSS overrides these bars has produced divergent judicial opinion.

The Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes (Prevention of Atrocities) Act, 1989 is the most frequently litigated special statute in this context. Section 18 of the SC/ST Act, as amended in 2018, expressly provides that the provisions of Section 438 of the CrPC shall not apply to cases under the Act. The question that has arisen post-BNSS is whether this bar — which references Section 438 CrPC specifically — continues to operate when anticipatory bail is now governed by Section 482 BNSS. The Allahabad High Court, in a December 2025 ruling, held that the bar under Section 18 of the SC/ST Act is not applicable to applications filed under Section 482 of the BNSS, reasoning that the bar referred specifically to Section 438 CrPC which no longer exists. However, the Supreme Court has reaffirmed that once prosecution materials prima facie disclose commission of offences under the SC/ST Act, the embargo operates with full force. This creates a nuanced position — the technical applicability of the bar is being contested, but the substantive principles underlying it continue to guide courts.

The Narcotic Drugs and Psychotropic Substances Act, 1985 presents a different challenge. Section 37 of the NDPS Act imposes stringent conditions on the grant of bail, requiring the court to be satisfied that there are reasonable grounds for believing that the accused is not guilty and is not likely to commit any offence while on bail. The Allahabad High Court has held that anticipatory bail applications under Section 482 BNSS are maintainable even for NDPS offences, though the stringent conditions of Section 37 would apply to the grant of such bail. This means the application can be filed and heard, but the threshold for grant remains high.

The Protection of Children from Sexual Offences Act, 2012 does not contain an express bar on anticipatory bail, but courts have traditionally been reluctant to grant pre-arrest protection in POCSO cases given the seriousness of the offences and the vulnerability of the victims. Nevertheless, the Allahabad High Court in March 2026 granted anticipatory bail in a POCSO case where the court found significant delay in the filing of the FIR and material inconsistencies in the prosecution’s version, demonstrating that anticipatory bail remains available even in POCSO cases where the facts justify it.

Section 482(4) of the BNSS itself creates an important embargo that did not exist in the corresponding CrPC provision. This sub-section provides that anticipatory bail shall not be available to a person accused of an offence under Section 65 of the Bharatiya Nyaya Sanhita (rape of a woman under sixteen years of age) or Section 70(2) of the BNS (gang rape of a woman under eighteen years of age). This is a statutory bar within the BNSS itself, and unlike the contested position with the SC/ST Act, this bar is unambiguous and directly operative.

The practical challenge for practitioners dealing with special statutes is that the law is in a state of flux. Different High Courts have taken different views on the interaction between Section 482 BNSS and the statutory bars in special legislation. Until the Supreme Court definitively settles these questions, practitioners must argue both the statutory interpretation point and the substantive merits of their application, and must be prepared for divergent outcomes depending on the court and the bench.

Special Statute Exceptions Matrix

How anticipatory bail under Section 482 BNSS interacts with special criminal statutes — statutory bars, current judicial positions, and availability status.

Available
Contested
Not Available
1SC/ST (Prevention of Atrocities) Act Contested

BarSection 18 references Section 438 CrPC
Current PositionAllahabad HC (Dec 2025) — bar not applicable to S.482 BNSS  |  SC reaffirms substantive bar
StatusContested — divergent views between High Court and Supreme Court

2NDPS Act, 1985 Available

BarSection 37 imposes stringent bail conditions
Current PositionAllahabad HC — application maintainable under S.482 BNSS but S.37 conditions apply
StatusAvailable (with high threshold)

3POCSO Act, 2012 Available

BarNo express bar on anticipatory bail
Current PositionAllahabad HC (March 2026) — granted in POCSO case with delay/inconsistencies
StatusAvailable (case-specific)

4BNS Section 65 (Rape of woman under 16) Not Available

BarSection 482(4) BNSS — express statutory embargo
Current PositionAbsolute bar within BNSS itself
StatusNot Available

5BNS Section 70(2) (Gang rape of woman under 18) Not Available

BarSection 482(4) BNSS — express statutory embargo
Current PositionAbsolute bar within BNSS itself
StatusNot Available


State Amendment Impact — The UP Case Study

The impact of the BNSS on state amendments to the CrPC is one of the most practically significant consequences of the new criminal law regime. Uttar Pradesh provides the most dramatic illustration of this impact, and the developments in UP carry implications for every state that had enacted restrictive amendments to the CrPC’s anticipatory bail provisions.

The background is straightforward. In 2019, the Uttar Pradesh government enacted an amendment to the CrPC inserting Section 438(6), which imposed an absolute bar on the grant of anticipatory bail in cases involving offences punishable with death or life imprisonment. This amendment effectively closed the door on anticipatory bail for the most serious criminal offences in India’s most populous state — covering charges under Section 302 IPC (murder), Section 307 IPC (attempt to murder), Section 376 IPC (rape), and a host of other serious offences. The amendment was widely criticised by the legal community but remained operative law.

The BNSS changed this position entirely. Section 482 BNSS, which governs anticipatory bail at the central level, contains no provision equivalent to Section 438(6) CrPC, and no mechanism for states to impose such restrictions. The question that immediately arose was whether the UP Amendment continued to operate, or whether the BNSS had impliedly repealed it.

The Allahabad High Court addressed this question directly in Abdul Hameed v. State of U.P. on July 3, 2025. The court held unequivocally that the BNSS has removed the bar that the UP Amendment had imposed. The reasoning was that the UP Amendment was an amendment to the CrPC — once the CrPC itself was repealed and replaced by the BNSS, the amendment to the repealed statute could not survive. Section 482 BNSS is a self-contained provision that does not incorporate or preserve state amendments to the corresponding CrPC provision.

The Allahabad High Court further held, in a separate ruling covered by Bar and Bench, that the anticipatory bail provisions under BNSS apply retrospectively, overriding CrPC restrictions. This means that even cases registered before July 1, 2024, where the offence was committed during the CrPC regime, can now attract anticipatory bail applications under Section 482 BNSS.

The Uttarakhand High Court has taken a more cautious approach, referring the question of whether Section 482 BNSS overrides state-level restrictions under Section 438 CrPC to a larger bench. This referral indicates that the issue is not entirely settled across all jurisdictions, and practitioners in states other than UP should monitor the larger bench decision for authoritative guidance.

The implications extend beyond UP. Several other states — including Maharashtra, Gujarat, and Karnataka — had their own amendments to Section 438 CrPC that imposed conditions, restrictions, or procedural requirements beyond those in the central legislation. The logic of the Allahabad High Court ruling, if applied consistently, would render all such state amendments inoperative under the BNSS regime.

The practical impact on criminal law practice in UP has been immediate and substantial. Practitioners report that applications for anticipatory bail in murder, attempt to murder, and other serious offences — which would have been rejected outright under the old regime — are now being heard on merits and, where appropriate, being granted. This represents a fundamental expansion of the rights available to accused persons in the state, and requires both prosecutors and defence counsel to recalibrate their approach to pre-trial custody decisions.


Key Judgments on Anticipatory Bail Under BNSS (2024–2026)

The judicial interpretation of Section 482 BNSS is developing rapidly. Since the BNSS came into force on July 1, 2024, High Courts and the Supreme Court have delivered several significant rulings that are shaping the contours of anticipatory bail under the new regime. The following table consolidates the most important judgments through March 2026.

Case Court Date Key Principle
Abdul Hameed v. State of U.P. Allahabad HC July 3, 2025 BNSS removes bar on anticipatory bail in death/life imprisonment cases; UP Amendment to Section 438(6) CrPC no longer operative
Qureshi & Patidar v. CBI Madhya Pradesh HC 2025 Anticipatory bail under Section 482 hinges on necessity of custodial interrogation, not gravity of allegation alone
Parisha Trivedi v. State of Chhattisgarh Chhattisgarh HC 2024 Section 482 BNSS widens scope of anticipatory bail compared to Section 438 CrPC; courts have wider discretion
Gauhati HC ruling (minor’s rape case) Gauhati HC June 2025 Section 482 BNSS is pari materia with Section 438 CrPC; partly allowed anticipatory bail in POCSO case
Allahabad HC (SC/ST Act bar) Allahabad HC December 2025 Bar under Section 18 SC/ST Act not applicable to applications under Section 482 BNSS
Allahabad HC (NDPS maintainability) Allahabad HC 2025 Anticipatory bail under Section 482 BNSS maintainable even for NDPS offences
Allahabad HC (POCSO grant) Allahabad HC March 2026 Anticipatory bail in POCSO case granted where delay and inconsistencies in prosecution version found
Supreme Court (onerous conditions) Supreme Court March 2026 Onerous conditions on anticipatory bail cannot be sustained; bail conditions must be proportionate to liberty interests
Dhanraj Aswani v. Amar S. Mulchandani Supreme Court 2025 Person in custody for one offence can apply for anticipatory bail for another offence — no bar
Uttarakhand HC (larger bench reference) Uttarakhand HC 2025 Whether Section 482 BNSS overrides state restrictions under Section 438 CrPC referred to larger bench

The trajectory of these judgments reveals several important trends. First, courts are broadly treating Section 482 BNSS as an expansion rather than a restriction of anticipatory bail rights. Second, the removal of state amendment restrictions is being judicially validated across multiple jurisdictions. Third, the standard for granting anticipatory bail appears to be shifting from the gravity of the offence to the necessity of custodial interrogation — a standard that is more favourable to applicants. Fourth, conditions imposed on anticipatory bail are being subjected to closer scrutiny, with onerous or disproportionate conditions being struck down.

Practitioners should note that this is a rapidly evolving area. New judgments are being delivered regularly, and the positions stated above may be modified, distinguished, or overruled by subsequent decisions. The Supreme Court has not yet delivered a comprehensive judgment interpreting Section 482 BNSS, and when it does, the landscape may shift significantly. Until then, the High Court judgments summarised above represent the best available guidance.


Anticipatory Bail vs Regular Bail vs Default Bail Under BNSS

Understanding when to apply for which type of bail is a foundational skill for criminal practitioners, and the BNSS has reorganised the bail provisions in a way that requires practitioners to update their working knowledge.

Feature Anticipatory Bail (S. 482) Regular Bail (S. 480/483) Default Bail (S. 187(3))
When applied Before arrest After arrest and custody After arrest, on expiry of investigation period
Court Sessions Court or High Court Magistrate, Sessions, or High Court Magistrate before whom accused is produced
Applicable to Non-bailable offences only All offences Non-bailable offences where chargesheet not filed in time
Trigger Reasonable apprehension of arrest Arrest has occurred Statutory investigation period (60/90/180 days) has expired without chargesheet
Nature Discretionary Discretionary Right-based (indefeasible right)
Key condition Must show grounds for apprehension Custody is established Must apply before chargesheet is filed
BNSS section reference Section 482 Sections 480, 483 Section 187(3) read with Section 480

Anticipatory bail is the pre-arrest remedy — it operates before the arrest takes place and prevents the applicant from being taken into custody at all. Regular bail operates after arrest — the accused is already in custody and seeks release. Default bail is a statutory right that accrues when the investigating agency fails to complete the investigation and file a chargesheet within the prescribed period.

The strategic question practitioners face is when to apply for anticipatory bail rather than waiting for arrest and then applying for regular bail. The answer depends on the urgency and the client’s circumstances. Anticipatory bail is preferable when the client has legitimate concerns about harassment, when arrest could cause irreparable reputational or professional damage, or when the client is a senior citizen, a woman, or a person with serious medical conditions for whom custody would be particularly harmful. Regular bail is the only option once arrest has occurred, and default bail should be applied for as soon as the statutory period expires, because the right can be lost if the chargesheet is filed before the application is made.

One question that frequently arises is whether anticipatory bail can be “converted” to regular bail. The answer is that anticipatory bail and regular bail are distinct remedies operating at different stages of the criminal process. However, if the conditions of anticipatory bail require the applicant to surrender before the trial court, the applicant may simultaneously apply for regular bail before the trial court, ensuring continuity of bail protection.


Practical Considerations for Criminal Practitioners

Section 482 BNSS has expanded the scope of anticipatory bail, but the expanded scope also brings new practical challenges that practitioners must navigate.

The most common mistake in anticipatory bail applications under BNSS is the failure to update citations and legal framework. Applications that continue to cite Section 438 CrPC, or that argue within the constraints of the old law — particularly in states like UP where the old law was more restrictive — do not take advantage of the expanded protections available under Section 482 BNSS. While courts have been accommodating in treating such applications as filed under the correct provision, the substantive arguments should reflect the new legal position.

Successive anticipatory bail applications present a recurring issue. The question of whether a second or subsequent anticipatory bail application is maintainable after the first has been rejected has been considered by courts, and the general position is that a successive application is maintainable if there is a change in circumstances or if new facts have emerged since the rejection of the first application. Filing an identical application without any change in circumstances, however, is likely to be rejected and may invite adverse comment from the court.

Transit anticipatory bail — where the applicant seeks protection from a court in one jurisdiction against arrest in another — continues to be available under the BNSS. The procedure requires the applicant to approach the court having jurisdiction over the area where they are present and obtain interim protection pending the hearing of the main application in the court having jurisdiction over the place of offence. This remedy is particularly relevant for professionals and business persons who may face FIRs in distant jurisdictions.

The question of what happens when anticipatory bail expires or is cancelled requires careful planning. If the anticipatory bail order does not specify a duration, it typically remains operative until the conclusion of the trial — the Supreme Court has held that anticipatory bail should not be of a limited duration. However, if the order specifies a time limit, or if the bail is cancelled on an application by the prosecution, the applicant must either surrender or apply for regular bail to maintain protection.

Record-keeping is an often-overlooked practical requirement. Practitioners should advise clients to maintain a contemporaneous record of compliance with bail conditions — attendance at police station for interrogation, travel records, communication records demonstrating no contact with witnesses, and court appearance records. This documentation becomes critical if the prosecution files a cancellation application or if the court seeks to verify compliance at the time of extending or modifying the bail order.

A persistent challenge in criminal practice is the gap between the letter of the law and its application at the ground level. Even after anticipatory bail is granted, clients occasionally face situations where investigating officers are unaware of the bail order or attempt to effect arrest despite its existence. Practitioners should ensure that the certified copy of the bail order is obtained immediately and that a copy is served on the investigating officer and the station house officer. In extreme cases, contempt proceedings may be necessary to enforce the order.


Disclaimer: This article is for informational and educational purposes only and does not constitute legal advice. Laws, rules, and procedures are subject to change. For advice specific to your situation, consult a qualified legal professional. Information is current as of March 2026. For the most current position, refer to the official texts of the Bharatiya Nagarik Suraksha Sanhita, 2023 and relevant High Court and Supreme Court judgments on Indian Kanoon, SCC Online, or the official court websites.

Frequently Asked Questions

Fundamentals

What is anticipatory bail under BNSS?

Anticipatory bail under the BNSS is a pre-arrest legal remedy governed by Section 482, which allows a person who reasonably apprehends arrest in a non-bailable offence to obtain a court direction that if arrested, they shall be released on bail. It replaced the erstwhile Section 438 of the CrPC when the BNSS came into force on July 1, 2024.

Which section governs anticipatory bail in BNSS?

Section 482 of the Bharatiya Nagarik Suraksha Sanhita, 2023 governs anticipatory bail. It corresponds to the former Section 438 of the Code of Criminal Procedure, 1973.

What replaced Section 438 CrPC?

Section 482 of the BNSS replaced Section 438 of the CrPC. While the core concept remains the same, Section 482 BNSS makes several significant changes including removing the bar on anticipatory bail in death and life imprisonment cases, eliminating the police arrest power during pendency, and widening judicial discretion.

Process and Requirements

Can anticipatory bail be granted for offences punishable with death or life imprisonment under BNSS?

Yes. Unlike Section 438(6) CrPC (as amended by certain states including UP), Section 482 BNSS contains no bar on anticipatory bail for offences punishable with death or life imprisonment. The Allahabad High Court confirmed this in Abdul Hameed v. State of U.P. (July 2025).

What conditions can the court impose while granting anticipatory bail?

Courts may impose conditions including making the applicant available for police interrogation, prohibiting inducement or threats to witnesses, restricting foreign travel, and any other conditions the court deems appropriate under Section 480(3) BNSS. Conditions must be proportionate — the Supreme Court has held that onerous conditions cannot be sustained.

What documents are needed for an anticipatory bail application?

The application requires an affidavit verifying the facts, a copy of the FIR (if registered), identity and address proof, any supporting documentary evidence, and a vakalatnama. The application must disclose the applicant’s criminal antecedents, if any, and any prior bail applications in the same matter.

Is anticipatory bail available under the NDPS Act through Section 482 BNSS?

Yes, the Allahabad High Court has held that anticipatory bail applications under Section 482 BNSS are maintainable even for NDPS offences, though the stringent conditions of Section 37 NDPS Act apply to the grant. The application can be filed and heard, but the threshold for grant remains high.

Does the SC/ST Act bar apply to Section 482 BNSS applications?

This is a contested question. The Allahabad High Court (December 2025) held that the bar under Section 18 of the SC/ST Act — which specifically references Section 438 CrPC — does not apply to Section 482 BNSS applications. However, the Supreme Court has reaffirmed the substantive principles underlying the bar. Practitioners should prepare for either interpretation.

Is Section 482 BNSS applied retrospectively?

Yes. The Allahabad High Court has held that anticipatory bail provisions under BNSS apply retrospectively, overriding CrPC restrictions. This means applications can be filed under Section 482 BNSS even for offences committed before July 1, 2024.

Practical Applications

Can a person already in custody for one offence apply for anticipatory bail for another?

Yes. The Supreme Court in Dhanraj Aswani v. Amar S. Mulchandani held that nothing precludes a person who is in custody for one offence from applying for anticipatory bail with respect to any other offence for which they apprehend arrest.

Can a second anticipatory bail application be filed under BNSS?

A successive anticipatory bail application is maintainable if there is a change in circumstances or new facts since the rejection of the first application. Filing an identical application without changed circumstances is likely to be rejected.

How long does anticipatory bail last under BNSS?

The Supreme Court has held that anticipatory bail should not ordinarily be of a limited duration and should continue until the conclusion of trial, unless the court specifically orders otherwise. If the order specifies a time limit, the applicant must seek extension or apply for regular bail before the expiry.

Which court should I approach — Sessions Court or High Court?

Most applications are filed first before the Court of Session having jurisdiction over the area where the offence was committed. The High Court is typically approached when the Sessions Court has rejected the application, when the case involves complex legal questions, or when there are concerns about local influence affecting the lower court’s decision.

Can the police arrest after anticipatory bail is rejected?

Yes. If the anticipatory bail application is rejected and no further appeal or revision is pending, the police can proceed with arrest. The applicant may consider filing a fresh application in a higher court or approaching the High Court under Section 528 BNSS (corresponding to Section 482 CrPC — inherent powers, now Section 528 BNSS).

What is the difference between anticipatory bail and regular bail under BNSS?

Anticipatory bail (Section 482) is sought before arrest to prevent custody, while regular bail (Sections 480/483) is sought after arrest to secure release from custody. Anticipatory bail can only be filed in the Sessions Court or High Court, while regular bail can also be filed before the Magistrate. Both are discretionary, unlike default bail which is a statutory right.



Download Now

Independent Director Under Companies Act 2013: Legal Framework, Compliance & Case Law Guide (2026)

0
Independent director under Companies Act 2013 legal framework compliance and case law guide 2026

Last verified: March 2026

The independent director is one of the most consequential legal innovations in Indian corporate governance. Section 149(6) of the Companies Act 2013 codified what was previously a listing agreement requirement into statutory law, creating a defined class of non-executive directors with specific eligibility criteria, tenure limits, and liability protections. This guide on independent director companies act 2013 provisions examines every provision that governs independent directors, from appointment to removal, from compensation to prosecution.

All statutory references verified as of March 2026 against the Companies Act 2013, SEBI (LODR) Regulations 2015, and the Companies (Appointment and Qualification of Directors) Rules 2014 as amended.


Table of Contents

1. The Legal Definition: Section 149(6) Decoded
1.1 Clause-by-Clause Analysis • 1.2 Evolution from Clause 49 • 1.3 How SEBI and NCLT Test Independence
2. Which Companies Must Appoint Independent Directors
2.1 Listed Companies: SEBI LODR • 2.2 Unlisted Public: Rule 4 • 2.3 Private Companies: The Trap
3. The IICA Databank, OPSAT, and Registration
3.1 Registration Fees • 3.2 The OPSAT • 3.3 Exemptions Under Rule 6(4)
4. The Appointment Process and Shareholder Approval
4.1 NRC Under Section 178 • 4.2 Resolution Types • 4.3 Filings and Disclosure
5. Compensation, Tenure, and Directorship Limits
5.1 Sitting Fees & Schedule V • 5.2 Tenure: 5+5 Years • 5.3 Removal & Resignation • 5.4 Directorship Caps
6. Duties, Related Party Transactions, and Committees
6.1 Section 166 Duties • 6.2 Section 188: RPT Oversight • 6.3 SEBI LODR Regulations 18-21
7. Liability Framework and Case Law
7.1 Section 149(12): Four-Limb Test • 7.2 Satyam (2009) • 7.3 IL&FS (2018) • 7.4 India vs UK vs US
8. Frequently Asked Questions

The Legal Definition: Section 149(6) Decoded

Section 149(6): The 6-Clause Eligibility Test
a
Integrity & Expertise
No minimum qualification
b
No Promoter Connection
S.2(77) defines related
c
No Pecuniary Relationship
2-year lookback
d
No Recent Employment
3-year lookback
e
No Auditor Connection
Includes partners
f
Securities & Voting Limits
Rs 50L or 2%
Pass all 6 → Eligible | Fail any → Disqualified

Clause-by-Clause Analysis

Section 149(6) of the Companies Act 2013 provides the statutory definition of an independent director. Understanding the independent director companies act 2013 definition clause by clause is essential because every eligibility dispute, every disqualification challenge, and every appointment irregularity traces back to this section.

An independent director, in relation to a company, means a director other than a managing director, whole-time director, or nominee director, who satisfies six specific conditions simultaneously. There is no room for “substantial compliance” — courts and regulators have consistently held that the test is strict.

Clause (a) requires the director to be a person of integrity who possesses relevant expertise and experience. The Act deliberately does not define “integrity” or prescribe minimum qualifications. This is intentionally broad — Parliament left the determination to the Nomination and Remuneration Committee and the board, recognising that a technology company may need cybersecurity expertise while a pharmaceutical company may need regulatory affairs knowledge.

Clause (b) prohibits the director from being a promoter of the company or its holding, subsidiary, or associate company, and from being related to the promoters or directors. “Related” is defined under Section 2(77) and catches a wide net including spouse, father, mother, son, daughter, son’s wife, and daughter’s husband. If your spouse’s sibling is a director of the holding company, you are disqualified.

Clause (c) bars any pecuniary relationship with the company beyond director remuneration for the current and two preceding financial years. The only exception is transactions not exceeding 10% of total income. This two-year lookback is one of the most frequently violated conditions, particularly by professionals who serve as consultants to a company before being appointed as independent directors.

Clause (d) requires that neither the director nor any of their relatives should have been a Key Managerial Personnel or employee of the company in the three financial years immediately preceding the year of appointment. The three-year cooling period ensures that former employees have sufficient distance from the management they will be overseeing.

Clause (e) bars the director from being a partner or employee of the company’s statutory auditor, internal auditor, cost auditor, or company secretary in practice, and from having been one in the preceding three financial years. This includes partner firms, preventing auditor-to-board revolving doors.

Clause (f) sets securities and voting power limits. The director, together with relatives, must not hold securities exceeding Rs 50 lakh face value or 2% of the total paid-up share capital, whichever is lower. Neither the director nor their relatives should hold 2% or more of the total voting power.

💡 GOVERNANCE INSIGHT
A corporate governance practitioner who has advised boards on over fifty independent director appointments has observed that clause (c) is the most frequently overlooked disqualification ground. Professionals who serve as consultants to a company often assume their consulting fees are distinct from the director relationship, but any pecuniary relationship beyond director remuneration that exceeds 10% of total income during the relevant period triggers disqualification. The lookback covers the current and two preceding financial years, meaning a consulting engagement that ended eighteen months ago can still prevent an independent directorship today.

Evolution from Clause 49 to Statutory Law

For law students studying corporate governance, the evolution of Section 149(6) from the earlier Clause 49 of the Listing Agreement is instructive. The Listing Agreement version was a contractual obligation between the company and the stock exchange, enforceable only through delisting threats. The Companies Act 2013 elevated independence criteria to statutory status, making non-compliance a prosecutable offence under Section 450 (general penalty) and potentially Section 447 (fraud) in egregious cases where a person knowingly accepts appointment despite being ineligible.

The interplay between these six clauses creates a comprehensive independence test that goes significantly beyond what most other jurisdictions require. A person may satisfy five of the six conditions and still be disqualified by the sixth. This strict approach reflects a deliberate policy choice by Parliament, informed by governance failures like the Satyam scandal where independent directors who had undisclosed relationships with management failed to prevent systematic fraud.

How SEBI and NCLT Test Independence

The practical significance of these clauses becomes apparent during enforcement proceedings. When SEBI or the NCLT examines whether an independent director was truly independent, they trace each clause methodically. In multiple SEBI adjudication orders, directors who had indirect pecuniary relationships through family members’ businesses, or who had served as consultants to group companies within the lookback period, have been found to have been incorrectly classified as independent directors.

The consequence is not merely disqualification. It can invalidate board resolutions that required independent director participation, creating cascading governance problems for the company. If a resolution approving a related party transaction was passed with the participation of a director later found to be non-independent, that resolution itself may be challenged, potentially exposing the company to liability and the directors to enforcement action.

Which Companies Must Appoint Independent Directors

Listed Companies: The SEBI LODR Framework

The appointment requirement for independent directors operates on two parallel regulatory tracks that law students must understand distinctly. The Companies Act track begins with Section 149(4), which requires every listed public company to have at least one-third of its total number of directors as independent directors. The Central Government may prescribe minimum numbers for specific classes of public companies.

The SEBI LODR track adds a more nuanced layer. Regulation 17(1)(b) creates a conditional requirement. Where the chairperson is a non-executive director, the minimum is one-third independent directors. Where the non-executive chairperson is a promoter or related to a promoter, or where there is no regular non-executive chairperson, the minimum rises to one-half (50%) of the board. Since the majority of Indian listed companies have promoter-chairpersons, the effective requirement for most listed companies is that half their board must consist of independent directors, significantly exceeding the Companies Act minimum.

SEBI LODR Regulation 17(1)(a) adds a gender requirement: the top 1,000 listed entities by market capitalisation must have at least one woman independent director on the board. This was initially mandated for the top 500 entities from April 1, 2019, and extended to the top 1,000 from April 1, 2020.

Unlisted Public Companies: Rule 4 Thresholds

Rule 4 of the Companies (Appointment and Qualification of Directors) Rules 2014 extends the independent director mandate to unlisted public companies meeting any one of three thresholds: paid-up share capital of Rs 10 crore or more, turnover of Rs 100 crore or more, or outstanding loans, debentures, and deposits in aggregate exceeding Rs 50 crore. These companies must have at least two independent directors.

With thousands of companies crossing these thresholds annually as the Indian economy grows, the structural demand for independent directors continues to accelerate. Companies that cross any of these thresholds during a financial year must appoint independent directors before the end of the next financial year, creating a continuous pipeline of new positions.

Private Companies: The Voluntary Appointment Trap

Private companies have no mandatory requirement to appoint independent directors under either the Companies Act or SEBI regulations. However, this exemption comes with an important caveat that practitioners frequently warn about: if a private company voluntarily appoints an independent director, all statutory obligations — eligibility criteria under Section 149(6), tenure limits under Sections 149(10) and (11), liability provisions under Section 149(12), the IICA databank requirement under Rule 6, and the OPSAT obligation — apply in full. A private company that casually appoints an “independent director” without understanding this compliance burden may find itself inadvertently violating multiple statutory requirements.

The IICA Databank, OPSAT, and Registration Process

Registration Fees and Process

Rule 6 of the Companies (Appointment and Qualification of Directors) Rules 2014 mandates that every individual appointed as an independent director must register with the Independent Directors Databank maintained by the Indian Institute of Corporate Affairs (IICA) at independentdirectorsdatabank.in. Registration on the MCA portal is a mandatory first step before creating the databank profile.

Registration fees are structured in three tiers, all inclusive of 18% GST. The one-year plan costs Rs 5,000 plus GST, totalling Rs 5,900. The five-year plan costs Rs 15,000 plus GST, totalling Rs 17,700, which works out to Rs 3,540 per year. The lifetime plan costs Rs 25,000 plus GST, totalling Rs 29,500 and represents the best value for serious candidates.

The OPSAT: India’s Unique Proficiency Test

The OPSAT represents a uniquely Indian regulatory innovation. No other major jurisdiction — not the UK, the US, Singapore, or Australia — requires independent directors to pass a statutory proficiency test. The test was introduced based on the recommendation of a corporate governance committee which noted that many independent directors lacked basic understanding of their legal obligations, financial literacy, and governance responsibilities.

Every registered individual must pass the OPSAT within two years of databank registration, unless exempt. The two-year deadline was extended from one year by the Fifth Amendment Rules 2020 (G.S.R. 774(E), December 18, 2020). The passing score was simultaneously reduced from 60% to 50%.

The test consists of 50 multiple-choice questions carrying 100 marks (two marks per question), with a duration of 75 minutes (90 minutes for Persons with Disabilities). There is no negative marking. Two daily time slots are available at 2:00 PM and 8:00 PM. Candidates may attempt the test unlimited times with a mandatory one-day gap between attempts. Results are immediate, with an e-certificate generated upon passing.

The syllabus is divided equally between Board Essentials (25 questions covering Companies Act 2013 sections 149 through 188, SEBI LODR Regulations, and SEBI PIT Regulations) and Board Practice (25 questions covering financial literacy, corporate governance principles, ethics, and case studies).

💡 EXAM INSIGHT
A governance training professional who has coached over two hundred candidates has identified a pattern: the most common mistake is neglecting SEBI LODR Regulations in favour of Companies Act provisions that candidates already know, and underestimating the financial literacy questions which require practical application — candidates must be able to identify red flags in an auditor’s report, not merely define what an auditor’s report is. With 75 minutes for 50 questions, each question allows exactly 90 seconds, making timed practice on the IICA portal essential.

Exemptions Under Rule 6(4)

Rule 6(4) exempts four categories from the OPSAT. First, Advocates, Chartered Accountants, Cost Accountants, and Company Secretaries who have been in practice for at least 10 years (as amended by G.S.R. 579(E), August 2021). Second, individuals who have served as director or KMP for at least 3 years in qualifying companies (reduced from 10 years by the Fifth Amendment Rules 2020). Third, Government officers at Director-level or above with 3 or more years in commerce, finance, or industry ministries. Fourth, SEBI, RBI, IRDAI, or PFRDA officers at CGM-level or above with 3 or more years.

The Appointment Process and Shareholder Approval

NRC Recommendation Under Section 178

The appointment of an independent director begins with the Nomination and Remuneration Committee. Section 178(3) requires the NRC to formulate criteria for determining qualifications, positive attributes, and independence. For listed companies, SEBI LODR Schedule II Part D further specifies that the NRC must identify qualified persons and recommend their appointment. The NRC evaluates the balance of skills, knowledge, and experience on the board and prepares a description of the role and capabilities required. This skills-matrix approach was designed to move board appointments away from relationship-based selection toward evidence-based governance needs.

Resolution Types: Ordinary vs Special vs Sixth Amendment

Shareholder approval follows a nuanced framework that has become increasingly complex, particularly for listed companies. For first-term appointments under the Companies Act, an ordinary resolution at the general meeting suffices (Section 152). For reappointment to a second term, Section 149(10) requires a special resolution, with a higher threshold of 75% votes in favour.

For listed companies, SEBI LODR Regulation 25(2A), effective January 1, 2022, originally required all independent director appointments through special resolution. This created practical problems: promoter groups with less than 75% shareholding faced difficulty appointing independent directors, while groups with more than 75% rendered the requirement meaningless.

The Sixth Amendment Rules (November 2022) introduced an alternative for first-term appointments: approval by ordinary resolution where votes cast in favour exceed votes cast against, subject to the condition that a majority of votes cast by public shareholders (non-promoter, non-promoter group shareholders) must be in favour. This alternative applies only to first-term appointments — reappointment still requires special resolution. Understanding this dual-track system is essential for any lawyer advising listed companies, as the wrong resolution type can invalidate the appointment entirely.

Regulatory Filings and Disclosure

The company issues a formal letter of appointment per Schedule IV format, containing the terms, conditions, role, duties, expected time commitment, and remuneration. Form DIR-12 is filed with the Registrar of Companies within 30 days of the board resolution. For listed companies, disclosure to the stock exchange must happen within 24 hours under SEBI LODR Regulation 30. The director must also file Form DIR-2 (consent to act) and Form DIR-8 (declaration of non-disqualification under Section 164) with the company, and submit Form MBP-1 (disclosure of interest under Section 184) as an internal board record.

Compensation, Tenure, and Directorship Limits

Sitting Fees, Commission, and Schedule V Brackets

Sitting fees are capped at Rs 1,00,000 per meeting of the Board or committee thereof under Rule 4 of the Companies (Appointment and Remuneration of Managerial Personnel) Rules 2014. This is a single uniform cap applying to all meetings. According to the Exec-Rem Advisors study reported by Business Standard in August 2024, the median total compensation for independent directors at Nifty-50 companies reached Rs 87.4 lakh in FY24, representing 106% growth since FY19.

Section 197(1) caps commission payable to independent directors at 1% of net profits if the company has a Managing Director, Whole-Time Director, or Manager, or 3% if it does not. Overall total managerial remuneration must not exceed 11% of net profits. Section 197(7A), inserted by the Companies (Amendment) Act 2017, explicitly prohibits the grant of stock options to preserve independence.

When a company has inadequate profits or no profits, Section 197 read with Schedule V prescribes maximum remuneration brackets based on effective capital. For companies with effective capital up to Rs 5 crore, the maximum is Rs 60 lakh per year. Between Rs 5 crore and Rs 100 crore, it is Rs 84 lakh. Between Rs 100 crore and Rs 250 crore, Rs 120 lakh. Above Rs 250 crore, Rs 120 lakh plus 0.01% of effective capital exceeding Rs 250 crore.

💡 PRACTITIONER INSIGHT
A practising company secretary who advises listed companies has noted that well-drafted NRC remuneration policies typically link independent director commission to attendance records, committee chairmanship responsibilities, and specific contributions to board deliberations rather than applying a flat percentage across all independent directors. For listed companies, SEBI LODR Regulation 17(6) requires disclosure of criteria for payments to non-executive directors in the annual report.

Independent director fees are taxed as “Income from Business or Profession” under Section 28 of the Income Tax Act. TDS is deducted at 10% under Section 194J (not Section 192 which applies to salary). If total fees exceed Rs 20 lakh per year, GST registration is mandatory. GST at 18% applies under the Reverse Charge Mechanism.

Tenure: 5+5 Years, Cooling-Off, and Rotation Exemption

Section 149(10) allows a maximum first term of up to five consecutive years. The statute uses “up to five” rather than a fixed five-year term, meaning the actual appointment may be for fewer years. Reappointment for a second term of up to five years is possible but requires a special resolution passed by shareholders, also under Section 149(10).

Section 149(11) imposes the two-term maximum and cooling-off requirement. No independent director shall hold office for more than two consecutive terms. After the expiry of the second term, the director is eligible for appointment only after the expiration of three years of ceasing to be an independent director. During this three-year cooling-off period, the person shall not be appointed in or be associated with the company in any capacity, directly or indirectly.

Section 149(13) provides that independent directors are not subject to retirement by rotation under Section 152(6). This protection ensures that promoter-dominated boards cannot use the rotation mechanism to effectively remove independent directors before their term expires, providing meaningful tenure security.

Removal and Resignation Framework

Under Section 169, any director including an independent director can be removed by ordinary resolution at a general meeting, provided that special notice of 14 days is given. The director has the right to be heard and to make written representations circulated to shareholders. For listed companies, SEBI LODR Regulation 25(2A) significantly strengthens this protection by requiring a special resolution for removal — the 75% threshold makes it substantially harder for promoter-shareholders to remove directors who ask uncomfortable questions.

The resignation process under Section 168 allows a director to resign by giving notice in writing. The resignation takes effect from the date the notice is received or a future date specified, whichever is later. The company must file Form DIR-12 with the ROC within 30 days. The resigning director may optionally file Form DIR-11 with reasons — this filing became optional after the 2018 amendment, but practitioners strongly recommend it as a contemporaneous defence record.

💡 RISK INSIGHT
A governance advisory professional has observed that resignation timing during regulatory investigations creates a difficult dilemma. Resignation too early may be interpreted as abandonment of fiduciary duty, while resignation too late creates the appearance of complicity. The advised approach is to document specific governance concerns in writing to the board, allow reasonable time for management to address them, and if concerns remain unresolved, resign with a detailed DIR-11 filing establishing the chronology.

Directorship Caps Under Section 165 and SEBI LODR

Section 165 caps total directorships at 20, with a maximum of 10 in public companies. SEBI LODR Regulation 17A limits independent directorships in listed entities to 7, reducing to 3 if the person also serves as a whole-time director or managing director in any listed entity. These caps are designed to ensure that directors can devote adequate time and attention to each board they serve on.

Duties, Related Party Transactions, and Committee Obligations

Section 166 General Duties and Schedule IV Code

All directors, including independent directors, are bound by the duties prescribed under Section 166. These include acting in accordance with the articles (Section 166(1)), acting in good faith for the benefit of members, employees, shareholders, community, and environment (Section 166(2)), exercising due and reasonable care, skill, and diligence (Section 166(3)), avoiding conflicts of interest (Section 166(4)), and not achieving undue gain or advantage (Section 166(5)).

Section 149(8) mandates that every independent director comply with Schedule IV, the Code for Independent Directors. The Code covers professional conduct, role and functions, and includes a mandate unique to the Indian framework: at least one separate meeting per year of independent directors without non-independent directors and management present. This separate meeting allows independent directors to review the performance of non-independent directors, assess information quality, and evaluate the board-management relationship without management influence.

Section 188: Related Party Transaction Oversight

Section 188 governs related party transactions, and independent directors bear a particularly important oversight role in this area. Every related party transaction exceeding prescribed thresholds requires Audit Committee approval. For material transactions exceeding SEBI LODR Regulation 23 thresholds, prior shareholder approval through ordinary resolution is required, with related parties abstaining from voting.

The Audit Committee’s role is central to independent director liability. SEBI LODR Regulation 23(2) requires prior Audit Committee approval for all related party transactions regardless of materiality. The committee must verify arm’s length pricing and ordinary course of business. For independent directors serving on the Audit Committee, this creates a direct nexus of knowledge under Section 149(12) — if a related party transaction later proves detrimental to minority shareholders, Audit Committee members who approved it cannot claim ignorance through board processes.

The IL&FS proceedings established a critical precedent in this area: Audit Committee independent directors who approved loans to entities already in default bore heightened responsibility because default information was available through committee processes. This reinforces that committee-level liability under Section 149(12) is measured at a higher standard than general board-level liability. Independent directors serving on the Audit Committee should review the related party transactions register line by line every quarter, verify arm’s length pricing documentation independently, and record their observations in the committee minutes.

Committee Requirements Under SEBI LODR Regulations 18-21

Committee Requirements at a Glance
Audit Committee
Reg 18 • ≥2/3 IDs • All financially literate • ID chair
NRC
Reg 19 • ≥2/3 non-exec • ID chair
Stakeholders RC
Reg 20 • ≥1 ID • Non-exec chair
Risk Management
Reg 21 • ≥2 IDs (top 1,000)

Independent directors carry specific mandatory obligations on four statutory committees. The Audit Committee under Regulation 18 requires at least two-thirds of members to be independent directors, all members must be financially literate (defined as the ability to read a balance sheet, profit and loss statement, and cash flow statement), at least one member must have accounting or financial management expertise, and the chairperson must be an independent director. If the company has outstanding SR equity shares, all Audit Committee members must be independent directors.

The NRC under Regulation 19 requires at least two-thirds non-executive directors, with an independent director as chairperson. The Stakeholders Relationship Committee under Regulation 20 must include at least one independent director with a non-executive chairperson. The Risk Management Committee under Regulation 21, applicable to the top 1,000 listed entities by market capitalisation, must include at least two independent directors.

Liability Framework and Case Law

Section 149(12): 4-Limb Liability Test
1
With your knowledge
2
Through board processes
3
Consent/connivance
4
Failed diligence
✓ PROTECTED
• Fraud without knowledge
• Voted against (dissent recorded)
• Violations never escalated
✗ EXPOSED
• Approved RPT unquestioned
• Signed misstated financials
• Low attendance
• Knew but stayed silent

Section 149(12): The Four-Limb Test

Section 149(12) is the most important provision for any independent director to understand. It is a non-obstante provision creating a four-limb test for liability. An independent director is liable only for acts of omission or commission that (1) occurred with their knowledge, (2) are attributable through board processes, (3) involved their consent or connivance, or (4) occurred because they failed to act diligently.

This creates a statutory safe harbour not available to executive directors. If a director can demonstrate diligent attendance, reading of board papers, active questioning, and recording of dissent under Section 118, Section 149(12) provides substantial protection from liability for management decisions they were not involved in.

💡 ENFORCEMENT INSIGHT
A former member of a regulatory enforcement team has shared an important observation about how Section 149(12) operates in practice. The provision creates a rebuttable presumption of non-liability, but the burden shifts to the director to demonstrate diligence when enforcement proceedings are initiated. Directors who maintain a personal file of all board papers they received, notes they made, questions they raised, and dissent they recorded have a significantly stronger defence than those who rely solely on company-maintained minutes. The IL&FS proceedings demonstrated that the standard of proof required from directors who served on specific committees is higher than for those who served only on the main board.

Satyam (2009): When Passive Attendance Failed

The Satyam Computer Services scandal involved falsification of accounts to the extent of Rs 7,000 crore. The independent directors failed in their most basic oversight function — they never questioned why the company reported massive cash reserves that did not actually exist. SEBI imposed penalties and the case became the primary catalyst for the independent director provisions in the Companies Act 2013. The case also led to the introduction of mandatory auditor rotation under Section 139(2) and stricter related party transaction disclosure requirements under Section 188.

The Satyam case established a principle that remains central to Indian corporate governance jurisprudence: attending board meetings is not the same as exercising independent judgement. The independent directors at Satyam attended meetings regularly. They signed off on financial statements. But they never asked the fundamental question that any reasonably diligent person should have asked — why does a technology company have Rs 7,000 crore in cash sitting in banks when its capital expenditure requirements are minimal? Passive attendance is not due diligence.

IL&FS (2018): Committee Knowledge Pierces the Shield

The IL&FS crisis pushed the liability analysis significantly further. The NCLT, by its order dated October 1, 2018, suspended the entire board of IL&FS and reconstituted it under government-appointed directors. Independent directors on the Audit Committee were specifically implicated for being aware that loans were being granted to entities that were already in default on their existing obligations. The NCLT restrained former directors from alienating their personal assets. In December 2025, IL&FS initiated proceedings before the NCLT to recover Rs 187 crore in excess remuneration paid to former directors.

The IL&FS case established a precedent with far-reaching implications for all Audit Committee members: committee membership creates a presumption of deeper knowledge about the matters within that committee’s purview. An independent director who serves only on the main board can argue that specific operational details were not brought to board attention through formal processes. An Audit Committee member cannot make the same argument about financial irregularities that were discussed in committee, even if the committee minutes do not explicitly record dissent. For law students and practitioners, this distinction between board-level and committee-level liability is one of the most practically significant developments in Indian corporate governance law since 2018.

Comparative Framework: India vs UK vs US

India vs UK vs US
INDIA
Prescriptive
S.149(6) • OPSAT • S.149(12) • Max 10 yrs
UK
Principles
Comply or explain • No test • 9 yrs
US
Hybrid
SOX + exchange • No test • No limit

India uses a prescriptive, statute-based approach with codified eligibility criteria in Section 149(6), a mandatory proficiency test (OPSAT), and a statutory liability shield under Section 149(12). The UK Corporate Governance Code 2024 operates on a “comply or explain” basis, recommending at least half the board (excluding the chair) as independent non-executive directors, with a 9-year tenure recommendation after which independence must be specifically justified. Board discretion to determine independence is significantly broader than in India.

The US relies on exchange-specific listing rules — NYSE and NASDAQ have different independence definitions — supplemented by the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, with the business judgement rule providing common law protection rather than a statutory safe harbour.

The comparative analysis reveals a fundamental philosophical difference. India’s prescriptive approach reflects a regulatory philosophy shaped by governance failures like Satyam and IL&FS, where board self-regulation proved insufficient. The UK trusts boards to exercise judgement and justify departures from the Code. The US falls between the two, with statutory requirements under SOX supplemented by exchange-specific rules. For Indian companies with cross-border operations or dual listings, understanding these differences is essential because independent directors may need to satisfy multiple governance frameworks simultaneously. India is the only major jurisdiction requiring a mandatory proficiency test for independent directors.

What is the statutory definition of an independent director?

Section 149(6) of Companies Act 2013 defines an independent director as a non-executive director satisfying six conditions: integrity with expertise, no promoter connection, no pecuniary relationship, no recent employment, no auditor connection, and securities below thresholds.

Which companies must appoint independent directors?

Every listed company (one-third, or 50% if promoter-chair under SEBI LODR). Unlisted public companies with Rs 10 crore+ capital, Rs 100 crore+ turnover, or Rs 50 crore+ loans must have at least two.

What protection does Section 149(12) provide?

Liability only for acts with director’s knowledge, through board processes, with consent or connivance, or where they failed to act diligently. Creates a statutory safe harbour.

How did Satyam and IL&FS impact liability?

Satyam (2009): passive attendance is not diligence. IL&FS (2018): Audit Committee members bear higher scrutiny as committee membership creates presumption of deeper knowledge.

Is the IICA proficiency test mandatory?

Yes, unless exempt under Rule 6(4). 10+ year professionals and 3+ year directors or KMPs are exempt. Others must pass OPSAT within two years.

Can an independent director be removed?

Section 169: ordinary resolution with special notice. Listed companies: Reg 25(2A) requires special resolution for stronger protection.

How does India compare with UK and US?

India is most prescriptive with codified eligibility, mandatory testing, and statutory liability shield. UK uses comply-or-explain. US uses SOX plus exchange rules. Only India requires proficiency test.

What is the tax treatment of independent director income?

Income from Business or Profession under Section 28. TDS 10% under Section 194J. GST 18% under Reverse Charge Mechanism if fees exceed Rs 20 lakh.


Disclaimer: This article is for informational and educational purposes only and does not constitute legal advice. Laws, rules, and procedures are subject to change. For advice specific to your situation, consult a qualified legal professional. Information is current as of March 2026.


Frequently Asked Questions

What is the statutory definition of an independent director in India?

Section 149(6) of the Companies Act 2013 defines an independent director as a non-executive director who satisfies six conditions simultaneously: integrity with relevant expertise, no promoter connection (Section 2(77) defines “related”), no pecuniary relationship beyond remuneration for current and two preceding years, not a KMP or employee in preceding three years, no auditor connection in preceding three years, and securities below Rs 50 lakh or 2% of paid-up capital. All six must be met — failure on any one disqualifies.

Which companies are legally required to appoint independent directors?

Every listed public company must have at least one-third independent directors under Section 149(4). SEBI LODR Regulation 17(1)(b) increases this to 50% when the chairperson is a promoter, which applies to most Indian listed companies. Unlisted public companies with Rs 10 crore or more paid-up capital, Rs 100 crore or more turnover, or Rs 50 crore or more in aggregate loans must have at least two independent directors under Rule 4. Private companies are exempt unless they voluntarily appoint one, in which case full compliance is required.

What is the maximum tenure for an independent director?

Section 149(10) allows a maximum of two consecutive terms of five years each, totalling 10 years. Reappointment for the second term requires a special resolution. After completing two terms, Section 149(11) mandates a three-year cooling-off period during which the person cannot be associated with the company in any capacity. Independent directors are not subject to retirement by rotation under Section 149(13).

What protection does Section 149(12) provide?

Section 149(12) creates a four-limb test limiting liability to acts that occurred with the director’s knowledge, are attributable through board processes, involved their consent or connivance, or where they failed to act diligently. This statutory safe harbour is not available to executive directors. However, the IL&FS proceedings established that Audit Committee members bear a higher standard of scrutiny because committee membership creates a presumption of deeper knowledge.

How did the Satyam and IL&FS cases change independent director liability?

Satyam (2009) exposed the failure of independent directors to question Rs 7,000 crore of falsified accounts despite regular meeting attendance, establishing that passive attendance does not constitute due diligence. IL&FS (2018) went further — the NCLT suspended the entire board, froze former directors’ assets, and initiated Rs 187 crore remuneration recovery proceedings. IL&FS established that Audit Committee members who knew about governance failures through committee processes could not invoke Section 149(12) simply by attending meetings.

Is the IICA proficiency test mandatory for all independent directors?

Yes, unless exempt under Rule 6(4). Professionals with 10 or more years of practice (advocates, CAs, cost accountants, company secretaries) are exempt. Directors or KMPs with 3 or more years in qualifying companies are exempt. Government officers at Director-level and SEBI/RBI/IRDAI/PFRDA officers at CGM-level with 3 or more years are also exempt. All others must pass the OPSAT (50 MCQs, 50% passing, unlimited attempts) within two years of databank registration.

Can an independent director be removed before completing their term?

Under Section 169, removal is by ordinary resolution with 14 days special notice, and the director has the right to be heard. For listed companies, SEBI LODR Regulation 25(2A) requires a special resolution (75% of votes), providing significantly stronger protection against arbitrary removal by promoter-shareholders.

How does India’s framework compare with the UK and US?

India is the most prescriptive of the three: codified eligibility in Section 149(6), mandatory OPSAT proficiency test, and statutory liability shield under Section 149(12). The UK Corporate Governance Code operates on a “comply or explain” basis with a 9-year independence tenure recommendation and board discretion. The US uses exchange-specific rules supplemented by the Sarbanes-Oxley Act with the business judgement rule as common law protection. India is the only major jurisdiction with a mandatory proficiency test.

What is the tax treatment of independent director income?

Independent director fees are taxed as “Income from Business or Profession” under Section 28 of the Income Tax Act, not as salary. TDS is deducted at 10% under Section 194J. GST at 18% applies under the Reverse Charge Mechanism if total fees exceed Rs 20 lakh per year. Unlike salary income, business income allows deduction of legitimate expenses including travel and professional subscriptions.

What committees must independent directors serve on?

Under SEBI LODR: at least two-thirds of the Audit Committee must be independent directors with an independent director chairperson (Regulation 18), the NRC chairperson must be an independent director (Regulation 19), the Stakeholders Relationship Committee must include at least one independent director (Regulation 20), and at least two independent directors must serve on the Risk Management Committee for the top 1,000 listed entities (Regulation 21).

Download Now

How to become an independent director in India

4

This article was written by Zehra Jamal. The article deals with multidimensional aspects of becoming an independent director in India, including but not limited to who are independent directors, what are their liabilities and duties, their relevant statutes, their appointment procedures, their examination and scope, eligibility, syllabus, books to follow, tips and tricks to qualify the exam, etc. The article tries to convey to its reader the maximum details presented in the best possible way about becoming an independent director in India.

It has been published by Rachit Garg.

Table of Contents

Introduction

What are your thoughts on the daily workings of a company, and how do you think an organisation like a company works? We all understand that since a company is an artificial person, it cannot perform and execute its daily functions. Thus, the directors are required to perform all such actions on behalf of the company. Thus, every company has a team of directors (based on the requirements of the company), also known as the board of directors, which acts on behalf of the company to ensure the smooth functioning of the company. The board of directors makes all the decisions for the functioning of the company and ensures that such decisions are put into action. They act as the trustee and guardian of the company and control all the important and major decisions of the company. Thus, simply put, we can say that the directors are individuals liable for managing the daily affairs of a company. They are trained professionals in a company who are hired to control the day-to-day operations of the company. They are the key managerial personnel of the company. As the name itself suggests, the key managerial personnel of a company are those employees who are entrusted with the most important managerial functions of the company.

Since the independent directors are the key managerial personnel holding the most important post in a company, they must also be governed through proper statutes. Thus, they are governed by the Companies Act, 2013. There are different kinds of companies defined under the Companies Act of 2013, and the requirement for such directors depends on the type of company. The Act bifurcates directors into various types based on their functions performed or on their appointment, etc., and puts forth the duties and liabilities of a director as well. It also discusses the various functions that are to be performed by the director of the company. The provisions of the Act help in deciphering the entire role of directors in the company. 

This article focuses on becoming an independent director in India, and thus we will be focusing more on topics related to independent directors. Independent directors are appointed based on functions performed by them, and they are non-executive directors of a company. To become an independent director in India, individuals need to get themselves registered on the Independent Directors Data Bank and clear the Independent Directors Online Proficiency Self-Assessment Test. After successfully clearing the test, the individuals are appointed by the company as independent directors to look after the functioning of the company. 

The article discusses the independent directors and the career aspects of becoming independent directors in India, including how they are appointed, their roles, duties, functions and liabilities, how they are governed, relevant statutes, their appointment procedures, etc., in a detailed manner. It tries to answer the queries and doubts of any individual who is either looking for details on becoming an independent director in India or exploring the field. 

Who are independent directors

The term ‘director’ has been defined under the definition clause of the Companies Act, 2013. According to Section 2(34) of the Act, directors are natural persons who give directions to the company, and they are appointed by the same company. Independent directors are also a type of director defined under Section 149(6) of the Act.  

Independent directors are appointed based on functions performed by the directors in a company. Two basic types of directors are appointed based on functions performed in a company: executive directors and non-executive directors. The executive directors are all-time directors of the company, managing the daily affairs of the company, while the non-executive directors are not directly involved in the day-to-day functioning of the company but take care of matters about strategizing goals, raising funds, etc. The definition of executive director is not specified in any law, statute, guidelines, rules, etc., so there isn’t a precise definition for it. The non-executive directors are further classified into the following two types:

  • Nominee directors: A nominee director in a company is a person who is appointed to the board of directors by another person. Usually, such directors can be appointed by shareholders of a company (specific class), third parties through contracts, financial institutions, etc. However, if there is a case of oppression and mismanagement, the union government can also appoint a nominee director.       
  • Independent directors: Independent directors are the non-executive directors of a company. They do not have any direct relations (which might affect the decision-making of the director) with the day-to-day affairs of a company. They are more focused on helping a company improve its corporate credibility and growth.                                                                                                                                                                 

According to the Ministry of Corporate Affairs, a company, while appointing an individual as an independent director, must consider the credibility, relevance, expertise, and integrity of the individual. 

For a company to compulsorily appoint two independent directors, the following minimum criteria should be fulfilled as per Section 149 of the Act: 

  1. The company should be a public company and must have a turnover of either Rs. 100 crores or more than that.
  2. The company should be a public company and must have a paid-up capital of either Rs. 10 crores or more. 
  3. The company should be a public company and must have a total debenture or deposit of either Rs. 50 crores or more.

Relevant provisions concerning independent directors 

Statutory provisions

Though there are many provisions concerning independent directors in the Companies Act, 2013, we will be discussing only the important ones. The following are the important statutory provisions concerning the independent director of a company:

Section 149 of the Companies Act, 2013

  • Every company should have a board of directors, which should consist of individuals as directors. It also specifies that:
  • There should be a minimum of one director in a one-person company, two directors in a private company and three directors in a company
  • The maximum number of directors a company can appoint should not be more than 15

However, the Section gives a company the liberty to appoint more than 15 directors by passing a special resolution. The proviso to the Section also states that such companies, as may be prescribed, shall have at least one woman director.

  • Every listed public company shall have at least one-third of its directors as independent directors, and it also gives liberty to the central government to prescribe the minimum number of independent directors for certain classes of companies.
  • An independent director of a company is any director other than a managing director, a whole-time director, or a nominee director of the company. It also specifies that companies should appoint such a person as an independent director who, in the opinion of the board of directors,  is a person of integrity and has the requisite skills to occupy the post. The individual should also not be a promoter of the company and should not have any direct relations with the promoter or directors of the company. 
  • Every independent director so appointed shall prove his competence by giving a declaration that he meets the requisite criteria to occupy the post in the very first meeting after his appointment and in the very first meeting of every financial year. 
  • Every independent director so appointed shall follow the guidelines given in Schedule IV of the Act.
  • Notwithstanding any other provisions of the Act, but concerning provisions of Section 197 and Section 198 of the Act, the independent director shall be entitled to his fees concerning Section 197(5) and reimbursement of expenses for participation in the Board and other meetings and profit related commissions as may be approved by the members, etc. 
  • The tenure of an independent director is five consecutive years, subject to provisions of Section 152 of the act. It also states that they are eligible for reappointment, subject to the passing of a special resolution by the company and disclosure of the same in the board’s report.
  • Notwithstanding clause 10, no individual shall be appointed as an independent director for more than two consecutive terms. However, they shall be reappointed after three years of their second tenure as independent directors. 

The proviso, however, states that during those three years, the individual shall not be either appointed or associated with the company. 

  • Section 149(12) makes the independent director of the company only liable for those acts that occurred without his knowledge. 
  • The provisions of sub-sections (6) and (7) of Section 152 shall not be applicable to the appointment of independent directors in a company. 

Section 150 of the Companies Act, 2013

Section 150 states about the selection of independent directors and the maintenance of the data bank of independent directors.

Subject to Section 149(6) of the Act, every independent director may be appointed from the data bank of independent directors, which contains details of the individuals who are eligible and willing to be appointed as independent directors. 

The proviso to the Section makes it the duty of the company to exercise due diligence while appointing an independent director from the data bank. 

Such appointment of the independent director by the company shall be approved by the company in its general meeting. It also specifies that the explanatory statement annexed to the notice of the general meeting should justify the appointment of such an individual as the independent director of the company. 

The data bank should have a list of individuals willing and qualified to be appointed as independent directors and should be made by the prescribed rules.

The manner and procedure for the selection of independent directors vest with the central government. 

Courts ruling

Mr. Satvinder Jeet Singh Sodhi and Mr. Sakti Kumar Banerjee vs State of Maharashtra and Anr. (2022)

In this case, the Hon’ble Bombay High Court, while deciding the liability of non-executive directors, held that since the non-executive directors of a company are not involved in the day-to-day functioning of the company, they cannot be liable for bouncing of cheques under Section 138 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881, and thus, no criminal proceedings can be initiated against them.

What are the duties of an independent director 

The duties of an independent director are prescribed in the code of conduct under Schedule IV of the Companies Act, 2013. It includes, but is not limited to, the following:

  • Help the board of directors come up with an independent judgement, calculating the pros and cons of the issues at hand

An independent director of the company must make efforts to attend all the board meetings of the company and must also strive to attend all the general meetings of the company and all other board committee meetings in which he or she is a member, and during those meetings, the independent director must put forth his independent judgement based on his best application of mind and help the other stakeholders of the meeting arrive at a decision that is in the best interest of the company. 

  • Help the board decide and come up with a strategy to increase the growth, performance, relations, etc. of the company

Independent directors should strive to maximise the overall performance of the company, and for the same, they can seek expert advice and clarification on issues that are within their domain. If the need arises, the independent director should also give instructions and advice to the required people to act in the requisite manner. All these things should be done by the independent director at the expense of the company. However, in doing so, the independent director of a company should always act within the scope of his authority, and he or she is also expected not to unfairly obstruct the functioning of the company. 

  • Help the board to protect the interest of all the stakeholders in the company and also to maintain a balance between the conflict of interest of all the stakeholders, especially the minority stakeholders

The independent director of a company is entrusted with maintaining the overall environment and relations of the company, and it is expected of the independent director to have an updated and overall view about the interests of all the parties and to keep an eye on those interests so that they are not compromised, especially the interests of the minority shareholders in the company. If the independent director comes across any such instance where the interests of any party of the company are being compromised, then the independent director must raise that point with the board of directors and try his or her best to resolve it. However, if, even after trying, it doesn’t get resolved, the independent director must note that the same gets recorded in the minutes of the meeting of the company.

  • The independent director of the company is also equipped with the duty of looking after the professional ethics and behaviour of the employees of the company.

The independent director of a company should look out for suspected or actual fraud and violations of the professional ethics of the company. The independent director should also ensure that if any individual or a party acts in violation of the code of ethics or professional morality, then the independent director of the company must report such acts of the party to the concerned authority for further deliberation on the issue. 

  • Help the board evaluate the performance of the various stakeholders of the company on the basis of the objectives and goals of the company and set up new prospective growth targets

The individual director of a company is expected to be updated with the overall functioning and the outside environment of the company, and the independent director is also entrusted with the overall growth of the company. For the same, they are also entrusted to regularly check and test the skills of the employees, and they are also empowered to take on new inductions to join other employees who have more familiar skills essential to the company. Apart from this, the independent director is also expected to ensure that the overall human resource required by the company for its day to day functioning does not get short at any time and that the same is updated at regular intervals. 

  • The independent director of the company should also make the best possible efforts to maintain a risk free and robust financial mechanism for the company. 

The independent director of the company must ensure that the company has an acceptable and proper financial system. The independent director also has to ensure that any individual or party that uses the mechanisms of the company doesn’t get prejudiced by using them. Also, the independent director must ensure that every transaction that happens through the company to an individual or any other party is firstly discussed, deliberated, and approved within the general meetings of the company and that such transactions are in the interest of all the stakeholders of the company. 

  • The independent director of the company should also make the best possible efforts to maintain the secrecy of the requisite things during his tenure as an independent director. 

It is the responsibility of the independent director of the company to maintain the confidentiality and secrecy of technologies used by companies, strategies followed by the company, the growth plan adopted by the company, the public relations strategy admitted by the company, the advertising plan of the company, unpublished secretive and other documents of the company. The independent  director of a company is allowed to disclose such sensitive information about the company, only when one or both of the following situations are present:

  1. Such disclosure by the independent director of the company is expressly approved by the board of directors of the company 
  2. Such disclosure by the independent director of the company is required by the law of the land

Which companies need to appoint independent directors 

The following types of companies are required to appoint independent directors:

Listed company

Section 2(52) of the Companies Act, 2013 defines a listed company as any company whose securities are listed on any of the recognised stock exchanges and whose shares are open for trading in the market. Out of the total directors of a listed company, not less than one third should be independent directors. 

Public company 

A public company should compulsorily appoint two independent directors, and for the public company to compulsorily appoint two independent directors, the criteria given under Section 149 of the Companies Act, 2013 should be fulfilled. Those criteria are already discussed above and hence are not mentioned again for the sake of brevity. 

Examination for becoming an independent director  in India

In order to become eligible for becoming an independent director in India, an individual has to register themselves on the independent director data bank and has to clear the  independent director online proficiency self assessment test within a year after registration, or their name will be removed from the independent director data bank. Let us have a look at the nuances of the independent director online proficiency self assessment test.

Independent director online proficiency self assessment test

The independent director online proficiency self assessment test is conducted by the Indian Institute of Corporate Affairs under the provisions of Section 150(1) of the Companies Act, 2013. The independent director online proficiency self assessment test will be conducted through the independent director data bank as provided under Rule 6(1) of the Companies (Appointment and Qualification of Directors) Rules, 2014

The slots for the independent director online proficiency self assessment test are available now, and an individual can take the test on any day of the week in any of the following three time slots:

  • Morning slot – 8 am to 9 am
  • Afternoon slot – 2 pm to 3 pm
  • Late evening slot – 8 pm to 9 pm 

In order to get familiar with the exam, mock tests are also available on the independent director data bank’s website. The candidates who are willing to give a mock test can attempt the same.  

Paper pattern of the independent director online proficiency self assessment test

The independent director online proficiency self assessment test will be based on the knowledge of a candidate in the areas of company law, securities law, basic accounting and corporate governance.

The independent director online proficiency self assessment test consists of a total of 50 multiple choice questions and 100 marks, which will further be divided into the following two categories:

  • Questions on board essentials – 25 multiple choice questions of direct type
  • Questions on board practices – 25 multiple choice questions based on scenario

The time limit for the candidate to attempt the above questions will be a total of seventy five (75) minutes. 

The marking scheme for the independent director online proficiency self assessment test

The independent director online proficiency self assessment test consists of a total of 50 questions. Each correct question will award the candidates two marks. There is no criteria for negative marking, and therefore, each wrong answer will award zero marks to the candidates. The time limit for the exam is seventy five (75) minutes, which implies that the average time allotted to each question will be around 1.5 minutes. 

Important points to note for the independent director online proficiency self-assessment test

The following points are to be kept in mind by the candidate attempting the independent director online proficiency self assessment test:

  1. In order to take the independent director online proficiency self assessment test, the candidate must register themselves on the independent director data bank.
  2. After registering on the independent director data bank, the candidate must qualify the independent director online proficiency self assessment test in a span of two years, or their name will be removed from the independent director data bank. 
  3. Any candidate who has given the independent director online proficiency self assessment test and has an aggregate score of not less than 50 percent will be deemed to be qualified for the examination.
  4. There is no limit on the maximum number of attempts a candidate can make for the exam; however, there must be a gap of one day between the slots in which the candidate attempts the exam. 

How to give the independent director’s online proficiency self-assessment test

In order to give the independent director online proficiency self assessment test, the candidate should follow the following steps:

  1. Register on the independent director data bank.
  2. Login to the independent director data bank.
  3. Go to the dashboard.
  4. Select the time slot in which you want to attempt the independent director online proficiency self assessment test.
  5. Attempt the independent director online proficiency self assessment test as per the slot you have booked.
  6. After attempting the independent director online proficiency self assessment test, the test result and report will be displayed on your portal. 

Tabular representation of the exam 

Name of the examOnline Proficiency Self Assessment Test
Name of the conducting bodyThe Indian Institute of Corporate Affairs (IICA)
Website of the conducting bodyhttps://iica.nic.in/ 
Website of the examhttps://www.independentdirectorsdatabank.in/self_assessment 
Total number of questions in the exams50 questions
Time allotted to the exam75 minutes
Marks awarded for the correct question2 marks
Marks awarded on the wrong question0 marks
Types of questions Multiple choice questions
Frequency of the exam Unlimited 
Time slot of the exam– 8 am to 9 am- 2 pm to 3 pm- 8 pm to 9 pm
No. of attempts Unlimited

Individuals who do not require passing the independent director online proficiency self assessment test

The following individuals are not required to pass the independent director online proficiency self assessment test in order to be appointed as an independent director:

  1. Any person who currently is, or has been, any of the following for at least ten years:
  1. A practising chartered accountant, or
  2. A practising cost accountant, or
  3. A practising advocate of a court, or 
  4. A practising company secretary

      (2) Any person who currently is, or has been, any of the following for not less than three   years on the date of inclusion of his name in the independent director data bank

  1. A key managerial personnel or a director, in at least any one of the following:

(i) a listed public company;

(ii) an unlisted public company having a paid up share capital of Rupees 10 crores or more;

(iii) any body corporate which has been incorporated outside india and has a paid-up share capital of US$ 2 million or more;

(iv) any body corporate listed on any stock exchange;

(v) any statutory corporation set up in India;

     (b) Any individual working in any ministry of department of any state or central government of India and having a pay scale of director or its equivalent, with an experience in the field of corporate affairs, commerce, etc.     

How to become an independent director in India

In order to become an independent director, one must possess extraordinary knowledge and experience, a balance of skills, and an understanding of the post. An independent director’s name is suggested by the board of directors. The same has also to be upvoted by the shareholders of the company. 

To  become an independent director, the individual needs to register on the independent director data bank and pass the independent director self proficiency online assessment test. The procedure to become an independent director is the same for both types of companies – public companies and listed companies.  

Minimum qualifications required to become an independent director in India

There is not a very specific set of guidelines and qualifications issued by any authority on the minimum qualifications or eligibility criteria to become an independent director. However, in order to be eligible to be appointed as an independent director by a company, individuals should fulfil the following basic criteria:

  • The individual should at least know the nuances of the law and other associated regulations to help the company grow.

In order to be eligible to become an independent director, basic legal knowledge with respect to the subject of company laws is expected to be a must. It also forms part of the syllabus of the candidate to clear the independent director online proficiency self assessment test, and thus it is necessary for the candidate to have knowledge of the same. 

  • The individual must also be financially literate and be a person of integrity with the requisite skills in order to be eligible for the same. 

Another important requisite for a candidate to be eligible for becoming an independent director is that they must also be financially literate so that they can calculate the growth, projections, shares, etc. of the company.

  • The individual should also have passed the independent director online proficiency self assessment test within two years from the date of their registration on the independent director data bank. 

Apart from these, there are no such specific qualifications for being an independent director, and anybody who is interested can register themselves on the Independent Director Data Bank. They will be appointed as independent directors if they clear the independent director online proficiency self assessment test.  

Benefits of the graduation subjects or graduation field of a candidate to help the candidate clear the independent director online proficiency self assessment test

There is no compulsion on any particular subject for the candidate to be eligible to be appointed as an independent director. However, there are a few subjects and graduation fields which help the candidate get a grasp of basic concepts related to the independent director online proficiency self assessment test, thereby giving them a benefit over students from other backgrounds. The following few backgrounds do give the candidates an edge over the other candidates in clearing the independent director online proficiency self assessment test. Let us discuss the same. 

Legal background

If a candidate has done their graduation with law and is from a law background, it will help the candidate in clearing the independent director online proficiency self assessment test as the major portions of the syllabus include company law, securities law, and corporate governance, all of which are an integral part of the law school journey. All of these subjects give the candidate an edge over other candidates who are not from a legal background.

Commerce background

If a candidate is from a commerce background, it will help the candidate in clearing the independent director online proficiency self assessment test as the syllabus includes basic accounting, which is an integral part of the commerce background. It will also give him leverage over students from other backgrounds because it will take time for other students to get a grasp on the subject as compared to the student who has already studied it. 

CA and CS professionals 

The chartered accountant and company secretary have not only relevant expertise in the field, but they have also studied the syllabus  of the independent director online proficiency self assessment test while clearing their chartered accountant or company secretary papers. It is because the syllabus to clear the CA includes commerce subjects like business, accountancy, etc., which form part of the independent director online proficiency self assessment test. Also, the syllabus of the CS includes company laws, securities laws, basic accountancy and numeracy, etc., which also forms the syllabus of the independent director online proficiency self assessment test and hence gives them an edge over other candidates. 

Independent director data bank 

The independent director data banks are set up under the Companies (Appointment and Qualification of Directors) Rules 2014. Let us have a look at the details of the independent director data bank.

How are the independent director data bank set up

The Companies (Appointment and Qualification of Directors) Rules, 2014 states that any institute or any corporation can set up an independent director data bank with the approval of the central government. After the notification of the government of India, the independent director data bank was set up by the ministry of company affairs along with the Indian Institute of Corporate Affairs (IICA). The independent director data bank was set up under the provisions of Section 150 of the Companies Act, 2013.

Services of independent director data bank

The independent director data bank plays a very vital role for companies by helping them in the appointment of an independent director. The three very important services that are provided by the independent director data bank are as follows:

  • Registration of individuals who are willing to become independent director 

The independent director data bank allows individuals to register themselves on its portal. It therefore creates a database for all the individuals who are willing to become independent directors. The link for the independent director data bank can be accessed here.

  • Independent director online proficiency self assessment test

The independent director data bank is also equipped with the task of conducting the independent director online proficiency self assessment test. It acts as a platform to help the Indian Institute of Corporate Affairs (IICA) with the examination.

  • Online courses for independent directors 

The independent director data bank also acts as a medium of knowledge for those individuals who want to learn about being an independent director. The courses also help the individual with the independent director online proficiency self assessment test. Candidates can also take mock tests on the platform, apart from learning from the online courses.

Information of the independent directors available on the independent director data bank

The independent director data bank, which acts as a collection of data about the people interested in being independent directors, contains the following information about the individuals: 

  1. Full name (name, middle name, surname) of the individual; 
  2. Director Identification Number of the individual (DIN);
  3. Name of the father of the individual;
  4. Gender of the individual;
  5. Nationality of the individual;
  6. Date of birth of the individual;
  7. Phone number of the individual;
  8. Full residential address of the individual along with the pin code (both permanent and present addresses); 
  9. Email address of the individual;
  10. Occupation of the individual;
  11. Experience and expertise of the individual;
  12. Any legal proceedings against the individuals;
  13. Educational qualification of the individual;
  14. List of limited liability partnerships in which the individual was a designated partner.

What is the Director Identification Number (DIN)

The Director Identification Number (DIN) is a unique number that is given to any person who is appointed as a director or any person who intends to be the director of any company. The Director Identification Number is allotted to an individual by the central government. It is an eight (8) digit number that is unique for everyone. The Director Identification Number (DIN) is used by any company to get the details of any director. The number (DIN) doesn’t expire and has a lifetime validity. 

Benefits of becoming an independent director in India

The benefits and scope of becoming an independent director in India are very wide. The world of an independent director gives you huge opportunities. Not only does the position of an independent director pay a very large remuneration, but it also gives great marketing and networking opportunities. 

It also helps you gain recognition and prestige in the market. Usually, the companies that appoint independent directors are always covered in the media, and once an individual is appointed as the independent director, that individual also starts getting fame, recognition, etc. Firstly, the appointment of the candidate as an independent director itself is covered by the media, followed by all the major decisions taken by the independent director and all the important meetings attended by the independent directors, thereby ensuring lots of recognition, which in essence will open more doors for the individual. 

Not only this, but the post of independent director brings much power to an individual as well. They can make various decisions about the company and its functioning, etc., and thereby make a positive impact on overall corporate strategy at the board level. The independent director of a company in India is vested with such high power to make decisions that usually every decision taken by them becomes a media highlight. Not only this, they are usually in board meetings with big businessmen, corporations, etc., thereby always having a chance of huge networking and success in their professional lives. 

Moreover, if we have a look at the trend of appointing an independent director in India for each coming year, there has been an increase in the demand for independent directors by the companies in India, thereby increasing the employment scope and demand for independent directors in India. Let us have a look at the trends and numbers concerning the appointment of independent directors in India through the following information available with respect to the independent directors in India.

The total number of independent directors appointed each year 

There is no sure shot number of the total number of independent directors appointed each year in India; however, an approximate number can be put up as that of the mid year of 2021, when there were approximately 22 lakh public companies in India. But, when we take a look at the data from the Bombay Stock Exchange, it states that approximately 5300 companies have registered their shares on the Bombay Stock Exchange. This data can be found on the official website of the Bombay Stock Exchange. The link to the same is here. And if we look at the data provided by the National Stock Exchange, it states that until the end of 2022, approximately 2,113 companies had registered their shares on the National Stock Exchange. This data can be found on the official website of the National Stock Exchange. The link to the same is here.

So, if we assume that each company will need a minimum of three to four directors (although the actual demand might be fluctuating a bit), then we will need at least 30,000 directors who are qualified enough to be appointed as independent directors. 

Scope of job opportunity of an independent director in the coming years

We just calculated that, at an estimate, we will need 30,000 directors who are qualified enough to be appointed as independent directors. However, this is not the limit of the scope of the job of an independent director in the coming years. The opportunity is much wider than that as of now. There are two main factors contributing to the cause. Let us try to understand the same:

The unlisted and private companies preparing to list their IPOs 

The IPO, or initial public offering, refers to the mechanism of making shares of a private corporation available to the general public in a new stock issuance for the first time. And though the unlisted and private companies do not require an independent director, once the unlisted and private companies go for the initial public offering (also known as the stock launch), they will also be required to appoint independent directors mandatorily. And thus, this will also increase the scope of job opportunities for an independent director in the coming years. 

Growth of the Indian economy in the next decade

India will probably be going through a boom of growth in the next decade, according to our economic survey of 2023 -24. As a result, such a boom of growth in the next decade will lead to companies going public in the economy and requiring independent directors. The value of our gross domestic product is also expected to be tripled by the next decade, according to our economic survey of 2023 -24. The survey can be read here. Thus, we will need thousands of independent directors for the same, and therefore, there is a very wide scope of job opportunities for an independent director in the coming years. 

The maximum allowed terms for the independent directors will come to an end in 2024. Since the maximum term for which an individual is allowed to occupy the position of an individual director is 10 years, the same will come to an end in 2024 because the majority of independent directors were appointed around 2014. The reason for the appointment of the majority of independent directors in 2014 is that the process under which an independent director is appointed in a company is prescribed under the Companies Act, 2013, read along with the Companies (Appointment and Qualification of Directors) Rules, 2014. After the rules came into force, it led to the appointment of a majority of independent directors. Thus, most of them will be coming to the end of their tenure in 2024, and therefore, this will lead to an increase in employment opportunities for independent directors by 2024, thereby increasing the scope of job opportunities for independent directors in the coming years. 

What will be the trend of appointing independent directors by the company in the next few years

The trend for the companies going for independent director hunting in the next few years can be summarised through the points given below:

  • India has seen a rise in the number of independent directors over the years because of the huge demand for independent directors by Indian companies. The reason for the rise can be attributed to the terms of many independent directors coming to an end in 2024. The link to the same can be accessed here
  • The companies are primarily on a hunt for independent directors in India who have special skills and expertise in corporate government, fund management, and strategic planning.
  • Very recently, KPMG did a survey on the demands and requirements of independent directors in India. The survey revealed that at least 65 percent of the companies in India are planning to appoint independent directors to their boards of directors by the end of next year. The link to the pdf of the survey done by KPMG can be accessed here
  • Since the companies in India are seeking to improve their corporate governance as enhanced by SEBI,  it will also increase the demand for independent directors in India, thereby taking the trend of appointing independent directors to a new height. 

Other important details about independent directors

The pay scale and remuneration of an independent director in India are quite high. Let us have a look at the same:

Remuneration: salary and pay scale

The salary of each independent director varies as per the company and the work of the independent director. However, there are usually two basic heads under which an independent director is paid the salary. The two basic heads can be divided as follows:

Sitting fee for an independent director for attending the board meetings 

For every board meeting that the independent director attends, he is paid a sitting fee for the same. According to Rule 4 of the Companies (Appointment and Remuneration of Managerial Personnel) Rules, 2014, an independent director can be paid up to INR 1 lakhs as the sitting fee for attending the board meeting. 

Commission to the independent director 

This is also paid to an independent director of the company, and the commission is usually a part of the profit which the company makes. It is given to the independent director because of all the duties and responsibilities he takes care of in the company. The commission forms a larger part of the salary of the independent director appointed to a company. The independent director can be paid money from the total profit made by the company as commission to the independent director, which is according to the Companies (Appointment and Remuneration of Managerial Personnel) Rules, 2014

Incentives given to an independent director

Apart from the above mentioned remuneration, the independent director of a company is also provided with various other incentives, which vary from company to company. Different companies incentivise their independent directors in different ways. Let us try to understand the same through the incentive policy of Infosys Company. Infosys has its own remuneration policy for their independent directors, but apart from this remuneration, the independent director of the Infosys company also enjoys incentives like D&O Insurance (which  is basically the directors and officers insurance policy to pay for the personal liability of directors and officers for claims made against them while serving on the Board) up to 200 million USD and other insurance up to 100 million USD. This was an example of the incentive policy of Infosys and how Infosys pays its independent director, although other companies also pay and give incentives to their independent directors in a similar range, with variations according to the policy of their company. 

Appointment procedure of an independent director 

This part of the article discusses the appointment procedure of the independent director once they have successfully qualified the independent director online proficiency self assessment tests and other important details with respect to the appointment of the independent directors.

How is the independent director appointed

The independent director is appointed from the list of directors available on the independent director data bank. The companies look for individuals who have already qualified for the independent director online proficiency self assessment test. The companies can also appoint an individual as an independent director who is given permission to become an independent director without giving the independent director online proficiency self assessment test. However, they must meet all the other criteria that are required for an individual to be appointed as an independent director. 

Letter of appointment of an independent director

Once a company selects an individual to be appointed as the individual director of the company, they then have to proceed with the formalities to appoint him as such. In order to proceed with the formalities, the company is expected to issue the letter of appointment of an independent director to the individual. The contents of the letter of appointment of the individual director must contain the following things:

  • The terms and conditions under which the individual is appointed as the independent director of the company;
  • The code of conduct and the actions which the independent director of the company is expected to follow while in the chair;
  • The duties and liabilities of the director and the code of professional ethics that a director is expected to maintain;
  • The remuneration, pay scale, incentives and all other fees which the company pays to its independent director;
  • The details about the various insurances being paid to the independent director of the company

Procedure to reappoint the independent director

In order to reappoint an individual as an independent director of the company, the board meeting evaluates the performance of the independent directors, and if the performance is up to the satisfaction level, he may be reappointed as the independent director of the company. The performance of the individual director of the company is evaluated by other directors on the basis of the performance appraisal report. The maximum tenure for which an independent director of a company can be reappointed is 10 years. 

Procedure for removal or resignation of the independent director

The process of removing an independent director of a company is the same as the process of removing any other director of the company, which is through the passing of an ordinary resolution in the board meeting of the company.

For the resignation of an independent director, he has to write the same to the board of directors of the company. He must mention the date on which he is resigning from the company as an independent director of the company. When the board of directors of the company receives the resignation of the independent directors of the company, they must intimate the same to the registrar of the company. 

Conclusion

An independent director is the individual who helps a company manage its affairs and  maintain its corporate governance policy. He can be appointed by a company on its board if he clears the independent directors online proficiency self assessment test within one year of his registration with the independent director data bank. The independent director data bank has a list of all the individuals who are willing to become an independent director and have qualified the independent director online proficiency self assessment test. 

Apart from this, they have a tenure of five years and they can consecutively occupy the office for two terms. Since the majority of them were appointed in 2014 after the enactment of the Companies (Appointment and Qualification of Directors) Rules, 2014, there will be a vast number of job opportunities for the position of an independent director in the next year. 

Frequently asked questions (FAQs) on how to become an independent director in India 

Here are some of the frequently asked questions by aspirants about becoming an independent director in India:

Frequently asked questions on the independent director online proficiency self assessment test and independent director data bank

How many attempts can an individual give of the independent director online proficiency self assessment test?

There is no bar on the number of attempts an individual can give the independent directors an online proficiency self assessment test. However, there should be a gap of at least one day in the two slots in which an individual is attempting the test. 

What is the mode of the independent director online proficiency self assessment test?

The independent director online proficiency self assessment test is conducted in online mode by the Indian Institute of Corporate Affairs (IICA).

Is it necessary for a candidate to be from a law or commerce background to be eligible to take the independent director online proficiency self assessment test?

No, it is not at all necessary for a candidate to be from a law or commerce background to be eligible to take the independent director online proficiency self assessment test. Candidates belonging to any category can take the independent director online proficiency self assessment test.

What is the nature of the questions asked in the independent director online proficiency self assessment test?

The independent director online proficiency self assessment test consists of objective questions (multiple choice questions).

What is the total time given to a candidate for the independent director online proficiency self assessment test?

The total time given to a candidate for completing the independent director online proficiency self assessment test is seventy five (75) minutes.

What happens if a candidate fails to clear the independent director online proficiency self assessment test within one year of his registration on the independent director data bank?

If a candidate fails to clear the independent director online proficiency self assessment test within one year of his registration on the independent director data bank, his name will be struck off the data bank. 

Frequently asked questions on appointment of independent directors 

What is the minimum age to get appointed as an independent director?

The minimum age to get appointed as an independent director is 21 years of age. 

Can an individual be appointed as an independent director of more than one company during the same period?

Yes, an individual can be appointed as an independent director in seven companies at the same time. 

Can a practising company secretary be appointed as an independent director of a company?

Yes, a practising company secretary can be appointed as an independent director of the company. However, the practising company secretary cannot be appointed as an independent director of the same company in which he or she is acting as the company secretary because the company secretary is the full time employee of the company and the independent directors cannot be a full time employee of the company. 

Can a candidate be reappointed as an independent director for two consecutive terms?

Yes, a candidate can be reappointed as an independent director for two consecutive terms.

Other frequently asked (miscellaneous) questions on independent directors in India 

Do all the directors require a director identification number (DIN)?

Yes, all the directors are required to have a director identification number. And not only the directors, even those individuals who are intending to be appointed as an individual are also required to have the director identification number (DIN).

What is the tenure of an independent director?

An independent director is appointed for a tenure of five years. 

References 

Download Now

UGC NET Constitutional and Administrative Law: Key Topics and Quick Revision Guide

0
UGC NET Questions

Quick revision guide for UGC NET Constitutional and Administrative Law covering high-priority topics, key case laws, and preparation tips for working professionals. Master Unit 2 efficiently. This article is written by Urvi Shah, Senior Associate at LawSikho.

If you’re a working professional preparing for UGC NET Law, you already know the challenge: limited time, vast syllabus, and the pressure to score well. 

But here’s the good news: Constitutional and Administrative Law (Unit II) is your strategic advantage.

This unit consistently delivers 20-30% of  Paper II  marks, with predictable patterns and high yield topics that reward smart preparation over exhaustive reading. 

Fundamental Rights, Emergency Provisions, and Natural Justice principles dominate question papers year after year. 

Master these core areas, memorize key case laws and you’ll confidently tackle questions that leave unprepared candidates guessing.

This guide cuts through the clutter. No lengthy textbooks, no overwhelming details, just the exact topics, case laws, and strategies that maximize your score in minimum time. 

Let’s turn Unit II into your scoring powerhouse.

Why Does Unit II Matter for Your UGC NET Score?

Constitutional and Administrative Law is not just another unit in your Paper II syllabus. It is a scoring goldmine that rewards candidates who understand patterns and prioritize smartly. 

The NTA consistently draws heavily from this unit, making it one of your best opportunities to accumulate marks efficiently.

Question Weightage and Exam Trends

Recent examination data reveal significant variation in Unit II weightage. 

The December 2023 cycle featured approximately 27 questions from Constitutional and Administrative Law alone. That represented 27% of your entire Paper II marks from a single unit. 

Even in leaner cycles like June 2025, with roughly 9 to 12 questions, this unit remained among the top contributors.

The pattern suggests that while exact numbers fluctuate, Constitutional and Administrative Law never drops below significant weightage. 

Your preparation must account for both high weightage and moderate weightage scenarios, ensuring comprehensive coverage of core topics while building depth in frequently tested areas.

Constitutional Law vs Administrative Law: Where to Focus

Within Unit II, Constitutional Law topics dominate both the syllabus and the question papers. Expect roughly 70% of Unit II questions to come from Constitutional Law areas like Fundamental Rights, Emergency Provisions, and distribution of powers. 

The remaining 30% covers Administrative Law, particularly natural justice principles and judicial review.However, Administrative Law questions tend to be more predictable. 

If you know the types of bias, the components of natural justice, and the grounds of judicial review, you can confidently answer most Administrative Law questions. 

Constitutional Law requires broader preparation across multiple topics but offers more opportunities due to higher question frequency.

Constitutional Law: High Priority Topics for Quick Revision

Constitutional Law spans seven major syllabus areas, but not all carry equal examination weight. Focus your limited time on topics that consistently generate questions while maintaining basic familiarity with others. Here is your priority roadmap for Constitutional Law preparation.

Fundamental Rights and Part III Essentials

Fundamental Rights questions appear in virtually every UGC NET cycle. 

Article 32 was tested in June 2025, with the question asking which Article Dr. Ambedkar called the “heart and soul” of the Constitution. Article 14’s arbitrariness test from E.P. Royappa, Article 19’s freedoms and reasonable restrictions, and Article 21’s expanded interpretation through Maneka Gandhi form the core testing areas.

Know the exact Article numbers for key rights. Questions often test whether you can identify which Article provides specific protection. 

The recent Kaushal Kishore v. State of UP (2023 SC) judgment held that Article 19 rights are available against both state and non state actors, expanding horizontal application of fundamental rights. This development may feature in upcoming cycles.

The relationship between Fundamental Rights and Directive Principles represents another frequently tested area. The December 2023 comprehension passage directly tested the principle that harmony between Parts III and IV is a basic feature of the Constitution

Understanding how courts have balanced these constitutional values helps answer both direct and comprehension based questions.

Emergency Provisions and Their Effects

Emergency Provisions under Part XVIII appear with remarkable consistency. You must know the three types: National Emergency (Article 352), President’s Rule (Article 356), and Financial Emergency (Article 360). 

More importantly, understand the conditions for proclamation, duration, parliamentary approval requirements, and effects on Fundamental Rights.

The June 2025 cycle tested which grounds trigger automatic suspension of Article 19. The answer is war and external aggression only; armed rebellion does not trigger automatic suspension. This distinction, introduced by the 44th Amendment, is frequently examined.

S.R. Bommai v. Union of India (1994 SC) established crucial limitations on Article 356, holding that the President’s satisfaction is subject to judicial review and that State Assemblies should not be dissolved before parliamentary approval. 

Questions on Article 356 limitations and the Bommai guidelines appear regularly.

Distribution of Powers and Centre State Relations

Schedule VII’s three lists define legislative competence between the Union and the States. 

Know the Union List contains 100 subjects, the State List has 61 subjects, and the Concurrent List covers 52 subjects where both can legislate. Article 254 provides that Union law prevails over State law in Concurrent List matters in case of conflict.

The June 2024 re exam tested circumstances when Parliament can legislate on State List matters. 

These include: Rajya Sabha resolution declaring national interest (Article 249), during National Emergency (Article 250), when two or more States consent (Article 252), and for implementing international treaties (Article 253). Memorize these provisions with their Article numbers.

Questions also test concepts like the pith and substance doctrine and colorable legislation. Understand that courts look at the true nature of legislation, not its form, when determining legislative competence.

Key Constitutional Amendments and Their Impact

Certain amendments receive repeated attention. The 42nd Amendment (1976) inserted “Socialist,” “Secular,” and “Integrity” in the Preamble, a fact tested in June 2025. 

The 44th Amendment (1978) introduced safeguards against emergency misuse, replacing “internal disturbance” with “armed rebellion” and making Articles 20 and 21 non suspendable.

The Basic Structure Doctrine, established in His Holiness Kesavananda Bharati v State of Kerala [1973 SC], limits Parliament’s amending power under Article 368

Questions test both the doctrine itself and specific cases that developed it. Minerva Mills Ltd. v. Union of India (1980 SC) reaffirmed basic structure; Indira Gandhi v. Raj Narain (1975 SC)clarified its limits constituent power, not ordinary legislative power.

Must Know Case Laws for Constitutional Law

Build your case law knowledge around examination patterns rather than exhaustive lists. The following cases appear most frequently and should be memorized with their principles:

His Holiness Kesavananda Bharati v State of Kerala [1973 SC] established the Basic Structure Doctrine. Maneka Gandhi v. Union of India (1978 SC) expanded Article 21, requiring procedures to be fair, just, and reasonable. 

S.R. Bommai v. Union of India (1994 SC) limited Article 356 misuse. Minerva Mills v. Union of India (1980 SC) reaffirmed the basic structure as limiting amending power. E.P. Royappa v. State of Tamil Nadu (1974 SC) introduced the arbitrariness test for Article 14.

For Fundamental Rights specifically, know A.K. Gopalan v. State of Madras (1950 SC) (narrow Article 21 interpretation, later overruled), I.C. Golak Nath & Ors. v State of Punjab & Anr.(1967 SC) (Parliament cannot amend Fundamental Rights, later overruled by Kesavananda), and K.S. Puttaswamy v. Union of India (2017 SC) (right to privacy as fundamental right under Article 21).

Administrative Law: High Priority Topics for Quick Revision

Administrative Law may seem smaller in scope, but its examination patterns are highly predictable. Master the core concepts, and you can confidently answer most Administrative Law questions. Here is your efficient preparation strategy for this portion.

Principles of Natural Justice: Core Concepts

Natural justice principles form the bedrock of Administrative Law testing. Two fundamental principles dominate: Audi alteram partem (hear the other side) and Nemo judex in causa sua (no one should judge their own cause). Know these Latin maxims and their practical requirements.

Audi alteram partem requires notice of allegations, disclosure of material, opportunity to respond, and a chance to present evidence. However, the right to appeal is NOT a natural justice requirement; it is a statutory right. This distinction is testable.

The rule against bias has four types frequently examined. 

Pecuniary bias involves financial interest, illustrated by Dimes v. Grand Junction Canal, where a judge’s shareholding disqualified him. 

Personal bias involves relationships or prejudice, examined in Mineral Development Ltd. v. State of Bihar (1959 SC). Official or subject matter bias arises when decision makers participate in matters they initiated, as in Gullapalli Nageswara Rao v. A.P. SRTC (1959 SC). Judicial obstinacy involves refusal to consider relevant material, discussed in State of West Bengal v. Shivananda Pathak (1998 SC).

The June 2025 cycle included a matching question requiring candidates to pair these bias types with their respective cases. Memorize these four pairings; they represent high probability marks.

Judicial Review: Grounds and Limitations

Judicial review of administrative action operates through three grounds systematized in the GCHQ case (1985). 

Illegality means the decision maker misunderstood the law governing their power. Irrationality, also called Wednesbury unreasonableness, means the decision was so unreasonable that no reasonable authority could have reached it. Procedural impropriety covers breaches of natural justice and statutory procedures.

Understand that judicial review examines legality, not merits. Courts do not substitute their judgment for administrative wisdom on policy matters; they ensure that administrators operate within legal bounds. The distinction between judicial review and appeal is frequently tested.

Wednesbury unreasonableness deserves special attention. From Associated Provincial Picture Houses v. Wednesbury Corporation (1948), this standard requires that the decision be “so unreasonable that no reasonable authority could ever have come to it.” Mere disagreement or finding the decision against the weight of evidence is insufficient.

The June 2024 re exam asked which feature is NOT part of the French administrative system, with “use of stare decisis in administrative decisions” being correct since France follows civil law tradition without binding precedent.

Must Know Case Laws for Administrative Law

A.K. Kraipak v. Union of India (1970 SC) extended natural justice requirements to administrative functions, not just quasi judicial ones. This landmark case expanded fair procedure obligations across governmental decision making.

Ridge v. Baldwin (1964), though English, revived natural justice principles and established that these requirements apply wherever rights are affected.Gullapalli Nageswara Rao v. A.P. SRTC (1959 SC) established that officials cannot approve proposals they themselves initiated. Dimes v. Grand Junction Canal (1852) illustrated automatic disqualification for pecuniary interest.

For juristic definitions of administrative law, memorize: Wade defines it as law relating to control of governmental power; Garner emphasizes rules recognized by courts as law relating to administration; Griffith and Street focus on operation and control of administrative authorities; Ivor Jennings describes it as law determining organization, powers, and duties of administrative authorities. This exact matching question appeared in June 2025.

Quick Preparation Tips for Working Professionals

If you are balancing UGC NET preparation with work responsibilities, efficiency is everything. The following strategies help maximize your limited study time while ensuring comprehensive Unit II coverage.

Time Efficient Study Strategy for Unit II

Dedicate 2 to 3 focused hours daily rather than sporadic longer sessions. For Unit II specifically, allocate your time as follows: 60% to Constitutional Law high priority topics, 25% to Administrative Law core concepts, and 15% to case law memorization and practice questions.

Start with the highest yield topics. Fundamental Rights, Emergency Provisions, and natural justice principles appear in nearly every cycle. Master these before moving to less frequently tested areas like special provisions for states or detailed legislative procedure.

Create condensed revision notes on weekends covering key Article numbers, case law principle pairings, and frequently tested facts. These notes become invaluable during final week revision when comprehensive reading is impossible.

Use commute time productively. Audio lectures or flashcard apps work well for reinforcing case law associations and Article numbers. The goal is converting otherwise unproductive time into incremental preparation.

Recommended Resources for Focused Preparation

For working professionals with limited time, UGC NET specific guides work better than comprehensive textbooks. “UGC NET Law Guide” by Rukmesh and “The Ultimate Guide to UGC NET (Law)” by Bhavna Sharma cover Unit II efficiently without overwhelming detail.

Previous year questions are your most valuable resource. Platforms like Legal Bites compile unit wise UGC NET previous year questions with answers, allowing you to practice actual examination patterns. Work through these systematically, identifying frequently tested concepts.

Keep a bare act of the Constitution of India for quick Article reference. Many questions test exact Article numbers; familiarity with the constitutional text pays dividends.

Aim for 15 to 20 mock tests before the examination. Focus on analyzing errors rather than just attempting tests. Categorize mistakes as conceptual gaps, careless errors, or time management issues, and address each systematically.

Conclusion

Constitutional and Administrative Law offers one of your best scoring opportunities in UGC NET Law Paper II. The unit’s consistent high weightage, predictable question patterns, and focused scope make it ideal for strategic preparation.

Prioritize Fundamental Rights, Emergency Provisions, and natural justice principles as your non negotiable foundation. 

Build case law knowledge around examination patterns: Kesavananda Bharati, Maneka Gandhi, S.R. Bommai, and A.K. Kraipak form the essential core. Master the matching patterns for bias types and juristic definitions; these questions offer certain marks if prepared.

Your remaining preparation time should balance efficiency with thoroughness. Cover high priority topics deeply; maintain familiarity with others. Practice previous year questions to internalize examination patterns. 

With focused effort on Unit II, you position yourself to capture a significant portion of your Paper II marks from a single, manageable unit.

For comprehensive coverage of Constitutional and Administrative Law with 20 sample questions and detailed preparation strategies, explore LawSikho’s complete guide.

Download Now

US GAAP: Generally Accepted Accounting Principles

0
US GAAP Explained

US GAAP stands for Generally Accepted Accounting Principles used by American companies. Learn key GAAP concepts, differences from Ind AS, and career benefits for Indian accountants and finance professionals. This article is written by Rohit Arora, Senior Associate at LawSikho.

Whether you are preparing consolidated financials for a US parent company, handling compliance at a shared services center, or simply looking to expand your career options in India’s booming finance sector, US GAAP knowledge has become a valuable asset that can set you apart from your peers. 

With American multinational corporations establishing extensive operations across Indian cities and Global Capability Centers proliferating in Bangalore, Hyderabad, and Pune, the demand for professionals who understand American accounting standards continues to grow. 

This article breaks down what US GAAP means, how it differs from the Ind AS framework you already know, and why investing in this knowledge can significantly boost your earning potential and career trajectory.

What is US GAAP?

US GAAP, which stands for Generally Accepted Accounting Principles, is the comprehensive framework of accounting standards, rules, and conventions that governs how companies in the United States prepare and present their financial statements. 

Developed and maintained by the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB), these standards ensure that financial reporting across American public companies remains consistent, comparable, and transparent. For investors reviewing financial statements, GAAP compliance provides assurance that the numbers they see have been prepared using standardised methods, making it possible to compare one company’s performance against another on a level playing field.

For Indian accountants and finance professionals, understanding US GAAP matters for several practical reasons. 

If you work at an Indian subsidiary of an American corporation, you likely need to prepare reporting packages that comply with US GAAP for consolidation into the parent company’s financial statements. 

If you are employed at a Big 4 firm serving multinational clients, GAAP knowledge enables you to handle audits and advisory work for US-headquartered companies. 

Even if your current role does not require GAAP expertise, having this skill on your resume opens doors to premium positions at MNCs, shared services centers, and finance operations that specifically seek professionals who can bridge Indian and American accounting requirements.

How Is US GAAP Regulated in the United States?

The regulatory framework governing US GAAP involves several interconnected organisations, each playing a distinct role in developing, maintaining, and enforcing accounting standards. At the center of this system is the Financial Accounting Standards Board, an independent private-sector body that has been responsible for establishing accounting standards for nongovernmental entities since 1973. 

FASB operates under the oversight of the Financial Accounting Foundation, which appoints board members and provides governance while maintaining the independence of the standard-setting process. When FASB issues new guidance or updates existing standards, these changes become part of the authoritative body of US GAAP.

The Securities and Exchange Commission retains ultimate authority over financial reporting for public companies and enforces compliance with GAAP through its review of company filings. While the SEC has historically deferred to FASB for standard-setting, it can and does intervene when it believes additional guidance is necessary. 

For practical purposes, what Indian professionals need to understand is that all authoritative US GAAP guidance now resides in the FASB Accounting Standards Codification, a unified system launched in 2009 that organises approximately 90 accounting topics into a searchable, hierarchical structure. When you need to research a US GAAP question, the ASC is your definitive source, and learning to navigate its topic-subtopic-section-paragraph structure will serve you well throughout your career.

Core Principles That Guide All GAAP Standards

Underlying all specific US GAAP standards are ten fundamental principles that guide how financial information should be recorded, measured, and reported. Understanding these principles helps you interpret any GAAP guidance you encounter, even for topics you have not studied in detail. 

The principle of consistency requires that companies apply the same accounting methods from one period to the next, enabling meaningful comparisons over time. If methods change, full disclosure of the change and its impact is mandatory. 

The principle of materiality ensures that all information significant enough to influence an investor’s decision gets disclosed, requiring professional judgment about what qualifies as material.

Other key principles include 

  • prudence, which requires fact-based reporting without speculative assumptions; 
  • continuity, which assumes the company will continue operating for the foreseeable future; and 
  • non-compensation, which prohibits hiding unfavourable items by netting them against favourable ones. 

The principle of regularity demands strict adherence to established standards without selective application based on convenience. 

For Indian professionals accustomed to principles-based Ind AS, these GAAP principles may feel somewhat familiar, but the rules-based nature of US GAAP means these principles manifest in more prescriptive, detailed guidance than you might be used to. 

Recognising this difference in approach helps you adjust your mindset when working across both frameworks.

Key Differences Between US GAAP and Ind AS That Affect Your Work

If you have trained under Indian Accounting Standards or worked extensively with IFRS-based frameworks, you already possess a strong foundation for understanding US GAAP. However, significant differences exist between these frameworks that can materially impact reported financial results. 

For professionals involved in dual reporting, preparing consolidation packages for US parent companies, or reconciling financials between standards, understanding these differences is not optional. Getting them wrong can lead to restatements, audit issues, and damaged credibility with stakeholders who expect accurate US GAAP financials.

The most fundamental difference lies in approach. US GAAP is characterised as rules-based, providing detailed prescriptive guidance for specific situations and transactions. This approach aims to reduce ambiguity and ensure consistent application across companies. 

Ind AS, following its IFRS heritage, is principles-based, establishing broader objectives while allowing more professional judgment in application. Neither approach is inherently superior, but this distinction affects how you research and apply guidance under each framework. Under US GAAP, you will often find specific rules addressing narrow fact patterns; under Ind AS, you may need to apply broader principles and document your reasoning more extensively.

Revenue Recognition and Lease Accounting Variations

Revenue recognition represents one of the most closely watched areas for any company, and while convergence efforts brought US GAAP (ASC 606) and Ind AS 115 closer together, differences remain in detailed application. 

Both standards use a five-step model for recognising revenue from contracts with customers: 

  • identify the contract, 
  • identify performance obligations, 
  • determine transaction price, 
  • allocate price to obligations, and 
  • recognise revenue as obligations are satisfied. 

However, interpretive differences can arise in areas like principal versus agent determinations, licensing arrangements, and variable consideration. When preparing US GAAP financials, you cannot simply assume your Ind AS 115 conclusions automatically apply; each significant contract may require fresh analysis under ASC 606’s specific guidance.

Lease accounting under ASC 842 and Ind AS 116 also shows important variations despite both standards requiring lessees to recognise most leases on the balance sheet. US GAAP maintains a distinction between finance leases and operating leases that affects how expense is recognised over the lease term, with operating leases showing straight-line expense while finance leases show front-loaded interest expense. 

While Ind AS 116 also distinguishes lease types, the classification criteria and measurement details differ in ways that can affect reported figures. For Indian subsidiaries preparing US GAAP reporting packages, lease calculations must specifically follow ASC 842 requirements, not just approximate them based on Ind AS 116 outputs.

Inventory Valuation and Fair Value Measurement Differences

One of the starkest differences between US GAAP and Ind AS relates to inventory costing methods. US GAAP permits the use of LIFO (Last-In, First-Out) inventory valuation, while IFRS and Ind AS prohibit this method entirely. 

Companies using LIFO under US GAAP can report significantly different inventory values and cost of goods sold compared to FIFO or weighted average methods. If you are reconciling between frameworks for an entity that uses LIFO for US purposes, this single difference can create substantial adjustments. Understanding not just that this difference exists but also its directional impact on financials helps you anticipate and explain variances.

Fair value measurement and asset revaluation present another area of divergence. US GAAP generally prohibits upward revaluation of property, plant, equipment, and most other long-lived assets, requiring them to remain at historical cost less accumulated depreciation and any impairment losses. 

Ind AS, following IFRS, permits revaluation of these assets to fair value when certain conditions are met. For Indian entities with significant property holdings or other assets that have appreciated, this difference can result in substantially different balance sheet values between the two frameworks. Similarly, US GAAP requires most research and development costs to be expensed as incurred, while Ind AS allows capitalisation of development costs when specific criteria are met, affecting both reported assets and the timing of expense recognition.

How Do US GAAP Skills Improve Career Opportunities in India?

The career value of US GAAP expertise in India has grown substantially as American companies have expanded their presence and Indian businesses have increased their integration with global capital markets. 

Several factors drive this demand.

First, the sheer number of US multinational corporations operating in India, estimated at over 1,000 companies, creates an ongoing need for finance professionals who can handle American accounting requirements. These companies need local talent who understand US GAAP for everything from day-to-day accounting to complex technical issues. 

Second, Global Capability Centers and shared services operations have proliferated, with companies centralising finance functions in India to serve their global operations, including US GAAP reporting.

Big 4 accounting firms represent another significant employer of GAAP-skilled professionals, with their audit and advisory practices serving multinational clients requiring US GAAP expertise. 

These firms offer excellent training, exposure to complex transactions, and clear career progression for professionals who demonstrate technical proficiency. Additionally, Indian companies listed on US exchanges or those seeking American investors need professionals who can ensure compliance with SEC reporting requirements and navigate the complexities of US GAAP. 

The combination of these factors means that GAAP skills genuinely differentiate you in the Indian job market, opening doors to roles that might otherwise be inaccessible.

Salary Expectations and Top Employers

Compensation for US GAAP-skilled professionals in India reflects the premium that employers place on this expertise. 

Entry-level professionals with basic GAAP training can expect starting salaries in the range of INR 6 to 10 lakhs per annum, varying by employer and location. With a few years of experience and demonstrated competence, mid-career professionals typically earn between INR 12 and 20 lakhs annually. 

Those who combine GAAP knowledge with certifications like the US CPA often command salaries 40 to 60 percent higher than non-certified counterparts in comparable roles. 

Senior professionals with extensive GAAP experience can earn INR 25 lakhs or more, with finance controllers and directors at multinational subsidiaries sometimes reaching INR 40 to 50 lakhs.

Top employers of GAAP-skilled professionals include Big 4 firms (Deloitte, PwC, EY, KPMG), which actively recruit for positions serving US-headquartered clients. Fortune 500 subsidiaries and their Global Capability Centers, including companies like Amazon, Microsoft, Google, Cisco, and numerous others, represent significant employment opportunities in cities like Bangalore, Hyderabad, Pune, and Gurgaon. 

Shared services centers handling finance operations for US companies, Indian companies with US listings or American investor relationships, and boutique advisory firms specialising in cross-border transactions also seek GAAP expertise. 

Metropolitan areas, particularly Mumbai and Bangalore, typically offer 10 to 20 percent higher compensation than other locations due to the concentration of MNCs and higher living costs.

Certification Pathways Worth Considering

While practical experience builds GAAP skills over time, formal certification provides external validation of your expertise and can accelerate career advancement significantly. 

The US CPA (Certified Public Accountant) credential stands as the most recognised certification for American accounting knowledge, covering US GAAP extensively in its Financial Accounting and Reporting section, along with audit, tax, and business environment topics. 

For Indian candidates, earning the CPA requires meeting education requirements that vary by state, passing four rigorous exam sections, and fulfilling experience requirements. The total investment typically runs INR 3 to 5 lakhs, including exam fees, review courses, and credential evaluation, with most candidates requiring 12 to 18 months of dedicated study.

Alternative certifications can also demonstrate GAAP proficiency without the full CPA commitment. The AICPA offers certificate programs focused on specific areas, including financial statement preparation. 

When choosing your path, consider your career goals, available time, and investment capacity. For professionals seeking maximum career impact and international recognition, the CPA remains the gold standard, while shorter programs can provide a useful starting point for those earlier in their GAAP learning journey.

Conclusion

US GAAP knowledge has transitioned from a niche specialisation to a mainstream career asset for Indian finance professionals. Whether you work directly with American companies, serve multinational clients at an accounting firm, or simply want to expand your career options, understanding these standards positions you for opportunities that offer higher compensation and more interesting work. 

The differences between US GAAP and Ind AS, while manageable, require attention and expertise that employers increasingly value. By investing in GAAP knowledge through self-study, practical experience, or formal certification, you are investing in a skill set that will remain relevant as India’s integration with global business continues to deepen. Take the next step by exploring certification options, seeking roles that expose you to US GAAP reporting, or simply continuing to build your understanding of these important standards.

If you want to learn more about US GAAP, read my article on the US GAAP: The Complete Guide

Download Now

Previous Year Papers for UGC NET LAW

0
Previous year papers for UGC NET Law

Access UGC NET Law previous year papers with direct PDF links. Learn which 4 units contribute 50% of questions and prepare strategically with limited time. This article is written by Urvi Shah, Senior Associate at LawSikho.

Let’s cut to the chase: you’re short on time, you’ve got a UGC NET Law exam coming up, and you need results fast.

Here’s what you actually need: direct access to previous year papers, and one game changing insight: just four units contribute nearly 50% of your Paper II questions.

That’s right. Half your score comes from strategic focus, not from trying to master everything in the syllabus. This guide shows you exactly which topics matter, where to find authentic previous year papers, and how to practice efficiently when time isn’t on your side.

Ready? Let’s dive in.

Why UGC NET Law Previous Year Papers Are Your Best Preparation Tool?

Previous year papers are not just practice material; they are your window into how NTA thinks about testing Law aspirants. The official syllabus lists 10 units covering everything from Jurisprudence to Comparative Public Law, but the exam does not treat these units equally. 

Some topics appear with clockwork regularity while others barely get attention. Understanding these patterns transforms your preparation from scattered effort into focused strategy.

The Pattern Recognition Advantage Every Aspirant Needs

When you analyze even three years of UGC NET Law papers systematically, clear patterns emerge that textbook study alone cannot reveal. 

Fundamental Rights questions under Constitutional Law appear in every single exam session. Schools of Jurisprudence distinctions show up without fail. General principles of criminal liability form a reliable question source. 

These are not random observations; they reflect NTA’s consistent testing preferences that have remained stable across exam cycles.

The practical implication is significant: if you master these recurring topics thoroughly, you secure a baseline score regardless of what specific questions appear in your exam. 

Candidates who prepare without pattern awareness often spread themselves thin across all topics, achieving mediocre knowledge everywhere instead of strong command over high frequency areas. 

Pattern recognition through previous year question analysis prevents this common mistake.

How to Use PYQs to Prioritize UGC NET Law Syllabus?

The UGC NET Law syllabus is genuinely overwhelming if you approach it as a checklist requiring equal attention everywhere. 

Constitutional Law alone covers everything from Preamble interpretation to emergency provisions. Jurisprudence spans ancient natural law theory to contemporary legal realism. Criminal Law includes both IPC/BNS provisions and the procedural framework under CrPC/BNSS. Attempting comprehensive coverage of everything is a recipe for burnout without corresponding exam success.

Previous year papers solve this problem by showing you where to focus. 

Constitutional Law’s 15 to 18 questions per exam justify spending significantly more time on it than Comparative Public Law’s 4 to 6 questions. Within Constitutional Law, Fundamental Rights and Basic Structure Doctrine appear far more frequently than detailed emergency provisions. 

This granular insight allows you to prioritize ruthlessly, covering high frequency sub topics thoroughly while maintaining only basic familiarity with peripheral areas.

Download UGC NET Law Previous Year Papers

Accessing authentic previous year papers should be your first preparation step. The links below provide direct access to papers organized by year, allowing you to download what you need without navigating complex websites. 

Use official NTA sources when possible, supplemented by trusted third party platforms for older papers.

Visit the official UGC NET website and look for the “Previous Year Question Papers” or “Downloads” section on the homepage. The interface may change periodically, but the download section typically remains accessible from the main navigation menu. Papers are usually available in PDF format, organized by exam cycle and subject.

Alternative Sources for Previous Year Questions

While official NTA sources should be your primary resource, there are third party platforms that provide organized collections of previous year papers with added features like solutions and topic wise sorting.

When using third party sources, verify paper authenticity by cross checking a few questions against official NTA releases. 

Recent Papers 

Recent papers from 2020 onwards follow the current exam pattern and provide the most relevant practice material. These papers reflect contemporary question framing styles and topic emphasis that you can expect in upcoming exams.

June 2025: Available on the official NTA website under the previous year papers section, while the December 2025: Exam scheduled for 31 December 2025 to 7 January 2026; papers will be available post exam.

Both June 2024 and December 2024 sessions are accessible on the NTA portal with answer keys for Shift 1 and Shift 2. 

The 2023 papers (June and December) show increased emphasis on recent legal reforms including consumer protection updates; the 2022 papers mark the post COVID exam resumption when the pattern stabilized after pandemic-related disruptions. 

While 2021 papers were limited due to pandemic sessions, they remain useful for pattern understanding, and the 2020 papers serve as a good baseline for understanding established question patterns as they were the last pre-pandemic papers following the current format.

For all recent papers, visit the official NTA UGC NET portal and navigate to the downloads section. Select Law as your subject, choose the specific year and session and download both Paper I and Paper II PDFs.

Older Papers for Comprehensive Practice

Papers from 2015 to June 2018 followed the old three paper format, which included separate subject specific Paper II (50 questions) and Paper III (75 questions) alongside Paper I, but the major shift to the current two paper structure merging the old Paper II and III into a single 100 question Paper II, began with the July 2018 exam. 

Despite these format differences, papers from this period remain highly valuable for practicing conceptual questions, as the core legal principles tested have not changed substantially.

The 2019 papers mark the full transition to the current combined structure and are directly comparable, while 2018 introduced the initial merged format, making it key for understanding the pattern evolution, and pre 2018 papers follow the old three paper system (with separate subject components) but are easily accessible via platforms like JRF Adda (often with Google Drive links).

For older papers, third party platforms like Testbook and JRF Adda maintain organized archives going back to 2009. While these platforms are reliable, cross check a few questions against any available official sources to verify authenticity.

UGC NET Law Paper: Important Units Preparation

Not all 10 units of UGC NET Law Paper II deserve equal preparation time. Analysis of previous year papers reveals that four units consistently contribute nearly half of all questions. 

Focusing your limited time on these high weightage units maximizes your scoring potential without requiring exhaustive coverage of every syllabus corner.

Constitutional Law and Jurisprudence: The Scoring Foundation

Constitutional and Administrative Law stands as the undisputed heavyweight, contributing 15 to 18 questions in virtually every exam session. This single unit can yield 30 to 36 marks from Paper II’s total of 200. 

Jurisprudence follows closely with 8 to 12 questions per exam. Together, these two units represent approximately 25 to 30 questions, making them your non negotiable preparation priorities.

Within Constitutional Law, certain topics repeat with remarkable consistency. Fundamental Rights interpretation, particularly the judicial expansion of Article 21 from mere right to life toward encompassing dignity, privacy, and livelihood, generates multiple questions per exam. 

The Basic Structure Doctrine established in Kesavananda Bharati and refined through subsequent cases appears without exception. Administrative law principles, especially natural justice requirements and judicial review grounds, complete the Constitutional Law core.

Jurisprudence questions predictably test Schools of Jurisprudence distinctions. Can you explain how Natural Law theory differs from Legal Positivism? Do you understand Austin’s Command Theory, Hart’s Rule of Recognition, and Kelsen’s Pure Theory? These foundational contrasts appear in every exam. Hohfeld’s analytical framework distinguishing rights, duties, privileges, and powers generates reliable questions testing whether you understand correlative legal relations.

The strategic implication is clear: if you master Constitutional Law and Jurisprudence thoroughly, you establish a scoring foundation of potentially 50 to 60 marks before touching other units. For time pressed candidates, this focus delivers maximum return on preparation investment.

Criminal Law and Family Law: Consistent Contributors

Criminal Law contributes 10 to 14 questions per exam, while Family Law adds another 8 to 12 questions. These two units together represent approximately 20 to 25 questions, making them your second tier priorities after Constitutional Law and Jurisprudence.

Criminal Law questions focus heavily on general principles rather than specific offence definitions. Actus reus and mens rea requirements, the stages of crime from intention through preparation and attempt to commission, and general exceptions under IPC Chapter IV appear consistently. Joint liability under Section 34 IPC (common intention) versus Section 149  IPC (unlawful assembly) distinctions appear consistently, testing whether you understand when each provision applies.

With the Bharatiya Nyaya Sanhita replacing the Indian Penal Code from July 2024, familiarize yourself with corresponding BNS section numbers for core principles. While underlying concepts remain unchanged, questions may reference new section numbers. The introduction of terrorism as a specific offence under BNS Section 113 represents one substantive change worth noting.

Family Law questions concentrate on Hindu Marriage Act provisions and Muslim Personal Law essentials. Valid marriage conditions under Section 5, divorce grounds under Section 13, and the distinction between mutual consent divorce and contested divorce form Hindu Law core topics. 

Hindu Succession Act questions focus on the 2005 Amendment granting daughters equal coparcenary rights in joint family property. The distinction between the Mitakshara and Dayabhaga schools and their succession implications, though less practically relevant post amendment, continues appearing in exam questions testing historical understanding.

For Muslim Law, understand talaq forms and their current validity following the 2019 Act criminalizing triple talaq. Succession basics under both systems, particularly the 2005 Amendment granting daughters equal coparcenary rights, complete essential Family Law preparation.

Across personal law systems, certain topics appear with high frequency. Maintenance provisions under Section 125  CrPC (now BNSS) versus personal law maintenance rights, particularly for Muslim women post the Shah Bano controversy and subsequent legislation, generate regular questions. 

Guardianship and custody principles, including the welfare of the child doctrine and distinctions between natural and testamentary guardianship, complete high frequency Family Law topics.

Contract Law Fundamentals

Offer, acceptance, consideration, and capacity as formation elements require a thorough understanding. Free consent vitiating factors under Sections 13 to 22 of the Contract Act, particularly coercion, undue influence, and misrepresentation distinctions, generate regular questions. Discharge of contracts and remedies for breach, especially damages calculation principles, complete Contract Law essentials.

Environmental Law Principles

The Environment Protection Act 1986 is umbrella legislation, and its relationship with specific pollution control Acts requires understanding. 

The precautionary principle, polluter pays principle, and sustainable development, as recognized in Indian jurisprudence, form the conceptual core. Public trust doctrine and its application in environmental cases represent an additional important area.

IPR Basics

Copyright subsistence and duration, patent validity criteria and exclusions under Sections 3 and 4 of the Patents Act 1970, and trademark registration and infringement basics represent the IPR core. The distinction between copyright, economic rights, and moral rights, and passing off action elements, is completely essential. Avoid excessive detail on procedural aspects.

Comparative Public Law

Indian Constitution comparisons with the US and UK systems, particularly regarding judicial review, federalism, and fundamental rights, form the tested core. Presidential versus parliamentary system distinctions and separation of powers implementation across jurisdictions complete Comparative Law essentials. Focus on broad structural comparisons rather than detailed foreign law provisions.

Smart Strategy to Crack UGC NET Law Using Previous Year Papers

Having papers is one thing; using them effectively is another. The strategies below are designed specifically for candidates balancing preparation with other responsibilities. These approaches maximize learning from each practice session without requiring unlimited study hours.

Time Saving Approach for Working Professionals

If you are juggling preparation with a job or final semester coursework, you cannot afford the luxury of solving papers randomly and hoping insights emerge. Instead, adopt a targeted approach that extracts maximum value from limited practice time.

Start with topic wise practice rather than full papers. Gather all Constitutional Law questions from the last three years and solve them in a single focused session. This concentrated approach reveals patterns that scattered paper by paper solving misses. 

You will notice that Fundamental Rights questions follow predictable formats, Basic Structure questions use similar framing, and administrative law questions test consistent principles. Complete this topic wise practice for your four priority units before attempting full papers.

When you do attempt full papers, simulate exam conditions strictly. Allocate 180 minutes for 150 questions combined (Paper I plus Paper II), sit without breaks or distractions, and resist the temptation to check answers mid paper. 

This simulation builds exam stamina that pure content study cannot develop. Even one properly simulated paper per week provides more preparation value than five casual attempts with constant interruptions.

For daily micro practice, solve 10 to 15 questions from a single unit during commute time, lunch breaks, or evening gaps. Use mobile friendly platforms or printed question sets that allow quick practice without extensive setup. 

These brief sessions maintain preparation momentum without requiring dedicated study blocks that your schedule may not accommodate.

Error Analysis and Revise Only High Weightage Topics

Every incorrect answer during practice represents a learning opportunity, but not all errors deserve equal attention. Develop a system for categorizing and addressing mistakes based on their source and the topic’s weightage.

For errors in high weightage topics like Constitutional Law or Jurisprudence, invest time in thorough remediation. Identify whether the mistake stemmed from conceptual gaps, careless reading, or unfamiliar question framing. 

Conceptual gaps require focused study of the underlying principle. Careless reading errors need awareness building through slower, more deliberate practice. Unfamiliar framing simply requires exposure to more question variations.

For errors in lower weightage topics like Comparative Public Law or IPR basics, note the correct answer and move on without deep analysis. The time spent mastering peripheral topics yields diminishing returns compared to strengthening high frequency areas. 

Accept that you may lose a few marks in low-weightage units while securing significantly more from thorough high weightage preparation.

Track your unit wise accuracy across practice sessions. If Constitutional Law accuracy remains below 70% despite focused preparation, that area needs additional attention. If Comparative Public Law accuracy is 50% but you are scoring 80% in Constitutional Law, your time is better spent reinforcing Constitutional Law strength than chasing Comparative Law improvement. 

Data driven decisions prevent emotional attachment to topics that interest you but contribute minimally to your score.

Common UGC NET Law Preparation Mistakes

Awareness of typical preparation pitfalls helps you avoid errors that undermine otherwise solid effort. These mistakes are especially common among first time UGC NET candidates and working professionals unfamiliar with competitive exam dynamics.

Treating All 10 Units as Equally Important

The most damaging preparation mistake is allocating equal time across all 10 Law units despite vastly different question contributions. Constitutional Law’s 15 to 18 questions merit significantly more preparation than Comparative Public Law’s 4 to 6 questions. Yet many candidates, following the syllabus linearly, spend similar time on each unit.

The mathematics are straightforward: if you have 300 total preparation hours, spending 30 hours per unit gives Comparative Public Law the same attention as Constitutional Law. This equal distribution ignores that Constitutional Law alone could contribute more marks than three lower-weightage units combined. 

A more strategic allocation might dedicate 60 hours to Constitutional Law, 40 hours to Criminal Law, 30 hours to Jurisprudence, and proportionally less to peripheral units.

This does not mean ignoring low weightage units entirely. Even Comparative Public Law’s 4 to 6 questions can determine borderline qualification. The goal is basic competency in peripheral areas and thorough mastery of high frequency topics, not comprehensive excellence everywhere that your available time cannot support.

Solving Without Tracking Performance Patterns

Many candidates solve previous year papers without systematic tracking, treating each practice session as isolated rather than cumulative. They complete a paper, check the score, feel good or bad about the result, and move to the next paper without extracting actionable insights.

Effective practice requires tracking unit wise accuracy, identifying recurring error patterns, and measuring improvement over time. Create a simple spreadsheet noting your score in each unit for every paper attempted. 

After five papers, clear patterns emerge: perhaps Constitutional Law accuracy is consistently strong while Family Law remains weak. Without tracking, this pattern remains invisible, and preparation efforts scatter rather than concentrate where improvement is most needed.

Similarly, track the types of errors you make. Are you losing marks primarily to conceptual gaps, careless mistakes, or time pressure? Each error type requires different remediation. Conceptual gaps need focused study. Careless mistakes need deliberate, slower practice. 

Time pressure errors suggest the need for better time management strategy rather than more content knowledge. Without tracking, you cannot diagnose which intervention your preparation actually needs.

Conclusion

Strategic previous year question practice separates candidates who qualify UGC NET Law from those who repeatedly fall short despite sincere effort. The pattern is clear: Constitutional Law and Jurisprudence together contribute approximately 25 to 30 questions, while Criminal Law and Family Law add another 20 to 25 questions. 

These four units alone determine nearly half your Paper II score. Download the papers using the links provided, focus your limited time on high weightage units, track your performance systematically, and approach each practice session with strategic intent rather than passive repetition. 

Your path to UGC NET Law qualification becomes significantly clearer when you prepare smarter, not just harder.

For a detailed guide on UGC NET Law Previous Year Papers, you can click here

Download Now

Who Can Apply for UGC NET

0
Who can apply for UGC NET Exam

Quick guide covering educational qualifications, age limits for JRF, State vs Central OBC rules, subject selection for Law and Commerce graduates, and common mistakes to avoid. This article is written by Urvi Shah, Senior Associate at LawSikho.

Table of Contents

Stop right there. Before you spend the next six months preparing for UGC NET, before you buy expensive books or join coaching classes, answer one simple question: are you actually eligible to sit for this exam?

Every year, thousands of candidates discover too late that their application was never valid. Some assumed their LLB degree qualified them for UGC NET Law. Others used a state OBC certificate when only the Central list works. A few missed the 55% mark requirement by a decimal point.

Understanding eligibility now saves you from costly mistakes later. This guide cuts through the confusion and tells you exactly who can apply, who cannot, and what documents you need to prove it.

UGC NET Eligibility Check: Are You Qualified To Apply?

Before diving into detailed criteria, let’s establish whether you meet the basic requirements. UGC NET isn’t just about scoring well; it has strict eligibility gates that determine whether you can even appear for the examination. 

The National Testing Agency doesn’t verify your eligibility when you submit your application. They check later, and if they find any discrepancy, your results get cancelled even after you’ve qualified.

60 Second Eligibility Test

Here’s a quick self assessment. 

Do you have a Master’s degree with at least 55% marks (or 50% if you belong to SC/ST/OBC NCL/PwD/Third Gender category)? 

Are you under 30 years old if you want JRF, or any age if you only want Assistant Professor eligibility? 

Is your postgraduate subject available in the UGC NET subject list of 85 disciplines? 

If you’re claiming OBC reservation, is your community in the Central OBC list at ncbc.nic.in

If you answered yes to all relevant questions, you’re likely eligible. If any answer was no or uncertain, read on carefully.

Three Qualification Categories: JRF, Assistant Professor and PhD

UGC NET offers three distinct qualification pathways, each with different outcomes. The first category, JRF plus Assistant Professor, is the highest level. Qualify here and you receive a monthly fellowship of ₹37,000 for the first two years, increasing to ₹42,000 thereafter, plus automatic eligibility for teaching positions and PhD admission. This requires the highest scores and has an age limit of 30 years.

The second category grants Assistant Professor eligibility plus PhD admission without fellowship benefits. You can apply for teaching positions across India but won’t receive any stipend for research. 

There’s no age limit here. The third category, introduced recently, is PhD Admission Only, designed for candidates who want doctoral admission without teaching eligibility. Choose your category wisely during application because it determines what benefits you can claim upon qualifying.

Who is Eligible to Apply for UGC NET?

The foundation of UGC NET eligibility rests on your educational qualifications. These requirements are non negotiable and applied without any rounding off or approximation.

Educational Qualification Requirements

General and EWS category candidates need a Master’s degree with minimum 55% marks from a UGC recognised university. Reserved category candidates, including OBC Non Creamy Layer, SC, ST, PwD, and Third Gender, need 50% marks.

The critical detail here is “without rounding off.” If your mark sheet shows 54.8%, you don’t meet the 55% threshold. NTA applies these percentages exactly as they appear on your official documents.

Your Master’s degree must be in a subject covered under the UGC NET subject list, which spans 85 disciplines from Humanities to Sciences to Professional subjects like Law and Commerce. 

For reserved categories claiming 50% eligibility, remember that OBC means OBC Non Creamy Layer as per the Central list, not your state government’s list. This distinction trips up thousands of applicants every cycle.

Can Final Year Students Apply for UGC NET?

Yes, candidates appearing for their final Master’s examination or awaiting results can apply on a provisional basis. This allows you to attempt UGC NET while completing your degree, saving valuable time. However, provisional eligibility comes with strict deadlines you must honour.

Two Year Completion Rule for JRF and Assistant Professor

If you qualify for JRF or Assistant Professor eligibility while your degree is pending, you must complete your Master’s with the required percentage within two years from the NET result date. 

Miss this deadline and your qualification becomes invalid. You would need to appear for UGC NET again after completing your degree, having lost both the earlier qualification and the time invested.

One Year Rule for PhD Admission Only

Candidates qualifying under PhD Admission Only face an even tighter deadline of one year to complete their Master’s degree. This shorter window aligns with annual PhD admission cycles at universities. 

If you’re applying provisionally with only PhD admission as your goal, ensure you can realistically finish your degree within twelve months of the result.

Can You Apply for UGC NET with a 4 Year Bachelor’s Degree Without a Master’s?

Under UGC Regulations 2022 aligned with the National Education Policy 2020, candidates with 4 year bachelor’s degrees can now appear for UGC NET without a Master’s degree. This pathway offers unique flexibility in subject selection but comes with important limitations.

75% Marks Requirement

Four-year degree holders need minimum 75% marks in aggregate, significantly higher than the 55% required from Master’s degree holders. Reserved category candidates get relaxation to 70%. 

This higher threshold reflects the expectation of exceptional academic performance for direct research eligibility without postgraduate qualification.

Not Eligible for Assistant Professor Posts

Here’s the crucial limitation: qualifying UGC NET based on a 4 year bachelor’s degree makes you eligible only for JRF and PhD admission, not for Assistant Professor positions. If teaching is your goal, you will eventually need a Master’s degree regardless of your NET qualification. 

This pathway suits candidates focused purely on research careers who want to begin doctoral work without completing traditional postgraduation.

Which UGC NET Subject Can You Apply For?

Subject selection causes significant confusion, especially for graduates in professional disciplines like Law and Commerce. 

The general rule is straightforward: appear in the subject of your postgraduation. But what if your exact subject isn’t listed, or what if you want to try a different discipline?

Law Aspirants: Why LLM Is Mandatory for UGC NET Law

This is the most common eligibility mistake among law graduates. An LLB degree, whether 3 year or 5 year integrated, does not qualify you for UGC NET Law

The reason is simple: LLB is an undergraduate professional degree, not a postgraduate qualification. UGC NET requires a Master’s degree, and for Law (Subject Code 58), that means LLM.

Many candidates assume the 5 year integrated LLB equals a postgraduate degree because of its duration. It doesn’t. You must complete LLM with minimum 55% marks (50% for reserved categories) before applying for UGC NET Law. 

Any LLM specialization works, whether Constitutional Law, Corporate Law, Criminal Law, or Intellectual Property. The specialization doesn’t matter; having an LLM does.

Commerce and Management Graduates: Your Options

Commerce graduates with M.Com should apply for Commerce (Subject Code 08), which covers Accounting, Auditing, Business Law, and related areas. MBA graduates, however, face a choice. Your MBA specialization determines whether Management (Code 17) or Human Resource Management (Code 55) suits you better. MBA holders can technically apply for Commerce, but the syllabus aligns more closely with M.Com coursework. Review both syllabi before deciding.

The key principle is academic alignment. Choosing a subject for perceived easier competition rather than genuine qualification risks rejection during verification. Stick to subjects where your postgraduate coursework provides genuine foundation.

Age Limit for UGC NET

Age restrictions apply primarily to JRF eligibility. Understanding these limits and available relaxations helps you plan your examination attempts strategically.

JRF Age Limit and Relaxations

The baseline requirement for Junior Research Fellowship is 30 years maximum age. This is calculated as on the first day of the month in which the examination concludes. For instance for the December 2025, the reference date is 1st December 2025. Born on 2nd December 1995? You’re 29 and eligible. Born on 30th November 1995? You’ve crossed 30 and need relaxation.

Reserved categories receive 5 years relaxation, extending eligibility to 35 years. This applies to SC, ST, OBC NCL, PwD, and Third Gender candidates. All women candidates, regardless of category, also get 5 years relaxation. LLM holders receive an additional 3 years, acknowledging the longer educational pathway in law. Research experience holders and defence personnel can claim up to 5 years based on their service period.

Assistant Professor: No Age Barrier

Excellent news for working professionals and career changers: there is no upper age limit for Assistant Professor eligibility through UGC NET. Whether you’re 25, 45, or 60, you can appear and qualify for teaching positions. This makes UGC NET accessible to anyone considering academic careers at any life stage.

PhD Admission Through UGC NET

Similarly, there’s no age restriction for PhD admission eligibility. Candidates of any age can qualify and use their NET scores for doctoral programme admissions across Indian universities.

Can Age Relaxations Be Combined?

Here’s the rule many candidates miss: total relaxation from all grounds cannot exceed 5 years. You cannot add 5 years for being SC plus 5 years for being a woman plus 3 years for holding LLM to claim 13 years total relaxation. Even if you qualify under multiple categories, the maximum combined relaxation remains capped at 5 years. Plan your attempts accordingly.

State OBC vs Central OBC: Mistake That Causes Application Rejection

This single issue causes more eligibility rejections than almost any other factor. Understanding the distinction between State OBC and Central OBC lists is absolutely critical for reservation candidates.

Why are State OBC Certificates not Valid for UGC NET?

India maintains two separate OBC lists: State lists managed by individual state governments, and a Central list maintained by the National Commission for Backward Classes. These lists are not identical. 

A community included in your state’s OBC list may or may not appear in the Central list. UGC NET is a national examination, so only the Central list applies.

Your state issued OBC certificate proves your community’s status in the state list. But for UGC NET eligibility, your community must appear in the Central list. If it doesn’t, you must apply under General category, need 55% marks, and compete under unreserved cutoffs. Many candidates discover this mismatch only after investing months in preparation.

How to Verify If Your Caste Is in the Central OBC List

Before applying under OBC category, verify your community’s presence in the Central list. Don’t assume or rely on general knowledge. Check directly from the official source.

NCBC Portal Verification Process

Visit the National Commission for Backward Classes website and navigate to “Central List of OBCs.” Select your state from the dropdown menu. The portal displays all communities included in the Central OBC list for that state. 

Search for your community name exactly as it appears in your caste certificate, noting that spelling variations matter.

If your community appears, you can claim OBC NCL benefits for UGC NET. If it doesn’t, apply under General category regardless of what your state certificate says. This verification takes five minutes but saves you from potential disqualification.

What to Do If Your Community Is Not in the Central OBC List?

If your community appears in your state’s OBC list but not in the Central list, you have two options. 

First, apply under the General category for UGC NET, which means you need 55% marks in your Master’s degree and will compete under General category cutoffs. 

Second, if you believe your community should be in the Central list, you can approach NCBC to check if inclusion is pending or under consideration. 

However, for the current examination cycle, you must apply based on the list as it exists at the time of application.

OBC NCL Certificate for UGC NET: Income Criteria and Financial Year Requirement

The “NCL” in OBC NCL stands for Non Creamy Layer, which has specific income criteria. Your family’s gross annual income must not exceed ₹8 lakh as per current norms. The certificate must be issued based on income for the financial year immediately preceding the year of application. 

Certificates older than one year from the date of application are generally not accepted. Always check the specific validity requirements in the current notification.

Key Exemptions in UGC NET Eligibility

Certain candidates don’t need UGC NET at all for Assistant Professor positions. Knowing these exemptions helps you understand whether appearing for NET is necessary for your specific situation.

PhD Holders Under UGC 2022 Regulations

Candidates with PhD awarded under UGC (Minimum Standards and Procedures for Award of Ph.D. Degree) Regulations, 2022 are exempted from NET/SET for Assistant Professor recruitment. 

The rigorous doctoral training under these standards is considered adequate preparation for academic positions. However, this exemption covers only teaching eligibility, not JRF benefits.

SET/SLET Qualified Candidates: Date Based Rules

State Eligibility Tests offer an alternative pathway, but their validity depends critically on when you cleared the exam.

Before June 1, 2002: Valid Anywhere in India

SET cleared before 1st June 2002 is treated as equivalent to UGC NET without geographical restriction. You can apply for Assistant Professor positions anywhere in India based on this qualification.

After June 1, 2002: State Specific Validity

SET cleared from 1st June 2002 onwards is valid only within the state where you passed. Cleared Maharashtra SET after June 2002? You can teach in Maharashtra institutions only. For positions in other states, you need UGC NET. This distinction matters significantly for candidates planning inter-state career mobility.

When is UGC NET Not Required for Assistant Professor?

Beyond PhD holders and SET qualified candidates, those who passed UGC/CSIR JRF before 1989 are also exempted. This historical provision affects very few current candidates but remains in official guidelines. 

For everyone else, NET or SET qualification is mandatory for Assistant Professor positions in universities and colleges.

Distance Education and Foreign Degree Holders

Distance education degrees from UGC recognised universities are valid for UGC NET. IGNOU, state open universities, and distance programmes from conventional universities all qualify, provided the institution holds UGC recognition. 

Verify recognition status on the UGC website if uncertain.

Foreign degree holders must obtain an equivalence certificate from the Association of Indian Universities (AIU) confirming their qualification equals an Indian Master’s degree. 

Without AIU equivalence, foreign qualifications don’t establish UGC NET eligibility. Start this process well in advance as it takes 10 to 30 days.

Post Graduate Diploma Holders

PG Diploma holders are generally not eligible unless AIU has granted equivalence to their specific diploma. Some premier institutions like IIMs award 2 year PG diplomas that have received AIU equivalence, making those graduates eligible. 

Check the AIU equivalence list to verify if your diploma qualifies before applying.

Common UGC NET Eligibility Mistakes to Avoid

Based on analysis of rejection patterns, these four mistakes cause maximum eligibility problems. Avoiding them protects your preparation investment.

Percentage Calculation Errors

Candidates frequently round off their percentages, assuming 54.6% qualifies as 55%. It doesn’t. 

UGC NET requires exact percentages without rounding. If your official mark sheet shows anything below 55.0% for General category or 50.0% for reserved categories, you don’t meet the threshold. 

Calculate your aggregate exactly as it appears on documents.

Using State OBC Certificate Instead of Central

As discussed earlier, state OBC certificates don’t automatically work for UGC NET. Your community must appear in the Central list maintained by NCBC. 

Using a state certificate when your community isn’t in the Central list leads to rejection of reservation claims or disqualification during verification.

Document Discrepancies

Name variations across documents, like “Rahul Sharma” in the Class 10 certificate but “Rahul Kumar Sharma” in the Master’s degree, create verification problems. 

Similarly, date of birth mismatches, even by a single day, can cause issues. Ensure consistency across all your academic and identity documents before applying.

Subject Mismatch Between Degree and Application

Appearing for a subject unrelated to your postgraduation creates verification problems. Some candidates choose subjects based on perceived easier competition rather than academic alignment. 

The notification clearly states candidates should appear in their postgraduate subject. Choosing an unrelated discipline risks rejection even if you score well.

Missing the Degree Completion Deadline

Provisionally eligible candidates who qualify NET but don’t complete their degree within the stipulated timeframe, two years for JRF and Assistant Professor or one year for PhD only, automatically lose their qualification. 

Your NET certificate becomes invalid, requiring you to appear again after degree completion. Track these deadlines carefully if applying while your results are pending.

Conclusion

UGC NET eligibility isn’t complicated once you understand the key parameters. You need a Master’s degree with 55% marks for General/EWS or 50% for reserved categories. JRF requires being under 30 years with specified relaxations. 

Your subject must align with your postgraduation. OBC candidates must verify Central list status, not rely on state certificates.

Verify every eligibility criterion against the official NTA Information Bulletin before investing in preparation. Remember, NTA doesn’t check eligibility during application; that responsibility is entirely yours. 

Getting it right from the start means your months of preparation translate into a valid qualification that opens doors to academic careers across India.

If you want to read a more detailed guide on the UGC NET eligibility criteria, you can read here

Download Now

One Person Company Registration in India

0
One Person Company Registration in India

One Person Company registration in India allows solo entrepreneurs to incorporate with single ownership and limited liability. Learn OPC eligibility, SPICe+ registration process, 2021 amendments, and compliance requirements in this guide. This article is written by Urvi Shah, Senior Associate at LawSikho.

Ever dreamed of running your own company but don’t want the hassle of finding partners or shareholders?

If you’re a solo entrepreneur in India, you’re in luck. 

The One Person Company (OPC) structure lets you enjoy all the benefits of running a corporate entity, limited liability, separate legal status, and credibility with clients without needing anyone else on board. It’s just you, your vision, and complete control over your business.

Introduced under the Companies Act, 2013, and made even better with the 2021 Budget amendments, OPCs have become the go to choice for ambitious individuals who want to formalize their business ideas without the complications of traditional company structures. 

Whether you’re a law student exploring entrepreneurship, a working professional ready to launch your startup, or an NRI looking to establish your Indian business presence, this guide walks you through everything you need to know about OPC registration, compliance, and why it might be the perfect fit for your entrepreneurial journey.

Understanding One Person Company Under Section 2(62) of the Companies Act, 2013

If you have ever wondered whether you can start a company all by yourself in India, the answer is yes. The One Person Company, defined under Section 2(62) of the Companies Act, 2013, is exactly what it sounds like: a company with only one person as its member. 

Before 2013, Indian law required at least two shareholders to incorporate a private company, which forced many solo entrepreneurs to bring in sleeping partners or family members just to meet legal requirements. 

The OPC structure changed this by recognizing that a single individual should be able to enjoy corporate benefits without artificial partnerships.

The concept was first recommended by the JJ Irani Expert Committee in 2005, which observed that small entrepreneurs in India faced a difficult choice between the informality of sole proprietorship and the partner requirement of private companies. 

The Committee suggested introducing a single member company form to encourage formalization of small businesses. When the Companies Act, 2013, came into force, Section 2(62) made this recommendation a reality. Today, thousands of entrepreneurs across India operate through OPCs, enjoying limited liability and corporate credibility while maintaining complete control over their ventures.

Key Features of One Person Company

The OPC structure comes with several distinctive features that make it attractive for solo entrepreneurs. Understanding these features helps you evaluate whether OPC is the right choice for your business plans.

The most significant feature is single ownership combined with limited liability. As the sole member, you own 100% of the company and make all decisions independently. 

At the same time, your personal liability is limited to the amount you have invested in the company’s shares. If the business fails or faces legal claims, your personal assets, like your house, car, or savings, remain protected (except in cases of fraud). This combination of complete control and liability protection is something a sole proprietorship cannot offer.

Another important feature is a separate legal entity status. Your OPC is legally distinct from you as an individual. The company can own property in its own name, enter into  contracts, sue others, and be sued. 

This separation means that business dealings are in the company’s name rather than your personal name, which often enhances credibility with clients, vendors, and financial institutions. Banks are generally more willing to extend credit facilities to a company than to an individual operating informally.

The nominee mechanism ensures perpetual succession, which is a corporate feature typically absent in sole proprietorships. When you incorporate an OPC, you must appoint a nominee who will become the member if something happens to you. 

This ensures that your business can continue even after your death or incapacity, protecting the interests of employees, creditors, and other stakeholders. The nominee steps into your shoes automatically, avoiding the uncertainties of inheritance disputes or business dissolution.

Finally, OPCs enjoy relaxed compliance requirements compared to regular private companies. You are exempt from holding Annual General Meetings, need only two board meetings per year instead of four, and can file simplified annual returns. 

These exemptions reduce the compliance burden and associated costs, making OPC more manageable for individuals without dedicated compliance teams.

One Person Company: MCA Amendments in 2021

The Union Budget 2021 brought transformative changes to the OPC framework through the Companies (Incorporation) Second Amendment Rules, 2021, effective from April 1, 2021. These amendments addressed several pain points that had limited OPC’s attractiveness since 2013.

The first major change was enabling Non Resident Indians to incorporate OPCs. Before the amendment, only Indian citizens residing in India could form OPCs, which excluded millions of NRIs interested in starting businesses in India. 

Now, any Indian citizen, whether residing in India or abroad, can incorporate an OPC. This opened significant opportunities for the Indian diaspora to formalize their India based business activities.

The second change was the removal of mandatory conversion thresholds. Earlier, if your OPC’s paid up capital exceeded Rs. 50 lakhs or annual turnover crossed Rs.2 crores, you were forced to convert to a regular private limited company within six months. 

This was a significant constraint because successful businesses would inevitably outgrow these limits. 

The 2021 amendment completely removed these thresholds, allowing OPCs to grow without forced conversion. You can now scale your OPC to any size and convert voluntarily only when you choose to do so.

The third change reduced the residency requirement from 182 days to 120 days. To be eligible for OPC membership, you must have stayed in India for at least 120 days during the preceding financial year. 

This relaxation benefits entrepreneurs with international commitments who travel frequently but still wish to maintain their Indian business presence.

One Person Company Registration: Eligibility and Documentation Requirements

Before you begin the registration process, you need to confirm that you meet the eligibility criteria and gather the required documents. Getting these basics right saves time and prevents application rejections.

Eligibility Criteria for Registration of a One Person Company

The eligibility requirements apply to both the sole member (you) and the nominee you appoint. Meeting these criteria is mandatory, and the MCA system will verify them during the application process.

To be eligible as the sole member, you must be a natural person who is an Indian citizen. Companies, LLPs, trusts, or other artificial persons cannot be OPC members. If you are an NRI (Non Resident Indian), you can now form an OPC after the 2021 amendments, but you must still be an Indian citizen holding an Indian passport. 

Foreign nationals cannot form OPCs in India regardless of their residency status.

You must have stayed in India for at least 120 days during the immediately preceding financial year. For example, if you are incorporating in November 2025, you need to have been in India for at least 120 days between April 1, 2024, and March 31, 2025. 

These days need not be consecutive; cumulative stay counts. Keep your passport stamps or travel records handy as proof of residency if required.

You cannot be a member or nominee in another OPC at the same time. This “one person, one OPC” rule prevents individuals from creating multiple shell companies. 

If you already have an OPC and want to start a second business, you must either convert your existing OPC to a private company or incorporate the new venture as a regular private company with a second shareholder.

Minors cannot be members or nominees of an OPC. If you are under 18, you must wait until you attain majority to incorporate an OPC. Persons who are of unsound mind or otherwise incapacitated from contracting are also ineligible.

Your nominee must meet the same eligibility criteria: natural person, Indian citizen, not already a member or nominee of another OPC, and not a minor. Choose your nominee carefully, as this person will potentially take over your business in unforeseen circumstances. Many entrepreneurs nominate a spouse, parent, or trusted friend.

One important restriction to note: OPCs cannot carry on non-banking financial activities. If your business plan involves lending, investment in securities, or other NBFC activities, OPC is not the right structure for you.

Documents Required for One Person Company Registration

Having all documents ready before starting the online application ensures a smooth process. Here is the complete checklist:

For the proposed director and member (you), you need: PAN card (mandatory for all company incorporations in India), Aadhaar card (used for identity verification through OTP), passport size photograph (recent, with white background), and address proof (bank statement, utility bill, or telephone bill not older than 60 days). 

If you are an NRI, you will additionally need your passport (notarized and apostilled) and overseas address proof.

For your nominee, you need: PAN card, Aadhaar card, passport size photograph, address proof, and the signed consent form (Form INC-3) agreeing to become the nominee.

For the registered office of your OPC, you need: proof of address (electricity bill, property tax receipt, or similar document not older than 60 days), a rent agreement if the premises are rented, and a No Objection Certificate from the property owner permitting the use of the address as your company’s registered office.

Additionally, you will need to prepare the Memorandum of Association (MOA) and Articles of Association (AOA), though these are now filed electronically as eMOA and eAOA through the SPICe+ form. The MOA contains your company’s name, registered office state, objects, and subscriber (member) details, including nominee information.

Step by Step One Person Company Registration Process Through SPICe+

The entire OPC registration process is conducted online through the Ministry of Corporate Affairs portal using the SPICe+ (Simplified Proforma for Incorporating Company Electronically Plus) form. 

This integrated form allows you to reserve your company name, incorporate the company, and obtain PAN, TAN, and other registrations in a single application.

Obtaining DSC and DIN

Before you can file any forms on the MCA portal, you need a Class 3 Digital Signature Certificate (DSC). The DSC is your electronic signature that authenticates documents you sign online. 

You can obtain a DSC from any licensed Certifying Authority, such as eMudhra, Sify, or NSDL. The application requires your PAN card, Aadhaar card, photograph, and a video verification. 

DSC issuance typically takes 1-2 days, and the certificate costs between Rs.2,000 and Rs. 3,000 depending on the validity period (1-3 years).

Once you have your DSC, you need to register it on the MCA portal. Download the DSC registration utility from the MCA website, associate your DSC with your user account, and verify the registration through OTP. This registered DSC will be used to sign all your incorporation documents.

The Director Identification Number (DIN) is a unique number assigned to every director in India. For new directors, DIN is obtained through the SPICe+ form itself, eliminating the need for a separate application. 

The system verifies your details with the PAN and Aadhaar databases, so ensure that your name and date of birth are identical across these documents.

Filing SPICe+ Form and Getting Your Certificate of Incorporation

The SPICe+ form has two parts: Part A for name reservation and Part B for incorporation.

In Part A, you propose a name for your OPC. Your company name must be unique (not identical or similar to any existing company or trademark), must not contain prohibited words (like “National” or “Government” without approval), and must end with “(OPC) Private Limited.” You can choose a name that includes your surname (like “Sharma Consultants (OPC) Private Limited”) or a descriptive name related to your business activity. 

The name reservation is processed within 1-2 days, and the approved name remains valid for 20 days.

In Part B, you complete the actual incorporation by providing details about your registered office, directors, subscribers, share capital, and nominee. The form integrates several linked forms: Form INC-33 (eMOA), Form INC-34 (eAOA), Form INC-3 (nominee consent), Form INC-9 (declaration by subscriber and director), and Form DIR-2 (director consent). You fill in the details, attach required documents as PDFs, and digitally sign using your DSC.

SPICe+ also integrates applications for PAN, TAN, EPFO registration, ESIC registration, and professional tax registration (in applicable states). By selecting these options, you receive these registrations along with your incorporation certificate, saving time and effort.

After you submit the form with the prescribed fees (approximately Rs. 2,000-5,000 depending on your authorized capital plus state specific stamp duty), the application goes to the Central Registration Centre at Manesar for processing. 

If everything is in order, you will receive your Certificate of Incorporation within 2-5 working days. This certificate contains your company’s Corporate Identity Number (CIN), PAN, and TAN.

After incorporation, you must file Form INC-20A (declaration of commencement of business) within 180 days and open a current bank account in your company’s name. Only after filing INC-20A can your OPC commence business operations.

OPC vs Sole Proprietorship vs Private Limited Company: Which Structure Should You Choose?

Choosing the right business structure is one of the most important decisions you will make as an entrepreneur. Each structure has advantages and limitations, and the right choice depends on your specific circumstances, risk tolerance, and growth plans.

Comparing Liability Protection and Legal Status

The fundamental difference between these structures lies in liability exposure and legal identity.

A sole proprietorship offers zero liability protection. You and your business are legally the same person. If your business incurs debts or faces lawsuits, creditors can pursue your personal assets, including your home, savings, and other property. This unlimited liability is the biggest risk of operating as a sole proprietor, especially if your business involves significant transactions, employs people, or carries operational risks.

An OPC provides limited liability, meaning your personal assets are protected from business liabilities. If your OPC cannot pay its debts, creditors can only claim the company’s assets, not yours personally (except in cases of fraud or where you have given personal guarantees). This protection is invaluable for entrepreneurs taking calculated business risks.

A private limited company also offers limited liability, similar to an OPC. The difference is that a private company requires at least two shareholders and two directors, while an OPC allows single ownership.

Regarding legal status, a sole proprietorship has no separate legal existence from its owner. Contracts are in your personal name, lawsuits are against you personally, and the business cannot outlive you. 

Both OPC and private limited companies are separate legal entities that can own property, sue and be sued, and continue perpetually regardless of changes in membership.

Perpetual succession is another distinguishing factor. A sole proprietorship ends when you die or become incapacitated. An OPC continues through the nominee mechanism, and a private limited company continues through share transmission to legal heirs. 

For businesses with long term value, employees, or ongoing client relationships, perpetual succession provides stability.

Compliance Requirements and Costs

The compliance burden varies significantly across these structures, and this directly impacts your time and money.

A sole proprietorship has minimal compliance requirements. There is no mandatory registration with the Registrar of Companies, no requirement for audited accounts (below certain thresholds), and simplified income tax filing. 

The annual compliance cost is typically under Rs. 10,000, primarily for tax return filing. This simplicity makes sole proprietorship attractive for very small businesses or those testing a business idea.

An OPC has moderate compliance requirements. You must file annual financial statements (Form AOC-4) and annual return (Form MGT-7A) with the Registrar, get your accounts audited by a Chartered Accountant, maintain statutory registers and minutes, and comply with applicable provisions of the Companies Act. 

The annual compliance cost typically ranges from Rs. 15,000 to Rs. 30,000, including auditor fees and filing charges. While higher than sole proprietorship, this cost is the price of limited liability and corporate credibility.

A private limited company has the highest compliance requirements among these three. Four board meetings per year, Annual General Meeting, detailed annual returns (Form MGT-7), and more extensive disclosures are mandatory. 

The annual compliance cost typically exceeds Rs. 25,000-40,000. For businesses with multiple stakeholders or external investors, this compliance structure provides governance safeguards.

When deciding, consider your risk profile and growth plans. If you are testing a small business idea with minimal risk, sole proprietorship might suffice initially. If you want liability protection but prefer simplified compliance, OPC is ideal. 

If you plan to raise external investment or bring in partners, start with a private limited company to avoid conversion later.

Essential Compliance for One Person Company in India

Once your OPC is incorporated, compliance becomes an ongoing responsibility. Missing deadlines results in penalties, and persistent default can lead to your company being struck off. Understanding the key compliance requirements helps you stay on the right side of the law.

Annual Filing Requirements: AOC-4 and MGT-7A

Two primary annual filings are mandatory for every OPC: financial statements and annual return.

Form AOC-4 is used to file your company’s financial statements with the Registrar. This includes your audited balance sheet, profit and loss statement, and directors’ report. 

For FY 2024-2025 (April 1, 2024 to March 31, 2025), the due date is within 180 days from the financial year end, which is September 27, 2025 (extended to December 31, 2025 by MCA General Circular). 

The financial statements must be audited by a Chartered Accountant before filing.

Form MGT-7A is the simplified annual return for OPCs and small companies. This form contains summarized information about your company’s shareholding, directors, and compliance status. 

The due date is within 60 days from the date of AGM or, since OPCs are exempt from AGM, 60 days from the deemed AGM date. For FY 2024-2025, this works out to approximately November 26, 2025 (extended to December 31, 2025).

Late filing attracts additional fees of Rs.100 per day of delay, which can quickly accumulate into significant amounts. Plan your compliance calendar in advance and work with your auditor to ensure timely completion.

Other Mandatory Compliance Requirements

Beyond annual filings, several other compliances apply to OPCs throughout the year.

Statutory audit is mandatory for all OPCs regardless of turnover. Unlike sole proprietorships, which require audit only above certain thresholds, every OPC must appoint a Chartered Accountant as auditor and get its accounts audited annually. Appoint your first auditor within 30 days of incorporation.

DIR-3 KYC is an annual requirement for all directors. By September 30 each year, you must complete your director KYC through the MCA portal. This involves verifying your PAN, Aadhaar, mobile number, and email address. 

Failure to complete DIR-3 KYC results in your DIN being deactivated, which prevents you from signing any company forms.

Board meetings must be held at least twice a year, with a gap of at least 90 days between meetings. Even though you may be the sole director, formal board meetings must be recorded in the minutes book. Use these meetings to approve financial statements, appoint auditors, and make other business decisions.

Income tax return must be filed by September 30 of each assessment year. OPCs are taxed at corporate rates (22% under Section 115BAA of the Income Tax Act or 30% under the regular regime). Your company will need a separate PAN (issued along with the incorporation certificate) and must file Form ITR-6.

Exemptions for One Person Company Compliance

The good news is that OPCs enjoy several compliance exemptions that reduce your administrative burden.

You are exempt from holding an Annual General Meeting (AGM). Since there is only one member, the concept of a shareholders’ meeting is redundant. You can approve matters requiring member approval through written resolutions recorded in your minutes book.

You need only two board meetings per year instead of four required for regular companies. Each half of the calendar year (January to June and July to December) should have at least one board meeting, with a minimum 90 day gap between meetings.

Your financial statements need not include a cash flow statement. While the balance sheet and profit and loss statement are mandatory, OPCs are exempt from the cash flow statement requirement, simplifying financial statement preparation.

Penalties for OPCs are half of those prescribed for regular companies under Section 446B. If you do face a penalty situation, the financial impact is reduced compared to what a regular company would pay for the same violation.

These exemptions make OPC compliance more manageable for solo entrepreneurs without dedicated finance or compliance teams. However, the exemptions do not eliminate compliance altogether, so maintaining a proper compliance calendar and working with professionals when needed is still essential.

Conclusion

The One Person Company structure offers a compelling proposition for solo entrepreneurs in India: corporate benefits with simplified compliance. You get limited liability protection that shields your personal assets, a separate legal entity status that enhances business credibility, and perpetual succession that ensures your business can outlive you. 

At the same time, you maintain complete control over your venture without needing to accommodate partners or shareholders.

The 2021 amendments made OPC even more attractive by removing the growth ceilings that previously forced conversion, reducing residency requirements, and opening the structure to NRIs.

Whether you are a law student planning your first venture, a professional looking to formalize your practice, or an NRI wanting to start a business in India, OPC provides a structured yet flexible framework to begin your entrepreneurial journey with confidence.

More detailed guide on this topic, click here.

Download Now
logo
FREE & ONLINE 3-Day Bootcamp (LIVE only) on

How Can Experienced Professionals Become Independent Directors

calender
28th, 29th Mar, 2026, 2 - 5pm (IST) &
30th Mar, 2026, 7 - 10pm (IST).
Bootcamp starting in
Days
HRS
MIN
SEC
Abhyuday AgarwalCOO & CO-Founder, LawSikho

Register now

Abhyuday AgarwalCOO & CO-Founder, LawSikho